Anda di halaman 1dari 1116

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

V100R011C00

Configuration Guide

Issue 01
Date 2016-10-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R011C00

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R011C00

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R011C00

iManager U2000 V200R016C50

iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R016C50

Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure optical network elements, WDM services, and
Ethernet services.

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers


l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk,


which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder .

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Based on Product Version


V100R011C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R011C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-03-10) Based on Product Version


V100R010C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-09-06) Based on Product Version


V100R010C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-01) Based on Product Version


V100R009C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-11-10) Based on Product Version


V100R009C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with the 01 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Whole manual 3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station), 3.2
Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station), 4 Configuring the
THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station), 5 Configuring the LOA
Board (Manually by Station), 6 Configuring Universal Line
Boards, 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)
and 12 Configuration Tasks: Optimized the operation procedure and
added operation screenshots.
Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R009C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

11.2.5.1 The method of configuring attributes of UNI ports for transmission of


Configuring Both C-VLAN and S-VLAN services is added.
UNI Port
Attributes

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

8 Configuring 8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2 Under


WDM Services Client 1+1 Protection is added.
(by Trail)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-07-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 01 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-04-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC120 and SPC200 are added.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8 Configuring Added are as below:


WDM Services l 8.7 Activating WDM Trails.
(by Trail)

6 Configuring Modified are as below:


Universal Line l Configuration Procedures.
Boards
l Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station.

11.2 Added are as below:


Configuring an l 11.2.3.3 Allocating IP Addresses to Ports Automatically.
Ethernet
Service on a l 11.2.4.3 Configuring Tunnels in Batches.
Packet Network Modified are as below:
in E2E Mode l 11.2.2 E2E Service Configuration Procedure.
l 11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links.

11.4 Managing Added are as below:


Services l 11.4.3 Managing VPLS Services.
l Checking the Composite Service Status.
l Modifying Composite Services.
l Deleting Composite Services.
l 11.4.6 Performing Performance Monitoring Based on Service
Paths.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Added are as below:


l 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards.
l 11.4.7 Querying Service Trail Performance By PMS System.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

11.3 Modified are as below:


Configuring an l Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.
Ethernet
Service on a l Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.
Packet Network l Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links.
in Single Site
Mode

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 05 (2014-03-10) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 04 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-09-19) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 03 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-07-05) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

11 Configuring 11.4.5 Searching for the Service Path is added.


Ethernet
Services
(Packet)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-04-20) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC100 and SPC200 are added.

Update Description

Whole manual l The required U2000 version is changed from V100R008C01 to


V100R008C00.
l Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 04, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-08-19) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

A Parameters l "Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port
Attribute)" is deleted.
l "Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is
deleted.
l "MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.
l "Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is
deleted.
l "QinQ Type Area" is deleted.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 02, updating of SPC200 is added.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN52TOM
Board (by
Station)

4 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring 8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow is added.


WDM Services 8.3 Creating OCh Trails is added.
(by Trail)
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails is added.
8.5 Creating Client Trails is added.

11 Configuring 11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in E2E


Ethernet Mode is added.
Services
(Packet)

12 Configuring the Line Rate is added.


Configuration 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
Tasks

A Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-9-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00. Only
the issue number is updated.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Added are as below:


l 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).

Modified are as below:


l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3
(Manually by Boards is added.
Station)
l "Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2
Switching Function" is deleted.

3.1 Configuring Overview of the Working Modes is added.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring l Overview of the Working Modes is modified.


the TN52TOM l The titles of examples and the sequence numbers of application
Board (by scenarios are modified so that they are the same as those in the
Station) Hardware Description.

4 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the THA/TOA l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
Board
(Manually by l The service signal flow and configuration process of each
Station) application scenario are modified.

5 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the LOA Board l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

9 Configuring The SDH service configuration is optimized. To be specific, contents


the SDH are added, modified, or deleted.
Services

10 Configuring l The Ethernet service configuration is optimized. To be specific,


Ethernet contents are added, modified, or deleted.
Services(EoO/E l Contents about EoS-based Ethernet services are added.
oW/EoS)

12.9 Modifying This chapter is deleted. Modifying Port and 12.9.2 Modifying the
the Services Configuration are moved to 12 Configuration Tasks.
Configuration
Data

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

12 l Configuring the Working Mode is modified.


Configuration l Creating Cross-Connections is modified.
Tasks
l "Creating a VLAN Group" is deleted.
l "Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses" is deleted.
l "Configuring MAC Address Filtering" removes to Feature
Description.
l "Configuring Port Mirroring" removes to Supporting Tasks.
l "Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults" is deleted.
l "Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring" removes to Feature
Description.

Updates in Issue 04 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l 2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow is modified.
(Manually by
Station) l Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3
Boards is added.
l "Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2
Switching Function" is deleted.

3.1 Configuring Overview of the Working Modes is added.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring l Overview of the Working Modes is modified.


the TN52TOM l The titles of examples and the sequence numbers of application
Board (by scenarios are modified so that they are the same as those in the
Station) Hardware Description.

4 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the THA/TOA l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the LOA Board l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

9 Configuring The SDH service configuration is optimized. To be specific, contents


the SDH are added, modified, or deleted.
Services

10 Configuring l The Ethernet service configuration is optimized. To be specific,


Ethernet contents are added, modified, or deleted.
Services(EoO/E l Contents about EoS-based Ethernet services are added.
oW/EoS)

12.9 Modifying This chapter is deleted. Modifying Port and 12.9.2 Modifying the
the Services Configuration are moved to 12 Configuration Tasks.
Configuration
Data

12 l Configuring the Working Mode is modified.


Configuration l Configuring the Service Type is modified.
Tasks
l 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
l "Creating a VLAN Group" is deleted.
l "Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses" is deleted.
l "Configuring MAC Address Filtering" removes to Feature
Description.
l "Configuring Port Mirroring" removes to Supporting Tasks.
l "Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults" is deleted.
l "Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring" removes to Feature
Description.

Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading) is added.


the TN11TOM l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
Board modified.
(Manually by
Station) l Application Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading) is
modified.
l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)
is modified.
l Application Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical
regeneration board) is modified.
l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is deleted.

4 Configuring 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

5 Configuring 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying l Conversion Between EVPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP
the Services is modified.
Configuration l Converting an EVPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service is
Data modified.
l Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EVPL Ethernet Service is
modified.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-12-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Configuring "Configuring the TEM28 Board" is added.


Ethernet Services
(TEM28 Board)

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-06-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN52TOM
Board (by
Station)

4 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring 8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow is added.


WDM Services 8.3 Creating OCh Trails is added.
(by Trail)
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails is added.
8.5 Creating Client Trails is added.

12 Configuring the Line Rate is added.


Configuration 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
Tasks

Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l 2.1.3 ODUflex is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

Application l Configuration Process is modified.


Scenario 5:
ODUflex Non-
Convergence
Mode

Application l Configuration Process is modified.


Scenario 4:
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.


l The title of some chapters are changed.
l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual is added.
l 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station) is added.
l 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package) is
added.
l The chapter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to
Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is added.


WDM Services l 2.1.3 ODUflex is added.
(Manually by
Station) l The chapter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

4 Configuring l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is added.


the THA/TOA l Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode is
Board added.
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

12 Configuring the Working Mode is added.


Configuration
Tasks

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.


l The chapter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to
Commissioning Guide.

2 Configuring l The chapter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
WDM Services Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.
(Manually by
Station)

4 Configuring l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is added.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

12 Configuring the Working Mode is added.


Configuration
Tasks

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Add the chapter 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by
Station).

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".


l Delete the "Quick Guide".
l Delete the "Creating a Network".
l Delete the "Performance Management".
l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".
l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".
l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".

2 Configuring The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM


WDM Services Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


WDM Services
(by Trail)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 05 (2012-05-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 04, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".


l Delete the "Quick Guide".
l Delete the "Creating a Network".
l Delete the "Performance Management".
l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".
l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".
l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".
l Delete the "NE Power Consumption".

2 Configuring l The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM


WDM Services Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".
(Manually by l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
Station) Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8 Configuring Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


WDM Services
(by Trail)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Configuring Modify the "service signal flow".


WDM Services
for Tributary
Boards and Line
Boards (with
ODUK SNCP
Protection)

8.8 Modify the "configuration process".


Configuration
Example: GE-
>ODU1->OTU2
Under ODUk
SNCP
Protection

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Configuration Modify the "configuration process".


Example:
Configuring EPL
Services on a
WDM Network

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Update Description

Creating OCh Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.


Trails by Trail
Search

2.3 Configuring 2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-
WDM Services Connect Capability, 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU
for OTU Boards Boards with Cross-Connect Capability, 2.5 Configuring WDM
Without Cross- Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards, and Configuring
Connect WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function are
Capability added.
2.4 Configuring
WDM Services
for OTU Boards
with Cross-
Connect
Capability
2.5 Configuring
WDM Services
for Tributary
Boards and
Line Boards
Configuring
WDM Services
for Boards with
the Layer 2
Switching
Function

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8.10 8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration is added.


Parameters:
End to End
Service
Configuration

Configuring Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards
WDM Services (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is added.
for Tributary
Boards and Line
Boards (with
ODUK SNCP
Protection)

8.8 The name of the section is changed from "Configuring End-to-End GE


Configuration Services" to "Configuring GE Services (By Trail)".
Example: GE-
>ODU1->OTU2
Under ODUk
SNCP
Protection

Configuring the Sections "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE


Transparent Service", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN
Transmission of Services", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN
the GE Service Service", and "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH
Configuring the Services" are deleted.
Transparent
Transmission of
the SAN
Services
Configuring the
Transparent
Transmission of
the OTN Service
Configuring the
Transparent
Transmission of
the SDH
Services

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Configuration Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d


Example: Bridge) on a WDM Network, Configuration Example: Configuring
Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network,
EPLAN Services Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1
(IEEE 802.1d ad Bridge) on a WDM Network, and Configuration Example:
Bridge) on a Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a
WDM Network WDM Network are added.
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1q Bridge)
on a WDM
Network
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1 ad Bridge)
on a WDM
Network
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPL and
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1q Bridge)
on a WDM
Network

Configuring the Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards is added.


Receive
Wavelength of
Boards

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual.............................. 1
2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)...............................................................4
2.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-Connections..............................................................................6
2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections.................................................................................................................6
2.1.1.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................10
2.1.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode...................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 ODUflex.................................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow.............................................................................................................................. 22
2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability..................................................... 25
2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................25
2.3.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................26
2.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................26
2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability........................................................... 27
2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................27
2.4.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................28
2.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................29
2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards............................................................................32
2.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................32
2.5.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................33
2.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................33
2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards.......................................................................38
2.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................38
2.6.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................39
2.6.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................40
2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3 Boards....................................................................... 45
2.8 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................................... 49
2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration....................................................................................................................49
2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration...................................................................................................................................51

3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM Board by Station..........................53


3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................................................54

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

3.1.1 Overview of the Working Modes.............................................................................................................................. 54


3.1.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)......................................................................................................... 55
3.1.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading).................................................................................................. 61
3.1.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading).................................................................................................. 70
3.1.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)...........................................................................................76
3.1.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board).................................................................... 84
3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)...........................................................................................................90
3.2.1 Overview of the Working Modes.............................................................................................................................. 90
3.2.2 Configuration Principles............................................................................................................................................92
3.2.3 Configuration Flow....................................................................................................................................................94
3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (cascading)........................................................................................................................ 96
3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading)................................................................................................ 103
3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (cascading)...................................................................................................................... 111
3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)................................................................................................ 115
3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (non-cascading)...............................................................................................................122
3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).........................................................................................130
3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading).............................................................................................................138
3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)..............................................144
3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading)....................... 151
3.2.13 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).....................................................................................160
3.2.14 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading).............................................................................................. 171
3.2.15 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)........................................................ 176

4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)................................................ 183


4.1 Overview of the Working Mode................................................................................................................................. 185
4.2 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 185
4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................................................... 197
4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................................................... 205
4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)...........................................................................................212
4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)......................................................................................220
4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)...............................................................................226

5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................234


5.1 Overview of the Working Mode................................................................................................................................. 235
5.2 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 235
5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).......................................... 247
5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)................................................ 254
5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).........................................260
5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)...................................................268
5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)..........................................................................273

6 Configuring Universal Line Boards.......................................................................................278


6.1 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 279
6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths............................................................................................................281

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

6.2.1 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station....................................................................................... 281


6.2.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Trail...........................................................................................286

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)............................................... 289


7.1 Overview of the Service Packages............................................................................................................................. 290
7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board............................................................................................................ 290
7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board.............................................................................................................293
7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board......................................................................................................................293
7.2 Configuring Service Packages....................................................................................................................................294

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)..................................................................................304


8.1 WDM Trails................................................................................................................................................................306
8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................307
8.3 Creating OCh Trails....................................................................................................................................................309
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails.................................................................................................................................................314
8.5 Creating Client Trails..................................................................................................................................................316
8.6 Searching for WDM Trails......................................................................................................................................... 321
8.7 Activating WDM Trails.............................................................................................................................................. 322
8.8 Configuration Example: GE->ODU1->OTU2 Under ODUk SNCP Protection........................................................ 322
8.8.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 323
8.8.2 Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................324
8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2 Under Client 1+1 Protection............................................... 328
8.9.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 328
8.9.2 Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................330
8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration........................................................................................................ 334

9 Configuring the SDH Services............................................................................................... 338


9.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................... 341
9.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain................................................................................................... 342
9.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 342
9.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 342
9.2.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................343
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.....................................................................................................345
9.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 345
9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 345
9.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................346
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services...................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................351
9.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services........................................................................................................................353
9.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 353
9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 353
9.5.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................354

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

9.6 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services...................................................................................356


9.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................356
9.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 357
9.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................358
9.7 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services................................................................................................. 361
9.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 361
9.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 362
9.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................363
9.8 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring...................................................................................................................... 366
9.8.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 366
9.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 367
9.8.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................369
9.9 Configuring the SNCP Ring Services........................................................................................................................ 372
9.9.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................372
9.9.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation......................................................................................................... 373
9.9.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................374
9.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain.................................................................. 378
9.10.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 378
9.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 379
9.10.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................380
9.11 Configuring Service on the MSP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain...................................................................... 385
9.11.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 385
9.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 386
9.11.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................387
9.12 Configuring the MSP Tangent Ring Services...........................................................................................................390
9.12.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................390
9.12.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 391
9.12.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................393
9.13 Configuring the MSP Intersecting Ring Services.....................................................................................................396
9.13.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................397
9.13.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 397
9.13.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................399
9.14 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services.........................................................................................................406
9.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................406
9.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 407
9.14.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................408
9.15 Configuring the SNCP Intersecting Ring Services...................................................................................................414
9.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................414
9.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 415
9.15.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................417
9.16 Configuring the Services on Two Tangent SNCP and MSP Rings.......................................................................... 426
9.16.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 426

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

9.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 427


9.16.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................428
9.17 Configuring the Services on Two Intersecting SNCP and MSP Rings.................................................................... 433
9.17.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 434
9.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 434
9.17.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................435
9.18 Configuration Task Collection..................................................................................................................................441
9.18.1 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections................................................................................................................... 441
9.18.1.1 Querying Lower Order Cross-Connection Resources........................................................................................ 441
9.18.1.2 Creating the SDH Service...................................................................................................................................442
9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service Configuration...................................................................................................................443
9.18.2 Configuring the Protection Subnet........................................................................................................................ 445
9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain..................................................................................................................445
9.18.2.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring................................................................................................................... 446
9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.............................................................................................................447
9.18.2.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet............................................................................................................ 449
9.18.3 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services......................................................................................................452
9.18.3.1 Configuring Trace Byte...................................................................................................................................... 452
9.18.3.2 Configuring C2 Byte.......................................................................................................................................... 453
9.18.4 Modifying the Configuration Data........................................................................................................................ 455
9.18.4.1 Configuring SDH Services................................................................................................................................. 455
9.18.4.2 Deleting SDH Services....................................................................................................................................... 456
9.18.4.3 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service................................................................................ 457
9.18.4.4 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service................................................................................ 458
9.18.5 Modifying Protection Subnets(SDH).................................................................................................................... 459
9.18.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets............................................................................................................................... 459
9.18.5.2 Modifying Protection Subnet Parameters...........................................................................................................460

10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)................................................................. 461


10.1 Supported Ethernet Service ModelsEPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN........................................................................ 463
10.2 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................................... 467
10.2.1 VLAN and QinQ................................................................................................................................................... 467
10.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports........................................................................................................................... 469
10.2.2.1 Tag Attributes..................................................................................................................................................... 470
10.2.2.2 Auto-negotiation................................................................................................................................................. 471
10.2.2.3 Flow Control.......................................................................................................................................................471
10.2.3 VLAN Static Multicast.......................................................................................................................................... 472
10.2.4 Virtual Bridge........................................................................................................................................................ 473
10.3 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................477
10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoO Solution..................................................................................... 492
10.4.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services............................................................................................. 492
10.4.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 492
10.4.1.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 493

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.4.1.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................494


10.4.1.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 498
10.4.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................501
10.4.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 501
10.4.2.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 502
10.4.2.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................503
10.4.2.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 508
10.4.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services..............................................................................513
10.4.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 513
10.4.3.2 Service Signal Flow............................................................................................................................................514
10.4.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................515
10.4.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)................................................... 519
10.4.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 519
10.4.4.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 520
10.4.4.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................521
10.4.4.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 527
10.4.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)................................................ 530
10.4.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 531
10.4.5.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 532
10.4.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................532
10.4.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)..............................................539
10.4.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 539
10.4.6.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 541
10.4.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................542
10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoW Solution.................................................................................... 547
10.5.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services............................................................................................. 548
10.5.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 548
10.5.1.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 549
10.5.1.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................549
10.5.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................552
10.5.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 552
10.5.2.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 553
10.5.2.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................553
10.5.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services..............................................................................556
10.5.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 557
10.5.3.2 Service Signal Flow............................................................................................................................................558
10.5.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................558
10.5.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)................................................... 561
10.5.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 561
10.5.4.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 562
10.5.4.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................563
10.5.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)................................................ 567

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.5.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 567


10.5.5.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 568
10.5.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................569
10.5.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)..............................................574
10.5.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 574
10.5.6.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 576
10.5.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................576
10.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoS Solution......................................................................................581
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.................................................................................581
10.6.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 581
10.6.1.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 582
10.6.1.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................584
10.6.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................................ 589
10.6.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 589
10.6.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 590
10.6.2.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................592
10.6.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services...................................................................................598
10.6.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 598
10.6.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 599
10.6.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................601
10.6.4 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services......................................................................................................................606
10.6.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 607
10.6.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 607
10.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure.....................................................................................................................................609
10.6.5 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)........................................................................................... 614
10.6.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 614
10.6.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 615
10.6.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................617
10.6.6 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)........................................................................................ 624
10.6.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 624
10.6.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 625
10.6.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................629
10.6.7 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)...................................................................................... 637
10.6.7.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 638
10.6.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 639
10.6.7.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................642
10.6.8 Configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) Services and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)...................648
10.6.8.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 648
10.6.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 649
10.6.8.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................652
10.7 Operation Tasks........................................................................................................................................................ 653
10.7.1 Configuring a Port on an Ethernet Board.............................................................................................................. 653

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port.............................................................................................................................653


10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port..............................................................................................................................656
10.7.1.3 Modifying the QinQ Type Area..........................................................................................................................659
10.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................................660
10.7.2.1 Creating EPL Services........................................................................................................................................660
10.7.2.2 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services........................................................................................................................ 662
10.7.2.3 Creating EPLAN Services.................................................................................................................................. 663
10.7.2.4 Creating a VLAN Group.................................................................................................................................... 666
10.7.2.5 Creating VLANs Filtering.................................................................................................................................. 668
10.7.3 Managing the MAC Address Table....................................................................................................................... 670
10.7.3.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry............................................................................................................... 671
10.7.3.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of a MAC Address................................................................................................... 673
10.7.3.3 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses............................................................................................. 674
10.7.3.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address............................................................................................... 676
10.7.3.5 Querying the Actual Capacity of a MAC Address Table................................................................................... 677
10.8 Parameters................................................................................................................................................................ 679
10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports)....................................................................................................... 680
10.8.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Ports)........................................................................................................... 687
10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Ports)................................................................................................690
10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Ports).................................................................................................697
10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.................................................................................................................................. 702
10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes............................................................................................................................ 710
10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.........................................................................................................................714
10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service........................................................................................................................717

11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).............................................................................. 723


11.1 Basic Concepts..........................................................................................................................................................724
11.1.1 Ethernet Service Types.......................................................................................................................................... 724
11.1.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN.................................................................................................................................................... 724
11.1.1.2 VPWS/VPLS...................................................................................................................................................... 728
11.1.2 Service Carrier Technologies.................................................................................................................................730
11.1.3 UNI/NNI................................................................................................................................................................ 731
11.1.4 Split Horizon Group...............................................................................................................................................732
11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in E2E Mode......................................................................733
11.2.1 Services Supporting E2E Configuration................................................................................................................733
11.2.2 E2E Service Configuration Procedure...................................................................................................................734
11.2.3 Configuring the Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel.........................................................................................735
11.2.3.1 Configuring the LSR ID for an NE.....................................................................................................................736
11.2.3.2 Configuring Global OAM Parameters................................................................................................................736
11.2.3.3 Allocating IP Addresses to Ports Automatically................................................................................................ 737
11.2.3.4 (Optional)Configuring NNI Port Attributes....................................................................................................... 738
11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links............................................................................................................................................... 739
11.2.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel............................................................................................................................... 741

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.2.4.1 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel Without Tunnel APS................................................................................. 741


11.2.4.2 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel with Tunnel APS....................................................................................... 748
11.2.4.3 Configuring Tunnels in Batches......................................................................................................................... 749
11.2.5 Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features............................................................................... 751
11.2.5.1 Configuring UNI Port Attributes........................................................................................................................ 751
11.2.5.2 (Optional) Configuring LAGs or MC-LAGs......................................................................................................753
11.2.6 Configuring a PWE3 Service.................................................................................................................................753
11.2.6.1 Configuring a PWE3 Service Without PW APS................................................................................................ 753
11.2.6.2 Configuring a PWE3 Service with PW APS...................................................................................................... 758
11.2.7 Configuring a VPLS Service................................................................................................................................. 759
11.2.8 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 1, Recommended).............................................................................763
11.2.8.1 Configuring a Composite Service Without PW APS......................................................................................... 763
11.2.8.2 Configuring a Composite Service with PW APS............................................................................................... 767
11.2.9 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 2).......................................................................................................768
11.2.10 (Optional) Configuring Other Ethernet Features................................................................................................. 777
11.3 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in Single Site Mode .......................................................... 777
11.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services..........................................................................................................778
11.3.1.1 E-Line Services Carried by PWs........................................................................................................................ 778
11.3.1.2 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links.............................................................................................................780
11.3.1.3 E-Line Services Carried by Ports........................................................................................................................783
11.3.1.4 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services...................................................................................... 786
11.3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services.........................................................................................................788
11.3.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs ...................................................................................................................... 789
11.3.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links ...........................................................................................................791
11.3.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.......................................................................................................................794
11.3.3 Configuring an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................................................797
11.3.3.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................... 798
11.3.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................799
11.3.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................800
11.3.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports.............................................................................................801
11.3.3.5 Configuring the Flow Control.............................................................................................................................802
11.3.4 Configuring the NNIs............................................................................................................................................ 803
11.3.4.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports........................................................................... 803
11.3.4.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels................................................. 806
11.3.4.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links.................................................................806
11.3.5 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel............................................................................................................................... 807
11.3.5.1 Configuring LSR ID........................................................................................................................................... 808
11.3.5.2 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis..............................................................809
11.3.5.3 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis................................................................ 811
11.3.6 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services................................................................................................ 812
11.3.6.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services..............................................................................................................812
11.3.6.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports.................................................................................. 815

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.3.6.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................818


11.3.6.4 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links............................................................................. 821
11.3.7 Configuring E-LAN Services................................................................................................................................ 823
11.3.7.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.................................................................................................. 823
11.3.7.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.......................................................................... 825
11.3.7.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links....................................................................................... 827
11.3.8 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services..................................................................................................829
11.3.8.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.......................................................................829
11.3.8.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs....................................................................... 831
11.3.8.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links............................................................ 832
11.3.9 Configuring Address Resolution........................................................................................................................... 834
11.3.10 Configuring the NE-Level TPID......................................................................................................................... 835
11.3.11 Creating a QinQ Link...........................................................................................................................................836
11.3.12 Managing the Blacklist........................................................................................................................................ 836
11.4 Managing Services....................................................................................................................................................837
11.4.1 Managing MPLS Tunnels...................................................................................................................................... 838
11.4.1.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels..............................................................................................................................838
11.4.1.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology............................................................................................................... 839
11.4.1.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................................ 841
11.4.1.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 843
11.4.1.5 Modifying MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 844
11.4.1.6 Deleting MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................................................................... 847
11.4.1.7 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................849
11.4.2 Managing PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................................... 850
11.4.2.1 Searching for PWE3 Services.............................................................................................................................850
11.4.2.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status.................................................................................................................... 851
11.4.2.3 Deploying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................................854
11.4.2.4 Modifying PWE3 Services................................................................................................................................. 856
11.4.2.5 Deleting PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................................858
11.4.2.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services....................................................................................................................860
11.4.3 Managing VPLS Services......................................................................................................................................863
11.4.3.1 Searching for VPLS Services............................................................................................................................. 863
11.4.3.2 Checking the VPLS Service Status.....................................................................................................................864
11.4.3.3 Deploying VPLS Services.................................................................................................................................. 867
11.4.3.4 Modifying VPLS Services.................................................................................................................................. 868
11.4.3.5 Deleting VPLS Services..................................................................................................................................... 872
11.4.3.6 Managing VSI Resources................................................................................................................................... 875
11.4.4 Managing Composite Services.............................................................................................................................. 877
11.4.4.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services................................................................................................ 877
11.4.4.2 Checking the Composite Service Status............................................................................................................. 879
11.4.4.3 Deploying Composite Services...........................................................................................................................881
11.4.4.4 Modifying Composite Services.......................................................................................................................... 883

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.4.4.5 Deleting Composite Services..............................................................................................................................885


11.4.5 Searching for the Service Path...............................................................................................................................887
11.4.5.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs...................................................................................................887
11.4.5.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses.....................................................................................889
11.4.6 Performing Performance Monitoring Based on Service Paths.............................................................................. 891
11.4.7 Querying Service Trail Performance By PMS System..........................................................................................892
11.4.7.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs...................................................................................................892
11.4.7.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses.....................................................................................894
11.5 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................................896
11.5.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface....................................................................................... 896
11.5.1.1 General Attributes...............................................................................................................................................897
11.5.1.2 Flow Control....................................................................................................................................................... 907
11.5.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes............................................................................................................................................... 911
11.5.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes............................................................................................................................................... 916
11.5.1.5 Advanced Attributes........................................................................................................................................... 922
11.5.2 Parameter Description: MPLS............................................................................................................................... 931
11.5.2.1 Basic Configuration............................................................................................................................................ 931
11.5.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................... 932
11.5.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).......................................................................937
11.5.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service................................................................................................................. 942
11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)......................................................................... 942
11.5.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)..................................................................... 948
11.5.3.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................959
11.5.3.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................960
11.5.3.5 Maintenance Association....................................................................................................................................963
11.5.3.6 MEP Point...........................................................................................................................................................964
11.5.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service................................................................................................................ 965
11.5.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)........................................................................ 965
11.5.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).................................................................... 967
11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................975
11.5.4.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................976
11.5.4.5 Split Horizon Group............................................................................................................................................979
11.5.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters................................................................................................................... 980
11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing............................................................................................................................... 981
11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address........................................................................................................................................... 981
11.5.4.9 Maintenance Association....................................................................................................................................982
11.5.4.10 MEP Point.........................................................................................................................................................982
11.5.5 Parameter Description: QinQ Link........................................................................................................................ 983
11.5.6 Parameter Description: Address Parse...................................................................................................................983

12 Configuration Tasks............................................................................................................... 985


12.1 Configuring the Working Mode................................................................................................................................987
12.2 Configuring the Service Mode................................................................................................................................. 988

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

12.3 Configuring the Service Type...................................................................................................................................990


12.4 Creating Cross-Connections..................................................................................................................................... 991
12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots................................................................................................................................. 995
12.6 Configuring the Board Mode....................................................................................................................................996
12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte............................................................................................................................................997
12.8 Configuring the Line Rate........................................................................................................................................ 999
12.9 Modifying the Configuration Data......................................................................................................................... 1001
12.9.1 Modifying Port.................................................................................................................................................... 1001
12.9.2 Modifying the Services Configuration................................................................................................................ 1004
12.9.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service........................................................................................................... 1004
12.9.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections............................................................................................................................. 1006

A Parameters Description......................................................................................................... 1008


A.1 Enable Port ..............................................................................................................................................................1010
A.2 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) ................................................................................................................................. 1010
A.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold................................................................................................................ 1011
A.4 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .................................................................................................................1013
A.5 Default VLAN ID.................................................................................................................................................... 1013
A.6 VLAN Priority ........................................................................................................................................................ 1014
A.7 Entry Detection ....................................................................................................................................................... 1014
A.8 Tag Identifier............................................................................................................................................................1015
A.9 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)............................................................................................................ 1016
A.10 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)...................................................................................... 1017
A.11 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration).................................................................................1018
A.12 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)................................................................................................... 1019
A.13 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)............................................................................................. 1021
A.14 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)........................................................................................................................1021
A.15 Service Mode (WDM Interface)............................................................................................................................ 1023
A.16 Board Mode (WDM Interface).............................................................................................................................. 1024
A.17 Explicit Link.......................................................................................................................................................... 1026
A.18 Explicit Node......................................................................................................................................................... 1027
A.19 Excluded Node.......................................................................................................................................................1028
A.20 Auto-Calculation....................................................................................................................................................1029
A.21 Copy after Creation................................................................................................................................................1029
A.22 Level (WDM Trail Creation)................................................................................................................................. 1030
A.23 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)........................................................................................................................... 1031
A.24 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)...................................................................................................................................1032
A.25 Source (WDM Trail Creation)............................................................................................................................... 1033
A.26 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)...................................................................................................................................1034

B Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 1036

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by


Referring to This Manual

This manual describes how to configure services on the NMS and other NMS operations
involved in service configuration. This section provides guidelines to use this manual and
obtain reference information.

l See Table 1-1 to obtain the service configuration guidelines.


l See Table 1-2 to obtain reference information, such as NMS configurations, NE and
network configurations, and feature configurations.

Table 1-1 Guidelines for Service Configuration

To... Then...

Configure WDM Select the Manually by Station, by Station Service Package,


services or by Trail mode to configure WDM services as required.
For boards that support multiple application scenarios,
guidelines are provided for configuring services manually by
station in each application scenario. For details, see:
l 3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by
Station)
l 3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)
l 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by
Station)
l 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)
For universal line boards, see 6 Configuring Universal Line
Boards.

Configuring SDH For details, see 9 Configuring the SDH Services.


Services

Configure Ethernet l For EoO/EoW/EoS, see 10 Configuring Ethernet


services Services(EoO/EoW/EoS).
l For Packet, see 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

NOTE

l To configure services with ODUk SNCP protection, see ODUk SNCP Protection in the Feature
Description.
l To configure PID boards, see "PID" in the Feature Description.

Table 1-2 Guidelines for Reference Information


To... Then...

Quickly understand See the Commissioning Guide:


NMS operations l Connecting the NMS Computer
Connecting the U2000 Server Directly
Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN
l U2000 Quick Guide
Logging In to the U2000 Client
Exiting a U2000 Client
l Web LCT Quick Guide
Installing the Web LCT
Connecting the Web LCT to NEs
Logging In to the Web LCT
Shutting Down the Web LCT
l Entering the Common Views
Opening the Main Topology on the U2000
NE List on the Web LCT
Opening the NE Explorer
Opening the NE Panel
l Using Online Help

Configure NEs and See Configuring NE and Network in the Commissioning Guide.
networks Configure each functional part of a network according to the
network creation process so that services can be created on the
network topology.

Monitor performance See Performance Management in the Commissioning Guide to


using the NMS query and set performance monitoring.

Understand detailed See the description of each board in the Hardware Description:
information about l Physical and Logical Ports: Describes physical ports
boards displayed on the NMS and logical ports of each board.
l Configuration of Cross-connection: Describes cross-
connection configurations of each board.
l Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS: Describes
parameters that can be set or queried on the NMS for each
board, default values of the parameters, and parameter
configuration principles.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

To... Then...

Complete optical-layer See Configuring Wavelength Grooming in the Commissioning


configurations or Guide. Complete wavelength grooming by referring to
service grooming Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.

Configure features See the Feature Description to understand features, such as:
l Optical Line Protection
l Intra-Board 1+1 Protection
l IPA
l Synchronization
l OTN Overheads Technology
l Master-Slave Subrack Management
To understand more features, see Feature at a Glance in the
Feature Description.

Back up NE data See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board, Manually
Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card, and Backing Up
Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client in the
Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by


Station)

About This Chapter

When manually configuring WDM services by station, you need to perform various
operations such as configuring board service types and creating cross-connections.
Configuring WDM services in this mode involves multiple NMS GUIs and the configuration
process is complex. However, the mode is applicable to various scenarios and very flexible.

2.1 Basic Concepts


The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-
connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps
you successfully configure services.
2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow
This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring
WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs
according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure the 10GE LAN services by using the LDX board,
which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.
2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.
2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.
2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2
boards.
2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services through TN52TQX boards and
cross-connect ODU2 or ODU2e signals to TN54NS3 boards in one station. The other station
is configured exactly the same.
2.8 Parameters

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.1 Basic Concepts


The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-
connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps
you successfully configure services.

2.1.1 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-


Connections
Electrical cross-connections include inter-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections
between boards) and intra-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections inside a
board). This topic describes the concepts, port types, configuration principles, and
applications of the two types of electrical cross-connections.

2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections


This topic describes the concept, port types, configuration principles, and two applications of
inter-board electrical cross-connections. In addition, this topic provides an example of
configuring inter-board electrical cross-connections using the U2000.

Basic Concept
Inter-board electrical cross-connections are configured between boards to groom ODUk and
GE services inside a subrack. They are configured on the U2000.
Specifically, inter-board electrical cross-connections can be configured either between OTN
tributary and line boards (include PID boards) or between line boards (include PID boards).
The line boards include OTN line boards, universal line boards.
Some OTU boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support inter-board 10GE
and GE cross-connections. For details, see section "Physical and Logical Ports".

Port Type
The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure inter-board cross-
connections. On the U2000, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports
of cross-connections:
l ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port
number and -1 indicates the channel number.
l ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port
number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/
TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in
standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. The service
mapping paths are different in the following ODU timeslot configuration modes: Assign
consecutive and Assign random.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

In the Assign consecutive mode, level-by-level service mapping is performed from


lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1->ODU2. In this example,
the logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1,
which means the first ODU0 in the second ODU1 of the first ODU2 on optical port
1.
In the Assign random mode, cross-level service mapping is performed from a low
rate to a high rate, for example, ODU0->ODU2. In this example, the logical port is
represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1, which means the first
ODU0 in the second ODU2 on optical port 1.

Configuration Principles
The source and sink ports of a cross-connection must have the same ODUk service
granularity and line rate (standard mode/speedup mode ), but they do not require the same
board working mode (standard/compatible) or ODUk timeslot configuration mode (assign
random/assign consecutive). The following figure shows ODU0-level cross-connections. In
the figure, each of the boards can work in either standard or compatible mode.
l As for the same ODUk service granularity, tributary boards (standard/compatible) can
interconnect with line boards (standard/compatible), and the cross-connections between
the boards are indicated by 1 2 3 4 in the figure.
l As for the same ODUk service granularity and line rate, line boards (standard/
compatible) can interconnect with each other, and the cross-connection between the
boards is indicated by 5 in the figure.

OTN tributary board


OTN line board(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

OTN tributary board OTN line board(compatible mode)


(standard mode)
5
3(TX1/RX1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1
4 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1

NOTE

l On the U2000, the subrack layout diagram displays different names of the board in different modes
(standard and compatible). For example, the name of the TN52ND2 board in standard mode is
displayed as TN52ND2(STND), and the name of the TN52ND2 board in compatible mode is
displayed as TN52ND2. For the board names in different modes, see 2.1.2 Standard Mode and
Compatible Mode.
l Line Rate is a parameter available only to line boards and can be set using the U2000. For the
parameter setting of boards, see the "Parameters Can Be Set and Queried on the NMS" topic for the
boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Applications
l Adding/Dropping of Client-Side Services on the WDM Side
The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN tributary
boards and line boards/PID boards/universal line boards.
Figure 2-1 illustrates how adding/dropping client-side services is achieved on the WDM
side using the ODU0 cross-connections between the TOA board (standard mode) and the
ND2 board (standard mode).

Figure 2-1 Adding/dropping of client-side services on the WDM side at sites A and C
Adding/dropping Client side WDM side
of client services
on the WDM side OTN tributary ODU0 OTN line
A board board

GE
OTN
Client service ODU0
network -> ODU0 Cross-connect -> OTU2
board

GE
TOA standard mode ND2 standard mode
B C 3(TX1/RX1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Local service 4(TX2/RX2)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
Adding/dropping
pass-through on of client services 5(TX3/RX3)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3
the WDM side on the WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Signal flow 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

l Local service pass-through on the WDM side


The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN line boards or
universal line boards.
When a PID network interconnects with a non-PID network, only centralized electrical
cross-connections are supported. For the tangent node between the two networks, cross-
connections must be configured between the PID and OTN/universal line boards so that
the ODUk services can be sent from the PID network to the non-PID network.
Figure 2-2 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side
in a non-PID network using the ODU0 cross-connections between the ND2 (standard)
and ND2 (compatible) boards.
Figure 2-3 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side
from the PID network to the non-PID network.

Figure 2-2 Local service pass-through on the WDM side at site B (non-PID network)
Adding/dropping WDM side WDM side
of client services
on the WDM side OTN line ODU0 OTN line
A
board board
GE
OTN
OTU2 ODU0
network ->ODU0 ->OTU2
Cross-connect
board

GE

B C ND2 compatible mode ND2 standard mode


Local service 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Adding/dropping 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
pass-through on of client services 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
the WDM side on the WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3

168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
Signal flow 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-3 Local service pass-through on the WDM side (interconnection of PID
network and non-PID network)
PID network Non-PID network
- WDM side - WDM side
PID board OTN line
Non-PID ODU1 board
network
Tangent NE:
The PID and
OTN/universal OTU2 ODU1
line boards ->ODU1 Cross-connect ->OTU2
reside in the board
same subrack.

NPO2 standard mode ND2 standard mode


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
PID
network 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Signal flow between a PID network and
a non-PID network 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Note: A PID network is a network that has
PID boards deployed, while a non-PID
network has no PID boards deployed. Cross-connections, which must be configured on the U2000

Configuring Cross-Connections on the U2000


Figure 2-4 shows the U2000 GUI for configuring cross-connections on the U2000. In the

figure, ports enclosed in are the source and sink ports of the cross-connection.
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
navigation tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab and click Create. Then the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2-4 GUI for configuring cross-connections (using the ODU0 cross-connection
between TOA and ND2 boards as an example)
TOA Compatible mode
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connection level: ODU0


ND2 Standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE
Direction shown in the figure can be set to Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
l Unidirectional creates unidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink
optical port. Signals can be transmitted only in one direction at the same time, such as only sending
or receiving signals.
l Bidirectional creates bidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink optical
port and from the sink optical port to the source optical port. Signals can be transmitted in both
directions at the same time.

2.1.1.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections


This topic describes the concept and port types of intra-board electrical cross-connections.
This topic provides a schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connections.

Basic Concept
Intra-board electrical cross-connections are used to flexibly groom services inside a board and
they can be configured using the U2000. For example, to converge multiple services into one
ODU1 signal, intra-board cross-connections must be created to groom the services into an
ODU1 signal.

Port Type
The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure intra-board cross-
connections. On the NMS, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports of
cross-connections:
l ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port
number and -1 indicates the channel number.
l ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port
number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/
TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in
standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. For example, 1(IN1/
OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 indicates the first ODU1 signal in the first ODU2
signal on optical port 1.

Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-5 illustrates intra-board cross-connections using the TOA board as an example.
Services from client-side ports 3(TX1/RX1)-1 to 5(TX3/RX3)-1 are cross-connected to port
201ClientLP. In this way, the three client-side Any-rate services are converged into one
ODU1 signal. The TOA board can converge a maximum of eight client-side Any-rate services
into one ODU1 signal.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-5 Schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connection (multiple Any-rate services


into one ODU1 signal)

Any ODU1
Multiple Any-rate cross- convergence
connections in a board are Any ODU1
groomed to the multiple Any
channels of one ODU1 port.
Backplane
Client side side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3

5(TX3/RX3)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1


208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8
Cross-connect Multiplex module
module

Cross-connections inside a board, which must be configured on the NMS


Virtual channels, which do not need to be configured on the NMS

Intra-board cross-connections are configured on the U2000 in the same way as inter-board
cross-connections. For details, see 2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections.

2.1.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode


Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new
models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the
existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only
channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths
displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical
ports. When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on
the boards. Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier
and has fewer end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs.

Boards Supporting the Standard Mode


Table 2-1 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS.

Table 2-1 Board names displayed on the NMS

Name of Board in Name of Board in Board Name (Displayed


Standard Mode Compatible Mode in the NE Panel)
(Displayed Only When (Displayed Only When
the Logical Board Is the Logical Board Is
Added) Added)

53TDX(STND) 53TDX 53TDX

54THA(STND) 54THA 54THA

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Name of Board in Name of Board in Board Name (Displayed


Standard Mode Compatible Mode in the NE Panel)
(Displayed Only When (Displayed Only When
the Logical Board Is the Logical Board Is
Added) Added)

54TOA(STND) 54TOA 54TOA

55TOX - 55TOX

55TQX(STND) 55TQX 55TQX

54TSC - 54TSC

54TSXL - 54TSXL

54TTX - 54TTX

52ND2(STND) 52ND2 52ND2

53ND2 53ND2(COMP) 53ND2

55NO2 - 55NO2

53NQ2 53NQ2(COMP) 53NQ2

52NS2(STND) 52NS2 52NS2

53NS2 53NS2(COMP) 53NS2

54NS3(STND) 54NS3 54NS3

55NS3 - 55NS3

56NS3 - 56NS3

54NS4 - 54NS4

56NS4 - 56NS4

57NS4 - 57NS4

58NS4 - 58NS4

54NS4M - 54NS4M

54HUNQ2 - 54HUNQ2

54HUNS3 - 54HUNS3

54ENQ2(STND) 54ENQ2 54ENQ2

55NPO2(STND) 55NPO2 55NPO2

55NPO2E - 55NPO2E

The hyphen (-) indicates that the compatible mode is not supported.

When electrical-layer ASON is deployed, there are the following restrictions:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

l Boards in standard mode cannot connect with those in compatible mode on the WDM
side. They can be interconnect only on the backplane side.
l If electrical-layer ASON services need to traverse boards in standard mode, the version
of the source NE must be V100R006C01 or later.

The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and
compatible modes of a line board.

Standard Mode
Figure 2-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode.

Figure 2-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1

ODU2:1 OCh:1
2XODUflex ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1
OCh :1

1 xODU2/
1xODU 2e

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
Other tributary/line/PID board

ODU1:1

ODU2:1 OCh : 1
4 xODU1
ODU1:4 IN/OUT

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0 ODU 0:1
ODU 1:4
ODU 0:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1

ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0
ODU0: 8

Backplane

Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module ODU2 mapping path

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Service processing module ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 Cross-connection that must be configured on


>ODU1>ODU2) the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU2)

Table 2-2 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board


Port Name Meaning

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the


(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the


(1-8) backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the


(1-4) backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from


the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1- Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the


ODUflex:(1-2) backplane

IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports

Compatible Mode
Figure 2-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.

Figure 2-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode


Other tributary/ Other tributary/ Other tributary/
line/PID board line/PID board line/PID board

8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1 1 x ODU2/ODU2e Backplane

161
51
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
164
ODU2
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51
164 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Cross-connect ODU1 mapping path


module

Multiplexing ODU2 mapping path


module

Service Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to


processing be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0
module signals are required, users only need to configure
cross-connections from other boards to the
ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The
board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do
not need to configure a cross-connection for
transmitting the multiplexed signal.
ODU0 mapping Cross-connection that must be configured on the
path NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

Table 2-3 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board


Port Name Description Automatic Cross-Connection

ODU0LP1- Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are


ODU0LP4 Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channels 1 and 2. the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1 Internal logical ports. Each of the Automatic cross-connections are


port provides optical channels 1, 2, established between these ports and
3, and 4. the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1 Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are


Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channel 1. the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports. -

Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of
the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes


Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 2-4 uses the
TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-4 GUIs on the NMS


GUI on the Navigation Path Compatible Standard Mode
NMS Mode

Path View In the NE panel, select a See Figure 2-8. See Figure 2-9.
board, double-click the board
icon or right-click and
choose Path View from the
shortcut menu.

WDM In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 2-10. See Figure 2-11.
Interface required board and choose
Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function
Tree. tab.

Create Cross- In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 2-12. See Figure 2-13.
Connection required NE and choose
Service Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree.

Figure 2-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-9 Path View (standard mode)

Figure 2-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Figure 2-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

2.1.3 ODUflex
Starting from V100R006C01, the equipment supports the ODUflex (ODUk with variable
bandwidth) technology, which enables users to flexibly configure the container capacity based
on service sizes, leveraging line bandwidth.

Applicable Boards
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex that is applicable to the following boards:
l Tributary boards: TN53TDX, TN57TDX, TN55TQX, TN57TQX, TN54TOA,
TN57TOA, and TEM28
l Line boards: TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN57ND2, TN52NS2, TN53NS2, TN53NQ2,
TN57NQ2, TN54NS4, TN54HUNS3, TN54HUNQ2, TN56NS3
l Tributary-line integrated board: LOA

NOTE

l The TN11LOA board supports ODUflex only when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to
Assign random.
l The TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN57ND2, TN53NQ2, TN57NQ2, TN52NS2, and TN53NS2 boards
support ODUflex only when they work in Standard Mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode is set to Assign random.

ODUflex Involved Operations


The following describes the GUIs for creating services involving ODUflex on the NMS and
the navigation paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-5 GUIs and navigation paths


GUI on the NMS Description Navigation Path

WDM Interface When the board where you want to In the NE Explorer, select the
create services is a line board or the required board and choose
LOA board and the services need to Configuration > WDM
be encapsulated into ODUflex Interface > Advanced
services, set ODU Timeslot Attributes from the Function
Configuration Mode to Assign Tree.
random.

Create Cross- When Level is set to ODUflex, you In the NE Explorer, select the
Connection Service must set Service Type. required NE and choose
Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree. In the
displayed window, click
New.

NOTE

l The value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is in the range of 1 to 8 for the TEM28 board and 3 to
7 for other boards, which indicates that the service rate supported by ODUflex is in the range of 1.25
Gbit/s (1 x 1.25 Gbit/s) to 10 Gbit/s (8 x 1.25 Gbit/s).
l The rule for calculating the value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is as follows: Value = Service
rate mapping the service type configured at a port/Bandwidth of each TS subtimeslot (1.25 Gbit/s).
If the value is not an integer, the value is the quotient plus 1. For example, if an FC400 service is
received, the value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is 4 (4.25 Gbit/s/1.25 Gbit/s = 3.4, 3 + 1 = 4).

ODUflex Configuration Procedure


Figure 2-14 shows the ODUflex configuration flowchart.

Figure 2-14 ODUflex configuration flowchart

Configure the port


1 working mode

Configure the
2 timeslot
configuration mode

3 Configure the
service type

(Optional)
4 Configure ODUflex
Tolerance

Configure cross-
5 connections

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-6 describes the ODUflex configuration procedure.

Table 2-6 Configuration procedure


No. Action Involved Board Description

1 Configure Tributary board or l Parameter settings: Set Port Working


the port tributary-line Mode to ODUflex non-convergence
working integrated board mode.
mode. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,
select the required board and choose
Configuration > Working Mode from
the Function Tree. In the displayed
window.

2 Configure Line board or l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot


the timeslot tributary-line Configuration Mode to Assign random
configuration integrated board for the required ports.
mode. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,
select the required board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function
Tree.

3 Configure Tributary board or l Parameter settings: Set the service type


the service tributary-line based on the service plan.
type. integrated board l Operation description: Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.

4 (Optional) Line board or l Parameter settings: Specifies the tolerance


Configure tributary-line of deviation between the actual client-side
ODUflex integrated board service rate and the specified rate when
tolerance the client-side service type is ODUflex.
This parameter is reserved and optional in
configuring the services currently
supported.
When the tributary board receives 3GSDI/
3GSDIRBR services from client
equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the
tributary board receives other services, set
it to 100.
l Operation description: Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function
Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. Action Involved Board Description

5 Configure l Tributary l Parameter settings:


cross- board or line Set Level to ODUflex and select the
connections. board: inter- source slot, sink slot, source optical
board cross- port, sink optical port, source optical
connections channel, and sink optical channel.
between
tributary and Set Service Type to the actual client-
line boards side signals.

l Tributary-line l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,


integrated select the required NE and choose
board: cross- Configuration > WDM Service
connections Management from the Function Tree. In
from LP ports the displayed window, click New.
to the WDM
side

2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow


This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring
WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs
according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
WDM service configuration flow refer to Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 WDM Service Configuration Flow


No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task
Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

1 - Configuring the Configuring the Optional


Board Mode Board Mode

2 - Configuring the Configuring the Optional


Service Mode Service Mode

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

3 Configuring the Configuring the Configuring the Mandatory


Service Type Service Type Service Type The type of client-
side services on
boards needs to be
set according to the
type of services
transmitted over
the network.
Different boards
access different
types of services.
For details, see the
client-side
specifications of
the OTU board and
tributary board in
the Hardware
Description.

4 12.7 Configuring 12.7 Configuring 12.7 Configuring Optional


the J0 Byte the J0 Byte the J0 Byte When the service
type is SDH or
SONET service,
you must set the J0
byte.

5 - - Configuring the Optional


Line Rate l When ODU2e
or ODU3e
signals are
cross-connected
to the line
board, you need
to set Line
Rate to
Speedup Mode
for the line
board.
l In other
scenarios, you
need to set
Line Rate to
Standard
Mode for the
line board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

6 - Creating cross- Creating cross- Optional


connect services connect services There is no need to
(intra-board) (intra-board) configure cross-
connections for the
OTU board
without grooming
functions. Cross-
connections must
be configured for
tributary boards
and other OTU
boards. For details
on how to choose
ports of a board for
cross-connections,
see service
configuration
descriptions of the
board in the
Hardware
Description.

7 - - Creating cross- Optional


connect services When tributary
(inter-board) boards work with
line boards, the
inter-board cross-
connections must
be configured. For
details on how to
choose ports of a
board for cross-
connections, see
service
configuration
descriptions of the
board in the
Hardware
Description.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

8 12.5 Configuring 12.5 Configuring 12.5 Configuring Optional


Service Service Service Timeslots When the timeslot
Timeslots Timeslots configuration
mode is set to
manual, Send
Timeslots and
Receive Timeslots
need to be set for
certain boards.

9 - Creating WDM Creating WDM Optional


trails by using trails by using the Create WDM trails
the trail search trail search by using the trail
function function search function
and check whether
service
configurations are
correct. If the end-
to-end services on
the client side are
correctly
configured, the
client trails of the
corresponding
level can be
searched out.

Confi 2.3 Configuring 2.4 Configuring 2.5 Configuring -


gurati WDM Services WDM Services WDM Services
on for OTU Boards for OTU Boards for Tributary
Exam Without Cross- with Cross- Boards and Line
ple Connect Connect Boards is
Capability is Capability is provided.
provided. provided.

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without


Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure the 10GE LAN services by using the LDX board,
which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.

2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-15. Optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs
function as OADM stations.
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is
available between station A and station B. At station A, the LDX board accesses one 10GE
LAN service. At station B, the LDX board accesses one 10GE LAN service.

Figure 2-15 Configuration networking diagram of the 10GE LAN service


User1

East 12LDX

East West NMS

West 12LDX West A East


B D

West
C
User2 East

:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, a 12LDX board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.3.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a 10GE
LAN service.
There is one bidirectional 10GE LAN service between stations A and B.

NOTE

You do not need to configure cross-connections on the LDX board.

2.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A and
B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)
Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LDX boards at stations A and B to
10GETH. For details, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDX board at station A.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.
Step 3 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDX board at station B.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of 10GE LAN levels can be searched out. For details,
see Searching for WDM Trails.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with


Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.

2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 2-16, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available
between station A and station B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-16 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1

East 12LQMS

East West NMS

West 12LQMS West A East


B D
West
C
User2 East

:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two 12LQMS boards must be configured at each station.

2.4.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE
service.

One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 Unidirectional service at each station


Client side WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Service
Cross-connect WDM-side
processing
module optical module
module

NOTE

ClientLP is a logical port. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports need
to be configured. There are connections between ClientLP ports and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and
therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see 8.6 Searching for WDM Trails.)

Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. .

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection
capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Board Mode of the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to LQM Mode. For details,
see Configuring the Board Mode.
NOTE

After Board Mode is set to LQM Mode, the TN12LQMS board can serve as a tributary and line board and
convert four Any services into one OTU1 service.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to
Client Mode. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.
NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12LQMS board can access services other than OTN
services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to
GE. For details, see Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station A.


1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the LQMS board to the ClientLP port.
For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 6 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station
A. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 7 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station B.


1. Configure a GE service from the ClientLP port of the LQMS board to the RX/TX port.
For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 9 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station
B. For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service
Timeslots.

----End

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see
Searching for Trails.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and


Line Boards
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.

2.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-18. ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as
OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is available
between station A and station B. At station A, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE service
and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one
ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed
with other services into one OTU2 service. At station B, the TN12TQM board accesses one
GE service and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that
is, one ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is
multiplexed with other services into one OTU2 service.

Figure 2-18 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1
East 12TQM
East 52NQ2

East West NMS

West A East

B D

C West
User2 East
West 12TQM
West 52NQ2
:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, a 12TQM board and a 52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and
station B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.5.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE
service.
One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.
Figure 2-19 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B.

Figure 2-19 Unidirectional service at each station


TQM NQ2
Client side WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 1(IN/OUT)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Fixed cross- Servive processing
connection module

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU1LP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and
ClientLP ports need to be configured. ODU1 cross-connections between the ClientLP ports of the TQM
board and the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board need to be configured. There are connections between
the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and therefore cross-connections do
not need to be configured.

2.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)
Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to
Client Mode. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.
NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12TQM board can access services other than OTN
services.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN52NQ2 boards at stations A and B to
ODU1. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE

After Service Mode is set to ODU1, the TN52NQ2 board can access ODU1 services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to GE.
For details, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 4 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from
the TN12TQM board at station A.
1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP
port. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 6 Configure ODU1 services between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board at station
A.
1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the
ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level ODU1
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 7 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 8 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at station A.
For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Step 9 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from
the TN12TQM board at station B.
1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP
port. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Optical
Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It is
not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service Signal
Flow.

Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 11 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board
at station B.
1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the
ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level ODU1
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 12 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 13 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at NE B.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see
Searching for WDM Trails.

2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX


and NS2 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2
boards.

2.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-20. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs
function as OADM stations.
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is
available between station A and station C. At station A, the TN52TDX board accesses one
10GE LAN service and encapsulates the 10GE LAN service into one channel of ODU2
electrical signals, that is, one ODU2 service. The TN52NS2 board accesses the ODU2 service
and then outputs one OTU2 service. Station B transparently transmits the OTU2 service. At
station C, the TN52NS2 board accesses the OTU2 service and converts the OTU2 service into
ODU2 electrical signals, which are groomed to the TN52TDX board and then output as one
10GE LAN service.

Figure 2-20 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1
East 52TDX
East 52NS2

East West NMS

East 52NS2
West 52NS2
West A East

B D

East West
C

West East
:OADM
West 52TDX
West 52NS2
:REG
User2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the TN52TDX board and TN52NS2 boards must be configured at stations A
and C. Two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station B.

2.6.2 Service Signal Flow


This topic describes how to configure the transmission signal flow of a 10GE LAN service.
One bidirectional GE service is available among stations A, B, and C.
Figure 2-21 shows the service signal flow among stations A, B, and C.

Figure 2-21 Service at each station

TDX backplane backplane NS2 WDM side


side side
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 71(ODU2LP/
3(RX1/TX1)-1
A ODU2LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
202(ClientLP2/
4(RX2/TX2)-1 ClientLP2)-1

Servive
processing
module

NS2 backplane backplane NS2


WDM side side side WDM side

71(ODU2LP/ 71(ODU2LP/
ODU2LP)-1 ODU2LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
B 1(IN/OUT)-1

Servive Servive
processing processing
module module

NS2 backplane backplane TDX


WDM side side side Client side
201(ClientLP1/
71(ODU2LP/ ClientLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1
ODU2LP)-1 202(ClientLP2/
C 1(IN/OUT)-1 ClientLP2)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

Servive
processing Cross-
module connection

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU2LP are logical ports. There are cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports
and ClientLP ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured. ODU2 cross-
connections between the ClientLP ports of the TDX board and the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board
need to be configured. There are connections between the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board and WDM-
side IN/OUT ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A, B,
and C.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 2-22 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 2-22 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
l The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Users can select a proper
mapping mode according to the service transmission requirements.
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) meets customer requirement for transparent bit
transport of 10GE LAN signals. In the Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) mode,
transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This
ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however,
the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.
MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) is specific to transparent transmission of
10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE
LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard
OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC
frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the
FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode.
Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services.
l The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port
Mapping of the TDX board is set to Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that services
pass through must be set to Speedup Mode.
l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port
Mapping of the TDX board is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Line Rate of
the 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that
services pass through must be set to Standard Mode.
l The Service Mode must be set to ODU2 or Automatic.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TDX board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TDX board that you want to configure, and then
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click the
corresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters.
Service Type: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Configuration example:

5
4

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE

5
:
When Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), the service cross-connect
granularity is ODU2e.
When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , the service cross-
connect granularity is ODU2.
5. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
6. Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52NS2 board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52NS2 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ODU2LP port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select
ODU2 or Automatic.
Configuration example:

5. On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2LP port and then double-click the
Line Rate parameter and select Speedup Mode.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

3
4

NOTICE
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TDX board is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the ODU2LP port on the NS2 board
must be set to Speedup Mode.
When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate
must be set to Standard Mode.
Port Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent;
otherwise, service interruption occurs.

Step 3 Repeat step 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52NS2 board at station B.

Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52TDX and TN52NS2 boards
of station C.

Step 5 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station
A.
1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the
ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TDX

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 6 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 7 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 boards at station B.
The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-07-52NS2

Source Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service Signal
Flow.

Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 9 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station C.
1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the
ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

----End

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and


NS3 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services through TN52TQX boards and
cross-connect ODU2 or ODU2e signals to TN54NS3 boards in one station. The other station
is configured exactly the same.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 2-23 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 2-23 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Application Diagram

Figure 2-24 Position of the TQX and NS3 boards in the WDM system
4xODU2/ODU2e 4xODU2/ODU2e

M M

1ODU3/ODU3e
4ODU2/ODU2e

4ODU2/ODU2e
1ODU3/ODU3e
1OTU3/OTU3e

1OTU3/OTU3e
1 1 1 U U IN 1 1 1
OUT
X X
TQX IN / / OUT TQX
D D
M M
4 4 4 U U 4 4 4
X X
NS3 NS3

Cross-Connection Diagram
NOTE

In this configuring process, a TN54NS3 board in compatible mode is used as an example in Figure
2-25.

Figure 2-25 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX and NS3 boards


WDM side

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2
NS3

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3 (compatible mode)


71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4
Cross connect mode

Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
TQX
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Cross connect mode

The client side of the TQX board are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 board

Procedure
Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TQX board of station A.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TQX board that you want to configure, and then
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click the
corresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters.
Service Type: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

3
1

5
4

NOTE

5
:When the service type is 10GE LAN, the service mapping path can be Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) . Users can select the service
mapping path based on the service transmission requirements.
When Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), the service cross-connect
granularity is ODU2e. When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , the
service cross-connect granularity is ODU2.
5. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
6. Click Query, In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Ensure that the query result
is consistent with the configuration.
Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN54NS3 board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN54NS3 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ODU2 port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select ODU2
or Automatic.
5. Select the ODU3 port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select
Automatic or MIX.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

6. On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2 port and ODU3 port and double-click
the Line Rate parameter and set to Speedup Mode.

3
4

NOTICE
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TQX board is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the corresponding ODU2 port of the
TN54NS3 board must be set to Speedup Mode. Line Rate of the ODU3 port must
be set to Speedup Mode.
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TQX board is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate of the corresponding ODU2 port of the
TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode. Line Rate of the ODU3 port can be
set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode.
Port Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent;
otherwise, service interruption occurs.

7. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.


8. Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 3 In the NE Explorer,configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TQX board
to the ODU2LP port of the TN54NS3 board.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

3
4
1

----End

2.8 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Table 2-8 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration


Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters vary The Level parameter is used


with different boards and to differentiate the service
products. types configured when
electrical cross-connections
are configured.
Click Level (WDM Cross-
Connection Configuration)
for more information.

Service Type For example, FE, STM-1, When Level of a new


FICON service is set to Any, you
can select a specific service
type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value Description

Occupied ODTUk l When Level is ODUflex The number of ODUflex


Timeslots and Service Type is set timeslots for received
to Custom: 1-8 services. This parameter is
Default: 8 set based on the type and
l It cannot be set rate of the service received
manually. by the port. The parameter
value ranges from 1 to 8.
l When Level is ODUflex
NOTE
and Service Type is set
Set this parameter when Level
to FC400: this parameter of a WDM cross-connection is
is 4 ODUflex and Service Type is
l When Level is ODUflex Custom or PACKET.
and Service Type is set
to FC800: this parameter
is 7
l When Level is ODUflex
and Service Type is set
to 3GSDI or InfiniBand
2.5G: this parameter is 3

Service Rate(bit/s) 1-9993964557 The parameter value varies


according to the value of
Occupied ODTUk
Timeslots in the range of 1
to 9993964557.
NOTE
Set this parameter when Level
of a WDM cross-connection is
ODUflex and Service Type is
Custom.

Direction Unidirectional, The Direction parameter


Bidirectional. indicates the service
Default: Unidirectional direction mode when the
service cross-connection is
configured. It can be set to
either Unidirectional or
Bidirectional.
Click Direction (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value Description

Source Channel Slot ID-Board Name- The Source Channel


Optical Interface ID-Optical parameter is used to query
Channel ID the transmit channel of a
Default: Null certain electrical cross-
connect service
(unidirectional service
flow).
Click Source Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

Sink Channel Slot ID - Board Name - The Sink Channel


Optical Interface ID - parameter is used to query
Optical Channel ID the receive channel of a
Default: Null certain electrical cross-
connect service
(unidirectional service
flow).
Click Sink Channel (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Activation Status Active, Inactive The Activation Status


Default: Active parameter is used to display
whether the service cross-
connection configuration is
activated.
Click Activation Status
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Service Origin Create Manually, Displays the mode of


Intelligently Generate creating WDM cross-
connections.

Lock Status Unknown, Locked, Indicates the lockout status


Unlocked of an electrical cross-
Default: Unlocked connection.

2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots
for transmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-9 Parameters of WDM services


Parameters Value Description

Port NE-Slot-Board-Optical The Port parameter


Interface-Channel indicates the location of the
service timeslots, including
the channel, optical
interface, board, slot, and
NE where the timeslots
reside.

Service Type For example: FE, STM-1, The Service Type parameter
FICON is used to set the type of the
services at an optical port
when the cross-connections
of any services are
configured, to match the
type of the actual services.

Transmit Timeslot 1 to 16 The Transmit Timeslot


parameter is used to select
the service timeslots in the
transmit direction.
The Send Timeslot
parameter is used to select
the service timeslots in the
transmit direction.
Click Service Timeslot
(WDM Services) for more
information.

Receive Timeslot 1 to 16 The Receive Timeslot


parameter is used to select
the service timeslots on the
receive direction.
Click Service Timeslot
(WDM Services) for more
information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by


the TOM Board by Station

About This Chapter

This section describes how to manually configure services carried by the TOM board by
station.

3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)


A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board is
applicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by station
on the NMS for the five application scenarios.
3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)
A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board is
applicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station
on the NMS for the 12 application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by


Station)
A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board is
applicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by station
on the NMS for the five application scenarios.

3.1.1 Overview of the Working Modes


This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service
signal flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are
set to specific values.

Board mode
As shown in Table 3-1, the TN11TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading
modes.

Table 3-1 Board mode of the TN11TOM board

Board mode Description

Cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN11TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or
two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a
maximum of eight client-side services.

Non-cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN11TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to
eight ODU0 services or one to four ODU1 services.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a
maximum of four client-side services.

Port Working Mode


The TOA board supports five working modes listed in Table 3-2. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Table 3-2 Mappings between the working modes and the service mapping paths
Board Configuration Port Working Mapping Path
Working Scenario Mode
Mode

Cascading mode 3.1.2 Scenario 1: N/A OTU1/Anya->ODU1


ODU1 tributary
mode
(cascading)

3.1.3 Scenario 2: N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode
(cascading)

Non-cascading 3.1.4 Scenario 3: N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1


mode ODU1 tributary
mode (non-
cascading)

3.1.5 Scenario 4: N/A Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.1.6 Scenario 5: N/A OTU1->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode (electrical
regeneration
board)

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

3.1.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-1 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary
mode (cascading))
1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, TX1 M M TX1 FE, GE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3, U U
DVB-ASI, STM-1, OC-3,
X X DVB-ASI,

1ODU1

1ODU1
STM-16, OC- N N

8Any

8Any
/ / STM-16, OC-
48, ESCON, S S
D D 48, ESCON,
STM-4, OC-12, 2 2
RX8 M M RX8 STM-4, OC-12,
FC100, FICON, U U
FC200, FICON FC100, FICON,
X X
Express, OTU1 TX8 TX8 FC200, FICON
Express, OTU1

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-2 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary
mode (cascading))
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3
mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
10(TX8/RX8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53NS2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2


mode)

NOTE

A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-3 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-3 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Setthe Board Modeof the TN11TOM boardtoCascading mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Operation Example:

Step 2 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 3 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board.
Operation Example in the client service type for FE, for example ,For other services types,
configuration is the same:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Service Level to GE or ANY. If you set Service Level to ANY, you can set
Service Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN11TOM and
TN12NS2 boards.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.1.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in
cascading ODU1 mode with its ports working in tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-4 lists two conditions in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. Perform the configurations for this board according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives a
maximum of six services on the client side. The other two client-side ports work as
WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board
receives a maximum of seven services on the client side, and the other client-side port
works as a WDM-side port, which also receives services.

Figure 3-4 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 TX7 RX7
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- MUX/ MUX/ 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
12, STM-16, OC- 12, STM-16, OC-

1ODU1
1OTU1

1ODU1
1OTU1
6Any

6Any
48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,
TX8 RX8
FC200, FICON RX6 RX6 FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI, MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX TX8 Express, DVB-ASI,
OTU1 DMUX
TX6 TX6 OTU1

Any Any

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1
RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC- TX8 RX8 12, STM-16, OC-
1ODU1
1OTU1

1ODU1
1OTU1
7Any

48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,

7Any
MUX/ MUX/
FC100, FICON, RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8 FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON FC200, FICON
RX7 RX7
Express, DVB-ASI, Express, DVB-ASI,
OTU1 OTU1
TX7 TX7

Any Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-5 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Figure 3-5 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:
Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Setthe Board Modeof the TN11TOM boardtoCascading mode.
Operation Example:

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

2
4

6
5

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
1. For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7 or
RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
2. For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7 and
RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
3. If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 4 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Note that the figure assumes
that the client service type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.


The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM
board.
n this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 6 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

Step 7 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP ports and WDM-side
ports.Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:
1

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are for dual feeding. The service on the working
channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as unidirectional.
In this example, port 10 (RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the protection
channel port.

Step 8 Optional: Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN11TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

NOTE

For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, this step is mandatory.

----End

3.1.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-7 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-7 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 RX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3, 1 1 GE, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12, STM-4, OC-12,

4ODU1
4ODU1

8Any
8Any
STM-16, OC-48 MUX/ MUX/ STM-16, OC-48
NS2 NS2
, FC200, FICON DMUX DMUX , FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI, RX8 TX8 Express, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FDDI, 4 4 ESCON, FDDI,
OTU1 TX8 RX8 OTU1

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-8 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN11NS2 /


(Compatible mode) TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)

Other board (Standard TN53NS2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2


mode)

NOTE
A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-9 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-9 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

1 3

Step 2 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 3 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Complete the settings as shown in the following figure. Note that the figure assumes that the client service
type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.
The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Service Level to GE or ANY. If you set Service Level to ANY, you can set
Service Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 5 Configure a bidirectional ODU1 cross-connection between the TN12NS2 line board and the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.Repeat to configure the remaining cross-
connections between the TN11TOM and TN12NS2 boards.

----End

3.1.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-10 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-10 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (non-cascading))
4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
TX1 RX5 TX5 TX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3

4ODU1
4OTU1
4ODU1

4OTU1
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,

4Any
4Any
DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, FC200, FICON DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
TX8 RX8
Express, STM-16, RX4 RX4 FICON Express,
OC-48 STM-16, OC-48
TX4 RX8 TX8
TX4

Any Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-11 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Figure 3-11 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (non-cascading))
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM
module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports
as an example.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-12 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-12 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

1 3

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

2
4

6
5

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 4 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Note that the figure assumes
that the client service type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.


The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM
board.
n this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 6 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

Step 7 Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port, and select the port for
which the port type is changed in Step 2.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

----End

3.1.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical


regeneration board)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works as an
electrical regeneration board with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system in which the
TN11TOM board works as an electrical regeneration board and its ports work in ODU1
tributary-line mode.

Figure 3-13 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (electrical regeneration board))

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TOM TX1


4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

DMUX MUX

RX4 TX4

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

TX1 TOM RX1


4ODU1

4OTU1
4OTU1

MUX DMUX
TX4 RX4

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-14 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-14 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (electrical regeneration board))
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM
module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports
as an example.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-15 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-15 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1 3

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example:

1
3

2
4

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
5

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

Step 3 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN11TOM board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE
Because the service type is OTU-1, set Service Mode of ports to OTN Mode.

Step 4 Set the service type to OTU-1 for the port. Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the OTU1 services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 6 Configure the cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the ODU1 services.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 7 Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.Operation
Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Selected in the WDM-side optical portsStep 2to modefy the Port type of port
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

----End

3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)


A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board is
applicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station
on the NMS for the 12 application scenarios.

3.2.1 Overview of the Working Modes


Each port on the TN52TOM board can work in different modes so that services can be
processed on different paths.

Board Working mode


As shown in Table 3-3, the TN52TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading
modes.

Table 3-3 Board Working mode of the TN52TOM board

Board Description
Working
mode

Cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or
two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a
maximum of eight client-side services.

Non-cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to
eight ODU0 services or one to four ODU1 services.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a
maximum of four client-side services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Port Working Mode


The TN52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, you
are advised to set the application scenarios, such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and
tributary-line mode, of the ports on the board. As shown in Table 3-4, the TN52TOM board
supports 14 different working modes.

Table 3-4 Mapping between the working modes and the mapping path of the TN52TOM
board
Board Configuration Port Working Mode Mapping Path
Working Scenario
mode

3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]


ODU0 mode
(cascading)

3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 Tributary-Line Any->ODU0->ODU1-


ODU0 tributary- mode >OTU1
line mode
(cascading)

Cascading 3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode Any->ODU1


ODU1 mode
(cascading)

3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 Tributary-Line Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 tributary- mode
line mode
(cascading)

- None (not for ports) -

3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]


ODU0 mode
(non-cascading)

3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 Tributary-Line Any->ODU0->ODU1-


ODU0 tributary- Mode >OTU1
line mode (non-
cascading)
Non- 3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode OTU1/Any->ODU1
Cascading ODU1 mode
(non-cascading)

3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_O OTU1->ODU1->Any-


ODU1_ANY_OD DU1 re-encapsulation >ODU0->ODU1
U0_ODU1 re- mode
encapsulation
mode (non-
cascading)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Board Configuration Port Working Mode Mapping Path


Working Scenario
mode

3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_O OTU1->ODU1->Any-


ODU1_ANY_OD DU1 re-encapsulation >ODU0->ODU1->OTU1
U0_ODU1 re- tributary-line mode
encapsulation
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.13 Scenario ODU1 tributary-line OTU1/Any->ODU1-


10: ODU1 mode >OTU1
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.14 Scenario ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0


11: ODU1_ODU0
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.15 Scenario ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re- OTU1->ODU1->Any-


12: encapsulation mode >ODU0
ODU1_ANY_OD
U0 re-
encapsulation
mode (non-
cascading)

- None (not for ports) -

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode,
there are two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.
l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other
ports.

3.2.2 Configuration Principles


This section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Table 3-5 Rules for configuring the TN52TOM board


Item Description

Slots For the OptiX OSN 3800:


l When two TN52TOM boards are used to configure GE service and Any
service cross-connections, the TN52TOM boards must be installed in the
following slots:
IU2 and IU3
IU4 and IU5
l When two TN52TOM boards are used to configure ODU1 cross-
connections, the TN52TOM boards must be installed in the following slots:
IU2 and IU4
IU2 and IU5
IU3 and IU4
IU3 and IU5

Applicat The following port working mode scenarios are only supported by the OptiX
ion OSN 8800.
scenario l Application Scenario 11: Non-cascading ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
s >ODU1->ODU0)
l Application Scenario 12: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
The following port working mode application scenarios are only supported by
the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
l Application Scenario 8: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

Cross- l The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support distributed cross-connection.
connect l For the OptiX OSN 6800,
The TN52TOM board can cross-connect a maximum of six Any services
through the backplane.
The TN52TOM boards in paired slots can cross-connect Any services.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800,
The TN52TOM board can cross-connect a maximum of six Any services
through the backplane.
The TN52TOM boards in a mesh slot group support cross-connections
of Any services between each other.
Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner
that the ClientLP3-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to
the ODU1LP1-3 port on the TN52NS2 board and the ClientLP5-1 port
on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on
the TN52NS2 board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Item Description

WDM- In the cascading tributary-line mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used
side as the WDM-side optical ports.
optical In the non-cascading tributary-line mode, all RX/TX optical ports can be used
ports as WDM-side optical ports.
In the tributary mode, none of the RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-
side optical ports.

Port In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to
working different port working modes.
mode

Channel In the cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)) and ODU0 tributary-


line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1):
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are
identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the
same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is
configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel.
In the non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) and ODU0
tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1):
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are
identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the
same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is
configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel.
l Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and
ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this
restriction.
When the board works in any mode, the source and sink channel IDs for
services must be consistent. For example, if a client-side service is configured
at ClientLPX.1, the service must also be configured at ClientLPY.1 on the
interconnected board. If a client-side service is configured at ClientLPX.2, the
service must also be configured at ClientLPY.2 on the interconnected board. In
other words, service interconnection must be implemented at channels with the
same ID, although the port numbers may be different.

3.2.3 Configuration Flow


Twelve port working modes are available for the TN52TOM board on the NMS. All of these
modes require configurations.
Figure 3-16 shows the general configuration flow for the port working modes on the
TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-16 Configuration flow

Tributary Mode Tributary-Line Mode

Configure the Working Configure the Working


Mode Mode

Configure the Service Configure the Port


Mode Type

Configure the Service


Configure Service Type Mode

Configure the Cross- Configure Service Type


connections from the
RX/TX Ports to the
ClientLP Ports Configure the Cross-
connections from the
RX/TX Ports to the
Configure the Cross- ClientLP Ports
connections between
AnyLP ports
Configure the Cross-
connections between
AnyLP ports
Configure Inter-Board
Cross-connections
Configure the Cross-
connections from the
ODU1LP Ports to the
RX/TX Ports

Configure Intra-Board Mandatory


1+1 Protection
Optional

The actions that are labeled "optional" in the preceding figure are required only in specific
scenarios. The following provides the details:
l Configure the service mode:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

If the service type is OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode for the port.
If the service type is any other service, retain the default value CLIENT Mode for
the port.
l Configure the cross-connections between AnyLP ports:
This operation is mandatory for scenario 8 "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode (non-cascading)" and scenario 9 "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1
re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading)".
This operation is not required for any other scenarios.
l Configure intra-board 1+1 protection:
This operation is mandatory for the application of "dual-fed and selectively
receiving on the WDM side" in the Tributary-Line Mode.
This operation is not required for any other scenarios.

3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).
Note that "(->ODU1)" in the mapping path means the ODU1 procedure is optional.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system in
which the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0(-
>ODU1)).

Figure 3-17 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)


(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M TX1
U U
FE, GE, X X FE, GE,
2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
2ODU0

N N
8Any

FC100, FICON,
8Any

/ / FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI, S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D
ESCON, FDDI RX8 2 2
M M RX8 ESCON, FDDI
U U
TX8 X X TX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-18 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 1: Any->ODU0) (OptiX
OSN 8800)
2xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 2xODU0

RX1 TOM TOM


TX1
1 1 M M 1 1
TX1 RX1
U U
FE, GE, X X FE, GE,

2ODU0
N N

8Any
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,

2ODU0
8Any
/ /
DVB-ASI, SDI, S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D
ESCON, FDDI 2 M 2 ESCON, FDDI
RX8 M TX8
U U
2 2 2 2
TX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-19 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

161(ODU0LP1
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 /ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-20 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1: Any->ODU0)


(OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
Other board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-21 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-21 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modeis ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to the
ODU0LP port on the TN52TOM board are automatically created.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM
and TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 8800.


This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When creating the cross-connection of the ODU0 signal, only the first channel can be selected, for
example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Repeat to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.

----End

3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-22 lists two conditions in which the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0
tributary-line mode. Perform the configurations according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of six services on the client side. The other two client-side ports work as
WDM-side ports, selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of seven services on the client side. The other client-side port works
as a WDM-side port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-22 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1-


>OTU1)
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:
1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 RX1
TOM RX7 TOM
TX7
TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1
RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
FE, GE, FE, GE,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,

2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
2ODU0
1OTU1

1OTU1
6Any

6Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI ESCON, FDDI
RX6 TX8 RX8 RX6
MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8
TX6 TX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 RX1
FE, GE, FE, GE,
TX8 RX8

2ODU0
FC100, FICON,
2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1 FC100, FICON,


7Any

7Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX TX8 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI DMUX
RX7 TX7ESCON, FDDI

TX7 RX7

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-23 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-23 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 2: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1->OTU1)
The dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Client side WDM side


3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
/ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 TOM
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
/ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 TOM
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Legend Information
Figure 3-24 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-24 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
Port Working Modeis ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).

Step 2 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7
or RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
l For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7
and RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-25 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Figure 3-25 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 3: Any->ODU1)


1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 RX1
FE, STM-1, STM-4, M M FE, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3, OC- U U STM-16, OC-3, OC-
12, OC-48, FC100, X X 12, OC-48, FC100,
1ODU1

1ODU1

N N
8Any

8Any

GE, FC200, FICON, / / GE, FC200, FICON,


S D S
FICON Express, D FICON Express,
2 M 2 TX8
HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, RX8 M HD-SDI, DVB-ASI,
SDI, ESCON, FDDI U U SDI, ESCON, FDDI
TX8 X X RX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-26 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3: Any->ODU1)


WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3
mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
10(TX8/RX8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-27 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-27 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modeof the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modemust beODU1 mode (Any->ODU1).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/STM-16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI services at the same time, but the
total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l The total rate of services that are received by each group of ClientLP ports, such as
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Each group of ClientLP ports can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s,
and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-28 shows two applications where the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. Perform configurations according to the network design.
l Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of six channels of services on the client side and the other two client-side
ports work as WDM-side ports, dual-fed selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of seven channels of services on the client side and the other client-
side port works as a WDM-side port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-28 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1)

Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TOM TOM RX1


TX7 RX7
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 TX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
MUX/ MUX/ STM-4, STM-16,
STM-4, STM-16, RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
OC-3, OC-12, OC-

1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1
6Any
48, FC100, FC200,

6Any
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
FICON, FICON TX8 RX8
Express, HD-SDI, RX6 MUX/ MUX/ RX6 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8
ESCON, FDDI
ESCON, FDDI TX6 TX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 RX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC- TX8 RX8 OC-3, OC-12, OC-
1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1
7Any

7Any
48, FC100, FC200, MUX/ MUX/ 48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON RX8 TX8 FICON, FICON
DMUX DMUX
Express, HD-SDI, RX7 TX7 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI TX7 RX7 ESCON, FDDI

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-29 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-29 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 4: Any->ODU1-


>OTU1)

Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Legend Information
Figure 3-30 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-30 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Mode of the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Step 2 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7
or RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
l For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7
and RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan.Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/STM-16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI services at the same time, but the
total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l Services can be input at the six or seven pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this
service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-31 and Figure 3-32 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-31 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)


(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M RX1
1 1 1 1
U U
FE, GE, FE, GE,
X X

8ODU0
4ODU1

4ODU1
8ODU0
FC100, FICON, N N FC100, FICON,

8Any

8Any
/ /
DVB-ASI, SDI, S S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D D
ESCON, FDDI 2 2
RX8 M M TX8 ESCON, FDDI
4 4 U U 4 4
TX8 X X RX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Figure 3-32 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 5: Any->ODU0)(OptiX


OSN 8800)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M RX1
1 1 1 1
FE, GE, U U
X X FE, GE,
8ODU0

FC100, FICON,
8ODU0

N N FC100, FICON,
8Any

8Any

DVB-ASI, SDI, / /
S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI D
2 M 2 TX8 ESCON, FDDI
RX8 M
U U
8 8 X X 8 8 RX8
TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-33 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 161(ODU0LP1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1
1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
9(TX7/RX7)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 /ODU0LP2)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 163(ODU0LP3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 /ODU0LP3)-1
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4
TOM 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 /ODU0LP4)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5: Any->ODU0)


(OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode
Other board
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-35 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-35 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modemust beODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 and 3800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to
ODU0LP on the TN52TOM board are automatically created.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM
and TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

NOTE

Repeat to configure a cross-connection for the remaining ODU0 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.
This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 8800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-36 shows two conditions where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading
ODU0 tributary-line mode. Perform configurations according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of four channels of services on the client side and the other two client-side
ports work as WDM-side ports, selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of six channels of services on the client side and the other client-
side port works as a WDM-side port.

Figure 3-36 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 6: Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
RX5 TX5
TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1
TX6 DMUX DMUX RX6
FE, GE, FE, GE,
RX6 TX6
FC100, FICON,

2ODU1

4ODU0
FC100, FICON,

4ODU0

2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

4Any
4Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, TX7 RX7 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI ESCON, FDDI
RX4 RX7 TX7 RX4
MUX/ MUX/
TX8 DMUX RX8
DMUX
TX4 TX4
RX8 TX8

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX7 RX7
TX1 RX1
FE, GE, RX7 TX7
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,

2ODU1
2OTU1

4ODU0
2ODU1
2OTU1

FC100, FICON,
4ODU0

6Any
6Any

DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, SDI,


ESCON, FDDI TX8 DMUX DMUX RX8
ESCON, FDDI
RX6 TX6
RX8 TX8
TX6 RX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-37 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-37 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 6: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1->OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:
Client side 161(ODU0LP1/
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ 7(TX5/RX5)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Client side 161(ODU0LP1/


WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-38 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-38 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTE

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributary-line
mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
Only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 support ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
l Before setting the working modes of the ClientLP1 port to ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1), set the working modes of the ClientLP5 port to None (not for ports).
l Before setting the working modes of the ClientLP3 port to ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1), set the working modes of the ClientLP7 port to None (not for ports).

Step 2 Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan.Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the Service Rate(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4,
ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this
restriction.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are received by each group of ClientLP ports, such as
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-39 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 TX1

4ODU1

4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1
OTU1 4 MUX/ MUX/ OTU1
NS2 NS2 4
DMUX DMUX
RX8 RX8

TX8 4 4
TX8

ODU1 ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Figure 3-40 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7:Any->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 RX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, 1 1 STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC- OC-3, OC-12, OC-
4ODU1
4ODU1
8Any

8Any
48, FC100, FC200, MUX/ MUX/ 48, FC100, FC200,
NS2 NS2
FICON, FICON DMUX DMUX FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI, RX8 TX8 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, 4 4 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI TX8 RX8 ESCON, FDDI

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-41 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-41 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 7: OTU1/Any-


>ODU1)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
mode
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-42 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-42 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).
Step 2 Optional: Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

NOTE

l If the service type is OTU-1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode for the port.
l If the service type is another service, retain the default value Client Modefor the port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan. Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the Service Rate(Mbit/s).you also must set the
service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services at the same time,
but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this
service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

The inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards must
be configured as shown below.

Product TN52TOM board TN52NS2 board

OptiX OSN 3800 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800 A cross-connection can be configured between any port on


the TN52TOM board and any port on the TN52NS2 board.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.


Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

----End

3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation


mode (non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-43 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1).

Figure 3-43 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

8ODU0

8Any
4ODU1

4ODU1
4ODU1

4ODU1

4OTU1
8ODU0
4OTU1

64Any

N N

64Any
8Any
8Any

8Any

32Any
/ /
32Any

OTU1 4 4 OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
4 4 4 4
TX8 X X TX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-44 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-44 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-


>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

201(ClientLP1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1


3(TX1/RX1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1
/ClientLP1)-1
1 2 3 2 4
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 /ODU0LP2)-1

234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1
203(ClientLP7
7(TX5/RX5)-1 /ClientLP7)-1
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8
242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3
8(TX6/RX6)-1 /ODU0LP3)-1
236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8
9(TX7/RX7)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-7 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 164(ODU0LP4


236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-45 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-45 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2 4

NOTE

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

When the service type is OTU-1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for ports.
Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l The board can receive a maximum of four OTU1 services at the same time.
l When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board, set the
service type to the same as the type of services that are encapsulated into the OTU1 services
received on the client side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated
into OTU1 services on the upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE
when configuring the internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.
l The source and sink of an Any cross-connection must have the same channel service type. For
example, to configure a cross-connection from the AnyLP1-1 port to the AnyLP5-1 port, set the
channel service types for the two ports to the same value.
l The sum of the service rates of all channels on the AnyLP5 port must not be larger than 1.25G,
which is also the case for the AnyLP6- AnyLP12 ports.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Configure any intra-board OTU1 cross-connection between the client-side and ClientLP ports.
Ensure that the ports are identical to those configured in steps Step 2 and Step 3.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 5to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boardsOperation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.


Repeat to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

----End

3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation


tributary-line mode (non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-46 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-46 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
2xOTU1 2xOTU1

TX3 RX3
RX1 TOM RX3 TX3 TOM RX1
MUX/ MUX/
TX1 TX4 DMUX DMUX RX4 TX1
RX4 TX4

32Any
32Any

2ODU1
4ODU0
4ODU0
2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

2ODU1
2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

16Any
16Any
OTU1 TX5 OTU1
RX5
RX2 RX5 TX5 RX2
MUX/ MUX/
TX2 TX6 DMUX DMUX RX6
TX2
RX6 TX6

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-47 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1-


>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Client side WDM side

201(ClientLP1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1


3(TX1/RX1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1
/ClientLP1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1 /ODU1LP1)-1
1 2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 8(TX6/RX6)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 2 2
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 4
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2 52(ODU1LP2 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 /ODU0LP2)-1 /ODU1LP2)-1
238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
10(TX8/RX8)-1
207(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1

238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8

Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect


TOM module module module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-48 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-48 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

1
3

5
4

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1).
l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports do not support the non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode.
l Before the working modes of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports are set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1
re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working
modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must be set to None (not for ports).

Step 2 Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

When the service type is OTU-1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for ports.
Step 4 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation
Example:

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the OTU1 services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 6to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 7 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example


1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and


7(RX5/TX5), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 8(RX6/
TX6)ports, and between the 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 9(RX7/TX7) ports.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service on
the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 7(RX5/TX5) and 10(RX8/TX8) are the working channel port, and port
8(RX6/TX6) and 9(RX7/TX7) are the protection channel port.

Step 8 Configure the realization of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side of the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

6
2

NOTE

For the application of "the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", the steps above.

----End

3.2.13 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->OTU1). Perform configurations according to the network design.
l Figure 3-49 shows a scenario where OTU1 signals are electrically regenerated.
l Figure 3-50 shows a scenario where the TN52TOM board works in tributary-line mode
and receives Any signals.
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of four channels of services on the client side and the other four client-
side ports work as WDM-side ports, two of which selectively receive services.
Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of six channels of services on the client side. The other two
client-side ports work as WDM-side ports.

Figure 3-49 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: OTU1-
>ODU1->OTU1)
Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals:

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

TOM
RX1 TX5
D
RX2 TX6 M
4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

M
U
U RX3 TX7 X
X RX4
TX8

TX1 RX5
D
M TX2
4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

RX6 M
U
X TX3 RX7 U
X
TX4 RX8

Figure 3-50 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
RX5 TX5
4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/ TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1 4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/
TX6 RX6
OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ DMUX DMUX OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3 RX6 TX6 FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3

2ODU1

2ODU1
2OTU1

2OTU1
4Any

4Any
2 x FC200/FICON Express/ TX7 RX7 2 x FC200/FICON Express/
HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/ RX4 RX7 TX7 RX4 HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 MUX/ MUX/ OTU1
TX8 DMUX DMUX RX8
TX4 TX4
RX8 TX8

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 RX5 TX5 TX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,

4ODU1
4OTU1
4ODU1

4OTU1

4Any
4Any

DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,


FDDI, FC200, DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express, RX4 TX8 RX8
RX4 FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM- SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48 TX4 RX8 TX8 16, OC-48
TX4

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: OTU1->ODU1-
>OTU1)

OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side.


Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module TOM

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)
OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Single transmitting and single receiving
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-53 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-53 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
l For the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) ports, set Port Working Mode to ODU1
tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).

Step 2 Optional: Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


l For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set four RX/TX ports
as WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side", set four RX/TX ports as
WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of "Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side", set two RX/TX
ports as WDM-side optical ports.

Step 3 Optional: Configure the service mode toOTN Modefor the ports on the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE

l For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set Service Mode of
the four RX/TX ports to OTN Mode.
l For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side" and "Single transmitting
and single receiving on the WDM side", retain the default value Client Mode for the four RX/TX
ports.

Step 4 Optional: Set the service type toOTU-1of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set Service Type of the
four RX/TX ports to OTU-1.
For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side" and "Single transmitting and
single receiving on the WDM side", the board can receive the FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI,
STM-16, OC-48, FC100, FICON, GE, STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FE, SDI, STM-1,
and OC-3 services at the same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10
Gbit/s.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining services.

Step 6 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example


1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 7(RX5/


TX5), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a unidirectional OTU1
cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 8(RX6/TX6), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
and 9(RX7/TX7) ports.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 7 Optional: Configure the realization of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM
side of the TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

6
2

NOTE

For the application of "the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", the steps above.

----End

3.2.14 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-54 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Figure 3-54 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 11: OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

8ODU0
8ODU0

4ODU1
4ODU1

4OTU1
4OTU1

N N OTU1

8Any
8Any 4
OTU1 4 / /
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
8 8 8 8
X X TX8
TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-55 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-55 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


4(TX2/RX2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 3 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
TOM

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-56 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-56 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board to OTU-1.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board.Operation Example:
1

Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.


Step 5 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Repeat to configure the remaining ODU0 cross-connections.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.15 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode


(non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-57 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-57 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 12: OTU1-
>ODU1->Any->ODU0)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

4ODU1
8ODU0

4OTU1
32Any

64Any
8ODU0
4ODU1
4OTU1

64Any

32Any
N N

8Any

8Any
OTU1 4 / / 4 OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
8 8 8 8
TX8 X X TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-58 shows the port configuration of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-58 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
Line/PID
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
board in
compatible
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1


1 2 3
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 4
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 235(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1 235(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8


236(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8
236(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
9(TX7/RX7)-1
244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-59 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-59 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0
re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation Example:

NOTE

l The board can receive a maximum of four OTU1 services at the same time.
l When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board, set the
service type to the same as the type of services that are encapsulated into the OTU1 services
received on the client side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated
into OTU1 services on the upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE
when configuring the internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.
l The source and sink of an Any cross-connection must have the same channel service type. For
example, to configure a cross-connection from the AnyLP1-1 port to the AnyLP5-1 port, set the
channel service types for the two ports to the same value.
l The sum of the service rates of all channels on the AnyLP5 port must not be larger than 1.25G,
which is also the case for the AnyLP6- AnyLP12 ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. Operation Example:
1

Configure any intra-board OTU1 cross-connection between the client-side and ClientLP ports.
Ensure that the ports are identical to those configured in steps 2 and 3.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 6 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Repeat to configure the remaining ODU0 cross-connections.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board


(Manually by Station)

About This Chapter

The THA and TOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is
applicable to various scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by
station on the NMS for the application scenarios.
The THA and TOA boards are almost the same except for the number of optical ports. The
THA board provides 16 optical ports while the TOA board provides 8 optical ports. This
chapter uses the TOA board as an example for illustration. The descriptions and configuration
of the THA board are similar to those of the TOA board.
The THA board differs from the TOA board in the following aspects:
l The client-side ports 3(TX1/RX1) to 10(TX8/RX8) on the THA board can be configured
with cross-connections only to the LP ports 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1; the client-side ports 11(TX9/RX9) to 18(TX16/RX16) on
the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the LP ports
209(ClientLP9/ClientLP9)-1 to 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1.
l The THA board cannot receive SDI, HD-SDI and HDSDIRBR services on the client
side.
l The THA board does not support ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
Therefore, all configurations related to this port working mode are applicable only to the
TOA board.
4.1 Overview of the Working Mode
Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.
4.2 Configuration Procedures
Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.
4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)


This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.
4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1
convergence mode.
4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.
4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.

The TOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 4-1. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Table 4-1 Port working modes on the TOA board

Configuration Scenario Port Working Mode Mapping Path

4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 ODU0 non-convergence Any->ODU0


non-convergence mode mode
(Any->ODU0)

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 ODU1 non-convergence OTU1/Any->ODU1


non-convergence mode mode
(Any->ODU1)

4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 ODU1 convergence mode n x Any->ODU1 (1 n 8)


convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1)

4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0


ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex ODUflex non- Any->ODUflex


non-convergence mode convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex)

- None (not for ports) -

NOTE

None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are released to
other ports.

4.2 Configuration Procedures


Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.

General Configuration Procedure


Figure 4-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the
TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the port


working mode

Configure the
port type

Configure the timeslot


configuration mode for
the line board

Configure the
service mode

Configure the
service type

Configure the
ODUflex tolerance for
the line board

Configure cross-
connections from the
client side to LP ports

Configure inter- Mandatory


board cross-
connections Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional
actions vary according to port working modes.
The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:
l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when
colored optical signals are received on the client side.
l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must
be set for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

When the port working mode of the TOA board is ODUflex, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the line board that is
interconnected with the TOA board.
In other port working modes, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the line
board to the same as the value that is set on the interconnected line board. The
recommended value is Assign random.
l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be
set to OTN Mode first.
l Configure the ODUflex tolerance(ppm): For the line board which is interconnected with
the TOA board, configure this parameter when the port of the TOA board works in
ODUflex mode. This parameter is reserved and optional in configuring service types
which are currently supported.
l Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP ports:
Compatible Mode: This action is required only for the ODU0 non-convergence
mode and ODU1 convergence mode.
Standard Mode: This action is required only for the ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each
mode.

l Table 4-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
l Table 4-3 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 non-convergence mode.
l Table 4-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 convergence mode.
l Table 4-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.
l Table 4-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence
mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-2 Configuration procedure

No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Optional


working mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working
Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0). If the default value is used, skip this step.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

3 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT-GMP),
STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-
ASI, ESCON, and SDI.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each
ClientLP port. Set the service type for only one of the two
channels. When the TOA board is interconnected with a
TN52TOM board, the channel where you set the service type must
be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the
TN52TOM board. When the TOA board is interconnected with
another board, set the service type for channel 1.
This note is only for the compatible mode. Services in standard
mode are configured at RX/TX ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

4 Configure cross- When services are in compatible mode, it is mandatory to


connections from the configure this parameter. But when services are in standard
client side to ClientLP mode, this parameter does not need to be configured.
ports on the TOA l Parameter settings:
board.
Level and Service Type:
If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) or
GE(TTT-GMP) in step 3, retain the default
value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE
in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service
Type to the same value that you set in step 3.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the
ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8). Ensure that the client-side port matches
an ClientLP port. That is, if you set the source
optical port to RXi/TXi, set the sink optical port to
ClientLPi.
Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel
for which you configure the service type in step 3.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from the client side to each ClientLP port. For details
about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0) for each sink optical port.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-3 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Optional


mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode
is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1,
set Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Mode.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are HD-SDI, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON
Express, and OTU1. The total received service
bandwidth cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Convergence Mode

Table 4-4 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are ANY, FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), FC100, FC200,
DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, SDI, HDSDI, HDSDIRBR, FICON, and
FICON Express.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
l Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in
each group of ClientLP ports can receive services with rates
higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLP
ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8,
cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
The preceding ClientLP ports are only for configuring service
types in compatible mode. in standard mode, RX/TX ports are
configured. 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 in compatible mode
corresponds to 3(RX1/TX1) in standard mode. The rest follows the
same principle.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

4 Configure cross- Mandatory


connections from the l Parameter settings:
client side to ClientLP
ports on the TOA Level and Service Type:
board. If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) in step 3,
retain the default value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE
in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service
Type to the same value that you set in step 3.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the
ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port:
Compatible Mode: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)
Standard Mode: 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)
to 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8)
Sink Optical Channel: Set it to a value in the range
of 1 to 8, which is the ID of the channel for which
you configure the service type in step 3.
l Configuration principles: There is no mapping between
client-side ports and ClientLP ports. For example, if
you set the source optical port to 3(RX1/TX1), you can
set the sink optical port to any of the ports from 201 to
208.
NOTE
However, for a board in compatible mode, when STM-16
services are received on the client side, these services must be
provisioned on the first optical channel of each ClientLP port,
and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports.
For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-
connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, services from
4(TX2/RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1, and so on.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from the client side to each ClientLP port. For details
about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any-
>ODU1) for each sink optical port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode

Table 4-5 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Mandatory


mode. l Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Mode.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: Set Service Type to OTU1.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Type.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ODU0LP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-6 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the timeslot Mandatory


configuration mode l Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot
for the line board that Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default
is interconnected with value is used, skip this step.
the TOA board.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the
line board that is interconnected with the TOA board
and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign
random for the required ports.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are 3GSDI, 3GSDIRBR and FC400.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

5 Configure the Optional


ODUflex l Parameter settings: For the transmission of 3GSDI or
tolerance(ppm) for the 3GSDIRBR services, set this parameter to 10; for the
line board that is transmission of other services, set this parameter to 100.
interconnected with
the TOA board. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the
line board that is interconnected with the TOA board
and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the
displayed window, set ODUflex tolerance(ppm) for the
required ports.

6 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Table 4-7 Parameters for configuring inter-board cross-connections


Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex
eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Level ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODUflex

Service - - - - Custom,
Type PACKET,
FC400,
FC800, or
3GSDI
NOTE
For the TOA
board, only
support
FC400 and
3GSDI.

Directi Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional


on

Source ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot
Slot where the where the where the where the where the
TOA board is TOA board TOA board is TOA board TOA board
housed is housed housed is housed is housed

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex


eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Source l Compatible l Compatib l Compatible l Compatib l Compatib


Optical Mode: le Mode: Mode: le Mode: le Mode:
Port 201(Client 201(Clien 201(Client 161(ODU 201(Clien
LP1/ tLP1/ LP1/ 0LP1/ tLP1/
ClientLP1) ClientLP ClientLP1) ODU0LP ClientLP
to 1) to to 1) to 1) to
208(Client 208(Clien 208(Client 168(ODU 208(Clien
LP8/ tLP8/ LP8/ 0LP8/ tLP8/
ClientLP8) ClientLP ClientLP8) ODU0LP ClientLP
l Standard 8) l Standard 8) 8)
Mode: l Standard Mode: l Standard l Standard
3(RX1/ Mode: 201(ConvG Mode: Mode:
TX1) to 3(RX1/ roup1/ 3(RX1/ 3(RX1/
10(RX8/ TX1) to ConvGroup TX1) to TX1) to
TX8) 10(RX8/ 1) to 10(RX8/ 10(RX8/
TX8) 208(ConvG TX8) TX8)
roup8/
ConvGroup
8)

Source 1 1 1 1 or 2 1
Optical
Channe
l

Sink ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot TN53NQ2,
Slot where the where the where the where the TN53ND2,
interconnected interconnecte interconnected interconnecte TN53NS2
board is d board is board is d board is
houseda houseda houseda houseda

Sink Example: Example: Example: Example: 1(IN1/


Optical 161(ODU0LP 51(ODU1LP 51(ODU1LP1/ 161(ODU0L OUT1) to
Port 1/ODU0LP1) 1/ ODU1LP1) P1/ 2(IN2/
ODU1LP1) ODU0LP1) OUT2)

Sink 1 or 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 or 2 OCH:1-
Optical ODU2:1-
Channe ODUflex:1
l to OCH:1-
ODU2:1-
ODUflex:2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex


eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Occupi - - - - It cannot be
ed set manually.
ODUT l The value
Uk is 4 when
Timesl the
ots service
type is
FC400.
l The value
is 3 when
the
service
type is
3GSDI.

Service - - - - The
Rate(bi parameter
t/s) value is
automatically
displayed
according to
the value of
Occupied
ODUTUk
Timeslots.

l There is no mapping between source optical ports and sink optical ports. For example, if
you set the source optical port to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1), you can set the sink optical
port to 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) or any other ODU0LP port on the board in the sink
slot.
l a: The interconnected board can be
Standard mode:
TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
Compatible mode:
TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /
TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Legend Information
Figure 4-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-3 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

Figure 4-3 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0))
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

TX1 TOA TOA TX1

1 1 M M 1 1
RX1 RX1
U U
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ X X FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
8ODU0

8ODU0
8ODU0

8ODU0
N N
8Any

8Any
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ / / STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
S D S
FC100/FICON/DVB- D FC100/FICON/DVB-
2 M 2
ASI/ESCON/SDI TX8 M TX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI
U U
8 8 8 8
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-4 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Line/PID board in
compatible mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-5 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1

Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board.Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-
convergence mode (Any->ODU0)
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

NOTE

l Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each ClientLP port. Set the service type for
only one of the two channels. When the TOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the
channel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set
on the TN52TOM board. When the TOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service
type for channel 1.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP ports on the TOA board. This
step is mandatory only when the TOA board is in compatible mode. While in standard mode,
implement Step 5.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

l The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOA board.
l In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to specific service, such as FE.

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port.
l For each of the remaining seven services, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/
TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)
to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). The sink optical port number must match the source optical port
number. That is, if the source optical port is RXi/TXi, the sink optical port must be ClientLPi.
l Set Sink Optical Channel to 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for which you configure the service type in
Step 3.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards.

Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU0
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) through 10(RX8/TX8).The sink optical
port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU1)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-7 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode.

Figure 4-7 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1))
8xODU1 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 8xODU1

TX1 TOA TOA TX1

1 1 M M 1 1
RX1 U U RX1
X X
8ODU1

8ODU1
8ODU0

8ODU0

N N
8Any

8Any

HD-SDI/STM16/ / / HD-SDI/STM16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON D D D OC-48/FC200/FICON
D
Express/OTU1 2 M 2 Express/OTU1
TX8 M TX8
U U
8 8 8 8
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-8 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 Line/PID board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-9 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode

Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
TOA
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board.Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-
convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

.
Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TOA board to OTN Mode. This configuration is for the TOA board
in compatible mode, not in standard mode.
Operation Example:

NOTE

2
: The default value of Service Mode is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU-1, set
Service Mode to OTN Mode

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from TOA board to other boards.


Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4
1

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

4
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU1
non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The sink optical port
channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)


This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-10 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-10 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-11 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 convergence mode.

Figure 4-11 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1))
(1~8)xODU1 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 (1~8)xODU1

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC- M M FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-
RX1 RX1
3/STM-16/ U U 3/STM-16/
(1~8)ODU1

(1~8)ODU1

DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ X X DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/
8ODU0
8ODU0

N N
8Any

8Any

STM-4/OC- / / STM-4/OC-
D D D
12/GE/FC100/ D 12/GE/FC100/
2 M 2
FICON/FC200/ TX8 M TX8 FICON/FC200/
FICON Express/SDI/ U U FICON Express/SDI/
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR RX8 X X RX8 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-12 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-12 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any->ODU1))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatibl
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 e mode
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2

2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-7
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

(standard
mode)

Other board b TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


TN54ENQ2
(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-13 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 Line/PID board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ConvGroup1/Conv 201(ConvGroup1/Conv


Group1)-1 Group1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1
Group1)-8
202(ConvGroup2/Conv 202(ConvGroup2/Conv
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Group2)-1 Group2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1 Group2)-8
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-1
Group8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
Group8)-8
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.

Operation Example:

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

NOTE

l Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in each group of ClientLP ports can
receive services with rates higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP or ConvGroup ports on the TOA
board.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

When STM-16 services are received on the client side, these services must be provisioned on the first
optical channel of each ClientLP port, and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports.
For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1,
services from 4(TX2/RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1, and so on.
l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOA board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
specific service, such as FE.

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode
is set to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-
connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink
Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the
range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in
standard mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to
10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ConvGroup2/
ConvGroup2) to 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8). The sink optical port number must
match the source optical port number. That is, if the source optical port is RXi/TXi, the
sink optical port must be ClientLPi or ConvGroupi.
Step 5 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from ClientLP ports to the WDM side on the TOA
board.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4
1

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

4
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2) to 208(ConvGroup8/
ConvGroup8). The sink optical port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-


>ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-14 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-14 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-15 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 convergence mode.

Figure 4-15 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
16xODU0 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 16xODU0

TOA TOA
RX1 RX1
1 1 M M 1 1
TX1 U U TX1
X X
16ODU0
16ODU0
8ODU1
8OTU1

8ODU1
8OTU1
8ODU0

8ODU0

N N
OTU1 D
/ /
D OTU1
D D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
TX8 16 16 X X 16 16 TX8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-16 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Figure 4-16 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID board
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Line/PID board
in compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1
1
162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2

9(TX9/RX9)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-1


167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-2
10(TX10/RX10)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

TOA Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

(standard
mode)

Other board b TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


TN54ENQ2
(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-17 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-2
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-2

TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-2

Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.

Operation Example:

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TOA board to OTN Mode.This configuration is for the TOA board
in compatible mode, not in standard mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Operation Example:

Step 4 The available values for Service Type is OTU-1 only.


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from the TOA board to other boards.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

1
4

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2) to 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8). When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The sink optical port
channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODUflex)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-18 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-18 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Application Diagram
Figure 4-19 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODUflex non-convergence
mode.

Figure 4-19 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex))
l 3G-SDI<->ODUflex
5xODUflex 4xOTU2 4xOTU2 5xODUflex

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
M M
5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR
RX1 1 1 1 1 RX1
U U
X X
5xODUflex

5xODUflex
3G-SDI N / N 3G-SDI
5 /
3G-SDIRBR Q Q 5 3G-SDIRBR
D D
2 M 2
TX8 M TX8
U U
5 5 5 5
RX8 X X RX8

l FC400/FICON4G<->ODUflex
4xODUflex 4xOTU2 4xOTU2 4xODUflex

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
RX1 1 1 M M 1 1

4xFC400/FICON4G
RX1
4xFC400/FICON4G

U U
X X

4xODUflex
4xODUflex

N / N
4xFC400/ 4 / 4xFC400/
Q D Q 4
FICON4G D FICON4G
2 M 2
TX8 M TX8
U U
4 4 4 4
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-20 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Line board
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
1 2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2


board

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
Line board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2


board

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Step 3 Optional: The available values for ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random
only.
Operation Example:

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODUflex-level cross-connections from ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

1
4

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

3
: When the service type is set to 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR, a maximum of five cross-connections
can be configured; for service type FC400/FICON4G, a maximum of four cross-connections.
The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in standard
mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The value
of Sink Optical Channel is automatically generated by the system.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by


Station)

About This Chapter

The LOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable to five
scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMS for
the application scenarios.

5.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.
5.2 Configuration Procedures
Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.
5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.
5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.
5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.
5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.
5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU2 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

5.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.

The LOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 5-1. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Table 5-1 Port working modes on the LOA board


Configuration Scenario Port Working Mode Mapping Path

5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non- ODU0 non-convergence Any->ODU0[->ODU1]-


convergence mode (Any- mode >ODU2->OTU2
>ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2)

5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non- ODU1 non-convergence OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2-


convergence mode (OTU1/ mode >OTU2
Any->ODU1->ODU2-
>OTU2)

5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[-


ODU1_ODU0 mode >ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex ODUflex non- Any->ODUflex->ODU2-


non-convergence mode convergence mode >OTU2
(Any->ODUflex->ODU2-
>OTU2)

5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non- ODU2 non-convergence Any->ODU2->OTU2


convergence mode (Any- mode
>ODU2->OTU2)

- None (not for ports) -

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in ODU0 non-convergence mode, two
service signal flows are available: Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 and Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2.
l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are
released to other ports.

5.2 Configuration Procedures


Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

General Configuration Procedure


Figure 5-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the
LOA board.

Figure 5-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the port


working mode

Configure the
port type

Configure the timeslot


configuration mode

Configure the
service mode

Configure the
service type

Configure the
ODUflex tolerance for
the line board

Configure cross-
connections from the
client side to LP ports

Configure ODU0-level Mandatory


cross-connections from
LP ports to the WDM side Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional
actions vary according to port working modes.

The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when
colored optical signals are received on the client side.
l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must
be set for the line side of the LOA board.
When the signal flow is from ODU0 or ODUflex to ODU2, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random.
When the signal flow is ODU0 -> ODU1 -> ODU2, ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode must be set to Assign consecutive.
When the signal flow is from Any or ODU1 to ODU2 directly, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode can be set to Assign consecutive or Assign random.
However, the value must be the same as the value that is set on the interconnected
LOA or line board.
l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be
set to OTN Mode first.
l Configure the ODUflex tolerance(ppm): when the port of the TOA board works in
ODUflex mode, this parameter can be configured. This parameter is reserved and
optional in configuring service types which are currently supported.
l Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required only
for the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.
The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each
mode.
l Table 5-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
l Table 5-3 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 non-convergence mode.
l Table 5-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.
l Table 5-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence
mode.
l Table 5-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU2 non-convergence mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-2 Configuration procedure


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Optional


working mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working
Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2). If the default value is used, skip
this step.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the Optional


timeslot l Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot
configuration Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal
mode. flows in the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2,
set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign
random.
When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2-
>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to
Assign consecutive.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side
port.

4 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type
are FE, GE(TTT-GMP), GE(GFP-T), STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/
OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port.
Set the service type for only one of the two channels. When the LOA
board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you
set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service
type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is
interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

5 Configure cross- Mandatory


connections from l Parameter settings:
the client side to
LP ports on the Level and Service Type:
LOA board. If you set Service Type to GE in step 4, retain the
default value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in
step 4, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to
the same value that you set in step 4.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID
of the slot where the LOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).
Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port. That
is, if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi, set the
sink optical port to ClientLPi.
Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for
which you configure the service type in step 4.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from the
client side to each LP port. For details about the
configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

6 Configure ODU0- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-3 Configuration procedure

N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-
convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the Optional


timeslot l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode
configuration to Assign consecutive or Assign random.
mode.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the dropdown list. Set
ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side
port.

4 Configure the Optional


service mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode is
Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1, set
Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

5 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type
are HDSDI, HDSDIRBR, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1,
STM16, or OC-48.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

6 Configure ODUk- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode

Table 5-4 Configuration procedure


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2).
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the Optional


timeslot l Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot
configuration Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal
mode. flows in the ODU1_ODU0 mode.
When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0-
>ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode to Assign random.
When the signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0-
>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side
port.

4 Configure the Mandatory


service mode. l Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

5 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type is
OTU1 only.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

6 Configure ODUk- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-5 Configuration procedure


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex
non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.
NOTE
When the RX1/TX1 port receives the FC800 service, set Port Working
Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2-
>OTU2) only for port LP1. And set Port Working Mode to None (not
for ports) for the other seven LP ports.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

3 Configure the Mandatory


timeslot l Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot
configuration Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default value
mode. is used, skip this step.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random
for the WDM side port.

4 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type
are 3GSDI, 3GSDIRBR, FC-400, or FC-800. FC-800 is only
for the RX1/TX1 port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
l The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed
identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the
FC400 service on the U2000.
l The FICON8G service and the FC800 service are processed
identically. For the FICON8G service, you can configure it as the
FC800 service on the U2000.

5 Configure the Optional


ODUflex l Parameter settings: For the transmission of 3G-SDI services,
tolerance(ppm). set this parameter to 10; for the transmission of other
services, set this parameter to 100.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the
displayed window, set ODUflex tolerance(ppm) for the
required ports.

6 Configure ODUk- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU2 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-6 Configuration procedure


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Before setting Port Working Mode to
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) for
port LP1, set to None (not for ports) for the other seven LP
ports.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the Mandatory


timeslot l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode
configuration to Assign random or Assign consecutive.
mode.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side
port.

4 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: Set Service Type to FC800 only for the
RX1/TX1 port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5 Configure ODUk- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Table 5-7 Parameters for configuring ODUk-level cross-connections from LP ports to the
WDM side
Paramete ODU0 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex ODU2
r Non- Non- U0 Mode Non- Non-
Convergenc Convergenc Convergenc Convergen
e Mode e Mode e Mode ce Mode

Level ODU0 ODU1 ODU0 ODUflex ODU2

Service - - - Custom, -
Type PACKET,
FC400,
FC800,
3GSDI, or
InfiniBand
2.5G,
NOTE
For the LOA
board, only
support
FC400,
FC800,
3GSDIRBR
and 3GSDI.

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot
Slot/Sink where the where the where the where the where the
Slot LOA board LOA board LOA board LOA board LOA board
is housed is housed is housed is housed is housed

Source 201(ClientLP 201(ClientLP 201(ClientLP 201(ClientLP 201(ClientL


Optical 1/ClientLP1) 1/ClientLP1) 1/ClientLP1) 1/ClientLP1) P1/
Port to to to to ClientLP1)
208(ClientLP 208(ClientLP 208(ClientLP 208(ClientLP
8/ClientLP8) 8/ClientLP8) 8/ClientLP8) 8/
ClientLP8)a

Source 1 or 2 1 1 or 2 1 1
Optical
Channel

Sink 1(IN1/ 1(IN1/ 1(IN1/ 1(IN1/ 1(IN1/


Optical OUT1) OUT1) OUT1) OUT1) OUT1)
Port

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Paramete ODU0 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex ODU2


r Non- Non- U0 Mode Non- Non-
Convergenc Convergenc Convergenc Convergen
e Mode e Mode e Mode ce Mode

Sink l When the OCH:1- l When the OCH:1- OCH:1-


Optical ODU ODU2:1- ODU ODU2:1- ODU2:1
Channel Timeslot ODU1:1 to Timeslot ODUflex:1a
Configur OCH:1- Configur to OCH:1-
ation ODU2:1- ation ODU2:1-
Mode is ODU1:8 Mode is ODUflex:2
Assign Assign
random: random:
OCH:1- OCH:1-
ODU2:1- ODU2:1-
ODU0:1 ODU1:1-
to OCH: ODU0:1
1- to OCH:
ODU2:1- 1-
ODU0:8 ODU2:1-
l When the ODU1:1-
ODU ODU0:8
Timeslot l When the
Configur ODU
ation Timeslot
Mode is Configur
Assign ation
consecuti Mode is
ve: OCH: Assign
1- consecuti
ODU2:1- ve: OCH:
ODU1:1- 1-
ODU0:1 ODU2:1-
or 2 to ODU1:1-
OCH:1- ODU0:1
ODU2:1- or 2 to
ODU1:4- OCH:1-
ODU0:1 ODU2:1-
or 2 ODU1:4-
ODU0:1
or 2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Paramete ODU0 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex ODU2


r Non- Non- U0 Mode Non- Non-
Convergenc Convergenc Convergenc Convergen
e Mode e Mode e Mode ce Mode

Occupied - - - It cannot be -
ODUTUk set manually.
Timeslots l The value
is 4 when
the
service
type is
FC400.
l The value
is 7 when
the
service
type is
FC800.
l The value
is 3 when
the
service
type is
3GSDI.

Service - - - The -
Rate(bit/s) parameter
value is
automatically
displayed
according to
the value of
Occupied
ODUTUk
Timeslots.

a: When the LOA board receives FC800 services, set Source Optical Port only to
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) and Sink Optical Channel only to OCH:1-ODU2:1-
ODUflex:1.

5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 5-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 5-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 5-3 lists the condition where the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

Figure 5-3 Position of the LOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2))
1xOTU2 1xOTU2

LOA LOA
TX1 RX1
M M
RX1 U U TX1
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ OUT X X IN FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
8ODU0
4ODU1

1ODU2
1OTU2

8ODU0
1ODU2

4ODU1
1OTU2
8ODU0
8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0
8ODU0
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ / / STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
IN OUT
FC100/FICON/DVB- D D FC100/FICON/DVB-
ASI/ESCON/SDI TX8 M M RX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI
U U
RX8 X X TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 5-4 shows the port configuration of the LOA board.

Figure 5-4 Cross-connection diagram of the LOA board (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2))
The service signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2:
Client side WDM side

1
3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1
1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:2
1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
5(RX3/TX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3
1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
1
7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
1
8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:6
1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:7
1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:8
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

The service signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2:


Client side WDM side

1
3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1
1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:2
1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
5(RX3/TX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:2ODU0:1
1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:2ODU0:2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
1
7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3ODU0:1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
1
8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3ODU0:2
1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1
1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:2
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.
Operation Example:

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3 4

2
5

Step 3 Optional: Configure the timeslot configuration mode.


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3
:
l If the service signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode to Assign random for the LOA board.
l If the service signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the LOA board.

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the LOA board according to the service planning.

Operation Example:

2
1

NOTE

2
:
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/FC100/FICON/DVB-ASI/
ESCON/SDI services at the same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 1.25
Gbit/s.
l Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port. Set the service type for only one of
the two channels. When the LOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where
you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the TN52TOM
board. When the LOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Step 5 Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports on the LOA board.

Operation Example:

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the LOA board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
specific service, such as FE.

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), note the following
difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port.
l Set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical
Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). The sink
optical port number must match the source optical port number. That is, if the source optical port is
RXi/TXi, the sink optical port must be ClientLPi.

Step 6 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

l When the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random.

l When the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), note the following
difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l Set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8). The sink optical port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any-


>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 5-5 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 5-5 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 5-6 lists the condition where the LOA board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode.

Figure 5-6 Position of the LOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2))
1xOTU2 1xOTU2

LOA LOA
TX1 RX1
M M
RX1 U U TX1
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/ OUT X HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/
X IN
4ODU1

1ODU2
1OTU2

1ODU2

4ODU1
1OTU2
8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0
STM16/OC-48/ / / STM16/OC-48/
FC200/FICON 4 IN OUT 4 FC200/FICON
D D
Express/OTU1 M M Express/OTU1
TX8 RX8
U U
RX8 X X TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 5-7 shows the port configuration of the LOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 5-7 Cross-connection diagram of the LOA board (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2))

Client side WDM side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
1
5(RX3/TX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:2

6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3
8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4
10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which does not need to be configured on the
NMS

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

3 4

2
5

Step 3 Optional: Configure the service mode of the LOA board.


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

2
: The default value of Service Mode is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU-1, set
Service Mode to OTN Mode.

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the LOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

2
1

NOTICE

l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.


l The board can receive the HD-SDI/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1/STM-16/OC-48
services at the same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to
2.67 Gbit/s.
l In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit
services.

Step 5 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

1 4

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), note the following difference
in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l Set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8). The sink optical port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-


>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.

Legend Information
Figure 5-8 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 5-8 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Application Diagram
Figure 5-9 lists the condition where the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode.

Figure 5-9 Position of the LOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2))
1xOTU2 1xOTU2

TX1 LOA LOA


RX1
M M
RX1 U U TX1
OUT
X X IN
4ODU1
8ODU0

4ODU1

1ODU2
1OTU2

1ODU2

4ODU1

8ODU0
4ODU1
1OTU2
8ODU0
8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0
8ODU0
/ /
OTU1 4 IN OUT 4 OTU1
D D
TX8 M M
RX8
U U
RX8 X X TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 5-10 shows the port configuration of the LOA board.

Figure 5-10 Cross-connection diagram of the LOA board (Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2))

The service signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2:


Client side WDM side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3
5(RX3/TX3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:6
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:7
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:8

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which does not need to be configured on the
NMS

The service signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Client side WDM side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1
4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:2
1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:2ODU0:1
6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:2ODU0:2
7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3ODU0:1
8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3ODU0:2
9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1
10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which does not need to be configured on the
NMS

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) for the LOA board.
Operation Example:

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3 4

2
5

Step 3 Optional: Configure the timeslot configuration mode of the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3
:
l If the service signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random.
l If the service signal flow is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2, set ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive.
Step 4 Set Service Mode to OTN Mode of the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Step 5 The available values for Service Type is OTU-1 only.


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 6 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.
Operation Example:
l When the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

z
4
1

3
z

4
1

l When the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

z
4
1

3
z

4
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE
This mode can be configured on a maximum of four ports, with each port configured with two cross-
connections.
The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), note the following difference in
cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Channel.
l Set any three of the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) ports as Source Optical Port
and set Source Optical Channel to 1 and 2 to configure the cross-connections. The value of Sink
Optical Channel is automatically generated by the system.

----End

5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 5-11 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 5-11 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 5-12 lists the condition where the LOA board works in ODUflex non-convergence
mode.

Figure 5-12 Position of the LOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2))
1xOTU2 1xOTU2

LOA LOA
TX1 RX1
M M
RX1 U U TX1
OUT IN
2ODUflex

2ODUflex

3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/ X X 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/
1ODU2
1OTU2

1ODU2
1OTU2
8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

8ODU0

FC400/ / / FC400/
IN
FICON4/FC800/ D D OUT FICON4/FC800/
FICON8G TX2 M M RX2 FICON8G
U U
RX2 X X TX2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 5-13 shows the port configuration of the LOA board.

Figure 5-13 Cross-connection diagram of the LOA board (Scenario 4: ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2))
Client side WDM side

3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
5(RX3/TX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

6(RX4/TX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

7(RX5/TX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1

8(RX6/TX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which needs to be configured on the NMS

The internal cross-connection of the board,


which does not need to be configured on the
NMS

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the LOA board.Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

NOTE

2
:When the RX1/TX1 port receives the FC800 service, set Port Working Mode to ODUflex
non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) only for port LP1. And set Port Working
Mode to None (not for ports) for the other seven LP ports.

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3 4

2
5

Step 3 Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random.

Operation Example:

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the LOA board according to the service planning.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE

2
:
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l The board can receive the 3GSDI/3GSDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G/FC800/FICON8G
services.
l In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3GSDI/
3GSDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G services, and only the RX1/TX1 port receives and
transmits FC800/FICON8G services.
l The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G
service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.
l The FICON8G service and the FC800 service are processed identically. For the FICON8G
service, you can configure it as the FC800 service on the U2000.

Step 5 Configure ODUflex-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA
board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

3
: When the service type is set to FC800/FICON8G, only one cross-connection can be
configured; for service type 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G, a maximum of two cross-
connections can be configured.
The preceding configuration is for port 3(RX1/TX1). When the service type is set to 3G-SDI/3G-
SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G, another cross-connection can be configured. Note the following difference
in the cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port.
l Set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8) and Sink Optical Port to OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2.

----End

5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU2 non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 5-14 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 5-14 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 5-15 lists the condition where the LOA board works in ODU2 non-convergence mode.

Figure 5-15 Position of the LOA in a WDM system (Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2))

1xOTU2 1xOTU2

LOA LOA
M M
U U
RX1 OUT X X IN TX1
1ODU2
1OTU2

1ODU2
1OTU2
8ODU0

8ODU0
FC800/ / / FC800/
TX1 IN D D OUT RX1 FICON8G
FICON8G
M M
U U
X X

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 5-16 shows the port configuration of the LOA board.

Figure 5-16 Cross-connection diagram of the LOA board (Scenario 5: ODU2 non-
convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2))
Client side WDM side

1
3(RX1/TX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be


configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which does not need
to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
for the LOA board.
Operation Example:

4 3

NOTE

2
:Set Port Working Mode to None (not for ports) for the other ports in the same way.

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

3 4

2
5

Step 3 Set Service Type to FC800 only for the RX1/TX1 port.
Operation Example:

1 2

Step 4 Configure ODU2-level cross-connections from LP ports to the WDM side on the LOA board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

About This Chapter

Universal line boards support hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services. This
topic describes the configuration procedures when a universal line board receives different
services.

6.1 Configuration Procedures


This topic describes the service configuration procedures for a universal line board.
6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths
Before using a universal line board to carry SDH or packet services, configure SDH or ETH
virtual ports and mapping paths on the universal line board according to the service plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

6.1 Configuration Procedures


This topic describes the service configuration procedures for a universal line board.

General Configuration Procedure


When a universal line board receives only OTN services, the service configuration procedure
and operation tasks are the same as those on an OTN line board. For details about the service
configuration procedure and operation tasks on an OTN line board, see 2 Configuring WDM
Services (Manually by Station) and 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail).
When a universal line board receives SDH and packet services, configure virtual ports and
path mappings prior to other configurations. Figure 6-1 shows the general configuration
procedure for a universal line board to receive SDH or packet services.

Figure 6-1 General configuration procedure for receiving SDH or packet services

Start

Configure board
WDM port attributes.

Create or search for


OCh trails.

Configure virtual
ports and mapping
paths.

Configure SDH Configure packet


services. services.

Check
configurations.

End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

NOTE

l When receiving packet or SDH services, the universal line board does not support the Assign
consecutive mode, but only supports the Assign random mode. In this case, the universal line
board only can be interconnected with an board that supports Assign random mode.
l When receiving OTN services, the universal line board can be interconnected with an board that
does not support timeslot mode settings.

Table 6-1 describes the configuration steps.

Table 6-1 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure board Configuring board WDM port attributes including:


WDM port attributes. l Configuring the wavelength of universal line boards:
The actual wavelength must be the same as the
configured wavelength; otherwise, services will be
unavailable. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Wavelength.
NOTE
If you create services by trail, you can configure the
wavelength while creating OCh trails.
l Setting the FEC Mode: According to the network
design, set FEC Mode to a proper value. FEC Mode of
two interconnected boards must be the same. For details
about the configuration procedure, see Setting the FEC
Mode.
l Setting the ODUflex tolerance: Specifies the tolerance
of deviation between the actual client-side service rate
and the specified rate when the client-side service type
is ODUflex. When the 3GSDI services are received
from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. For the
packet services, set this parameter to 20. For other
services, set it to 100.
NOTE
In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface > Advanced Attributes
from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, set ODUflex
tolerance(ppm) for the required ports.
l For details about other operations, see Configuring
Board WDM Port Attributes.

2 Create or search for Mandatory


OCh trails. For the och trails that traverse dynamic OADMs, Creating
Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection (by Station) or
8.3 Creating OCh Trails (by Trail) is needed. For those
that do not traverse dynamic OADMs, the och trails
already exist and can be searched out.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

No. Action Description

3 Configure virtual Mandatory


ports and mapping When SDH or packet services are provisioned on the
paths. universal line board, the board will encapsulate the SDH or
packet services into ODUk signals and then perform ODUk
mapping. Configure SDH or ETH virtual ports and
mapping paths before creating services.
Operation description:
l If you create services by station, see 6.2.1 Configuring
Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station.
l If you create services by trail, see 6.2.2 Configuring
Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Trail.

4 Configure SDH When SDH services are provisioned on the universal line
services. board, this step is mandatory.
For details about the configuration procedure, see 9
Configuring the SDH Services.

Configure packet When packet services are provisioned on the universal line
services. board, this step is mandatory.
NOTE
When the HUNS3 board is used to receive and transmit packet
services, Line Rate of the ODUk channels mapped by ETH virtual
ports must be set to Standard Mode. For details, see Configuring
the Line Rate.
For details about the configuration procedure, see 11
Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).

6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths


Before using a universal line board to carry SDH or packet services, configure SDH or ETH
virtual ports and mapping paths on the universal line board according to the service plan.

6.2.1 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station


This section describes how to configure SDH or ETH virtual ports for the universal line board
by station.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The universal line board must be created.
l The license for universal line board has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the universal line board has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

Background Information
After ETH virtual ports and mapping paths are created, Layer 2 links can be automatically
discovered by 8.6 Searching for WDM Trails so that the U2000 can automatically compute
tunnel routes.

After the trail search is completed, you can choose Inventory > Link Management from the
main menu to view the found Layer 2 links in the window that is displayed. If no Layer 2 link
is found, see Manually Creating a Layer 2 Link.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Legend Information
Figure 6-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 6-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,configure SDH or ETH virtual ports to the universal line board
l Operation Example:To add an SDH virtual port,

3 4
1
5

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

l Operation Example:To add an ETH virtual port,

3
1
5
4

Step 2 Optional: Click Port and select the desired virtual port number based on the service plan.
Operation Example:

Step 3 Click the Mapped ODUk drop-down list and select a desired ODUk mapping path.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

Table 6-2 Parameters for configuring virtual ports and mapping paths
Parameter Value Range Description

Port Type ETH, SDH Specifies the access service type.

Level STM-16, STM-64 Specifies the access service rate.


Default: STM-16 Relationship with Other Parameters:
This parameter is valid only when Port Type is set
to SDH.

Bandwidth GE, 2GE, 10GE, nGE Specifies the maximum bandwidth of services
Default: GE received or transmitted on a port.
NOTE
You are advised to set the maximum bandwidth of a port
based on the actual packet traffic on the network.
Relationship with Other Parameters:
This parameter is valid only when Port Type is set
to ETH.

Quantity 1 to 32 Specifies the number of virtual ports to be added.


Default: 1
NOTE
The value range of this
parameter depends on
the number of
configured virtual
ports and the
remaining available
virtual port resources.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

Parameter Value Range Description

Port l ETH: Specifies the virtual port number.


40001(V_ETH-1) NOTE
to SDH virtual ports are classified into four groups:
40032(V_ETH-32 51(V_SDH-1) to 54(V_SDH-4), 55(V_SDH-5) to
) 58(V_SDH-8), 59(V_SDH-9) to 62(V_SDH-12), and
63(V_SDH-13) to 66(V_SDH-16). When configuring
l SDH: SDH virtual ports, observe the following requirements:
51(V_SDH-1) to l Only the following four SDH virtual ports can be
66(V_SDH-16) provisioned with STM-64 services: 51(V_SDH-1),
55(V_SDH-5), 59(V_SDH-9), and 63(V_SDH-13).
l In each group of SDH virtual ports, if one port is
provisioned with an STM-16 service, the remaining
ports cannot be provisioned with STM-64 services.
For example, if an STM-16 service is configured on
the 52(V_SDH-2) port, the remaining three ports
cannot be provisioned with STM-64 services:
51(V_SDH-1), 53(V_SDH-3) and 54(V_SDH-4).
l When configuring STM-16 services for the virtual
ports, prefer to use the consecutive ports. For
example, to configure STM-16 services on five of
the SDH virtual ports, use 51(V_SDH-1),
52(V_SDH-2), 53(V_SDH-3), 54(V_SDH-4), and
55(V_SDH-5).

Mapped The available Specifies the physical port number used for
ODUk mapping path is mapping a virtual port into ODUk.
related to the type of NOTE
universal line board, When packet or SDH services are provisioned, the
the port type and universal line boards support only the Assign random
level/bandwidth that mode, but do not support the Assign consecutive mode
and the relevant mapping path.
have been set.

Occupied 1 to 32 Specifies the number of ODTUk timeslots


ODTUK Default:1 occupied for mapping a virtual port into ODUk.
Timeslots Relationship with Other Parameters:
This parameter is valid only when Port Type is set
to ETH and Mapped ODUk is set to an ODUflex-
level value.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To adjust the number of SDH and packet services carried on a universal line board, you can
perform the following steps to adjust the number of SDH and ETH virtual ports accordingly:
1. Select a virtual port to be adjusted, and delete it.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

2. See steps 1 to 3 to add required virtual ports.

6.2.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Trail


This section describes how to configure SDH or packet service mapping path for the universal
line board by trail.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The universal line board must be created.
l The license for universal line board has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the universal line board has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.
l You have created OCh trails.

Background Information
After ETH virtual ports and mapping paths are created, Layer 2 links can be automatically
discovered by 8.6 Searching for WDM Trails so that the U2000 can automatically compute
tunnel routes.
After the trail search is completed, you can choose Inventory > Link Management from the
main menu to view the found Layer 2 links in the window that is displayed. If no Layer 2 link
is found, see Manually Creating a Layer 2 Link.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Configure Service
Mapping.

Step 2 Set the subnet type to Ring subnet or Chain subnet.

Step 3 In the main topology on the right pane, double-click the NEs for which you want to set
service mapping in turn.

Step 4 Click Query Server Trails of Segment.

Step 5 Select a desired OCh trail from the Trail Name drop-down list.

Step 6 Set Service Mapping and Carried Service.

NOTE

When Service Mapping is set to ETH and Carried Service is set to ODUflex, the Timeslot
(ODTUk.ts,1-8) parameter is available.

Step 7 Click Details. The detailed service mapping information will be displayed in the lower part of
the right pane.

Step 8 Click Channel to select the channel for which you want to set service mapping.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards

Step 9 Click Configure. The U2000 will create the selected service mapping.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After service mapping is successfully configured, an ODUk server trail will be created, on
which you can directly configure SDH and packet service trails.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station


Service Package)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in
station service package mode to achieve one-click configuration. In station service package
mode, multiple configurations such as configuring port working modes and service types are
performed on a single NMS GUI, facilitating operations and improving configuration
efficiency. The station service package mode is applicable only to some fixed scenarios.

NOTE

You can also configure the TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards in manual station mode. In this
mode, you need to perform various operations such as configuring port working modes and service types
on multiple NMS GUIs. The configuration process is complex but applicable to various scenarios. For
details about the manual station mode, see the related sections for manually configuring the TN52TOM,
THA/TOA, and LOA boards by station.

7.1 Overview of the Service Packages


Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple
configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and
reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring
working modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents vary
according to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to the
TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards.
7.2 Configuring Service Packages
You can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the service
package for each board separately.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

7.1 Overview of the Service Packages


Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple
configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and
reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring
working modes, service types, cross-connections, and port types. Configuration contents vary
according to boards and service packages. Currently, service packages are available to the
TN52TOM, THA/TOA, and LOA boards.

7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board


Configuration contents vary according to service packages.
Table 7-1 and Table 7-2 list the service packages for the TN52TOM board and the
corresponding configuration contents.

Table 7-1 Service packages for the TN52TOM board in cascading mode and the
corresponding configuration contents
Service Port Working Service Type Port Type Cross-Connection
Package Mode Configuration
Name

Tributary Set to ODU1 Set to STM-1 Set to Line l Bidirectional ANY-


line tributary-line for channels 1 Side Color level cross-
7*STM-1/ (OTU1/Any- to 7 of port Optical connections are
OC3- >ODU1- ClientLP1. Port for configured between
>ODU1 >OTU1) for port RX8/ ports from RX1/TX1
port ClientLP1. TX8. to RX7/TX7 and
channels 1 to 7 of port
ClientLP1.
l Bidirectional OTU1-
level cross-
connections are
configured between
port RX8/TX8 and
channel 1 of port
ODU1LP1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Service Port Working Service Type Port Type Cross-Connection


Package Mode Configuration
Name

Tributary Set to ODU0 Set to FE for Set to Line l Bidirectional ANY-


line 7*FE- tributary-line channels 1 to 4 Side Color level cross-
>ODU0 (Any->ODU0- of port Optical connections are
>ODU1- ClientLP1 and Port for configured between
>OTU1) for channels 5 to 7 port RX8/ ports from RX1/TX1
port ClientLP1. for port TX8. to RX7/TX7 and
ClientLP2. channels 1 to 4 of port
ClientLP1 and
channels 5 to 7 of port
ClientLP2.
l Bidirectional OTU1-
level cross-
connections are
configured between
port RX8/TX8 and
channel 1 of port
ODU1LP1.

Table 7-2 Service packages for the TN52TOM board in non-cascading mode and the
corresponding configuration contents
Service Port Working Service Type Port Type Cross-Connection
Package Mode Configuration
Name

Tributary Set to ODU1 Set to STM-1 - Bidirectional ANY-level


4*STM-1 Mode (OTU1/ for channel 1 cross-connections are
6/OC48- Any->ODU1) of ports configured between ports
>4*ODU1 for ports ClientLP1, from RX1/TX1 to
ClientLP1, ClientLP3, RX4/TX4 and channel 1
ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and of ports ClientLP1,
ClientLP5, and ClientLP7. ClientLP3, ClientLP5,
ClientLP7. and ClientLP7.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Service Port Working Service Type Port Type Cross-Connection


Package Mode Configuration
Name

Tributary Set to ODU0 Set to GE for - l Bidirectional GE-


8*GE- Mode (Any- channel 1 of level cross-
>8*ODU0 >ODU0[- ports of connections are
>ODU1]) for ClientLP1, configured between
ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ports RX1/TX1, RX3/
ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and TX3, RX5/TX5, and
ClientLP5, and ClientLP7. RX7/TX7 and
ClientLP7. Set to GE for channel 1 of ports
channel 2 of ClientLP1, ClientLP3,
ports of ClientLP5, and
ClientLP2, ClientLP7.
ClientLP4, l Bidirectional GE-
ClientLP6 and level cross-
ClientLP8. connections are
configured between
ports RX2/TX2, RX4/
TX4, RX6/TX6, and
RX8/TX8 and
channel 2 of ports
ClientLP2, ClientLP4,
ClientLP6, and
ClientLP8.

4*OTU1 Set to ODU1 Set to OTU1 Set to Line l Bidirectional OTU1-


REG tributary-line for channel 1 Side Color level cross-
(OTU1/Any- of ports Optical connections are
>ODU1- ClientLP1, Port for configured between
>OTU1) for ClientLP3, ports from ports from RX1/TX1
ports ClientLP1, ClientLP5, and RX5/TX5 to RX4/TX4 and
ClientLP3, ClientLP7. to RX8/ channel 1 of ports
ClientLP5, and TX8. ClientLP1, ClientLP3,
ClientLP7. ClientLP5, and
ClientLP7.
l Bidirectional OTU1-
level cross-
connections are
configured between
ports from RX5/TX5
to RX8/TX8 and
channel 1 of ports
from ODU1LP1 to
ODU1LP4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Service Port Working Service Type Port Type Cross-Connection


Package Mode Configuration
Name

Tributary Set to Set to OTU1 - Bidirectional OTU1-level


4*OTU1- ODU1_ANY_O for channel 1 cross-connections are
>ODU1 DU0_ODU1 re- of ports configured between ports
(re- encapsulation ClientLP1, from RX1/TX1 to
encapsulat tributary-line ClientLP3, RX4/TX4 and channel 1
ed into mode (OTU1- ClientLP5, and of ports ClientLP1,
ODU0) >ODU1->Any- ClientLP7. ClientLP3, ClientLP5,
>ODU0- and ClientLP7.
>ODU1-
>OTU1) for
ports ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5, and
ClientLP7.

7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board


Configuration contents vary according to service packages.

NOTE

Only the compatible mode of the THA and TOA boards supports service packages.

Table 7-3 lists the service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configuration
contents.

Table 7-3 Service packages for the TOA board and the corresponding configuration contents
Service Port Working Mode Service Type
Package
Name

8*GE- Set to ODU0 non-convergence Set to for ports from ClientLP1 to


>8*ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0) for ports from ClientLP8.
ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

8*STM-16/ Set to ODU1 non-convergence Set to STM-16 for ports from


OC48- mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.
>8*ODU1 ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.

7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board


The LOA board supports only one service package (8 x GE->8 x ODU0). The configuration
contents of the service package include port working modes, service types, ODU timeslot
configuration modes, and cross-connections from the client side to LP ports, and cross-
connections from the LP ports to the WDM side.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Table 7-4 lists the service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configuration
contents.

Table 7-4 Service packages for the LOA board and the corresponding configuration contents

Servic Port Service ODU Cross- Cross-


e Working Type Timeslot Connections Connections
Packag Mode Configurat from the from the LP
e ion Mode Client Side ports to the
Name to LP Ports WDM side

8*GE- Set to ODU0 Set to Set to Bidirectional Bidirectional


>8*OD non- GE(TTT- Assign GE-level ODU0-level
U0 convergence GMP) for random for cross- cross-
mode (Any- ports from WDM side connections connections
>ODU0[- ClientLP1 to ports IN/ are configured are configured
>ODU1]- ClientLP8. OUT-OCH: between ports between ports
>ODU2- 1. from from OCH:1-
>OTU2) for RX1/TX1 to ODU2:1-
ports from RX8/TX8 and ODU0:1 to
ClientLP1 to channel 1 at OCH:1-
ClientLP8. each port from ODU2:1-
ClientLP1 to ODU0:8 and
ClientLP8. channel 1 at
each port from
ClientLP1 to
ClientLP8.

7.2 Configuring Service Packages


You can configure service packages for multiple boards in batches or configure the service
package for each board separately.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The boards that support service packages must be created.
l No cross-connection or protection is configured on the board.
l Port Type is not set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the port in tributary-line
integrated mode on the TN52TOM board.

Precautions
l Existing services on a board will be interrupted if you configure service packages on the
board.
l After a service package is configured for a board, you can change the working mode,
service type, and cross-connections at a port as required. After the change, the
configurations on the board will be different from the fixed configuration contents of the
service package.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Configuration Process

Figure 7-1 Service package configuration process

Start

Are cross-connections and No


protection configured for the
board?

Yes

Delete cross-connections and


protection configured on the
board

Select the required service


package

Configure WDM services in


one-click mode using the
service package

No
Are the configurations
successful?
Yes

End

NOTE

The following describes how to configure a service package in two modes.

Legend Information
Figure 7-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 7-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

NE Batch Configuration
This mode helps you configure service packages for all involved boards in batches on the
NMS.
In the main menu interface entrance:

Step 1 In the Service Package Configuration window, click the Board Type drop-down list to
select the required board type.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Step 2 In the Service Package window, select the name of the service package that you want to
configure and click Apply To.... In the Select Board dialog box that is displayed, all subnets
containing the selected board type are displayed. Select the boards where you want to
configure the service package and click OK.
Operation Example:

2 3

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

NOTE

2
To configure service packages for all boards on the NMS, click the Physical Root check
box.

3
When configuring service packages, you can choose whether creating cross-connection or
not.

Step 3 TheConfirmdialog box is displayed twice,clickYes.


Operation Example:

Step 4 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operation
progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

Separate Board Configuration


This mode helps you to configure a service package for a separate board.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > Service Package
from the Function Tree.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

3 4

NOTE

3
:When configuring service packages can choose whether to create a cross.

Step 2 TheConfirmdialog box is displayed twice,clickYes.


Operation Example:

Step 3 The Configuring Service Package for Boards dialog box is displayed to show the operation
progress. After the operation is completed, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Operation Result
l If "Operation succeeded" is displayed in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to
complete the operation.
l If "Operation failed" or "Operation partially succeeded" is displayed in the Operation
Result dialog box, click Details to view the cause. The possible causes are listed in the
following table. Handle the problem based on the displayed cause.
Cause Solution

Cross connection Delete all cross-connections on the board corresponding to


already exists the value of Object.

Invalid port type Change the port type of all ports on the board
corresponding to the value of Object to client-side ports.

Configuration Verification
After a service package is completed, verify that the service package is successfully
configured.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that the value of Service
Type is correctly set for the required ports according to the configured service package.
Operation Example:

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the board where the service package is configured and choose
Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree. Verify that the values of Board
Working Mode and Port Working Mode are correctly set according to the configured
service package.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Operation Example:

NOTE

3
:Verify the value of Board Working Mode only for the TN52TOM board.

Step 3 If the board is TN52TOM, select the required NE in the NE Explorer and choose
Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click the WDM
Cross-Connection Configuration tab and verify that the WDM cross-connections are
correctly configured according to the configured service package.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

Step 4 If the board is TN52TOM and the configured service package is Tributary line 7*STM-1/
OC3->ODU1, Tributary line 7*FE->ODU0, or 4*OTU1 REG, select the NE where the
service package is configured in the Main Topology. Double-click the NE icon to open the NE
panel. In the NE panel, select and right-click the required board, and then choose Path View
from the shortcut menu that is displayed. Right-click the required port and choose Modify
Port from the shortcut menu that is displayed. Verify that the value of Type is correctly set
according to the configured service package.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

3 4
5

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

About This Chapter

You can configure WDM services in end-to-end mode by searching for trails and creating
trails at different layers. In addition, the NMS provides the signal flow diagram that visually
displays the signal flow and the transmission media layer route of trails. This facilitates
operations and improves the maintenance efficiency.

8.1 WDM Trails


This section provides the concept, types, and related information of WDM trails.
8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow
The feature for WDM trail creation simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. This section describes how to configure end-to-end trails for WDM
services.
8.3 Creating OCh Trails
The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end (E2E) mode. After you specify the
source and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail directly.
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails
The U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the
source and sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates
the ODUk trail.
8.5 Creating Client Trails
After OCh trails are created, you can create client trails that traverse different layers on the
U2000. The ODUk trails are automatically generated during the creation of client trails.
8.6 Searching for WDM Trails
After fibers are connected and services are configured on the WDM equipment, there is no
trail information on the U2000. Cross-connection or fiber connection information can be
uploaded to the U2000 and existing trails can be browsed and managed using the WDM trails
searching function.
8.7 Activating WDM Trails
For the unactivated trail, activate the trail and enable the service on the trail according to the
trail data saved on the NMS.
8.8 Configuration Example: GE->ODU1->OTU2 Under ODUk SNCP Protection

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 304


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you
need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to
generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.
8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2 Under Client 1+1 Protection
8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration
In this user interface, you can configure WDM trails.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 305


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

8.1 WDM Trails


This section provides the concept, types, and related information of WDM trails.
Currently, the U2000 provides OTN trail models in compliance with ITU-T G.872. OTN trails
include the following types:
l Client trails
l ODUk trails
l OTUk trails
l OCh trails
l OMS trails
l OTS trails
l OSC trails

NOTE

l The first six types of OTN trails are related with services while OSC trails are only related with
supervisory optical signals.
l OTS trails cannot be deleted on the U2000. Instead, they can be deleted only by removing fiber
connections.

The rate level of an ODUk/OTUk trail varies with the value of k, as shown in Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 ODUk rate level


Trail Level Rate (Gbit/s)

ODU0 1.25

ODU1/OTU1 2.5

ODU2/OTU2 10

ODU3/OTU3 40

ODU4/OTU4 100

ODUflex 1.25 to 10 (the value increases by 1.25)

Trail Model
Figure 8-1 shows the relationships between different trail types and locations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 306


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Figure 8-1 WDM trails

M40
D40
OA OA
F F
T L I I L T
U U

D40
M40
OA OA

OTS trail
OMS trail
L: Line board
OCh trail T: Tributary board
ODUk trail
Client trail

8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow


The feature for WDM trail creation simplifies the service configuration procedure and ensures
proper operation. This section describes how to configure end-to-end trails for WDM
services.
WDM trails are closely related and created in a hierarchical order. End-to-end WDM trails
must be configured by following a specific procedure, and a new WDM trail can be created or
searched out on the condition that its server trails already exist.
NOTE

When configuring an end-to-end service, users can directly create a client service trail without creating
the electrical-layer server trail. After the service trail is created, the electrical-layer server trail will be
automatically created.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 307


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Figure 8-2 End-to-end WDM trail configuration flow


Transponder (OTU) with
Tributary + Line Board TOM Tributary Board + TOM Tributary-line Board Transponder (OTU) LOA Board
Client level cross-connection
Line Board
function

Configure logical fiber Configure logical fiber Configure logical fiber Configure logical fiber Configure logical fiber Configure logical fiber
connections connections connections connections connections connections

Configure cross-
Configure wavelength Configure wavelength connection (TX/RX Configure wavelength Configure wavelength Configure wavelength
port<-> LP port)

Create OCh trail Create OCh trail Configure wavelength Create OCh trail Create OCh trail Create OCh trail

Configure service
Search WDM trail Search WDM trail Create OCh trail Configure service type Search WDM trail
type

Configure Working Configure Working Configure Working Configure Working


Search WDM trail Search WDM trail
Mode Mode Mode Mode

System creates System creates


Create ODUk trail Create ODUk trail Search WDM trail ODUk & client trail ODUk trail Create ODUk trail
automatically automatically

System creates
Configure Service Configure Service Create client trail Configure Service
ODUk trail
type type type
automatically

Create client trail Create client trail Create client trail Create client trail

XXXXX Mandatory task XXXXX Optional task

Configure on the Configure on the Trails created


Line board Tributary board automatically

The end-to-end WDM trail configuration flow varies with the board type. For details on each
step in the flowchart, refer to Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 End-to-end WDM trail configuration flow


N Step Remarks
o
.

1 Configure l WDM trails can be searched out and created only when logical
logical fiber fiber connections are correct.
connections.

2 Configure l The actual wavelength must be the same as the configured


wavelengths. wavelength; otherwise, services will be unavailable.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 308


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

N Step Remarks
o
.

3 Configure the l Set the board working mode and port working mode based on the
working mode. current application and service mapping path. Therefore, in the
multiple applications, the boards enable services to be processed
differently.
l Set Working Mode for the port in the Create WDM Trail
window when creating ODUk trails or client trails using the
board that supports multiple application scenarios. For details,
refer to 8.4 Creating ODUk Trails and 8.5 Creating Client
Trails.

4 Configure the l Service transmission is possible only when the service type
service type. configured for WDM ports is consistent with the type of the
transmitted service.
l When creating client trails in an end-to-end configuration mode,
set the Service Type for the port in the Create WDM Trail
window. For details, refer to 8.5 Creating Client Trails.

5 Create OCh OCh trails that traverse dynamic OADMs must be manually created
trails. and those that do not traverse dynamic OADMs already exist and
can be searched out.

6 Create ODUk ODUk trails with cross-connections need to be created and those
trails. with no cross-connection already exist and can be searched out.
NOTE
Users can create an end-to-end client service trail directly without creating the
electrical-layer server trail. After the service trail is created, the electrical-
layer server trail will be automatically created.

7 Create client Client cross-connections on OTU or tributary boards need to be


trails. created.

8.3 Creating OCh Trails


The U2000 supports creating OCh trails in an end-to-end (E2E) mode. After you specify the
source and sink of a service, the U2000 can generate an OCh trail directly.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
The logical fiber connections on the trail must be established.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 309


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Background Information

Figure 8-3 Introduction to OCh trails

M40
D40
OA OA OA OA
F F F F
T L I I ROADM I I L T
U U U U

M40

D40
OA OA OA OA

D40 M40

L
T: Tributary Board
OCh TraiN
L: Line Board

T
l When Board Mode of a regenerator board is set to Electrical Relay Mode, the OCh
trail is terminated on the regenerator board. For example, for a service traversing a
regenerator board, as shown in Figure 8-4, four unidirectional OCh trails are generated
using the E2E trail management function.

Figure 8-4 OCh trails of a service that traversing an electrical regenerator board

IN1 OUT1
T L L L T
OUT2 IN2

Electrical Regenerator Board

Forward OCh Trail T: Tributary Board


Reverse OCh Trail L: Line Board

l When Board Mode of a regenerator board is set to Optical Relay Mode, a complete
bidirectional OCh trail is generated using the E2E trail management function. Figure 8-5
shows the OCh trail.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 310


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Figure 8-5 OCh trail of a service that traversing an optical regenerator board

IN1 OUT1

T L L L T
OUT2 IN2

Optical Regenerator Board

T: Tributary Board
OCh Trail
L: Line Board

NOTE

l If the Auto Calculation check box is selected during trail creation, route calculation is triggered when
you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection. If the route calculation is
successful, the calculation result can be queried in the topology view and the server route list; otherwise,
an error message is displayed indicating the failure causes.
l If the Auto Calculation check box is deselected, routes are not automatically calculated when you create
a trail. You can click Calculate Route to check the correctness of a route.
l After an optical cross-connection is created for an MCS0816 board, view the WDM interface attribute
McsSwitch Status of the MCS0816 board. If the value is on, the optical cross-connection is successfully
created and services are normal. If the value is off, the optical cross-connection is successfully created
and the OCh trail search succeeds, but services are unavailable and an MCS_SWITCH_BLOCKED alarm
is reported. The possible cause is as follows: When two optical cross-connections to the same sink port
are created, the actual wavelengths on the two source ports are the same, causing a conflict.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.

Step 2 In the displayed window, set Level to OCh.

Step 3 Click Browse on the right side of the Source field. In the displayed dialog box, select the
required NE and specify a port on the NE as the source port of the E2E trail. Then use the
same procedure to specify the sink port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 311


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

NOTE

If the message "There is no server trail between the source and the sink" is displayed, check the
following information with the design document:
l Wavelength and band settings for the source and sink ports of the OCh trail
l Logical fiber connections for the source and sink ports of the OCh trail
If any of this information is incorrect, the OCh trail fails to be created.

Step 4 Optional: If the routes that are automatically computed are different from the planned ones,
you must specify route constraints.
l Method 1: Specify route constraints in the Create WDM Trails window.
a. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click the blank area and choose Add from the
shortcut menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, you can search for the existing
server trails and set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created.
b. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction or Add Board/Port Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the
window that is displayed, you can search for an NE, a board or a port and set them
as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created.
NOTE

When the E2E trail traverses an optical regeneration site, you must specify the INx/OUTx port on
the optical regeneration board that the forward trail traverses and the INx/OUTx port on the
optical regeneration board that the reverse trail traverses.
c. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the window that is displayed, you can
search for an NE and set it as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created.
l Method 2: You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create
a service, the server links of the OMS level are automatically filtered and displayed in
green in the topology view. After routes are successfully calculated, the working route is
displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

a. Specify the explicit link. Click a server link in green between the source and sink
NEs. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server trails of all levels
for the service. Click the trail again to cancel the selection.
b. Specify the explicit node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Explicit Node >
NE or Set Explicit Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE, a
board or a port as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created. This selected NE is
marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
c. Specify the excluded node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Excluded Node
> NE or Set Excluded Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE,
a board or a port as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created. The selected NE
is marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 312


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Step 5 After the trail computation is complete, the server-layer route information of the to-be-created
trail and the port attribute list are displayed at the bottom of the topology view.
l Click the Server Layer Route Details tab to view the server-layer route information of
the working and protection trails.
l Click the Port Attributes Settings tab to view and modify the port attributes of the to-
be-created trail and its server-layer trails.

Step 6 Optional: Before deploying the configuration of a service, you can perform the following
operations as required.
l Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after
it is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.
l If the network design clearly specifies that the OPA function is not required, in the OPA
Mode dialog box, set the optical power adjustment mode to Manual for the OCh trail to
be created.

Step 7 Click Apply to complete the trail settings. The Create Trail dialog box is displayed, which
shows the trail creation progress. Wait until the Operation Result dialog box displays the
message Operation succeeded.

Step 8 Click Close to close the dialog box.

----End

Troubleshooting
If route computation fails during the trail creation, a dialog box indicating a route computation
failure will be displayed on the U2000. Click Analyze Route to analyze the root cause based
on the information displayed in Route Fault Analysis.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 313


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Follow-up Procedure
To view the new trails, click Browse Trail in the Operation Result dialog box. The new
trails are displayed in the Manage WDM Trail window.

8.4 Creating ODUk Trails


The U2000 supports creating ODUk trails in an end-to-end mode. After you specify the
source and sink of a service, the U2000 automatically searches for the server trail and creates
the ODUk trail.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
l If the Auto Calculation check box is selected during trail creation, route calculation is
triggered when you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection.
If the route calculation is successful, the calculation result can be queried in the topology
view and the server route list; otherwise, an error message is displayed indicating the
failure causes.
l If the Auto Calculation check box is deselected, routes are not automatically calculated
when you create a trail. You can click Calculate Route to check the correctness of a
route.

Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.

Step 2 In the displayed window, set Level to the required ODUk level, for example, ODU1.
NOTE

l When Level is set to ODU2 or ODU3, the Rate parameter has two values: Standard Mode and Speedup
Mode. When the WDM-side signal is OTU2e or OTU3e, or when the client-side signal is 10GE LAN and
Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) for the client-side port, set this parameter to
Speedup Mode. In any other cases, set this parameter to Standard Mode.
l When the trail level is ODUflex, set Service Type to the same value as the service type configured in the
NE Explorer.

Step 3 Click Browse to the right of the Source field. In the displayed Select Board Port-Source
dialog box, select the required NE and specify a port on the NE as the source port of the E2E
trail.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 314


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

NOTE
In the Select Board Port-Source window, click Working Mode Setting to set Working mode for the port
when using the board that supports multiple application scenarios.
Then use the same procedure to specify the sink port.

Step 4 Optional: If the routes that are automatically computed are different from the planned ones,
you must specify route constraints.
l Method 1: Specify route constraints in the Create WDM Trails window.
a. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add from the
shortcut menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, search for the existing server
trails and set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. Select the Select
Channel check box and select the channels for the explicit links. If no channel is
selected for the explicit links, the U2000 automatically calculates route channels.
b. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction or Add Board/Port Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the
window that is displayed, you can search for an NE, a board or a port and set them
as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created.
c. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the window that is displayed, you can
search for an NE and set it as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created.
l Method 2: You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create
a service, the server links of the OCh level are automatically filtered and displayed in
green in the topology view. After routes are successfully calculated, the working route is
displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

a. Specify the explicit link. Click a server link in green between the source and sink
NEs. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server link for the
service.
Select the Select Channel check box and select the channels for the explicit links.
If no channel is selected for the explicit links, the U2000 automatically calculates
route channels.
b. Specify the explicit node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Explicit Node >
NE or Set Explicit Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE, a
board or a port as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created. The selected NE is
marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
c. Specify the excluded node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Excluded Node
> NE or Set Excluded Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE,
a board or a port as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created. The selected NE
is marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 315


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Step 5 After the trail computation is complete, the server-layer route information of the to-be-created
trail, the list of new dynamic cross-connections, and the port attribute list are displayed at the
bottom of the topology view.
l Click the Server Layer Route Details tab to view the server-layer route information of
the working and protection trails.
l Click the Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.
The user can modify the level of the pass-through cross-connections on the intermediate
pass-through node by selecting a value from the Traversal Level drop-down list. The
default level is the smallest granularity.
l Click the Port Attributes Settings tab to view and modify the port attributes of the to-
be-created trail and its server-layer trails, excluding the port attributes of the OMS and
OTS trails.

Step 6 Optional: Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer
after it is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.

Step 7 Click Apply to complete the trail settings. The Create Trail dialog box is displayed, showing
the trail creation progress. Wait until the Operation Result dialog box displays the message
Operation succeeded.

Step 8 Click Close to close the dialog box.

----End

Troubleshooting
If route computation fails during the trail creation, a dialog box indicating a route computation
failure will be displayed on the U2000. Click Analyze Route to analyze the root cause based
on the information displayed in Route Fault Analysis.

Follow-up Procedure
To view the new trails, click Browse Trail in the Operation Result dialog box. The new
trails are displayed in the Manage WDM Trail window.

8.5 Creating Client Trails


After OCh trails are created, you can create client trails that traverse different layers on the
U2000. The ODUk trails are automatically generated during the creation of client trails.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

An OCh trail has been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 316


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Background Information
l When OTUk services are used both on the source and sink, client trails cannot be created
and managed in E2E mode.
l If the Auto Calculation check box is selected during trail creation, route calculation is
triggered when you specify the source, sink, or route constraints, or configure protection.
If the route calculation is successful, the calculation result can be queried in the topology
view and the server route list; otherwise, an error message is displayed indicating the
failure causes.
l If the Auto Calculation check box is deselected, routes are not automatically calculated
when you create a trail. You can click Calculate Route to check the correctness of a
route.

Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.

Step 2 In the displayed window, set Level to Client.

Step 3 Select the required service rate from the Rate field according to the information in the design
document.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 317


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Step 4 Configure the source port and sink port.


1. Click Browse to the right of the Source field. In the displayed dialog box, select the
required NE and specify a port on the NE as the source port of the E2E trail.
2. Optional: If the board where the source port is located is applicable for multiple
application scenarios, click Working Mode Setting to set the working mode of the
source port based on the network planning.
3. Click OK.

Then use the same procedure to specify the sink port.


Step 5 Optional: If the routes that are automatically computed are different from the planned ones,
you must specify route constraints.
l Method 1: Specify route constraints in the Create WDM Trails window.
a. Click the Explicit Link tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add from the
shortcut menu. In the Add Explicit Link window, search for the existing server
trails and set them as the explicit links of the trails to be created. Select the Select

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 318


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Channel check box and select the channels for the explicit links. If no channel is
selected for the explicit links, the U2000 automatically calculates route channels.
b. Click the Explicit Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction or Add Board/Port Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the
window that is displayed, you can search for an NE, a board or a port and set them
as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created.
c. Click the Excluded Node tab. Right-click in a blank area and choose Add NE
Restriction from the shortcut menu. In the window that is displayed, you can
search for an NE and set it as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created.
l Method 2: You can also specify route constraints in the topology view. When you create
a service, the server links of the OCh level are automatically filtered and displayed in
green in the topology view. After routes are successfully calculated, the working route is
displayed in blue between the source and sink NEs.

a. Specify the explicit link. Click a server link in green between the source and sink
NEs. In the dialog box that is displayed, specify the explicit server link for the
service.
Select the Select Channel check box and select the channels for the explicit links.
If no channel is selected for the explicit links, the U2000 automatically calculates
route channels.
b. Specify the explicit node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Explicit Node >
NE or Set Explicit Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE, a
board or a port as the explicit nodes for the trails to be created. The selected NE is
marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.
c. Specify the excluded node. Right-click the desired NE, choose Set Excluded Node
> NE or Set Excluded Node > Board/Port from the shortcut menu, and set an NE,
a board or a port as the excluded nodes for the trails to be created. The selected NE
is marked with . Double-click the NE again to cancel the selection.

Step 6 After the trail computation is complete, the server-layer route information of the to-be-created
trail, the list of new dynamic cross-connections, and the port attribute list are displayed at the
bottom of the topology view.
l Click the Server Layer Route Details tab to view the server-layer route information of
the working and protection trails.
l Click the Create Cross-Connection tab to view new dynamic cross-connections.
The user can modify the level of the pass-through cross-connections on the intermediate
pass-through node by selecting a value from the Traversal Level drop-down list. The
default level is the smallest granularity.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 319


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

l Click the Port Attributes Settings tab to view and modify the port attributes of the to-
be-created trail and its server-layer trails, excluding the port attributes of the OMS and
OTS trails.

Step 7 Optional: Select the Activate the Trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer
after it is created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the
U2000.
Step 8 Click Apply to complete the trail settings. The Create Trail dialog box is displayed, showing
the trail creation progress. Wait until the Operation Result dialog box displays the message
Operation succeeded.
Step 9 Click Close to close the dialog box.

----End

Troubleshooting
If route computation fails during the trail creation, a dialog box indicating a route computation
failure will be displayed on the U2000. Click Analyze Route to analyze the root cause based
on the information displayed in Route Fault Analysis.

Follow-up Procedure
To view the new trails, click Browse Trail in the Operation Result dialog box. The new
trails are displayed in the Manage WDM Trail window.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 320


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

8.6 Searching for WDM Trails


After fibers are connected and services are configured on the WDM equipment, there is no
trail information on the U2000. Cross-connection or fiber connection information can be
uploaded to the U2000 and existing trails can be browsed and managed using the WDM trails
searching function.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l Logical fiber connections have been configured correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail.

Step 2 In the Advanced Settings area, set various processing policies associated with trail searching.

Step 3 On the lower right of the window, click Next to start trail searching. Wait until the status of
the progress bar reaches 100%.

Step 4 Click Next to view the found trails.

Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services on the network.

Step 6 When the searching completes, click Finish.

Step 7 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail
from the Main Menu.
2. On the Basic Settings tab, select the level of the service being queried for Level.
3. Click Filter All.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 321


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

In Manage WDM Trail, Check whether the trails on the subnet being queried are
consistent with the network design.

8.7 Activating WDM Trails


For the unactivated trail, activate the trail and enable the service on the trail according to the
trail data saved on the NMS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The Client, ODUk, OTUk, or OCh trail has been searched or created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.

Step 2 The Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Set the filter criteria and view
the desired trails in the trail list.
NOTE

l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.


l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental Filter.
l To search the existing trails using new filter criteria, click Secondary Filter.

Step 3 Select one or more unactivated trails, right-click and choose Active from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

For an OCh trail, you can choose Active or Active(with Attenuation Restored) to activate the trail.
l Active indicates that the optical attenuation is the default one after the OCh trail is activated.
l Active (with Attenuation Restored) indicates that the modifiable optical attenuation is the one set on
the NMS before the trail is activated on an activated OCh trail.

Step 4 In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes. The displayed Result dialog box indicates
that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.

----End

8.8 Configuration Example: GE->ODU1->OTU2 Under


ODUk SNCP Protection
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist in the network layer of the U2000. To manage WDM trails, you
need to search for the data of cross-connections and fiber connections over the network to
generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 322


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

8.8.1 Example Description


This section describes how to configure end-to-end GE services on a ring network.

Service Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 8-6, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs
function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:

l User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTN service is
configured between station A and station C.
l One GE service is added and dropped for User1 and User2 each.
l ODUk SNCP protection is configured.

Figure 8-6 Network diagram of end-to-end services


User1

21-TOM
E 04- 16- W NMS
NQ2 NQ2

W A E
04-
16-
NQ2
NQ2 D
B 16-
04-
NQ2
NQ2 C
W
E

Working service route W 16- 04- E


NQ2 NQ2
Protection service route
21-TOM

OADM

User2

Boards Configured
Two NQ2 boards and one TOM board must be configured at stations A and C each. Two NQ2
boards must be configured at stations B and D each.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 323


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Station signal flow


TOM NQ2
51(ODU1L 71(ODU2L 1(IN1/
3(RX1/TX1)
201(ClientLP1/Cli P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT1)
4(RX2/TX2) entLP1)-1
5(RX3/TX3) 72(ODU2L 2(IN2/
203(ClientLP3/Cli 52(ODU1L
P/ODU2LP) OUT2)
6(RX4/TX4) entLP3)-1 P/ODU1LP)
7(RX5/TX5) 53(ODU1L 73(ODU2L 3(IN2/
205(ClientLP5/Cli OUT2)
8(RX6/TX6) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP)
entLP5)-1
9(RX7/TX7) 54(ODU1L 74(ODU2L 4(IN2/
207(ClientLP7/Cli
10(RX8/TX8) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT2)
entLP7)-1

NQ2 NQ2
1(IN1/ 71(ODU2L 51(ODU1L 51(ODU1L 71(ODU2L 1(IN1/
OUT1) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT1)

2(IN2/ 72(ODU2L 72(ODU2L 2(IN2/


52(ODU1L 52(ODU1L
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT2)
P/ODU1LP) P/ODU1LP)
3(IN2/ 73(ODU2L 53(ODU1L 53(ODU1L 73(ODU2L 3(IN2/
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT2)
4(IN2/ 74(ODU2L 54(ODU1L 54(ODU1L 74(ODU2L 4(IN2/
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU1LP) P/ODU2LP) OUT2)

NQ2 TOM
1(IN1/ 71(ODU2L 51(ODU1L 201(ClientLP1/Cli 3(RX1/TX1)
OUT1) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) entLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)
2(IN2/ 72(ODU2L 203(ClientLP3/Cli 5(RX3/TX3)
52(ODU1L
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) entLP3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)
P/ODU1LP)
3(IN2/ 73(ODU2L 53(ODU1L 205(ClientLP5/Cli 7(RX5/TX5)
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) entLP5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)
4(IN2/ 74(ODU2L 54(ODU1L 207(ClientLP7/Cli 9(RX7/TX7)
OUT2) P/ODU2LP) P/ODU1LP) entLP7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)

:Client-side services :WDM-side services :Vritual channel

8.8.2 Service Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure an end-to-end GE service between NEs A and C.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l A license for trail management must be available.
l The OCh server trail must be searched out.
l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must
be established correctly.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 324


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
NOTE

The value of TN52TOM Board Mode is NON-Cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) and 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 203
(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) and 207 (ClientLP7/ ClientLP7) ports can access a maximum of two services.
NOTE

A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can
be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.
The total rate of services accessed by a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s.
The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
The client-side ports can be grouped as required.

Background Information
ODUk SNCP is classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S. The difference among
the three types is that they have different monitoring abilities and therefore are triggered by
different conditions.

For details on ODUk SNCP protection, see the Feature Description.

Procedure (Text Description, Unfold It to View Detailed Information)


Step 1 Configure board attributes.
1. Configure port attributes of the TN52TOM boards in slot 21 at stations A and C.
Set Board Working mode to Non-cascading. For details, see Configuring the
Working Mode.
Set Service Type of TOM-201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP)-1 to GE. For details, see
Configuring the Service Type.
2. Configure port attributes of the NQ2 boards in slots 4 and 16 at stations A, B, C, and D.
Set Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)-
ODU1-1 to ENABLED.
Set Service Mode of NQ2-51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP)-ODU1 to ODU1. For details,
see Configuring the Service Mode.

NOTICE
n If you need to change Service Mode of a board, deactivate the services on the
board first. Note that deactivation interrupts the services.
n For a 51NQ2 board, the default value of Service Mode is ODU1. For a 52NQ2
board, the default value of Service Mode is AUTO. You can change the value to
ODU1 or retain the default value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 325


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Step 2 Create ODU1 server trails.


1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
2. Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window:
Level: ODU1
Direction: Bidirectional
Rate: ODU1
3. Double-click NE A in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the
displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:
Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1)
Channel: 1
4. Click OK.
5. Double-click NE C in the Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the
displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:
Available Timeslots/Port: 201(ClientLP1)
Channel: 1
6. Click OK.
7. Check values of Source and Sink in Route Information and ensure that the route is the
design route.
8. Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs, and select the included
server trail in the displayed dialog box. You can click the trail again, and cancel the
selected server trail in the displayed dialog box.
9. Optional: Double-click the other NE in the subnet to specify the NE that the route

cannot pass through. The sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to
cancel your selection.
10. Optional: Click Specify Route Channel and the Specify Route Channel dialog box is
displayed. Select a path and click OK.
11. Click the Protection Setting tab, and set the SNCP protection route.
Right-click the NEA that dual feeds services and choose Set Dual-Feed Point from

the shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEA icon, is displayed.
Right-click the NEC that dual feeds services and choose Set Selective-Receiving

Point from the shortcut menu. In the upper left corner of the NEC icon, is
displayed.
12. Right-click on the Node list window and choose Set SNCP Parameter. In the displayed
Set SNCP Parameter window, set SNCP Type of NEs A and C to SNC/N. Click OK.
13. Click the General Attributes set the basic trail attributes, including the name and ID.
14. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is
created successfully. Otherwise, the trail configuration data is saved only on the U2000.

Step 3 Create client trails.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 326


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
2. Make the following settings in the Create WDM Trail window:
Level: Client
Direction: Bidirectional
Rate: GE
3. Double-click NE A in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the
displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:
Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1)
Channel: 1
4. Click OK
5. Double-click NE C in Physical Root. Then, select the TOM board in slot 21 in the
displayed Select Board Port window and make the following settings:
Available Timeslots/Port: 3(RX1/TX1)
Channel: 1
6. Click OK.
7. Click the General Attributes tab to set the basic trail attributes, including the name and
ID.
8. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE

Select the Activate the trail check box. The trail is then delivered to the NE layer after it is
created successfully. If you do not select the Activate the trail check box, the trail configuration
data is saved only on the U2000.
NOTE

The preceding configuration procedure is described based on the scenario of ODU1 SNCP
protection. In this scenario, cross-connect and pass-through services of the ODU1 level and optical
ports 51-54 on the line board must be configured. If ODU0 SNCP protection is configured, cross-
connect and pass-through services of the ODU0 level and optical ports 161-176 on the line board
must be configured. If no SNCP protection is configured, you do not need to create ODUk server
trails but directly create client trails.

----End

Result
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu and select
the proper filter criteria for the trails.
NOTE
You can filter other trails based on the source and sink of the new trail.

Step 2 In the WDM Trail Management window, verify that the trail is correctly created.

----End

Postrequisite
Perform forced switching after creating the protection.
1. Perform forced switching to switch services to the protection channel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 327


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

a. On the U2000, log in to site A. Select a desired protection group and choose
Function > Force to Protection Channel in the lower right part of the page.
b. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box. A dialog box indicating that the operation is
successful is displayed, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
2. Verify that the switching is successful.
a. Click Query. A message is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
b. In the forced switching mode, ensure that Working Channel Status and
Protection Channel Status are Normal. In addition, Switching Status is Force to
Protection Channel.
c. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Verify that the services are
normal. To be specific, verify that no new abnormal alarms or performance events
occur, which indicating that the switching is successful.
3. Clear the forced switching.
a. Select the desired protection group and choose Function > Clear in the lower right
part of the page.
b. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
4. Perform forced switching to switch services to the working channel.
a. On the U2000, log in to site A. Select a desired protection group and choose
Function > Force to Working Channel in the lower right part of the page.
b. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box. A dialog box indicating that the operation is
successful is displayed, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
5. Verify that the switching is successful.
a. Click Query. A message is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
b. In the forced switching mode, ensure that Working Channel Status and the
Protection Channel Status are Normal. In addition, Switching Status is Force to
Working Channel.
c. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Verify that the services are
normal. To be specific, verify that no new abnormal alarms or performance events
occur, which indicating that the switching is successful.
6. Clear the forced switching.
a. Select the desired protection group and choose Function > Clear in the lower right
part of the page.
b. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.

8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2


Under Client 1+1 Protection

8.9.1 Example Description


This topic describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service under client 1+1 protection on a
point-to-point (P2P) network.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 328


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Service Requirements
On the network shown in Figure 8-7, stations A and B (both are OTM stations) form a P2P
network. The service requirements are as follows:
l User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is
configured between stations A and B.
l One 10GE LAN service is added and dropped to/from User1 and User2 each.
l Client 1+1 protection is configured.

Figure 8-7 Service configuration networking diagram

NMS

User1 A B User2

NE(9-811) NE(9-812)

2-TN53TDX 4-TN52ND2 4-TN52ND2 2-TN53TDX


OLP OLP
3-TN53TDX 5-TN52ND2 5-TN52ND2 3-TN53TDX

OTM

Board Configuration Information


Two TN53TDX and TN52ND2 boards are configured at stations A and B each.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 329


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Signal flow

Figure 8-8 Station signal flow


A

OLP TDX ND2

RX1/TX1 ODU2:1-OCH:1 IN1/OUT1

TO1/RI1
RX2/TX2 ODU2:1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2

TI/RO
RX1/TX1 ODU2:1-OCH:1 IN1/OUT1
TO2/RI2
RX2/TX2 ODU2:1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2

TDX ND2

NE(9-811)

ND2 TDX OLP

IN1/OUT1 OCH:1-ODU2:1 RX1/TX1

TO1/RI1

IN2/OUT2 OCH:1-ODU2:1 RX2/TX2


TI/RO
IN1/OUT1 OCH:1-ODU2:1 RX1/TX1

TO2/RI2
IN2/OUT2 OCH:1-ODU2:1
RX2/TX2

ND2 TDX

NE(9-812)

:Working service traffic


:Client-side service

:Protection service traffic

8.9.2 Service Configuration Process


This topic uses 10GE LAN services as an example to describe how to configure client 1+1
protection services in E2E cross-layer mode. To be specific, this topic describes how to create
client 1+1 10GE LAN services on the OCh server-layer link.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l Inter- and intra-station physical and logical fiber connections have been correctly
created.
l OCh trails have been searched out or created.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 330


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure (Text Description, Unfold It to View Detailed Information)


1. Configure client 1+1 protection at station A.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Port
Protection.
b. In Port Protection, click Create to display the Confirm dialog box. Then, click
OK to display the Create Protection Group dialog box. Set the protection-related
parameters.

c. Click OK. In the Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The created
protection group is displayed.
2. Configure client 1+1 protection at station B. For details, see 1.
3. Create a client trail.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 331


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

b. Set the following parameters in the Create WDM Trail window:


n Level: client
n Direction: bidirectional
n Rate: 10GE LAN

c. Configure the source port.


i. In the Physical Root pane on the right of the window, double-click optical
NE(9811). In the Select Board Port-Source window that is displayed,
select the OLP board as the service receiving board.

ii. Select the service receiving port and channel and click OK.
d. Configure the sink port. For details, see 3.c.
e. Select Auto-Calculation. In Server Layer Route Details, verify that Source and
Sink of the trail are the same as planned. On the Port Attributes Settings tab,
configure the FEC type of the upstream and downstream boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 332


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

f. Click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was
successful. Click Close.

Result
To view the created trail, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the
main menu. In the Manage WDM Trail window that is displayed, set the criteria to search
for the new trail.

Follow-up Procedure
Perform forced switching after creating the protection.

1. Perform forced switching to switch services to the protection channel.


a. On the U2000, log in to station A. Select a desired protection group and choose
Function > Force to Protection Channel in the lower right part of the page.
b. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
2. Verify that the switching is successful.
a. Click QueryChoose Query > Query All in the lower right part of the page. A
prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
b. In the forced switching mode, ensure that Working Channel Status and the
Protection Channel Status are Normal. In addition, Switching Status is Force to
Protection Channel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 333


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

NOTE

For bidirectional switching, check the status at both ends.


c. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Ensure that the services
are normal. If services are normal, no new abnormal alarms or performance events
are present. The switching is successful.
3. Clear the forced switching.
a. Select the desired protection group and choose Function > Clear in the lower right
part of the page.
b. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
4. Perform forced switching to switch services to the working channel.
a. On the U2000, log in to station A. Select a desired protection group and choose
Function > Force to Working Channel in the lower right part of the page.
b. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful, click Yes in the displayed dialog box.
5. Verify that the switching is successful.
a. Click QueryChoose Query > Query All in the lower right part of the page. A
prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
b. In the forced switching mode, ensure that Working Channel Status and the
Protection Channel Status are Normal. In addition, Switching Status is Force to
Working Channel.
NOTE

For bidirectional switching, check the status at both ends.


c. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Ensure that the services
are normal. If services are normal, no new abnormal alarms or performance events
are present. The switching is successful.
6. Clear the forced switching.
a. Select the desired protection group and choose Function > Clear in the lower right
part of the page.
b. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.

8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure WDM trails.

Parameters Value Description

Level OCh, ODU0, ODU1, Specifies the level of a trail.


ODU2, ODU3, ODU4, Click Rate (WDM Trail Creation) for
ODUflex, Client more information.

Rate For example: GE Selects the service type.


Click Level (WDM Trail Creation) for
more information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 334


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Parameters Value Description

Direction Bidirectional, Selects the service direction.


Unidirectional Click Direction (WDM Trail Creation)
for more information.

SPC First Checked, Unchecked When checked, you can create ASON-
WDM trail, if the trail passes through
the ASON domain.

Source For example: NE6- Selects the source of the route.


shelf0-21-52TOM-3(R Click Source (WDM Trail Creation) for
X1/TX1)-1 more information.

Sink For example: NE7- Selects the sink of the route.


shelf0-21-52TOM-3(R Click Sink (WDM Trail Creation) for
X1/TX1)-1 more information.

Trail Explicit - Specifies the explicit server link for the


Setting Link trail to be created.
Click Explicit Link for more
information.

Explicit For example: NE7 Specifies the explicit NE for the trail to
Node be created.
Click Explicit Node for more
information.

Excluded For example: NE7 Indicates the excluded node of the trail.
Node Click Excluded Node for more
information.

Platinum - Indicates the reference trail selected


Service when the platinum service of the trail is
Group created.

Route Source-Sink-Channel Indicates the calculation result of


Constraint Occupied-Working/ available trails.
Protection

Auto- Checked, Unchecked Calculates routes automatically when


Calculatio you select this parameter.
n Click Auto-Calculation for more
information.

Protectio Node list Dual-Fed Point To set or cancel the dual-fed point,
n Setting right-click the NE on the topology and
select Set Dual-Feed Point or Cancel
Dual-Feed Point from the shortcut
menu.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 335


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Parameters Value Description

Selective-Receiving To set or cancel the selective-receiving


Point point, right-click the NE on the
topology and select Set Selective-
Receiving Point or Cancel Selective-
Receiving Point from the shortcut
menu.

SNCP Parameter of Specifies the SNCP parameter of the


Dual Fed Point dual fed point.

SNCP Parameter of Specifies the SNCP parameter of the


Selective Receiving selective receiving point.
Point

Set SNCP SNCP Type Specifies the SNCP type. For example,
Parameter SNC/N.

OTN Level Specifies the OTN level. For example,


TCM1.

Route Source-Sink-Channel Indicates the calculation result of


Informatio Occupied-Working/ available trail.
n Protection

General Name Source NE-sink NE- Indicates the name of a trail.


Attribute trail level-trail suffix
s
Order No Character string Specifies the order number of the trail.

Remarks Character string Adds the remarks.

ID For example: 1 Specifies the trail ID.

Specify Source For example: NE6 Indicates the source of the server layer
Route trail.
Channel
Sink For example: NE7 Indicates the sink of the server layer
trail.

Server Source-Sink-Trail Indicates the name of the server layer


Layer Level-Trail NO trail.
Trail
Name

Server For example: 5 Indicates the channel that the trail


Layer occupies.
Trail

Channel For example: 1 Sets the channel occupied by the trail.

Direction For example: Indicates the service direction.


Bidirectional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 336


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)

Parameters Value Description

Route Negative Working, Indicates the route description.


Descriptio Positive Working
n

NE List For example: NE1 Indicates the NE that the trail traverses.

Wavelengt For example: Indicates the operating wavelength.


h 1/1529.16/196.050

Select Source/ For example: NE6- Indicates the source/sink of a server


the Sink shelf0-21-52TOM-3(R trail.
included X1/TX1)-1
server
trail Level For example: OCh Indicates the level of the server trail.

Trail Source NE-Sink NE- Indicates the name of a server trail.


Name Trail Level-Trail Suffix

NE List For example: Indicates the NE that a server trail


NE6;NE7 passes through.

Route Positive, Negative Indicates the route information.


Descriptio
n

Wavelengt For example: Specifies the optical channel occupied


h 1\1560.61\192.100 by the trail.

Activate the trail Checked, Unchecked Applies trail configuration to the NE so


that the service takes effect on the NE.

Copy after Creation - Creates multiple trails whose share the


same routes but have different
channels.
Click Copy after Creation for more
information.

Set Optical Power - Switches to the Query Relevant


After Creation Optical Power window to view the
relevant optical power.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 337


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9 Configuring the SDH Services

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure the SDH services on the U2000 by providing an
example.

Context

NOTICE
l Two AUX boards are required for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 equipmemt configured with
SDH services.
l Disable the warm backup function when configuring SDH services.
l When MSP and SNCP are coupled, set the hold-off time to ensure that MSP switching
happens before SNCP switching. After SDH services have been configured, forbid the
start and stop of the MSP.

9.1 Basic Concepts


The following basic concepts help you understand and configure the relevant SDH services
correctly.
9.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection chain separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection chain.
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring
Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the
non-protection ring.
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services
In the case of the 1+1 linear multiplex section protection (MSP), services are transmitted on
the working path and protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 338


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

the working path in normal cases, and selects services from the protection path when the
working path becomes faulty.
9.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services
In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP, services are transmitted on the working path and the sink
NE receives the services from the working path in normal cases. When the working path
becomes faulty, the services are switched to the protection path for transmission and the sink
NE receives the services from the protection path.
9.6 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service, you need respectively create the MSP
subnet protection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the creation sequence.
9.7 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services
The four-fiber bidirectional MSP services can provide network level protection for the
services on NEs on the MSP ring. On the U2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring
into the protection subnet to create a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
9.8 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring
The transoceanic MS provides path protection for the higher order services on a transoceanic
ring network by using the transoceanic protocol.
9.9 Configuring the SNCP Ring Services
When compared to the MSP ring service, the SNCP service has the special physical path as
the protection path. In addition, the SNCP service is dually fed and selectively received. In
SNCP service configuration, you need not to respectively create the protection subnet and
service. For service configuration, however, you need to respectively configure the working
service and protection service.
9.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain
To configure the services on the SNCP ring, you can directly configure the working service
and protection service, without first configuring the protection subnet. To configure the
services on the non-protection chain, you need to configure the services after the protection
subnet is created.
9.11 Configuring Service on the MSP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet for the MSP, protection subnet for the non-protection chain,
and services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain separately. It is recommended that
you configure the protection subnets before configuring the services on the MSP ring with a
non-protection ring chain.
9.12 Configuring the MSP Tangent Ring Services
On the MSP tangent node, the service timeslot utilization in two rings is high. As the MSP
tangent ring is economic and practical, it is widely used for the SDH networking. For the
networking of the MSP tangent ring, you need to connect two physical ring networks by one
NE. This NE is called the tangent NE for two ring networks. With respect to service
configuration, the MSP tangent ring has no great difference from the MSP tangent ring of the
single ring network. You need configure a bidirectional path service on the tangent node
where the service enters the sink ring network from the source ring network.
9.13 Configuring the MSP Intersecting Ring Services
The service configuration of the MSP intersecting ring is complicated, but the inter-ring
service has low capacity and perfect protection mechanism. Both the MSP intersecting ring
and MSP tangent ring can protect the service when one fiber is cut in the local MSP ring. But
only the MSP intersecting ring can protect the service when one intersecting node is faulty.
Therefore, the MSP intersecting ring is applicable to the scenario where the service on the
single intersecting node must be protected.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 339


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.14 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services


With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent
ring. It can protect the service in two SNCP rings when one fiber is cut in one single SNCP
ring. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the tangent
node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with four
pairs of protection groups.
9.15 Configuring the SNCP Intersecting Ring Services
When compared to the SNCP tangent ring, the SNCP intersecting ring has the complicated
service configuration method, but has perfect protection mechanism. Both the SNCP
intersecting ring and SNCP tangent ring can protect the service when one fiber is cut in the
local SNCP ring. But only the SNCP intersecting ring can protect the service when one
intersecting node is faulty. Therefore, the SNCP intersecting ring is applicable to the scenario
where the service on the single intersecting node must be protected.
9.16 Configuring the Services on Two Tangent SNCP and MSP Rings
The topology of two tangent SNCP and MSP rings is similar to the topology of two tangent
MSP rings and the topology of two tangent SNCP rings. This topic focuses on the
configuration of the SDH services on the tangent NE.
9.17 Configuring the Services on Two Intersecting SNCP and MSP Rings
The topology of two intersecting SNCP and MSP rings is similar to the topology of two
intersecting MSP rings and the topology of two intersecting SNCP rings. This topic focuses
on the configuration of the SDH services on the intersecting NEs.
9.18 Configuration Task Collection
This section describes basic operations involved in SDH service configuration, such as
configuring SDH cross-connections, configuring the protection subnet, configuring path
overhead for SDH services and so on.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 340


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.1 Basic Concepts


The following basic concepts help you understand and configure the relevant SDH services
correctly.

Unidirectional Service
The unidirectional service indicates the service that is received and transmitted through
different routing. A unidirectional service created between NE A and NE B can only be
transmitted from NE A (source) to NE B (sink) or only be transmitted from NE B (sink) to
NE A (source).

Bidirectional Service
The bidirectional service indicates the service that is received and transmitted through the
same routing. For a bidirectional service created between NE A and NE B, the service can be
transmitted and received from NE A to NE B or from NE B to NE A.

MSP
The multiplex section protection (MSP) provides a function that switches the signals from the
working section to the protection section.

Shared MSP Ring


As an SDH ring structure, the shared MSP protection ring provides the working and
protection paths for each node in the ring network. When the service in the working path is
abnormal or interrupted, the service is automatically switched to the protection path for
further transmission. In this case, the service loss can be avoided.

Two-Fiber Shared MSP Ring


To form a two-fiber shared MSP ring, you should use two fibers. In each fiber, one half of
channels are used as working timeslots, and the other half of channels are used as protection
timeslots. For example, in the case of an STM-16 service, VC-4s numbered 1 to 8 are used as
working timeslots and VC-4s numbered 9 to 16 are used as protection timeslots. When VC-4s
numbered 1 to 8 is abnormal or faulty, the service is switched to the corresponding protection
timeslots 9 to 16 for further transmission.

SNCP Principle
The sub-network connection protection (SNCP) is defined by the ITU-T Recommendations.
With 1+1 single-ended switching function, the SNCP is used for services that travel in
different subnets. The SNCP is characterized by the dual-fed and selective-receiving mode.

Tangent Rings
The tangent ring indicates an SDH network topology where two ring networks are connected
by a public NE and all inter-ring services must pass through the tangent point for
transmission. If the tangent NE is faulty, the inter-ring services are interrupted. Thus, the
tangent NE is very important for the entire network.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 341


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Intersecting Rings
The intersecting ring indicates two ring networks that are connected by two public node NEs
to implement an intra-ring connection. The inter-ring services are simultaneously transmitted
and received over two intersecting NEs. The inter-ring services are simultaneously
transmitted and received over two intersecting NEs. If one intersecting NE is faulty, services
are not affected. Thus, the protection capability of the intersecting ring topology is much
stronger than the protection capability of the tangent ring topology.

Principles for Generating SNCP Services


The SNCP service features the dual-fed and selective receiving mode. If the dual-fed SNCP
service is configured, both the dual-fed service and the selective receiving service can be
automatically created on the U2000. If the unidirectional SNCP service is configured, only the
selective receiving service can be automatically configured on the U2000.

9.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain


Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection chain separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection chain.

9.2.1 Networking Diagram


Configure a non-protection chain if protection is not required for services on the chain. All the
timeslots on a non-protection chain can be used are transmitting services.

Figure 9-1 shows a point-to-point non-protection chain. In this example, NE1 and NE2 use
SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Figure 9-1 Networking diagram of a non-protection chain


NE 1 NE 2

7
7

Line board 2-SL64 Line board 2-SL64


Line board 7-SL64 Line board 7-SL64

9.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure services on the non-protection chain, you need to plan the traffic direction and
timeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection chain.

Figure 9-2 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one VC-4 service is
added to or dropped from NE1 and NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 342


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-2 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of services on a non-protection chain


1VC4 1VC4
7 7
VC4: VC4-1
NE1 NE2
Line board Line board Line board Line board
2-SL64 7-SL64 2-SL64 7-SL64

Traffic direction of the


non-protection chain

9.2.3 Configuration Process


Service configuration on a non-protection chain is not related to the configuration of the
protection subnet. The main task for configuring services on an existing protection subnet is
to configure the SDH services for the source and sink NEs.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-
Protection Chain.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services for the source NE (NE1).
1. Select NE1 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and


l received on the same path. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ack)-2- used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 343


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE2, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE1 is
ack)-7- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Range(e.g. and NE2, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
1,3-6) Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services for the sink NE (NE2) by referring to Step 1.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received


on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is used
ck)-2- as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and
Range(e.g.1,3-6) NE2, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE1 is used
ck)-7- as the sink line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and
Range(e.g.1,3-6) NE2, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 344


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Step 3 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring


Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring services on the
non-protection ring.

9.3.1 Networking Diagram


You can configure a non-protection ring if the services on the ring do not need to be protected.
In this case, all the timeslots on the ring can carry services.

Figure 9-3 shows a non-protection ring consisting of four NEs. In this example, all NEs on
the ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Figure 9-3 Networking diagram of a non-protection ring


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

8
NE1 12

12 8
Two-fiber bidirectional
NE2 NE4
non-protection ring
8
12
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64 NE3
12 8

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure services on the non-protection ring, you need to plan the traffic direction and
timeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection ring.

Figure 9-4 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one VC-4 service is
added to or dropped from NE1 and NE3, and the service passes through NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 345


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-4 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the non-protection ring
NE1:
1VC4
Line board Line board
2-SL64 8-SL64

VC4:VC4-1

8
NE2: NE1
Line board Line board
8-SL64 12-SL64 12

VC4:VC4-1
NE4
Pass-through service NE2 Non-protection ring

12 NE3

VC4:VC4-1

NE3:

1VC4 Line board Line board


2-SL64 12-SL64

Traffic direction

9.3.3 Configuration Process


Service configuration on a non-protection ring is not related to the configuration of the
protection subnet. The main task for configuring services on an existing protection subnet is
to configure SDH services for the source and sink NEs and pass-through services for
intermediate NEs.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 9.18.2.2 Configuring a Non-
Protection Ring.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services for the source NE (NE1).
1. Select NE1 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 346


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE3, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1 is
ck)-8- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE3, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services for the sink NE (NE3) by referring to Step 1.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3 is used
ck)-2- as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 347


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and


Timeslot NE3, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE3 is used
ck)-12- as the sink line board. Therefore, set this parameter to 12-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and
Range(e.g. NE3, and the service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
1,3-6) set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services for NE2.


1. Select NE2 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is
ck)-12- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE3, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 348


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE3, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.
----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services


In the case of the 1+1 linear multiplex section protection (MSP), services are transmitted on
the working path and protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from
the working path in normal cases, and selects services from the protection path when the
working path becomes faulty.

9.4.1 Networking Diagram


The networking diagram for the point-to-point 1+1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs
are connected to two pairs of optical fibers.
Figure 9-5 shows the networking diagram for 1+1 linear MSP services. In this example, NE1
and NE2 use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Figure 9-5 Networking diagram for 1+1 linear MSP services


12 12

8 8
NE2 NE1
Line board 2-SL64 Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64 Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64 Line board 12-SL64

9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure the 1+1 linear MSP service, you can configure the service added to the source
NE and dropped from the sink NE if the 1+1 linear MSP is already created.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 349


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

As shown in Figure 9-6, the signal flow and timeslot allocation are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and are transmitted from the working path
and protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE
(NE2), which selects the services from the working path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and are transmitted on the working path and
protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE1),
which selects the services from the working path.
l Services between NE1 and NE2 use the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2. The service capacity is one VC-4.
When the working path from NE1 to NE2 becomes faulty, in the case of single-ended
switching, the signal flow is as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and are transmitted on the working path and
protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE2),
which selects the services from the protection path.
l The services from NE2 to NE1 are not affected, and the traffic direction is NE2NE1.
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and are transmitted on the working path and
protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE1),
which selects the services from the working path.
When the working path from NE1 to NE2 becomes faulty, in the case of dual-ended
switching, the traffic flow is as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and are transmitted on the working path and
protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE2),
which selects the services from the protection path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2NE1
Services are added from the source NE (NE2) and are transmitted on the working path
and protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE
(NE1), which selects the services from the protection path.

Figure 9-6 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1+1 linear MSP service

12 12
VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

1xVC4 1xVC4

8 8
NE2: NE1:
Line Line Line Line Line Line
board board board board board board
2-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64

Traffic direction of
the working path
Traffic direction of
the protection path

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 350


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.4.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the 1+1 linear MSP service.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 9.18.2.4 Creating a Linear MS
Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services on the source NE (NE1).
1. Select NE1 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source board of bidirectional services from
SL64-1(SD NE1 to NE2. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
H-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE2, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE1 is
ck)-12- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1


Timeslot and NE2, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 351


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services for the sink NE (NE2).

Click , and select NE2 from the displayed NE Navigator. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is used
ck)-12- as the source line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and


Timeslot NE2, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE2 is used
ck)-2- as the sink board of bidirectional services from NE1 to
SL64-1(SDH NE2. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE1 and
Range(e.g. NE2, and the service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
1,3-6) set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.
----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 352


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services


In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP, services are transmitted on the working path and the sink
NE receives the services from the working path in normal cases. When the working path
becomes faulty, the services are switched to the protection path for transmission and the sink
NE receives the services from the protection path.

9.5.1 Networking Diagram


The networking diagram of the point-to-point 1:1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs are
connected to two pairs of optical fibers.
Figure 9-7 shows the networking diagram for 1:1 MSP services. In this example, NE1 and
NE2 use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Figure 9-7 Networking diagram for 1:1 linear MSP services


12 12

8 8
NE2 NE1
Line board 2-SL64 Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64 Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64 Line board 12-SL64

9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure the 1:1 linear MSP service, you can configure the service added to the source
NE and dropped from the sink NE if the 1:1 linear MSP is already created.
As shown in Figure 9-8, the signal flow and timeslot allocation are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then are dropped from the sink NE
(NE2). The services are transmitted on the working path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then are dropped from the sink NE
(NE1). The services are transmitted on the working path.
l Services between NE1 and NE2 use the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2. The service capacity is one VC-4.
When the working path between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, the signal flow is as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then are dropped from the sink NE
(NE2). The services are transmitted on the protection path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then are dropped from the sink NE
(NE1). The services are transmitted on the protection path.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 353


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

The difference between the 1:1 linear MSP service and the 1+1 linear MSP service is as
follows:
l In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP service, services are transmitted on the working path
and protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from the working
path.
l In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP service, services are transmitted only on the working
path. Services are switched to the protection path for transmission only when the
working path becomes faulty.

Figure 9-8 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1:1 linear MSP service

12 12
VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

1xVC4 1xVC4

8 8
NE2: NE1:
Line Line Line Line Line Line
board board board board board board
2-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64

Traffic direction of
the working path
Traffic direction of
the protection path

9.5.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the services in the 1:1 linear MSP.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 9.18.2.4 Creating a Linear MS
Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 At NE1, configure SDH services on the source NE.
1. Select NE1 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 354


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE1 is
ck)-12- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 At NE2, configure SDH services on the sink NE.

Click , and select NE2 from the displayed NE Navigator. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is used
ck)-12- as the source line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 355


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE2 is used
ck)-2- as the sink line board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service
Range(e.g. sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
1,3-6) 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.6 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring


Services
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service, you need respectively create the MSP
subnet protection and MSP services. There is no requirement for the creation sequence.

9.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


For the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring in a single ring network, the configuration
networking diagram is relative simple. In the network construction, you should create and
name NEs in sequence according to the certain direction, which helps you facilitate the
planning of the service flow and service configuration.
Figure 9-9 shows a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring consisting of four NEs. All NEs on the
ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 356


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-9 Networking of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

8 12
NE1

12 8
MSP Ring
NE2 NE4
8 12

Line board 8-SL64 NE3 Line board 8-SL64


Line board 12-SL64 12 8 Line board 12-SL64

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

9.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


When the MSP subnet is created, you can configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service
that enters the ring network directly from the source NE, passes through the intermediate node
and then is dropped on the sink NE. For the ring network service, there is more than one route
from the source NE to the sink NE. In actual application scenarios, not all routes need to be
configured. Therefore, you should properly plan and configure the service direction and
timeslots before the configuration.
Figure 9-10 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one VC-4 service
is added to the ring from NE1 and dropped from NE3, and the service passes through NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 357


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-10 Signal flow and timeslot allocation


1xVC4 NE1:
Line board Line board
2-SL64 8-SL64
VC4:VC4-1

8 12
NE1
NE2:
Line board Line board
8-SL64 12-SL64 12
VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through NE2 MSP Ring NE4

12 NE3 8

NE3:
Line board Line board

1xVC4 2-SL64 12-SL64

service route

9.6.3 Configuration Process


The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service is independent of creation of its
MSP protection subnet. In the case that the protection subnet is created, you need to
respectively configure SDH services from the tributary board to the line board on the source
NE and the destination NE, and configure the pass-through service on the intermediate NE.

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l A protection subnet must be created and be consistent with the actual topology. For
details about how to create a protection subnet, see 9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH service on NE1 (source NE).
1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 358


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services for the sink NE (NE3) by referring to Step 1.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE3 is used
ck)-12- as the source board.
SL64-1(SDH
-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 359


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3 is used
ck)-2- as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service
Range(e.g. sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
1,3-6) 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.


1. Select NE2 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is
ck)-12- used as the source board.
SL64-1(SD
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 360


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.7 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services


The four-fiber bidirectional MSP services can provide network level protection for the
services on NEs on the MSP ring. On the U2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring
into the protection subnet to create a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

9.7.1 Networking Diagram


The networking diagram of a single four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name these NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps when you plan the traffic direction and service
configuration in future.
Figure 9-11 shows a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. All NEs on the ring use SL64 boards
for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 361


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-11 Networking diagram of a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 7-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64
8 12

7 13
NE1
12 8
13 7
Four-fiber
NE2 bidirectional MSP ring NE4

8 7 13
12

Line board NE3 Line board


7-SL64 7 7-SL64
13
Line board 8-SL64 Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64 Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64 12 8 Line board 13-SL64
Line board 2-SL64
Line board 7-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

9.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service, configure the service added to the ring
network on the source NE, passing through the intermediate nodes, and dropped from the sink
NE if the MSP protection subnet is already created.
As shown in Figure 9-12, the signal flow and timeslot allocation are as follows:
l Traffic direction of the bidirectional services from NE1 to NE3: NE1NE2NE3
l One VC-4 service is added to or dropped from NE1 and NE3.
l The services pass through NE2.
l The forward working service and the forward protection service are in opposite
directions.
l The backward working service and the backward protection service are in opposite
directions.
When the transmission path between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, the signal flow and
timeslot allocation are as follows:
l Traffic direction of the bidirectional services from NE1 to NE3: NE1NE4NE3
NE2NE3
l If the services need to be transmitted from NE1 to NE3, the services are firstly added to
the ring on the source NE (NE1). The services are switched from the original working
path to the protection path for transmission, and pass through NE4 and NE3. The
services are switched at NE2 from the protection path to the working path. Finally, the
services are dropped from the sink NE (NE3).
l If the services need to be transmitted from NE3 to NE1, the services undergo a reverse
process. The services are firstly added to the ring at the source NE (NE3) and transmitted
over the working path to NE2. The services are switched on NE2 from the working path

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 362


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

to the protection path for transmission. Then, the services pass through NE3 and NE4
and finally are dropped from NE1.

The comparison between the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service and the two-fiber
bidirectional MSP service is as follows:
l The four-fiber bidirectional MSP service and the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service use
the uniform route.
l In the case of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service, different optical fibers are used
for the working timeslot and protection timeslot. That is, one optical fiber is used for
carrying the working service, and the other optical fiber is used for protection. In the
case of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service, the same optical fiber is used for the
working timeslot and protection timeslot. That is, a certain capacity of the optical fiber is
used for carrying the working service, and a certain capacity of the optical fiber is used
for protection.

Figure 9-12 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service

1xVC4 NE1:
Line board Line board
2-SL64 8-SL64

VC4:VC4-1 8

NE2:
NE1
Line board Line board
8-SL64 12-SL64 12

VC4:VC4-1
Services pass NE2 Four-fiber NE4
through bidirectional MSP ring
8

NE3
Traffic direction of the
forward working path
Traffic direction of the
backward working path
12
Traffic direction of the
forward protection path VC4:VC4-1 NE3:
Traffic direction of the Line board Line board
backward protection path 1xVC4
2-SL64 12-SL64

9.7.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 363


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l A protection subnet must be created and be consistent with the actual topology. For
details about how to create a protection subnet, see 9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 At NE1, configure SDH services on the source NE.
1. Select NE1 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1 is
ck)-8- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

Click , and select NE2 from the displayed NE Navigator. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 364


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is used
ck)-12- as the source line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is used
ck)-8- as the sink line board. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service
Range(e.g. sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
1,3-6) 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 At NE3, configure SDH services on the sink NE.

Click , and select NE3 from the displayed NE Navigator. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE3 is used
ck)-12- as the source line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 365


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3 is used
ck)-2- as the sink line board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required and the service sink
Range(e.g. uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.8 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring


The transoceanic MS provides path protection for the higher order services on a transoceanic
ring network by using the transoceanic protocol.

9.8.1 Networking Diagram


A transoceanic MSP ring can be a two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring or four-
fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring
network, the ring switching is performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two
neighboring nodes of the faulty point. This prevents the services from traveling across the
ocean repeatedly after the switching and therefore prevents the transmission delay of a long-
distance transmission network such as the submarine cable system from increasing. The
switching time ranges from 0 ms to 300 ms.
Figure 9-13 shows a transoceanic MSP ring. All NEs on the ring use SL64 boards for
transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 366


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-13 Networking diagram of a transoceanic MSP ring


Line board 1-SL64
Line board 17-SL64
Line board 18-SL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
NE2 Transoceanic MSP ring NE4
17 1
Line board 1-SL64 Line board 1-SL64
NE3
Line board 17-SL64 18 17 Line board 17-SL64

Line board 1-SL64


Line board 17-SL64
Line board 18-SL64

9.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The transoceanic protocol is developed based on the normal MSP protocol. Compared with
the switching operations on the normal MS, certain switching operations are added on all the
nodes of the transoceanic MS. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring network, the
switching is performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two neighboring nodes of
the faulty point. This prevents the services from traveling across the ocean repeatedly after the
switching and therefore prevents the transmission delay of a long-distance transmission
network such as the submarine cable system from being increased.
Figure 9-14 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one VC-4 service
is added to the ring from NE1 and dropped from the sink NE (NE3), and the service passes
through NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 367


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-14 Signal flow and timeslot allocation


NE1: 1VC4
Line board Line board Line board
1-SL64 17-SL64 18-SL64
VC4:VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1
Line board Line board
1-SL64 17-SL64 1
VC4:VC4-1
Services pass through NE2 Transoceanic MSP ring NE4

17

18 NE3 17

NE3:
Line board Line board Line board
1-SL64 17-SL64 18-SL64
1VC4
Traffic direction

If a fault occurs on the section between NE1 and NE2, protection switching occurs on the
original source NE (NE1) and sink NE (NE3). This prevents the path loopback and shortens
the service transmission distance. Figure 9-15 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation
after the switching.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 368


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-15 Signal flow and timeslot allocation after the switching
NE1:
1VC4
Line board Line board Line board
1-SL64 17-SL64 18-SL64
VC4:VC4-1

17 18
NE1

VC4:VC4-1
Service 1
NE2: pass-through
Line board Line board
NE2 Transoceanic MSP ring NE4
1-SL64 17-SL64
17

18 NE3 17

NE3:
Line board Line board Line board
1-SL64 17-SL64 18-SL64
1VC4 Traffic direction

NOTE
When the transoceanic MS is in the switched state, the extra services on the protection paths that are not
preempted by the working services during the switching are restored one minute after the switching is
performed.

9.8.3 Configuration Process


The procedure for configuring a transoceanic MS is similar to the procedure for configuring a
normal MS. In the case of a transoceanic MS, however, the service table needs to be
established, which takes some time. Hence, you need to configure the services before
configuring the transoceanic MS on the entire ring. It is recommended that you do not enable
or disable the transoceanic protocol manually. The transoceanic MS should enter the normal
state automatically.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l A protection subnet must be created and be consistent with the actual topology. For
details about how to create a protection subnet, see 9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 369


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Precautions
All nodes on a transoceanic MSP ring must use the transoceanic protocol. Otherwise,
protection switching fails to work properly.
Transoceanic MSs do not support lower order services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services for the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and set required parameters in the Create SDH
Service dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, service are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 1 of NE1 is
ck)-1- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 1-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 17 of NE1 is
ck)-17- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 17-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services for the sink NE (NE3) by referring to Step 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 370


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, service are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 18 of NE3 is used
ck)-18- as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter to 18-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 1 of NE3 is used
ck)-1- as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to 1-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service
Range(e.g. sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
1,3-6) 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure the pass-through services for NE2.


1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and set required parameters in the Create SDH
Service dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, service are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 1 of NE2 is
ck)-1- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 1-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 371


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 17 of NE2 is
ck)-17- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 17-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.9 Configuring the SNCP Ring Services


When compared to the MSP ring service, the SNCP service has the special physical path as
the protection path. In addition, the SNCP service is dually fed and selectively received. In
SNCP service configuration, you need not to respectively create the protection subnet and
service. For service configuration, however, you need to respectively configure the working
service and protection service.

9.9.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


The creation of the SNCP ring network is similar to the MSP ring network. For example, both
two topologies are based on two fibers and their services must pass through the intermediate
node for transmission from the source NE to the sink NE. The difference is that the SNCP
protection and SNCP service can be created on the U2000 at a time.

Figure 9-16 shows an SNCP ring consisting of four NEs. All NEs on the ring use SL64
boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 372


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-16 Networking diagram of an SNCP


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

8 12
NE1

12 8
NE2 SNCP Ring NE4
8 12

Line board 8-SL64 NE3 Line board 8-SL64


Line board 12-SL64 12 8 Line board 12-SL64

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64

9.9.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


Similar to the MSP ring service , when multiple service routes are available from the source
NE to the sink NE, the SNCP ring service needs to be configured with the direction of the
service flow in advance. In addition, when allocating timeslots of the SNCP ring service, you
should respectively configure the working service source timeslot and the protection service
source timeslot.
Figure 9-17 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. In the practical
configuration, you can plan the working path and protection path according to requirements.
The service capacity is one VC-4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 373


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-17 Signal flow and timeslot allocation


NE1:
1xVC4
SNCP protection group Working board Protection board Sink board
Group1 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SL64
VC4:VC4-1
VC4:VC4-1

8 12
NE1 NE2 NE4:
SDH service Working board Working board
VC4 8-SL64 12-SL64
12 8
VC4:VC4-1
SNCP VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through NE2 Ring NE4 Service pass-through

8 12

12 NE3 8

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1
NE3:
SNCP protection group Working board Protection board Sink board
1xVC4 Group1 12-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64

Working service route

Protection service route

9.9.3 Configuration Process


Both the configuration of SNCP ring services and protection are created on the U2000. To
configure the SNCP services on the source NE and sink NE, you need to determine the source
boards and timeslots for the working service and protection service. In addition, you need to
configure the pass-through service on the intermediate node.

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH service on NE1 (source NE).
1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window to set required
parameters in the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 374


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that


is in the switching state releases the switching
and services are switched back to the original
working path some time after the original
working path is restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit
direction need to be created. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to


Time(100ms) the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is
valid only when Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1
king rack)-8- is used as the source board of the working
Ser SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
vice DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timesolt service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1
rack)-2- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(S parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink Timesolt 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
1,3-6) this parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of
ecti rack)-12- NE1 is used as the source board of the protection
on SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 12-
Ser DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).
vice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timesolt service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 375


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH service on the sink NE (NE3). See Step 1 to configure the SDH service
on NE3.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is


in the switching state releases the switching and
services are switched back to the original working
path some time after the original working path is
restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit direction
need to be created. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Hold-Off 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to the


Time(100ms) default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is valid
only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE3 is
king ack)-12- used as the source board of the working service.
Serv SL64-1(SD Therefore, set this parameter to 12-
ice H-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timesolt service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3 is
ack)-2- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 376


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Sink Timesolt 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
1,3-6) parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3 is
ectio ack)-8- used as the source board of the protection service.
n SL64-1(SD Therefore, set this parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
Serv H-1)
ice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timesolt service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Immediately Yes -

Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.


1. Select NE2 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE2 is
ck)-12- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timesolt source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 377


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timesolt sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure the pass-through service on NE4. See Step 3 to configure the SDH service on NE4.
The configuration method and parameter setting are the same as those of NE2.
Step 5 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-


Protection Chain
To configure the services on the SNCP ring, you can directly configure the working service
and protection service, without first configuring the protection subnet. To configure the
services on the non-protection chain, you need to configure the services after the protection
subnet is created.

9.10.1 Networking Diagram


The networking of the SNCP ring in the case of configuring the services on the SNCP ring
with a non-protection chain is similar to the networking in the case of configuring the services
on the SNCP ring. The services from the SNCP ring to the non-protection chain pass through
the intersecting node and are added to or dropped from the NE on the non-protection chain.
Figure 9-18 shows an SNCP ring with a non-protection chain. This ring consists of five NEs
and all NEs on the ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 378


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-18 Networking diagram of an SNCP ring with a non-protection chain


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

NE5
8 13 Line board 2-SL64
NE1
Line board 12-SL64
13 8 Non-protection NE5
SNCP ring chain
NE2 NE4
8 13
12 12
Line board 8-SL64 NE3 NE4
Line board 13-SL64 13 8 Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

9.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, you should plan a proper
traffic direction for the services on the SNCP ring and on the non-protection chain. In the case
of the services on the SNCP ring, allocate timeslots for the source slot of the working service
and timeslots for the source slot of the protection service when allocating timeslots for source
slots.
Figure 9-19 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. One VC-4 service is transmitted
between NE3 and NE5.
In the case of the services on the SNCP ring, the traffic direction in this example is configured
as follows:
l Traffic direction of the working service from NE3 to NE4: NE3NE4
Traffic direction of the protection service from NE3 to NE4: NE3NE2NE1NE4
l Traffic direction of the working service from NE4 to NE3: NE4NE1NE2NE3
Traffic direction of the protection service from NE4 to NE3: NE4NE3
In the actual configuration, you can plan other proper working paths and protection paths
according to the requirement.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 379


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-19 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the SNCP ring with a non-
protection chain
NE1: VC4:VC4-1 Services pass through
SDH Service Service
service source sink
VC4 13-SL64 8-SL64
NE4:
SNCP Working Protection Service
13 protection service service
NE2: VC4:VC4-1 Services pass through 8 group sink
NE1 source source
SDH Service Service Protection 13-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64
service source sink group 1
VC4 13-SL64 8-SL64 13 8 VC4:VC4-1


NE2 SNCP ring NE4 1VC4
12 12
Non-protection
8 13 NE5
chain
VC4:VC4-1
SDH Service Service
service source sink
13 NE3 8
VC4 12-SL64 2-SL64

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1
NE3: Traffic direction of the
working service
SNCP Working Protection Traffic direction of the
protection Service
service service protection service
group source source sink
1VC4 Traffic direction of services on
Protection 13-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64 the the non-protection chain
group 1

9.10.3 Configuration Process


Before you configure the services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, familiarize
yourself with the information about the source slot, sink slot, and their corresponding
timeslots of the working service and protection service on the source and sink NEs on the
SNCP ring. In the case of the intersecting NE, you need to configure pass-through services.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l A protection subnet must be created and be consistent with the actual topology. For
details about how to create a protection subnet, see 9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-
Protection Chain.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services on the source NE (NE3).
1. Select NE3 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service to display the Create SNCP Service dialog box. Set the
parameters that are required. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 380


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that


is in the switching state releases the switching
and services are switched back to the original
working path some time after the original
working path is restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit
direction need to be created. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to


(100ms) the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is
valid only when Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of
king rack)-13- NE3 is used as the source board of the working
Ser SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
vice DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between


Timeslot NE3 and NE5, and the service source uses the
Range(e.g. first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3
rack)-2- is used as the sink board of the working service.
SL64-1(S Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between


Range(e.g. NE3 and NE5, and the service sink uses the first
1,3-6) VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3
ecti rack)-8- is used as the source board of the protection
on SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
Ser DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).
vice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between
Timeslot NE3 and NE5, and the service source uses the
Range(e.g. first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 381


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH service on the sink NE (NE4).


1. Select NE4 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service to display the Create SNCP Service dialog box. Set the
parameters that are required. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that


is in the switching state releases the switching
and services are switched back to the original
working path some time after the original
working path is restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit
direction need to be created. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to


(100ms) the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is
valid only when Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of
king rack)-13- NE4 is used as the source board of the working
Ser SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
vice DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between


Timeslot NE3 and NE5, and the service source uses the
Range(e.g. first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 382


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


rack)-12- NE4 is used as the sink board of the working
SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 12-
DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between


Range(e.g. NE3 and NE5, and the service sink uses the first
1,3-6) VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE4
ecti rack)-8- is used as the source board of the protection
on SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
Ser DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).
vice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between
Timeslot NE3 and NE5, and the service source uses the
Range(e.g. first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.


1. Select NE2 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are
required. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


l

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE2 is
ck)-13- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 383


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure pass-through services on NE1. Refer to Step 3 and configure SDH services on
NE1. Use the same configuration method and set the parameters so that they can be consistent
with the set parameters of NE2.
Step 5 Configure services on the non-protection chain at NE5.
1. Select NE5 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are
required. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


l

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE5 is
ck)-2- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE5 is
ck)-12- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 384


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 6 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.11 Configuring Service on the MSP Ring with a Non-


Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet for the MSP, protection subnet for the non-protection chain,
and services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain separately. It is recommended that
you configure the protection subnets before configuring the services on the MSP ring with a
non-protection ring chain.

9.11.1 Networking Diagram


In the case of the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, the networking diagram of the MSP
ring is similar to the networking diagram of the single two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. The
only difference is that one line board needs to be configured on the intersecting NE when the
non-protection chain is added. This can realize the pass-through of the service when the
services must be transmitted out of the MSP ring.
Figure 9-20 shows a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection chain. This ring
consists of five NEs and all NEs on the ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 385


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-20 Networking diagram of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection
chain
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

NE5
8 13 Line board 2-SL64
NE1
Line board 12-SL64
13 8 Non-protection NE5
Two-fiber bidirectional NE4 chain
NE2
MSP ring
8 13
12 12
Line board 8-SL64 NE3 NE4
Line board 13-SL64 13 8 Line board 8-SL64
Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

9.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


To configure the service on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, you should plan a
proper traffic direction and a timeslot allocation scheme for the services on the MSP ring and
on the non-protection chain.
Figure 9-21 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one VC-4 service
is added to or dropped from NE3 and NE5, and the service passes through NE4.
On the MSP ring, the services from NE3 to NE4 in this example are transmitted over the short
path. In the actual configuration, you can plan other service paths according to the
requirement.

NOTE

On a ring network, the long path and short path are determined by the number of intermediate NEs
instead of by the geographical distance. In Figure 9-21, if the service is transmitted from NE3 to NE4,
NE3->NE4 is the short path, and NE3->NE2->NE1->NE4 is the long path.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 386


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-21 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the service on the MSP ring with a non-
protection chain

8 13
NE1 NE4:
Line board Line board
13-SL64 12-SL64
13 8

MSP ring 1VC4


NE2 NE4
12 12
Non-protection
8 13 NE5
chain
VC4:VC4-1
Line board Line board
NE3 12-SL64 2-SL64
13 8

VC4:VC4-1
NE3:
Line board Line board
8-SL64 2-SL64
1VC4 Traffic direction
of the MSP ring
Traffic direction of the
non-protection chain

9.11.3 Configuration Process


Configuration of the services on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection
chain is not related to the creation of the protection subnets for the MSP and for the non-
protection chain. To configure the services on the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a
non-protection chain, configure the SDH services on the source and sink NEs and configure
pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection subnet is already created.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l Protection subnets must be created and be consistent with the actual topology. For details
about how to create a protection subnet, see 9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-Protection
Chain and 9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure SDH services on the source NE (NE3).
1. Select NE3 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 387


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and


l received on the same path. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE3 is
ack)-2- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3 is
ack)-8- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Range(e.g. and NE5, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
1,3-6) Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure SDH services on the sink NE (NE5) by referring to Step 1.


Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received


on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE5 is used
ck)-2- as the source line board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SDH 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3 and
Range(e.g.1,3-6) NE5, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 388


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE5 is
ck)-12- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SDH parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3 and
Range(e.g.1,3-6) NE5, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE4.


1. Select NE4 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and


l received on the same path. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE4 is
ack)-13- used as the source line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Timeslot and NE5, and the service source uses the first VC-4.
Range(e.g. Therefore, set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE4 is
ack)-12- used as the sink line board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required between NE3


Range(e.g. and NE5, and the service sink uses the first VC-4.
1,3-6) Therefore, set this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 389


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.12 Configuring the MSP Tangent Ring Services


On the MSP tangent node, the service timeslot utilization in two rings is high. As the MSP
tangent ring is economic and practical, it is widely used for the SDH networking. For the
networking of the MSP tangent ring, you need to connect two physical ring networks by one
NE. This NE is called the tangent NE for two ring networks. With respect to service
configuration, the MSP tangent ring has no great difference from the MSP tangent ring of the
single ring network. You need configure a bidirectional path service on the tangent node
where the service enters the sink ring network from the source ring network.

9.12.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


For MSP tangent ring, you should connect two physical ring networks by one NE and
configure the bidirectional service on this tangent NE.
Figure 9-22 shows two MSP tangent rings consisting of seven NEs and the tangent NE is
NE3. All NEs on the ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 390


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-22 Networking diagram of two MSP tangent rings


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

8 13
NE1

13 8
Line board 13 - SL64
NE2 MSP ring 1 NE4
Line board 8 - SL64
8 13
NE3 Line board 7-SL64
13 8 Line board 8-SL64
7 12 Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

13 8
Line board 13 - SL64
NE5 MSP ring 2 NE7
Line board 8 - SL64
8 13

NE6
13 8

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

9.12.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The timeslot allocation of the MSP tangent ring is similar to the timeslot allocation of single
MSP ring. The service can be transmitted in multiple routes, and therefore the service flow
direction is based on the configuration of the service source board and sink board on the
tangent NE.
Figure 9-23 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. One VC-4 service is transmitted
on the MSP tangent ring and the service can be transmitted in different directions and paths.
In this example, the VC-4 service is added to the ring from NE1 and dropped from NE6. The
working path is NE1->NE2->NE3->NE5->NE6.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 391


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-23 Signal flow and timeslot allocation


NE1:
Line board Line board
2-SL64 8-SL64

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

8 13
NE2: NE1

Line board Line board


8-SL64 13-SL64 13 8

VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through MSP Ring1
NE2 NE4

8 13

NE3
13 8

NE3:
Line board Line board VC4:VC4-1
13-SL64 7-SL64

7 12

13 8

VC4:VC4-1
MSP Ring2
Service pass-through NE5 NE7

NE5:
8 13
Line board Line board
8-SL64 13-SL64

13 NE6 8

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

NE6:
Line board Line board
2-SL64 13-SL64

service route

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 392


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.12.3 Configuration Process


The service configuration of the MSP tangent rings equals the configuration of services in two
single MSP rings. You only need to configure the bidirectional path services of two ring
networks on the tangent node.

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The protection subnets of the two MSP tangent rings must be created and be consistent
with the actual topology. For details about how to create the protection subnets, see
9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH service on NE1 (source NE).
1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1 is
ck)-2- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 393


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH service on NE6 (sink NE) by referring to Step 1.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and received on


the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE6 is used
ck)-13- as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE6 is used
ck)-2- as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to 2-
SL64-1(SDH SL64-1(SDH-1).
-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service
Range(e.g. sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter to
1,3-6) 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.


1. Select NE2 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 394


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE2 is
ck)-13- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure the pass-through service on NE5. See Step 3 to configure the SDH service on NE5.
The configuration method and parameter setting are the same as those of NE2.

Step 5 Configure the SDH service on tangent NE3.


NOTE

For the MSP tangent rings, you only need to configure a bidirectional path service on the tangent point
to ensure that services in one ring can be transmitted to the other ring. The services in two MSP rings are
respectively protected by their local rings.
1. Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 395


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE3 is
ck)-13- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE3 is
ck)-7- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 6 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.13 Configuring the MSP Intersecting Ring Services


The service configuration of the MSP intersecting ring is complicated, but the inter-ring
service has low capacity and perfect protection mechanism. Both the MSP intersecting ring
and MSP tangent ring can protect the service when one fiber is cut in the local MSP ring. But
only the MSP intersecting ring can protect the service when one intersecting node is faulty.
Therefore, the MSP intersecting ring is applicable to the scenario where the service on the
single intersecting node must be protected.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 396


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.13.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


For the networking of the MSP intersecting ring, you need to connect two physical ring
networks by two NEs and choose one intersecting NE as the working intersecting NE. In
addition, all inter-ring services of two MSP rings must pass through the working intersecting
node. In this case, the service can be protected when the working intersecting node is faulty.

Figure 9-24 shows two MSP intersecting rings consisting of eight MSTP NEs. NE3 functions
as the working intersecting NE and NE8 functions as the protection intersecting NE. In this
example, one VC-4 service is added to the ring network from NE1 and dropped from the sink
NE (NE6). All NEs on the rings use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Figure 9-24 Networking diagram of two MSP intersecting rings


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13 -SL64

8 13
NE1

13 8
NE2 MSP Ring1 NE4
8 13

NE3 NE8 8
8 13 Line board 7-SL64
13
Line board 8-SL64

7 Line board 12-SL64


12 12
7 Line board 13-SL64

13 8
NE5 MSP Ring2 NE7
8 13

NE6
13 8

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13- SL64

9.13.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


On the MSP intersecting ring, the timeslot allocation of services in non-intersecting nodes is
the same as the timeslot allocation of services in a single MSP ring network. You should focus
on the service configuration in the working intersecting node (NE3).

Figure 9-25 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation.

l On the working node (NE3), you need to configure two SNCP protection groups.
Normally, the service flow of the selected working path is NE1NE2NE3
NE5NE6, which is consistent with the service flow on the MSP tangent ring.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 397


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

When services travel to MSP ring 2 from the MSP ring 1, SNCP protection group 1
selectively receives one service.
When the service travels to MSP ring 1 from the MSP ring 2, SNCP protection
group 2 selectively receives the service.
l On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 13 to the board in slot 8.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 13 to the board in slot 7.
These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection group 1 on NE3.
l On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 7 to the board in slot 12.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 7 to the board in slot 13.
These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection group 2 on NE3.
The MSP intersecting ring and MSP tangent ring topologies implement protection for the
service when two fibers are cut in two MSP rings respectively. But only the MSP intersecting
ring can protect the service when one intersecting node is faulty.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 398


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-25 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the MSP intersecting ring
NE1: VC4:VC4-1
1xVC4
Line board Line board
2-SL64 8-SL64

8 13
NE1

VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through
13 8

NE2 MSP Ring1 NE4


NE3: VC4:VC4-1
unidirectional service service 8 13
cross-connection source sink
cross-connection1 13-SL64 8-SL64
13 NE3 NE8 8
8 13
cross-connection2 7-SL64 12-SL64

SNCP service working protection


protection group sink source source
NE8: VC4:VC4-1
protection group1 7-SL64 13-SL64 12-SL64 Service pass-through

protection group2 13-SL64 7-SL64 8-SL64

12 7
7 12

13 8

NE5 MSP Ring2 NE7

8 13
VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through

13 NE6 8

VC4:VC4-1 NE6:
Line board Line board
2-SL64 13-SL64
1xVC4

working path
protection path

9.13.3 Configuration Process


To configure the MSP intersecting ring service, you must configure the pass-through service
at two intersecting nodes for two SNCP protection groups and protection paths of working
node NE3. For service configuration of non-intersecting nodes, see the service configuration
of the MSP tangent rings.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 399


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The protection subnets of the two MSP intersecting rings must be created and be
consistent with the actual topology. For details about how to create the protection
subnets, see 9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.

Procedure
Step 1 See Steps 1-4 in 9.12.3 Configuration Process to configure services on NE1, NE2, NE5, and
NE6.
Step 2 Configure the service from MSP ring 1 to MSP ring 2 on NE3 (working intersecting node).
1. Configure the pass-through service from the board housed in slot 13 to the board housed
in slot 8 on NE3.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in
the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, services are transmitted and


nal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE3
ack)-13- is used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3 is
ack)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 400


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

2. Configure SNCP protection group 1 according to the SNCP group plan of NE3.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window to set
required parameters in the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is displayed. Click
OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 1 MSP protection and SNCP protection are


(100ms) available on the network. You are advised to
set the hold-off time to 100 ms. That is, set
this parameter to 1.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


rkin brack)-13 NE3 is used as the source board of the
g - working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser SL64-1(S to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 401


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of


brack)-7- NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
SL64-1(S this parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of
tect brack)-12 NE3 is used as the source board of the
ion - protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser SL64-1(S parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

NOTICE
It is recommended that you set the hold-off time to a value that is longer than maximum
MSP switching time (50 ms). If the hold-off time is set to 0 ms, the MSP may perform
multiple unnecessary switchings in the case that the fiber between NE2 and NE3 is cut.

Step 3 Configure the service from MSP ring 2 to MSP ring 1 on NE3 (working intersecting node).
1. Configure the pass-through service from the board housed in slot 7 to the board housed
in slot 12 on NE3.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in
the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 402


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, services are transmitted and


nal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE3 is
ack)-7- used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE3
ack)-12- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

2. Configure SNCP protection group 2 according to the SNCP group plan of NE3.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window to set
required parameters in the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is displayed. Click
OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 403


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 1 MSP protection and SNCP protection are


(100ms) available on the network. You are advised to
set the hold-off time to 100 ms. That is, set
this parameter to 1.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of


rkin brack)-7- NE3 is used as the source board of the
g SL64-1(S working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser DH-1) to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic
e Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


brack)-13 NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
- this parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
SL64-1(S
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of
tect brack)-8- NE3 is used as the source board of the
ion SL64-1(S protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser DH-1) parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic
e Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 404


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

NOTICE
It is recommended that you set the hold-off time to a value that is longer than maximum
MSP switching time (50 ms). If the hold-off time is set to 0 ms, the MSP may perform
multiple unnecessary second switchings in the case that the fiber between NE2 and NE3
is cut.

Step 4 Configure the pass-through service between MSP ring 1 and MSP ring 2 on NE8.
1. Select NE8 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE8 is
ck)-13- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 13-N2SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE8 is
ck)-7- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 7-N2SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 405


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 5 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.14 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services


With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent
ring. It can protect the service in two SNCP rings when one fiber is cut in one single SNCP
ring. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the tangent
node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with four
pairs of protection groups.

9.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


The SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring in terms of physical networking
topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional services
in the tangent point for the MSP ring. For the SNCP ring, however, you need to configure four
protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.
Figure 9-26 shows two SNCP tangent rings consisting of seven NEs. The tangent NE is NE3.
All NEs on the rings use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 406


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-26 SNCP tangent ring networking


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13 -SL64

8 13
NE1

13 8
Line board 13 -SL64
NE2 SNCP Ring1 NE4
Line board 8 -SL64
8 13
NE3 Line board 7-SL64
13 8 Line board 8-SL64
7 12 Line board 12-SL64
Line board 13-SL64

13 8
Line board13-SL64
NE5 SNCP Ring2 NE7
Line board 8-SL64
8 13

NE6
13 8

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13 -SL64

9.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The service in the SNCP tangent ring is not transmitted in the fixed direction. The service
flow direction depends on how to choose and configure the working path and the protection
path of the service on each NE where the SNCP protection group is configured. When
configuring the SNCP protection group on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP
protection groups for each bidirectional service in the tangent point. The service timeslot
allocation in the SNCP tangent ring is same as the service timeslot allocation on a single
SNCP ring.
Figure 9-27 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. Services can be transmitted
on the SNCP tangent ring in different directions and paths. In this example, one VC-4 service
is added to the ring from NE1 and dropped from NE6. On the tangent NE (NE3), four SNCP
protection groups must be configured and the working path is either NE1->NE2->NE3->NE5-
>NE6 or NE1->NE2->NE7->NE6.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 407


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-27 Signal flow and timeslot allocation


NE1:
1xVC4 SNCP protection service protection service
group source source sink
protection group 1 13-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64
VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

8 13
NE1 NE2 and NE4 :
service service
SDH service source source
13 8 VC4 8-SL64 13-SL64
VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1
SNCP Ring1
Service pass-through NE2 NE4 Service pass-through

8 13
NE3:

SNCP protection service protection service


NE3
13 8 group source source sink

protection group 1 12-SL64 7-SL64 13-SL64

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 protection group 2 12-SL64 7-SL64 8-SL64

protection group 3 13-SL64 8-SL64 12-SL64


7 12
protection group 4 13-SL64 8-SL64 7-SL64

13 8

VC4:VC4-1 SNCP Ring2 VC4:VC4-1


NE5 NE7 Service pass-through
Service pass-through

8 13

13 NE6 8

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

NE6:

1xVC4 SNCP protection service protection service


group source source sink

protection group 1 13-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64

working service route


protection service route

9.14.3 Configuration Process


For non-tangent nodes in the SNCP tangent rings, the service configuration is the same as the
service configuration in a single ring network. On tangent nodes, you need to configure four
SNCP protection groups for a bidirectional service.

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH service on NE1 (source NE).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 408


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window to set required
parameters in the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that


is in the switching state releases the switching
and services are switched back to the original
working path some time after the original
working path is restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit
direction need to be created. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to


(100ms) the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is
valid only when Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of
king rack)-13- NE1 is used as the source board of the working
Ser SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
vice DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE1
rack)-2- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(S parameter to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
1,3-6) this parameter to 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 409


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE1
ecti rack)-8- is used as the source board of the protection
on SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
Ser DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).
vice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH service on NE6 (sink NE) by referring to Step 1.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is


in the switching state releases the switching and
services are switched back to the original working
path some time after the original working path is
restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit direction
need to be created. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to the


(100ms) default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is valid
only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE6 is
king ack)-13- used as the source board of the working service.
Serv SL64-1(SD Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
ice H-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 410


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 of NE6 is
ack)-2- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 2-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
1,3-6) parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE6 is
ectio ack)-8- used as the source board of the protection service.
n SL64-1(SD Therefore, set this parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
Serv H-1)
ice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Immediately Yes -

Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.


1. Select NE2 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required. Therefore,


set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, services are transmitted and received


l on the same path. Therefore, set this parameter to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE2 is
ck)-13- used as the source board. Therefore, set this parameter
SL64-1(SD to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 411


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE2 is
ck)-8- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this parameter to
SL64-1(SD 8-N2SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the service


Timeslot sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this parameter
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

NOTE

In this example, NE4, NE5, and NE7 are pass-through NEs. The configuration method and
parameter setting are the same as those of NE2. See substeps a-b in Step 3.

Step 4 Configure the SDH service on NE3 (tangent NE).


NOTE

According to the configuration principle of the SNCP tangent rings, you need to configure four SNCP
protection groups for each bidirectional service. The configuration combination of protection groups is
not fixed. You can configure the protection group according to actual requirements. The following
configuration is considered as a reference.
1. Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window. Select Configure
SNCP Tangent Ring on the lower right of the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is
displayed and set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 412


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that


is in the switching state releases the switching
and services are switched back to the original
working path some time after the original
working path is restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, cross-connections in the SNCP


al receive direction and the SNCP transmit
direction need to be created. Therefore, set this
parameter to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter to


(100ms) the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path is
restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time,
revertive switching occurs. This parameter is
valid only when Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of
king rack)-13- NE3 is used as the source board of the working
Ser SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 13-
vice DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


rack)-12- NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(S parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
1,3-6) this parameter to 1.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3
ecti rack)-8- is used as the source board of the protection
on SL64-1(S service. Therefore, set this parameter to 8-
Ser DH-1) SL64-1(SDH-1).
vice
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 413


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(sub In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE3
rack)-7- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(S parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Range(e.g. service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
1,3-6) this parameter to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 5 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.15 Configuring the SNCP Intersecting Ring Services


When compared to the SNCP tangent ring, the SNCP intersecting ring has the complicated
service configuration method, but has perfect protection mechanism. Both the SNCP
intersecting ring and SNCP tangent ring can protect the service when one fiber is cut in the
local SNCP ring. But only the SNCP intersecting ring can protect the service when one
intersecting node is faulty. Therefore, the SNCP intersecting ring is applicable to the scenario
where the service on the single intersecting node must be protected.

9.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


For the networking of the SNCP intersecting ring, you need to connect two physical ring
networks by two NEs. When compared to the SNCP tangent ring, the SNCP intersecting ring
implements the protection for the service when one intersecting node is faulty.
Figure 9-28 shows two SNCP intersecting rings consisting of eight NEs. The intersecting
NEs are NE3 and NE8. In this example, one VC-4 service is added to the ring from NE1 and
dropped from the sink NE (NE6). All NEs on the ring use SL64 boards for transmitting SDH
services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 414


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-28 Networking diagram of two SNCP intersecting rings


Line board 2-SL64
Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13 -SL64

8 13
NE1

13 8
NE2 SNCP Ring1 NE4
8 13

NE3 NE8 8
8 13 Line board 7-SL64
13
Line board 8-SL64

7 Line board 12-SL64


12 12
7 Line board 13-SL64

13 8
NE5 SNCP Ring2 NE7
8 13

NE6
13 8

Line board 2-SL64


Line board 8-SL64
Line board 13 -SL64

9.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


In the SNCP intersecting ring, the timeslot allocation of services in non-intersecting nodes is
same as the timeslot allocation of services in single SNCP ring network. You should focus on
the service flow directions of the working paths and protection paths in the SNCP protection
group on two intersecting nodes.
Figure 9-29 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation.
You need to respectively create two SNCP protection groups on NE3 and NE8. For the
service source whose service crosses different rings, you need to create a unidirectional pass-
through service in the local ring. In this case, this pass-through service is taken as a working
source or protection source of the SNCP protection group on another intersecting node.
l Normally, the service flow direction from SNCP ring 1 to SNCP ring 2 is NE1-NE2-
NE3-NE5-NE6.
On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 13 to the board in
slot 8. These pass-through services are working sources of SNCP protection group 1
on NE8.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 8 to the board in
slot 13. These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection
group 1 on NE3.
When the services are transmitted from SNCP ring 1 to SNCP ring 2, SNCP
protection group 1 on NE3 and SNCP protection group 1 on NE8 selectively

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 415


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

receive the service respectively. In the normal situation, the flow direction of the
selected working source is NE1-NE2-NE3.
SNCP protection group 1 on NE6 selectively receives the service that enters SNCP
ring 2. In the normal situation, the flow direction of the selected working source is
NE3-NE5-NE6.
l Normally, the service flow direction from SNCP ring 2 to SNCP ring 1 is NE6-NE7-
NE8-NE4-NE1.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 12 to the board in
slot 7. These pass-through services are working sources of SNCP protection group 2
on NE3.
On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 7 to the board in
slot 12. These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection
group 2 on NE8.
When the services are transmitted from SNCP ring 2 to SNCP ring 1, SNCP
protection group 1 on NE8 and SNCP protection group 2 on NE3 selectively
receive the service respectively. Normally, the flow direction of the selected
working source is NE6-NE7-NE8.
SNCP protection group 1 on NE1 selectively receives the service that enters SNCP
ring 1. In the normal situation, the flow direction of the selected working source is
NE8-NE4-NE1.
The service flow direction in the SNCP tangent ring is consistent with the service flow
direction on SNCP intersecting ring. Both the SNCP intersecting ring and SNCP tangent ring
can implement protection for the service when two fibers are cut in two MSP rings
respectively. But only the SNCP intersecting ring can protect the service when one
intersecting node is faulty.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 416


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Figure 9-29 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the SNCP intersecting ring
NE1:

SNCP protection service protection service


1xVC4 group source source sink

protection group1 13-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

8 13
NE1

13 8
VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through VC4:VC4-1
NE3: VC4:VC4-1 NE2 SNCP Ring1 NE4

Service pass-through

unidirectional service service


8 13 NE8: VC4:VC4-1
cross-connection source sink
13 13 NE8 8 unidirectional service source service sink
cross-connection1 13-SL64 8-SL64 NE3 8 cross-connection
cross-connection1 8-SL64 13-SL64
cross-connection2 7-SL64 12-SL64
cross-connection2 12-SL64 7-SL64
SNCP protection service service protection SNCP protection service sink service source protection source
group sink source source group
protection group1 12-SL64 13-SL64 8-SL64
protection group1 7-SL64 13-SL64 8-SL64 protection group2 8-SL64 12-SL64 7-SL64
protection group2 13-SL64 12-SL64 7-SL64
12 7
7 12

13 8

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1
Service pass-through NE5 SNCP Ring2 NE7
Service pass-through

8 13

13 NE6 8

VC4:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1
NE6:

SNCP protection service protection service


group source source sink
1xVC4
protection group1 13-SL64 8-SL64 2-SL64

working path
protection path

9.15.3 Configuration Process


To configure the SNCP intersecting ring service, you must configure the SNCP protection
group and pass-through services on the two intersecting nodes. For service configuration of
non-intersecting nodes, see the service configuration of the SNCP tangent rings.

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 See Steps 1-3 in 9.14.3 Configuration Process to configure services on NE1, NE2, NE4,
NE5, and NE7.
Step 2 Configure the SDH service on NE3 (intersecting NE).
1. On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 13 to the board in slot 8.
These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection group 1 on NE8.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 417


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Click Create in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in
the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and


received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subrac In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


k)-13- NE3 is used as the source board. Therefore, set
SL64-1(SDH- this parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrac In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE3
k)-8- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SDH- parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

2. On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 7 to the board in slot 12.
These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection group 2 on NE8.
On NE3, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 7 to the board in
slot 12 by referring to Step 2.1.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectional In this example, services are transmitted and


received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 418


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source Slot Shelf0(subrac In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE3
k)-7- is used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SDH- parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrac In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


k)-12- NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SDH- parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

3. Configure SNCP protection group 1 according to the SNCP group plan of NE3.
Select NE3 in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window to set
required parameters in the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is displayed. Click
OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 419


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter


(100ms) to the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


rkin brack)-13 NE3 is used as the source board of the
g - working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser SL64-1(S to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of


brack)-7- NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
SL64-1(S this parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of
tect brack)-8- NE3 is used as the source board of the
ion SL64-1(S protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser DH-1) parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic
e Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

4. Configure SNCP protection group 2 according to the SNCP group plan of NE3.
The method of configuring protection group 2 is the same as the method of
configuring protection group 1. Configure protection group 2 by referring to Step
2.3.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 420


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter


(100ms) to the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


rkin brack)-12 NE3 is used as the source board of the
g - working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser SL64-1(S to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


brack)-13 NE3 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
- this parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
SL64-1(S
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of
tect brack)-7- NE3 is used as the source board of the
ion SL64-1(S protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser DH-1) parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 421


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

vic Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


e Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure SDH services on NE8 (intersecting NE).


1. On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 8 to the board in slot 13.
These pass-through services are protection sources of SNCP protection group 1 on NE3.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 8 to the board in
slot 13 by referring to Step 2.1.

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, services are transmitted and


nal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of NE8 is
ack)-8- used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of NE8
ack)-13- is used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 422


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

2. On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 12 to the board in slot 7.
These pass-through services are working sources of SNCP protection group 2 on NE3.
On NE8, configure pass-through services from the board in slot 12 to the board in
slot 7 by referring to Step 2.1.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, services are transmitted and


nal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of NE8
ack)-12- is used as the source board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set
Range(e.g. this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of NE8 is
ack)-7- used as the sink board. Therefore, set this
SL64-1(SD parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
H-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore, set this
Range(e.g. parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

3. Configure SNCP protection group 1 according to the SNCP group plan of NE8.
On NE8, configure SNCP protection group 1 by referring to Step 2.3.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 423


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter


(100ms) to the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 of


rkin brack)-13 NE8 is used as the source board of the
g - working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser SL64-1(S to 13-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


brack)-12 NE8 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
- this parameter to 12-SL64-1(SDH-1).
SL64-1(S
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of
tect brack)-8- NE8 is used as the source board of the
ion SL64-1(S protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser DH-1) parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic
e Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 424


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

4. Configure SNCP protection group 2 according to the SNCP group plan of NE8.
The method of configuring protection group 2 is the same as the method of
configuring protection group 1. Configure protection group 2 by referring to Step
2.3.
Parameter Value in Value Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, VC-4 services are required.


Therefore, set this parameter to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive If this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE


that is in the switching state releases the
switching and services are switched back to
the original working path some time after the
original working path is restored to normal.

Direction Unidirecti In this example, services are transmitted and


onal received on different paths. Therefore, set this
parameter to Unidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 It is recommended that you set this parameter


(100ms) to the default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 When the time after the original working path
is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR
time, revertive switching occurs. This
parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wo Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 of


rkin brack)-12 NE8 is used as the source board of the
g - working service. Therefore, set this parameter
Ser SL64-1(S to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic DH-1)
e
Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 425


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Value Description


This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 of


brack)-8- NE8 is used as the sink board. Therefore, set
SL64-1(S this parameter to 8-SL64-1(SDH-1).
DH-1)

Sink 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the


Timeslot service sink uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Pro Source Slot Shelf0(su In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 of
tect brack)-7- NE8 is used as the source board of the
ion SL64-1(S protection service. Therefore, set this
Ser DH-1) parameter to 7-SL64-1(SDH-1).
vic
e Source 1 In this example, one VC-4 is required, and the
Timeslot service source uses the first VC-4. Therefore,
Range(e.g. set this parameter to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.16 Configuring the Services on Two Tangent SNCP and


MSP Rings
The topology of two tangent SNCP and MSP rings is similar to the topology of two tangent
MSP rings and the topology of two tangent SNCP rings. This topic focuses on the
configuration of the SDH services on the tangent NE.

9.16.1 Networking Diagram


The topology of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings is similar to the topology of two tangent
MSP rings and the topology of two tangent SNCP rings. The only difference is in the tangent
point. In the case of two tangent MSP rings, only one pair of bidirectional services need to be
configured at the tangent point. In the case of two tangent SNCP rings, one SNCP protection
group needs to be configured for each of the four received services at the tangent point. In the

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 426


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

case of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings, SNCP protection groups need to be configured for
the service that is selectively received on the MSP ring and for the service that is dually
transmitted on the SNCP ring at the tangent point.

Figure 9-30 shows the networking diagram of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings. The tangent
NE is NE3. The SL64 boards are installed on all the NEs as line boards to transmit the SDH
services.

Figure 9-30 Networking diagram of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings
Line Board 2-SL64
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64

Line Board 8-SL64 8 13


NE1
Line Board 13-SL64
13 8
NE2 NE4
8 13
NE3 Line Board 7-SL64
13 8 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64
7 12 Line Board 13-SL64

13 8
NE5 NE7
8 13
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64 NE6
13 8

Line Board 2-SL64


Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64

9.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


In the case of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings, the signal flow and timeslot allocation of the
MSP ring is the same as the signal flow and timeslot allocation of a separate MSP ring, and
the signal flow and timeslot allocation of the SNCP ring is the same as the signal flow and
timeslot allocation of a separate SNCP ring. The signal flow and timeslot allocation of two
tangent MSP and SNCP rings depend on the service sink of the tangent NE. Only one
protection group needs to be configured on the tangent NE.

As shown in Figure 9-31, the signal flow and NE configuration of two tangent MSP and
SNCP rings are as follows:
l The signal flow of the working service in the SNCP group is NE1NE2NE3.
l The signal flow of the protection service is NE1NE4NE3.
l The service flow of the multiplex section is NE5NE6.
l The tangent NE (NE3) is configured with one protection group.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 427


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

l Services are configured so that they pass through NE2, NE4, and NE5.

Figure 9-31 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of two tangent MSP and SNCP rings
1xVC4 NE1:
SNCP Protection Working Protectio
Service Sink
Group Source n Source
Protecton group 1 8-SL64 13-SL64 2-SL64

8 13
NE1
NE2 and NE4:
:

SDH Service Service Source Service Source

VC4 8-SL64 13-SL64


13 8
VC4-1:VC-1 VC4-1:VC4-1
NE2 NE4
pass-through service SNCP ring pass-through service

13
8

13 NE3
8
NE3:
SNCP Protection Working Protection Service
Group Source Source Sink
Protection Group 1 13-SL64 8-SL64 7-SL64

7 12

13
8
VC4-1:VC4-1
NE5 MSP ring NE7
pass-through service

8 13
NE5:
SDH Service Servuce Source Service Source

VC4 8-SL64 13-SL64


13 NE6 8

NE6:
Flow of the working service Service Service
SDH Serice
Source Sink
Flow of the protection service
VC4 13-SL64 2-SL64

1xVC4

9.16.3 Configuration Process


In the case of two tangent SNCP and MSP rings, the method of configuring the service on the
SNCP ring is the same as the method of configuring the service on a separate SNCP ring, and
the method of configuring the service on the MSP ring is the same as the method of
configuring the service on a separate MSP ring. The tangent NE needs to be configured with
an SNCP protection group.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 428


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Prerequisites
l The physical network topology must be established.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.
l The MSP protection subnet must be created and must be consistent with the actual
topology. For details about how to create the MSP protection subnet, see 9.18.2.3
Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with the information about 9.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot
Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 To configure the SDH service of the source NE (NE1), do as follows:
NOTE

When you configure an SNCP service, you can select the SNCP switching conditions.
1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service at the lower right. Then, the Create SNCP Service dialog
box is displayed. Set the parameters in the dialog box, and then click OK.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured.


Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is


restored from the switching state to the normal
state some time after the working path is
restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, the services are transmitted and


al received over the same path, that is, the
transmitted service and received service are
bidirectional services. Hence, set Direction of
the services to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 This parameter takes the default value and need
(100ms) not be specified.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is restored to normal, the
switching restoration occurs if the normal state
lasts for 600s. This parameter is valid only
when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the
king ack)-8- source board of the working service (see Figure
Ser SL64-1(SD 9-30). You can select a different source board
vice H-1) depending on the actual situation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 429


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
1,3-6) because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the
ecti ack)-13- source board of the protection service (see
on SL64-1(SD Figure 9-30). You can select a different source
Ser H-1) board depending on the actual situation.
vice
Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
1,3-6) because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 is the
ack)-2- sink board (see Figure 9-30). You can select a
SL64-1(SD different sink board depending on the actual
H-1) situation.

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1-5 In this example, the total service capacity that is
Range(e.g.1,3-6) planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Step 2 To configure the SDH service on the tangent NE (NE3), do as follows:

Click , and select NE3 from the NE Navigator that is displayed. Click OK. Refer to
Step 1 and configure the SDH service on NE3. Set the parameters listed in the following
table.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured.


Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is


restored from the switching state to the normal state
some time after the working path is restored to
normal.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 430


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Direction Bidirection In this example, the services are transmitted and


al received over the same path, that is, the transmitted
service and received service are bidirectional
services. Hence, set Direction of the services to
Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 2 There are two protection switching modes in this


(100ms) example. Hence, set Hold-Off Time (100ms) to 2.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is restored to normal, the
switching restoration occurs if the normal state lasts
for 600s. This parameter is valid only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the
king ack)-13- source board of the working service (see Figure
Serv SL64-1(SD 9-30). You can select a different source board
ice H-1) depending on the actual situation.

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
1,3-6) Level of the service is set to VC4.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the
ectio ack)-8- source board of the protection service (see Figure
n SL64-1(SD 9-30). You can select a different source board
Serv H-1) depending on the actual situation.
ice
Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
1,3-6) Level of the service is set to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 is the sink
ack)-7- board (see Figure 9-30). You can select a different
SL64-1(SD sink board depending on the actual situation.
H-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Range(e.g.1,3-6) planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
Level of the service is set to VC4.

Step 3 To configure the SDH service on the sink NE (NE6), do as follows:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 431


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

1. Click , and select NE6 from the NE Navigator that is displayed. Click OK.
2. Select NE6 in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create on the lower right of the window. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog
box is displayed. Set the parameters in the dialog box, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured on the


ring. Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path, that is, the transmitted service and
received service are bidirectional services. Hence, set
Direction of the services to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the source
ck)-13- line board (see Figure 9-30).You can select different
SL64-1(SDH source boards depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned


Timeslot is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
1,3-6) to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 is the sink board
ck)-2- (see Figure 9-30). You can select a different sink board
SL64-1(SDH depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned
Range(e.g. is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set Source Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
to VC4.

Step 4 Configure the pass-through services on NE2, NE4, and NE5. Refer to Step 3 and configure
the VC4-1:VC4-1 pass-through service from the board in slot 13 to the board in slot 8.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured on the


ring. Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 432


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path, that is, the transmitted service and
received service are bidirectional services. Hence, set
Direction of the services to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the source
ck)-13- line board (see Figure 9-30). You can select a different
SL64-1(SDH source board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned


Timeslot is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
1,3-6) to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the sink line
ck)-8- board (see Figure 9-30). You can select a different sink
SL64-1(SDH board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned
Range(e.g. is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-31). Hence, set Source Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
to VC4.

Step 5 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.17 Configuring the Services on Two Intersecting SNCP


and MSP Rings
The topology of two intersecting SNCP and MSP rings is similar to the topology of two
intersecting MSP rings and the topology of two intersecting SNCP rings. This topic focuses
on the configuration of the SDH services on the intersecting NEs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 433


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.17.1 Networking Diagram


To construct two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings, you need to connect two separate ring
networks through two NEs, configure the services to pass through one intersecting NE, and
configure one SNCP protection group on the other intersecting NE. Compared with two
tangent MSP and SNCP rings, two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings realize protection for
the services when an intersecting NE fails.
Figure 9-32 shows the networking diagram of two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings. The
intersecting NEs are NE4 and NE5. The SL64 boards are installed on all the NEs as line
boards to transmit the SDH services.

Figure 9-32 Networking diagram of two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings
Line Board 2-SL64
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64

8 13
NE1

13 8
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64 NE2 NE3
8 13

NE4 NE5
12 8 12 8 Line Board 7-SL64
Line Board 8-SL64
7 13 7 13 Line Board 12-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64

13 8
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64 NE6 NE7
8 13

NE8
13 8

Line Board 2-SL64


Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 13-SL64

9.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


In the case of two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings, the signal flow and timeslot allocation
of the MSP ring is the same as the signal flow and timeslot allocation of a separate MSP ring,
and the signal flow and timeslot allocation of the SNCP ring is the same as the signal flow
and timeslot allocation of a separate SNCP ring. The signal flow and timeslot allocation of
two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings depend on the protection configuration of the
intersecting NEs. The services need to be configured so that they pass through one
intersecting NE and one protection group needs to be configured on the other intersecting NE.
As shown in Figure 9-33, the signal flow and NE configuration of two intersecting MSP and
SNCP rings are as follows:
l The signal flow of the working service in the SNCP protection group is NE1NE2
NE4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 434


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

l The signal flow of the protection service in the SNCP protection group is NE1NE3
NE5NE4.
l The service flow of the multiplex section is NE6NE8.
l One intersecting NE (NE4) is configured with one protection group.
l Services are configured so that they pass through the other intersecting NE (NE5).
l Services are configured so that they pass through NE2, NE3, and NE6.

Figure 9-33 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of two intersecting MSP and SNCP rings
Add or drop 1xVC4
services
NE1:
SNCP Protection Protection Service
Working Source
Group Source Sink
8-SL64 13-SL64 2-SL64
Protection group 1

8 VC4-1:VC4-1
13 pass-through service
NE1
13 8

NE2 SNCP ring


NE2, NE3, and NE6: NE3
Service
SDH Service Service Source
Source
12 NE4 NE5 8
13
VC4 8-SL64 13-SL64 8
8 12
NE4: NE5:
SDH Service Service
SNCP Protection Service Source Source
Working Source Protection Source Service Sink
Group
VC4 8-SL64 7-SL64
Protection group 1 12-SL64 13-SL64 7-SL64

13 7
13 13 8
7

VC4-1:VC4-1 NE6 MSP ring NE7


pass-through service

13
8 NE8
13 8

NE8:
SDH Service Service Source Service Source

VC4 13-SL64 2-SL64

Flow of the Line board


Add or drop
working service 1xVC4 services
Flow of the
protection service

9.17.3 Configuration Process


In the case of two intersecting SNCP and MSP rings, the method of configuring the service on
the SNCP ring is the same as the method of configuring the service on a separate SNCP ring,
and the method of configuring the service on the MSP ring is the same as the method of
configuring the service on a separate MSP ring. Services need to be configured so that the
services pass through one intersecting NE and one SNCP protection group needs to be
configured on the other intersecting NE.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 435


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

l The MSP protection subnet must be created and must be consistent with the actual
topology. For details about how to create the MSP protection subnet, see 9.18.2.3
Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with the information about 9.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot
Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 To configure the SDH service of the source NE (NE1), do as follows:
NOTE

When you configure an SNCP service, you can select the SNCP switching conditions.
1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service on the lower right of the window. Then, the Create SNCP
Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters in the dialog box, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured.


Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is


restored from the switching state to the normal
state some time after the working path is
restored to normal.

Direction Bidirection In this example, the services are transmitted and


al received over the same path, that is, the
transmitted service and received service are
bidirectional services. Hence, set Direction of
the services to Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 0 This parameter takes the default value and need
(100ms) not be specified.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is restored to normal, the
switching restoration occurs if the normal state
lasts for 600s. This parameter is valid only
when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the
king ack)-8- source board of the working service (see Figure
Ser SL64-1(SD 9-32). You can select a different source board
vice H-1) depending on the actual situation.

Source VC4 - -

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 436


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
1,3-6) because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the
ecti ack)-13- source board of the protection service (see
on SL64-1(SD Figure 9-32). You can select a different source
Ser H-1) board depending on the actual situation.
vice
Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
1,3-6) because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 is the
ack)-2- sink board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a
SL64-1(SD different sink board depending on the actual
H-1) situation.

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Range(e.g.1,3-6) planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1,
because Level of the service is set to VC4.

Step 2 Configure the SDH service on the intersecting NE (NE4).

Click ,and select NE4 from the NE Navigator that is displayed. Click OK. Refer to Step
1 and configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the parameters listed in the following table.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Type SNCP Set Service Type to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured.


Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is


restored from the switching state to the normal state
some time after the working path is restored to
normal.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 437


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Direction Bidirection In this example, the services are transmitted and


al received over the same path, that is, the transmitted
service and received service are bidirectional
services. Hence, set Direction of the services to
Bidirectional.

Hold-Off Time 2 There are two protection switching modes in this


(100ms) example. Hence, set Hold-Off Time (100ms) to 2.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is restored to normal, the
switching restoration occurs if the normal state lasts
for 600s. This parameter is valid only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 12 is the
king ack)-12- source board of the working service (see Figure
Serv SL64-1(SD 9-32). You can select a different source board
ice H-1) depending on the actual situation.

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
1,3-6) Level of the service is set to VC4.

Prot Source Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the
ectio ack)-13- source board of the protection service (see Figure
n SL64-1(SD 9-32). You can select a different source board
Serv H-1) depending on the actual situation.
ice
Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Timeslot planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
1,3-6) Level of the service is set to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 is the sink
ack)-7- board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different
SL64-1(SD sink board depending on the actual situation.
H-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is


Range(e.g.1,3-6) planned is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because
Level of the service is set to VC4.

Step 3 To configure the SDH service on the sink NE (NE8), do as follows:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 438


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

1. Click , and select NE8 from the NE Navigator that is displayed. Click OK.
2. Select NE8 in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create on the lower right of the window. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog
box is displayed. Set the parameters in the dialog box, and then click OK.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured on the


ring. Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path, that is, the transmitted service and
received service are bidirectional services. Hence, set
Direction of the services to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the source
ck)-13- line board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different
SL64-1(SDH source board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned


Timeslot is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
1,3-6) to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 2 is the sink board
ck)-2- (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different sink board
SL64-1(SDH depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned
Range(e.g. is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
to VC4.

Step 4 Configure the pass-through services on NE2, NE3, and NE6. Refer to Step 3 and configure
the VC4-1:VC4-1 pass-through service from the board in slot 13 to the board in slot 8.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured on the


ring. Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 439


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path, that is, the transmitted service and
received service are bidirectional services. Hence, set
Direction of the services to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 13 is the source
ck)-13- line board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different
SL64-1(SDH source board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Source VC4 - -

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned


Timeslot is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
1,3-6) to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the sink line
ck)-8- board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different sink
SL64-1(SDH board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned
Range(e.g. is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
to VC4.

Step 5 Configure the pass-through service on NE5. Refer to Step 3 and configure the VC4-1:VC4-1
pass-through service from the board in slot 8 to the board in slot 7.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the VC4 service is configured on the


ring. Hence, set Level of the VC4 service to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path, that is, the transmitted service and
received service are bidirectional services. Hence, set
Direction of the services to Bidirectional.

Source Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 8 is the source line
ck)-8- board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different source
SL64-1(SDH board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Source VC4 - -

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 440


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Source 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned


Timeslot is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
1,3-6) to VC4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subra In this example, the SL64 board in slot 7 is the sink line
ck)-7- board (see Figure 9-32). You can select a different sink
SL64-1(SDH board depending on the actual situation.
-1)

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the total service capacity that is planned
Range(e.g. is 1xVC4 (see Figure 9-33). Hence, set Source Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) to 1, because Level of the service is set
to VC4.

Step 6 Verify the service configurations by referring to 9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service
Configuration.

----End

Related Tasks
If the services are configured incorrectly, delete them by following instructions in 9.18.4.2
Deleting SDH Services.

9.18 Configuration Task Collection


This section describes basic operations involved in SDH service configuration, such as
configuring SDH cross-connections, configuring the protection subnet, configuring path
overhead for SDH services and so on.

9.18.1 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections


This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.

9.18.1.1 Querying Lower Order Cross-Connection Resources


The lower order cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment determines the lower
order access capacity of the equipment. When configuring a service, you need to consider the
lower order cross-connect capacity of the equipment.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Guests" privilege or higher.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 441


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Workbench view, double-click Main Topology to display the main topology.

Step 2 Right-click the NE in the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer.

Step 3 Select Configuration > Cross-Connect Capacity Management > Lower Order Cross-
Connect Capacity from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Query to display information such as Max. Capacity(G), Max. VC4 Count,
Remaining Source VC4 Count, Remaining Sink VC4 Count, Remaining Sink VC3
Countand Remaining Sink VC12 Count.
NOTE

Do as follows if the lower order resources are insufficient:


l Aggregate lower order timeslots.
l Replace the original cross-connect board with board of higher cross-connect capacity.
l Configure VC-4 services.

----End

9.18.1.2 Creating the SDH Service


To add or drop services between a processing board and a line board, thus realizing service
transmission on an SDH network, you need to create SDH cross-connections from the
processing board to the line board.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Guests" privilege or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Workbench view, double-click Main Topology to display the main topology.

Step 2 Select the required NE, right-click it, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Query to query the service on the NE.

Step 5 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 442


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service Configuration


According to the alarm reported on the U2000 and MSP switching status, you can check
whether the service configuration is correct. In addition, you can obtain the service switching
time from the SDH test meter.

Prerequisites
l The physical topology of the network has been created.
l NEs, boards, and fibers have been successfully created on the U2000.
l The SDH test meter has been correctly connected to the source end and the sink end, and
the corresponding service type and rate have been configured.
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.

Impact on System
None

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
When the service type and rate are set on the test meter, the "SIGNAL", "PATTERN", and
"FRAME" indicators of the 37718 SDH analyzer turn green from red and are constantly on. If
no alarm indicator is on the test meter, the SDH test meter is normally connected to the
network.

Test connection diagram


As shown in Figure 9-34, the SDH test meters are respectively connected to the source end
and sink end of the network to be tested. At the same time, the U2000 can communicate with
the network to be tested.

Figure 9-34 Test connection diagram

Source SDH Sink SDH


analyzer Source Sink analyzer
NE1 NE2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 443


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Precautions

NOTICE
Add an appropriate optical attenuator to the OUT optical interface and IN optical interface on
the board that is directly connected to the SDH meter. In this case, the damage due to
excessive optical power can be prevented for the test meter and board.

Procedure
Step 1 Respectively enable the SDH test meters at the source end and the sink end to monitor the
service switching in the network.
Step 2 In the Main Topology, click the source NE and then right-click the NE to choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu. In the board directory tree in the left window, select the
line board for service transmission and then choose Configuration > SDH Interface from
Function Tree.
Step 3 In the right window, select By Function. Choose Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Set
Laser Switch to Off.
Step 4 Click Apply. Confirm the relevant information in the displayed dialog boxes. Close the
Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE

By performing steps 2-4, you can close the laser that transmits services. In this case, the service in the
working path is interrupted and the service switching condition is met.

Step 5 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu on the U2000.

Step 6 Click OK in the Filter dialog box. In the Browse Current Alarm window, you can view the
LASER_SHUT alarm reported by the line board whose laser is shut down on the source NE,
and the R_LOS alarm reported by the line board on the sink NE.
Step 7 The service interruption time read from the RESULT TS window on the test meter is equal to
the service switching time.
NOTE

On the test meter, the LONGEST and SHORTEST parameters in the RESULT TS window record the
longest switching time and the shortest switching time when the switching is performed for multiple
times. The LAST parameter records the time of the last switching.

Step 8 Query the switching state and service state on the U2000 to check whether the configuration
is correct.
NOTE

The query of the MSP ring switching status is different from the query of the SNCP switching status.
Refer to Steps 9-11 for querying the service status on the MSP ring. Refer to Steps 12-13 for querying
the SNCP service status.

Step 9 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu on the U2000.
Step 10 Choose the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab on the right side of the SDH Protection
Subnet Common Attributes pane. Query East Status and West Status. If the status is

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 444


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

"Signal Fail Switching - Ring", "Signal Fail Switching - Span", or "Lockout of protection-
Span", the MSP switching is successful.

Step 11 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm... from the Main Menu on the U2000. If no service
alarm is reported for the working path, the service switching is successful.
NOTE

Verify the MSP ring service configuration by performing steps 10-11. The results show that the
configuration is successful.

Step 12 Click the NE to be queried in the Main Topology and then right-click the NE to choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the
Function Tree.
Step 13 Query the parameters of Current Status, Trail Status and Active Channel to check whether
the service is switched successfully.

NOTE

The service switching and SNCP service configuration are successful if the following conditions are
satisfied: 1. The current status is SF switching. 2. The status of the working service path is SF. 3. The
status of the protection service path is normal. 4. The current path is the protection path.

----End

9.18.2 Configuring the Protection Subnet


The OptiX OSN equipment supports various network level protection schemes, including the
linear MSP and ring MSP.

9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain


If a service in the chain does not need to be protected, you can configure a non-protection
chain. In this case, all the timeslots in the chain can be used to transmit the service.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l On the NM, the data of each NE must be configured, and fibers must be created
correctly.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Create Unprotected Chain from the Main
Menu.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 445


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

The Create Protection Subnet tab is displayed.

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.


Generally, enter the default name, for example, non-protection chain_1.

Step 3 Select the capacity level of the protection subnet,


for example, STM-4.

Step 4 Select Resource Sharing and Assigned by VC4 as needed.


NOTE

l If multiple protection subnets use one port of a board, you need to check the Resource Sharing
check box. If MSP Sharing is enabled, you can check the Resource Sharing check box to map a
port of the board to multiple MSPs. If different protection subnets use different ports of a board, do
not check this check box.
l Select the Assigned by VC4 option when there are different VC4s belonging to different protection
subnets to achieve MSP only in some channels protection.

Step 5 Select a node to create a non-protection chain. Double-click an NE in the Main Topology and
add it to the left node list.

Step 6 Click Next to display the Select Link dialog box. Set parameters, such as Physical Link
Information.

Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.

----End

9.18.2.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring


When services on a ring do not need protection, you can configure a non-protection (NP) ring.
All timeslots on the ring can be used to transmit services.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Create Unprotected Ring from the Main
Menu.
The Create Protection Subnet tab is displayed.

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.


The default name is usually used, for example, NP_Ring_1.

Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet,


for example, STM-4.

Step 4 Select Resource Sharing and Assigned by VC4 as needed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 446


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

NOTE

l If multiple protection subnets use one port of a board, you need to check the Resource Sharing
check box. If MSP Sharing is enabled, you can check the Resource Sharing check box to map a
port of the board to multiple MSPs. If different protection subnets use different ports of a board, do
not check this check box.
l Select the Assigned by VC4 option when there are different VC4s belonging to different protection
subnets to achieve MSP only in some channels protection.

Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
and add it to the node list in the left-hand pane.

Step 6 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link screen of the wizard. Set parameters, such as
Physical Link Information.
NOTE

l If there are multiple fibers between two NEs, select them from the Physical Link Information
drop-down list.
l If Assigned by VC4 is selected, you can select the working and protection VC4 timeslots as needed.

Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.

----End

9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet


The MS ring protection scheme is adopted in a common ring network. Normally, it is adopted
to protect a channel to transmit additional services. By running the APS protocol, it achieves
the MS level protection.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Context
l The number of nodes in an MSP ring cannot exceed 16.

NOTICE
Starting the protocol controller may interrupt the service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Create 2f_MS_SPRing from the main menu.
Click OK in the Information dialog box that is displayed. The Create Protection Subnet tab
is displayed.
NOTE
To create a four-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet >
Create 4f_MS_SPRing.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 447


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.


The default name is usually used, for example, 2f_MS SPRing_1.

Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet, for example, STM-4.

Step 4 Select Resource Sharing, Assigned by VC4, or Transoceanic Protocol as required.


NOTE

l If multiple protection subnets use one port of a board, you need to check the Resource Sharing
check box. If MSP Sharing is enabled, you can check the Resource Sharing check box to map a
port of the board to multiple MSPs. If different protection subnets use different ports of a board, do
not check this check box.
l Select the Assigned by VC4 option when there are different VC4s belonging to different protection
subnets to achieve MSP only in some channels protection. For example, for an STM-16 fiber, the
VC4s 1-4 belong to an STM-4 MSP, and VC4s 5-8 belong to a PP.
l Transoceanic Protocol specifies whether the transoceanic MS protocol is used. If the transoceanic
MS protocol is used on a transoceanic ring network and a switchover occurs, services are switched
from the source and sink nodes. This significantly shortens the service interruption duration in the
case of long-distance transmission and improves the service transmission quality. Therefore, if a
transoceanic MS is configured, the Transoceanic Protocol option must be selected for use of the
transoceanic MS protocol.

Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
to add it to the node list in the left-hand pane.
NOTE

For easy maintenance, the nodes should be added anticlockwise to the protection subnet.

Step 6 Set the attribute of the nodes. Select MSP Node in this example.

Step 7 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link screen of the wizard. Set parameters, such as
Physical Link Information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 448


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

NOTE

l If there are multiple fibers between two NEs, select them from the Physical Link Information
drop-down list.
l If Assigned by VC4 is selected, you can select the working and protection VC4 timeslots as needed.

Step 8 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.

Step 9 Right-click the protection subnet and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut
menu.

Step 10 Click the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab to check whether the protocol controller starts.
If the protocol controller is not started, select all the NEs of the protection subnet. Right-click
in the blank space and choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start from the shortcut menu. Click Yes
every time it is displayed to ensure that the status of every Protocol Controller is Protocol
Started.

Step 11 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab and set the WTR time and SD Condition as
needed. Click Apply to deliver the configuration. The WTR time of all NEs in the same
protection subnet should be the same.

NOTE

The default value is 600s.

----End

9.18.2.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet


In a chain network, an NE can protect a service in different sections of the fiber after a linear
MS protection subnet is created.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Context
Fibers that are related to a linear MSP cannot be used by other protection subnets. That is, a
linear MSP and other subnets cannot create virtual fibers together.

NOTICE
Starting the protocol controller may interrupt the service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 449


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Create 1+1 Linear MSP from the main menu.
The Create Protection Subnet tab is displayed.
NOTE

To create an M:N linear MSP subnet, choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Create M:N Linear
MSP.

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.


The default name is usually used, for example, 1+1_MSP_1.
Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet, for example, STM-4.

Step 4 Set Revertive Mode and Switching Mode based on the protection type and requirements.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 450


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

NOTE

l For M:N linear MS protection scheme, set the number of working links to N. M indicates the number of
protection links and cannot be set. Currently, the value is 1 only.
l Revertive Mode refers to the handling strategy adopted after the faulty line recovers to normal.
Non-Revertive: The service does not automatically revert to the working channel after the faulty
line recovers to normal.
Revertive: The service automatically reverts to the working channel after the faulty line recovers to
normal.
l Switching Mode refers to the switching strategy adopted after a fault occurs in the line.
Single-ended switching: To protect services, switching occurs at the receive end when the receive
end is faulty and at the transmit end when the transmit end is faulty.
Dual-ended switching: To protect services, the switching occurs at the receive and transmit ends
when either end is faulty.
l If multiple protection subnets use one port of a board, you need to check the Resource Sharing check
box. If different protection subnets use different ports of a board, do not check this check box.
l Select the Assigned by VC4 option when there are different VC4s belonging to different protection
subnets to achieve MSP only in some channels protection. For example, for an STM-16 fiber, the VC4s
1-4 belong to an STM-4 MSP, and VC4s 5-8 belong to a PP.

Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
to add it to the node list in the left-hand pane.
Step 6 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link of the wizard. Set the Physical Link Information
of Working Link and Protection Link.
Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. The Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.
Step 8 Right-click the protection subnet and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut
menu.
Step 9 Click the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab to check whether the protocol controller starts.
NOTE

If the protocol controller is not started, select all the NEs of the protection subnet. Right-click in the
blank space and choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start from the shortcut menu. Click Yes every time it is
displayed to ensure that the status of every Protocol Controller is Protocol Started.

Step 10 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab and set the WTR time and SD condition as
needed. Click Apply to deliver the configuration.

NOTE

The WTR time(s) of all NEs in the same protection subnet should be the same.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 451


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.18.3 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services


The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to
maintain the network.

9.18.3.1 Configuring Trace Byte


The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the
transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same
vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the
characters previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l When the cross-connections of the VC4 levels are created, you can query or set the trace
byte of the VC4.

Impact on System
Incorrect configuration of the trace byte causes interconnection failure.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the required NE, right-click it, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Select the type of the trace byte.

If you need to Perform the following operations


configure

J0 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >


Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from
the Function Tree.

J1 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >


Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.

Step 3 Click Options and the Options dialog box is displayed. Select the processing mode for the
read and write attributes of the overhead bytes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 452


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

NOTE

l You cannot select the mode for the J0 byte.


l The U2000 has two kinds of processing modes for the read and write attributes of the J1 byte:
Extended Mode and Standard Mode. The U2000 has a stronger processing ability for the read and
write attributes of the overhead bytes in the extended mode than in the standard mode.

Step 4 Right-click the trace byte and choose the trace byte input mode from the shortcut menu.

Figure 9-35 Configuring the J0 byte

Figure 9-36 Configuring the J1 byte

If you choose Perform the following operations

Copy All Form Click Copy All Form Received.


Received

Manual Input Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead byte
dialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode and
enter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically
copied to the table.
l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.

Step 5 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

9.18.3.2 Configuring C2 Byte


The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types
contained in the VC frame.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 453


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

l The cross-connection must be created on the NE.

Impact on System
Incorrect configuration of byte C2 causes interconnection failure.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, right-click the required NE and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
Step 2 Select the service level of the C2 byte.

If the service level of Perform the following operations


the C2 byte is

VC4 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >


Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the
Function Tree. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.

Step 3 Click Options and the Options dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set Switch Mode to Extended Mode and click OK.

NOTE

l The mode must be set to Extended Mode. You can then set the C2 byte.
l The U2000 has two kinds of processing modes for the read and write attributes of the overhead
bytes, which are Extended Mode and Standard Mode. The U2000 has a stronger processing ability
for the read and write attributes of the overhead bytes in the extended mode than in the standard
mode.

Step 5 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received.

Step 6 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 454


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

9.18.4 Modifying the Configuration Data


When you need to adjust the existing configuration data related to topologies and services,
you can modify the configuration data.

9.18.4.1 Configuring SDH Services


You can modify SDH services by using the modification function provided by the U2000 or
by deleting and re-creating the cross-connections.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Context

NOTICE
This operation interrupts the SDH services being modified.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select an SDH service and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional.

Step 3 Optional: If the service to be modified is active, deactivate the service by selecting it and
clicking Deactivate.

NOTICE
Service deactivation interrupts the service.

Step 4 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box each time it is displayed. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.

Step 6 After cross-connections are deactivated, modify SDH services by following the instructions in
Step 7 or Step 8.
NOTE

l The method in Step 7 allows you to modify the service source or sink, but requires that the source
and sink must be on the same board before and after the modification.
l If you fail to modify an SDH service using the method in Step 7, you can modify the service by
deleting and re-creating a service, as shown in Step 8.

Step 7 Optional: Modify an SDH service using Modify on the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 455


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

1. Right-click an SDH service and select Modify from the shortcut menu. The Modify
SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
2. Modify settings of Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range, and Sink
Timeslot Range.

NOTE

For VC12 or VC3 services, you can modify either Source VC4 and Source Timeslot Range
or Sink VC4 and Sink Timeslot Range. Modification of the four parameters at a time is not
allowed.
For VC4 services, you can modify either Source Timeslot Range or Sink Timeslot Range.
Modification of the two parameters at a time is not allowed.
3. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
4. Click Close.
5. Select the modified service and click Activate.
6. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
7. Click Close.

Step 8 Optional: Delete an SDH service and then create a new SDH service.
1. Select an SDH service and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
2. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
3. Click Close. The service is deleted.
4. Create the service again as required by following instructions in 9.18.1.2 Creating the
SDH Service.

----End

9.18.4.2 Deleting SDH Services


You can delete an existing SDH service.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 456


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query existing services.

Step 3 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the
service that you want to delete and click Deactivate.

NOTICE
Deactivation will interrupt services.

Step 4 Select the desired service and click Delete.

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

9.18.4.3 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service


The SNCP service features the dual fed and selective receiving function and is used to protect
cross-subnet services. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can perform
this operation to convert a configured non-protection service to an SNCP service.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

The normal service is created.

Precaution

NOTICE
Converting a normal cross-connection service to an SNCP service may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the SDH services from the NE.

Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 457


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Step 4 Select the desired normal service, click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional from
the drop-down list. Right-click a desired normal service and choose Convert to SNCP from
the shortcut menu.
NOTE

You can select multiple services to change them in batches.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 6 In the Create SNCP Service dialog box displayed, configure the protection service and click
OK.
NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the NEs that are set as the dual fed nodes and selective receiving
nodes on the source or sink, or in the cross protection subnets.

Step 7 Click Create. In the Create SDH Service dialog box displayed, configure a unidirectional
service from the service source board to the line board of another direction.
NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the NEs that are set as the dual fed nodes and selective receiving
nodes on the source or sink, or in the cross protection subnets.

Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional pass-
through services between line boards.
NOTE

You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.

----End

9.18.4.4 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service


The SNCP service is dually fed and selectively received. The services that travel across
subnets can be configured as SNCP services for protection. This topic describes how to
change an existing SNCP service to a non-SNCP service when you configure SDH services
on the per-NE basis.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The SNCP service has been created.

Impact on System

NOTICE
Changing an SNCP service to a normal service may interrupt services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 458


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, right-click the required NE and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Optional: Click Query to check the information about the NE-side cross-connections.

Step 4 Click Display and choose Expand to Unidirectional to display the service one by one.
Right-click an SNCP service and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the
shortcut menu. The protection service is then deleted.

Step 5 Optional: To convert the service in the protection path into a non-protection service, select a
cross-connection in the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, right-click the SNCP service
and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 In the Prompt dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 7 Select a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of another
direction, and click Deactivate. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. In the
Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
NOTE

You need to perform the operation on the NEs that are set as the dual fed nodes and selective receiving
nodes on the source or sink, or in the cross protection subnets.

Step 8 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-
through services between line boards.

----End

9.18.5 Modifying Protection Subnets(SDH)


This topic describes how to modify the configuration data of protection subnets.

9.18.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets


Before deleting an NE or a fiber, you need to delete the associated protection subnets.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l Trails in the protection subnets to be deleted must be deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Manage SDH Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.

Step 2 Right-click the protection subnet to be deleted and choose Delete from the NM or Delete
from the NE or Delete All from the NM from the short-cut menu.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 459


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring the SDH Services

NOTE

The methods to delete a protection subnet are as follows:


l Delete from the NM: Deletes the relationship between the protection subnet and logical systems at the
NE side, to allow deleting of fibers, re-uploading, and so on. This command is not delivered to the NE
and does not affect the services. The deleted protection subnet can be located by using the search feature.
The U2000 locates it according to the NE layer protection information.
l Delete from the NE: Deletes the protection subnet, logical systems at the NE side, and all traffic in the
protection subnet. The deleted protection subnet cannot be restored without being created again.
l Delete All from the NM: Deletes data other than fibers in the network layer. The deleted protection
subnet can be located by using the search feature. It is recommended that you do not select this option, as
a large amount of data can be deleted.

Step 3 In the Operation Prompt dialog box, click Yes. After completion, the Result dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE
If Delete from the NE is selected, you need to confirm the operation once more.

Step 4 Click Close to complete the operation.

----End

9.18.5.2 Modifying Protection Subnet Parameters


You can modify the SDH protection subnet parameters to maintain an SDH protection subnet.

Prerequisites
l The NE data must be configured and fibers must be created properly.
l SDH protection subnets must be configured.
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu. The SDH Protection Subnet Common Attributes dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select an SDH protection subnet from the left pane. The attribute information of the
protection subnet is displayed in the right pane.

Step 3 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab.

Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the SDH protection subnet.

Step 5 Click the WTR Time(s) text box and enter a value.
NOTE
By default, enter 600. You can also enter a value from 300 to 720.

Step 6 Optional: Select SD Condition.

Step 7 Click Apply to display the Result prompt box. Then click Close.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 460


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10 Configuring Ethernet
Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure Ethernet services based on the EoO, EoW and EoS
solution.This chapter describes how to configure Ethernet services based on the EoO and
EoW solution.

10.1 Supported Ethernet Service ModelsEPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN


According to ITU-T, Layer 2 Ethernet services are classified into four types: Ethernet private
line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN), and
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN).
10.2 Basic Concepts
Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts of
configuring the Ethernet service.
10.3 Configuration Procedure
Ethernet services based on the Ethernet over WDM (EoW) solution, Ethernet services based
on the Ethernet over SDH (EoS) solution and Ethernet services based on the Ethernet over
OTN (EoO) solution are configured in similar ways. The difference is that to configure
Ethernet services based on the EoO solution you need to specify the port working mode for
the TEM28 board and create ODUk cross-connections between the TEM28 board and the line
board. EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN services are configured in the same way.
10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoO Solution
The TEM28 board is used to configure Ethernet services based on the EoO solution.
10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoW Solution
The LEM24, LEX4, L4G, and TBE boards are used to configure Ethernet services based on
the EoW solution.
10.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoS Solution
The EGSH and EAS2 boards are used to configure Ethernet services based on the EoS
solution.
10.7 Operation Tasks

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 461


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

This section describes basic operations involved in Ethernet service configuration, such as
configuring the port on an Ethernet board, configuring Ethernet services, and managing the
MAC address table.
10.8 Parameters
This section describes how to configure parameters related to Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 462


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.1 Supported Ethernet Service ModelsEPL/EVPL/


EPLAN/EVPLAN
According to ITU-T, Layer 2 Ethernet services are classified into four types: Ethernet private
line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN), and
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN).
The OptiX OTN product series support transmission of EPL/EVPL or EPLAN/EVPLAN
services between the headquarters (HQ) of a company and its branches through a Layer 2
switching network. Table 10-1 shows the Ethernet service models of the equipment.

Table 10-1 Ethernet service models


Service Model Description

Private Ethernet private line (EPL) Both EPL and EVPL services are point-to-
line point (P2P) services, using a communication
service Ethernet virtual private line channel between two ends. The difference is
(EVPL) that, each EPL service exclusively uses
network resources, while multiple EVPL
services share network resources.

Private Ethernet private LAN EPLAN and EVPLAN are multipoint-to-


network (EPLAN) multipoint services but they can provide point-
service to-multipoint services. They are used to
Ethernet virtual private establish communication channels between
LAN (EVPLAN) multiple organizations. Each EPLAN service
exclusively uses network resources but
different EVPLAN services share the same
network resources.

EPL Services
Each EPL service exclusively uses physical ports and line resources. It features high costs and
high security. As shown in Figure 10-1, the EPL service between the HQ of company A and
its branch, and the EPL service between the HQ of company B and its two branches are
transmitted using their own VCTRUNK channels. In this context, "VCTRUNK channel" is a
channel that carries Ethernet services. It can be a standard ODUk or VC container, or a virtual
container consisting of multiple concatenated standard containers.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 463


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-1 EPL services

HQ of HQ of
company A company B

NE 1

NE 2
NE 3
Branch of Branch of
company A company B

Branch of
company B

Service flow for company A PORT port VCTRUNK channel

Service flow for company B VCTRUNK port

EVPL Services
Different EVPL services share the same physical ports or line resources. Therefore, the use of
EVPL services increases bandwidth utilization and reduces network costs. Different EVPL
services are distinguished by VLAN IDs or QinQ tags, ensuring high reliability. Figure 10-2
shows the application of EVPL services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 464


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-2 EVPL Services

HQ of
company A HQ of
company B

VLAN 10 VLAN 11/12

NE 1

VLAN 10

VLAN 12
VLAN 11
Branch of NE 2
company A NE 3
Branch of
company B

Branch of
company B

Service flow for company A PORT port VCTRUNK channel

Service flow for company B VCTRUNK port

As shown in Figure 10-2, EVPL services are classified into two types:
l EVPL services sharing the same PORT port: Data for multiple users is transmitted on the
same PORT port at a site and the data is isolated by VLAN IDs. As shown in Figure
10-2, the two EVPL services between the HQ of company B and its two branches are
identified as VLAN 11 and VLAN 12, each being transmitted over a specific
VCTRUNK channel.
l EVPL services sharing the same VCTRUNK port: Data for multiple users is transmitted
over the same VCTRUNK channel and the data is isolated by VLAN IDs. As shown in
Figure 10-2, between the HQ of company A and its branch, and between the HQ of
company B and one of its branches, two EVPL services are transmitted over the same
VCTRUNK channel and identified as VLAN 10 and VLAN 11.

EPLAN Services
Each EPLAN service exclusively uses physical ports and line resources. It features high costs
and high security. As shown in Figure 10-3, each NE has one or more IEEE 802.1d virtual
bridges (VBs). Each VB creates a forwarding table that is based on MAC addresses. The
forwarding table is updated periodically using the self-learning function of the system. The
incoming Ethernet services are transmitted through different ports based on the MAC
addresses stored in the forwarding table.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 465


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-3 EPLAN Services

HQ of
company A

VCTRUNK2
VB PORT3

VCTRUNK1

NE 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
PORT3 VB VB PORT3

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

NE 2
NE 3

Branch of Branch of
company A company A

Service flow for company A VCTRUNK channel

NOTE
EPLAN services cannot form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm may occur. If necessary, run a
spanning tree protocol on the network or configure some ports mounted to VBs as SPOKEN ports as
required.

EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services can dynamically share resources between multiple points after IEEE
802.1q VBs or IEEE 802.1ad VBs are established. Unlike EPLAN services, different
EVPLAN services share the same physical ports and line resources. Therefore, the use of
EVPLAN services increases bandwidth utilization and reduces network costs. Different
EVPLAN services are distinguished by VLAN IDs, ensuring high reliability. See Figure
10-4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 466


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-4 EVPLAN Services


HQ of
company A
HQ of
VCTRUNK2 company B
PORT3 VB
PORT4
VCTRUNK1
VLAN 10
VLAN 11

VCTRUNK2
PORT3 NE 1
VB
PORT4
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
VB PORT3
PORT4
VCTRUNK1
VLAN 10

VLAN 11 VLAN 11

Branch of NE 2 VLAN 10
company A NE 3 Branch of
company B

Branch of
company B Branch of
company A

Service flow for company A VCTRUNK channel

Service flow for company B

NOTE
EVPLAN services cannot form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm may occur. If necessary, run a
spanning tree protocol on the network or configure some ports mounted to VBs as SPOKEN ports as
required.

10.2 Basic Concepts


Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts of
configuring the Ethernet service.

10.2.1 VLAN and QinQ


The QinQ technology is the basis for implementing EVPL services. QinQ technology
achieves VLAN nesting. With the increase of network users, the current number of VLAN
IDs fails to meet the network requirement. With the QinQ technology, users can be identified
through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, the VLAN is extended.

VLAN
VLANs cannot exchange their own Ethernet packets. Therefore, data can be isolated by
VLANs and network security is ensured.
To implement the VLAN function, the IEEE 802.1q protocol defines the Ethernet frame
format that contains the VLAN information. Compared with the ordinary Ethernet frame, the

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 467


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

frame with the format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol is added with a four-byte header.
See Figure 10-5 for more information.

Figure 10-5 Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.1q)

Variable
6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes length 4 bytes

Destination Source Length FCS


VLAN Data
address address /Type (CSC-32)

Type PRI CFI VID

2 bytes 2 bits 1 bit 12 bits

NOTE

The length of the data field is variable. The maximum length of the data field depends on the maximum
frame length that the equipment ports of support.

QinQ
Because Ethernet technology is deployed largely in carrier networks, which are metropolitan
area networks, implementing the 802.1Q VLAN to isolate and identifying users is limited to a
great extent. The VLAN tag domain that is defined in the IEEE 802.1Q has 12 bits, which can
represent 4K VLANs only. This cannot meet the requirements for identifying a large number
of users in metropolitan area networks. In order to increase the number of VLANs, the QinQ
technology is developed.
The QinQ technology is realized by adding a layer of 802.1Q tags to 802.1Q packets.
Therefore, the number of VLANs is increased to 4096 x 4096. With the development of the
metro Ethernet and the requirement of fine operation, QinQ double tags can be implemented
in other scenarios. The inner and outer tags can represent different information. The inner tag
(C-VLAN) represents the client and the outer tag (namely the S-VLAN) represents the
service. See Figure 10-6 for more information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 468


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-6 Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.1ad)


Frame format with the C-VLAN tag only

Destination Source Length FCS


C-VLAN Data
address address /Type (CSC-32)

6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes Variable 4 bytes


length

Frame format with both the S-VLAN and C-VLAN tags

Destination Source Length FCS


S-VLAN C-VLAN Data
address address /Type (CSC-32)

6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes Variable 4 bytes


length

10.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports


External ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal
ports on Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services to the transmission
network for transparent transmission.

External ports on Ethernet boards (that is, external physical ports) are also referred to as
client-side ports or user-side ports, and are used to access the Ethernet services on the user
side.

Internal ports on Ethernet boards (that is, internal VCTRUNKs) are also referred to as system-
side ports or backplane-side ports in certain cases, and are used to encapsulate and map
services to the WDM side.

Figure 10-7 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards

External VCTRUNK
port port
Backplane

Cross-connect
Service unit
L2 switching
processing
module
module
Cross-connect
unit

Ethernet Board

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 469


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.2.2.1 Tag Attributes


When Ethernet packets enter or exit a port on an Ethernet board, the processing mode of the
Ethernet packets is determined by tag attributes of this port.
There are three types of Ethernet ports: Tag aware, Access and Hybrid.

Table 10-2 Processing mode of Ethernet packets at ports with different tags
Directi Type of Processing Mode
on Ethernet
Packets Tag Access Hybrid
aware

Ingress Frames with Transpar Discarded Transparently transmitted


port VLAN tags ently
transmitt
ed

Frames Discarde Adds the VLAN tags that contain the default
without d VLAN ID and VLAN priority and transparently
VLAN tags transmits Ethernet packets.

Egress Frames with Transpar Strips the VLAN l If the VLAN IDs contained
port VLAN tags ently tags and transmits in the data frames are
transmitt Ethernet packets. Default VLAN ID, strips
ed the VLAN tag and
transmits Ethernet packets.
l If the VLAN IDs contained
in the data frames are not
Default VLAN ID,
transparently transmits
Ethernet packets.

NOTE

The tag setting is valid only if the following conditions are met:
l The port type is UNI.
l The entry detection function is enabled. When the Ethernet switching board works in the Ethernet
transparent transmission state and when the entry detection function is disabled, the ports
transparently transmit the received Ethernet packets regardless of whether the Ethernet packets have
the VLAN tags.

Based on the tag aware, access, and hybrid features, adhere to the following principles when
setting the tag for a port:
l If it is certain that the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment have
the VLAN tags, set the local port to the tag aware mode.
l If it is certain that the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment do not
have the VLAN tags, set the local port to the access mode.
l If it is uncertain whether the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment
have the VLAN tags, set the local port to the hybrid mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 470


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.2.2.2 Auto-negotiation
Ethernet rates and duplex modes vary according to the Ethernet port type. To prevent
interconnection failures between two Ethernet ports and simplify manual configuration, the
auto-negotiation mechanism is introduced.
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its
supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding
information that the opposite end may transfer.
The working modes of the interconnected ports on the equipment at both ends must be the
same. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. If the working mode of the port on the opposite
equipment is full duplex and if the working mode of the port on the local equipment is auto-
negotiation, the local equipment works in the half-duplex mode. That is, the working modes
of the interconnected ports at both ends are different.
NOTE

When one port is in negotiation mode and the peer port is in non-negotiation mode, the auto-negotiation
mechanism can detects only the working rate but not the duplex mode of the peer port. In this scenario,
the auto-negotiation mechanism adheres to the "downward compatible" Ethernet negotiation rule and
selects the working mode of the lowest level . As a result, the half-duplex mode is negotiated for the
local port.
Hence, when the working mode of the port on the opposite equipment is full duplex, you need
to set working mode of the port on the local equipment to full duplex.

10.2.2.3 Flow Control


When the data processing/transferring capability of the equipment fails to handle the flow
received at the port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets
due to buffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken.
The half-duplex Ethernet port applies the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. Full-
duplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplex
Ethernet function is not widely applied. Therefore, the flow control function realized by
Ethernet service boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports.
Ethernet service boards can implement two types of flow control functions: auto-negotiation
flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-negotiation Flow Control


When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, you can use the auto-negotiation
flow control function. Auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Enable dissymmetric flow control
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Enable symmetric flow control
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
l Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control
The port has the following abilities:
Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 471


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Processes the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.

Non-Auto-negotiation Flow Control


When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-auto-
negotiation flow control function. Non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the
following:
l Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Receive only
The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in
the case of congestion.
l Send and receive
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.

10.2.3 VLAN Static Multicast


VLAN static multicast services are EVPL or QinQ services forwarded based on the same
VLAN from one source port to multiple sink ports.

Introduction
VLAN static multicast services consist of multiple EVPL or QinQ services of the same
VLAN, with the same source port but different sink ports.
A VLAN static multicast is created by links of the same type and with the same parameters
except the sink port parameter. The links are member links of the VLAN static multicast
group and the sink ports of the links are the member ports of the VLAN static multicast
group. On an Ethernet board, 2*k (1 k=1024) links are used as member links of the multicast
group.
NOTE

When services are deleted from a VLAN multicast group, the matching rules of multicast services will
be updated. Therefore, the deletion of one link from a VLAN multicast group will cause a few packets
on other links in the multicast group to be lost transiently.

Table 10-3 shows network properties of source/sink ports and supported VLAN multicast

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 472


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Table 10-3 Supported VLAN multicast

Network Network Supported VLAN Multicast


Property of Property of
Source Ports Sink Ports

UNI ports UNI ports Port + VLAN1->Port + VLAN1


Port + VLAN1->Port + VLAN2

C-aware ports C-aware ports Port + CVLAN1->Port + CVLAN1


Port + CVLAN1->Port + CVLAN2

S-aware ports S-aware ports Port + SVLAN1->Port + SVLAN1


Port + SVLAN1->Port + SVLAN2

C-aware ports S-aware ports Port->Port + SVLAN


Port + CVLAN->Port + CVLAN + SVLAN

S-aware ports C-aware ports Port + SVLAN->Port


Port + CVLAN + SVLAN->Port + CVLAN

Specification
l Table 10-4 shows the number of VLAN multicast groups and the maximum number of
sink ports for different boards.
l For VLAN multicast, only unidirectional services can be configured, and network
properties sink ports must be the same .
l The sink ports for VLAN multicast cannot be added to the LAG group.

Table 10-4 Specification

Boards Number of VLAN Maximum Number Valid Value Range of


Multicast Groups of Sink Ports a VLAN ID

LEM24 1024 OptiX OSN 6800: 29 1 to 4095


OptiX OSN 8800: 27

LEX4 1024 OptiX OSN 6800: 9


OptiX OSN 8800: 7

TEM28 128 43

a: Maximum number of sink ports = Maximum number of ports - 1 (source port)

10.2.4 Virtual Bridge


A virtual bridge (VB) is the functional unit used to implement the interconnection between
two or more LANs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 473


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

VB and LP
Virtual bridge (VB) is a unique concept used with Huawei products. For Ethernet data boards
that have Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into multiple sub-
switching domains. As a result, if no services are interconnected, different VBs cannot access
each other. Each VB has an independent configuration mode and uses an independent VLAN.
Different VBs can use the same VLAN.
A VB can contain a number of logical ports (LPs). By configuring the mounting relationship,
you can mount multiple MAC ports and VCTRUNK ports to the same VB.
Figure 10-8 shows the relationship between a VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port.

Figure 10-8 Relationship between a VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port

Ethernet Board

VB1
PORT1 LP1 LP4 VCTRUNK1

PORT2 LP2 LP5 VCTRUNK2

PORT3 LP3 LP6 VCTRUNK3

Pure Bridge and Virtual Bridge


l Services of different pure bridges are isolated, but the services of the same pure bridge
are not isolated. One pure bridge is one switching domain.
l The services of different virtual bridges are isolated and the services with different
VLAN IDs in the same virtual bridge are also isolated. The switching domain of the
entire virtual bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching domains according to the
VLAN IDs.
NOTE

As shown in Figure 10-9, the same logical port may belong to one or more sub-switching domains with
different VLAN IDs. On the U2000, the same logical port can belong to multiple filtering tables for
different VLAN IDs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 474


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-9 Pure bridge and virtual bridge

VCTRUNK1 VLAN1 VCTRUNK1


PORT1 PORT1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK2
VLAN1 VLAN2
VLAN2 VCTRUNK3
PORT2 PORT2 VCTRUNK3
VLAN3 VCTRUNK4 VCTRUNK4
VCTRUNK5
PORT3 VCTRUNK5
VCTRUNK6 PORT3 VLAN3
VCTRUNK6
Pure bridge Virtual bridge

Logical port

Table 10-5 Comparison between a pure bridge and a virtual bridge


Item Pure Bridge Virtual Bridge

VLAN filtering table Does not need to be configured. Must be configured.

Ingress filtering The validity of VLAN tags is The validity of VLAN tags is
not checked. All the data frames checked. If the VLAN ID in the
that enter the bridge are VLAN tag is not the same as
considered as valid. defined in the VLAN filtering
table, the data frame is
discarded.

MAC address SVLa IVLb


learning mode

Data frame Queries the MAC address table Queries the MAC address table
forwarding mode to obtain the forwarding port to obtain the forwarding port
according to the destination according to the destination
MAC address of the data frame. MAC address and VLAN ID of
the data frame.

Broadcast range Forwards the broadcast data Forwards the broadcast frames
frames to all the ports of the to the forwarding ports defined
bridge. in the VLAN filtering table.
NOTE
To forward a Layer 2 switching service, a bridge must determine the MAC address. A bridge determines
the MAC address in one of the following ways: shared VLAN learning (SVL) or independent VLAN
learning (IVL).
l a: When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, the entry in the MAC address table is created
according to the source MAC address and the source port of the data frame. Entry is valid for all the
VLANs.
l b: When the bridge adopts the IVL learning mode, the entry in the MAC address table is created
according to the source MAC address, VLAN ID, and source port of the data frame. Entry is not
valid for all the VLANs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 475


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Types of Bridges
As listed in Table 10-6 the Ethernet boards support three types of bridges.

Table 10-6 Types of bridges


Bridge Type VLAN Filter Bridge Bridge Ingress
Table Switch Mode Learning Filtering
Mode

IEEE 802.1d No need to be SVL/Ingress SVL Disabled


bridge configured Filter Disable

IEEE 802.1q Must be IVL/Ingress IVL Enabled


bridge configured Filter Enable

IEEE 802.1ad No need to be SVL/Ingress SVL Disabled


bridge configured Filter Disable

Must be IVL/Ingress IVL Enabled


configured Filter Enable

l IEEE 802.1d bridge: This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are
in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC
addresses of the data frames.
l IEEE 802.1q bridge: This bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags.
The bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and
performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.
l IEEE 802.1ad bridge: This bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN tags
and uses the outer S-VLAN tag to isolate data frames. It supports C-aware and S-aware
ports only. The bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC address and S-VLAN
IDs of the data frames.

IEEE 802.1ad bridge


The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports ports with the C-aware and S-aware attributes only.
The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-aware ports are used to
transparently transmit the S-VLAN tag.
The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the following operation types:
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN
l Performing port mounting based on the port
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN
This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge is set to IVL/Ingree Filter Enabled.
l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-aware port are
added with the preset S-VLAN tag and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 476


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-aware port, the S-VLAN tag is
stripped.
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: The entry detection is
performed for the packets that enter the C-aware port. Then the corresponding S-VLAN
tags are added to the packets according to the mapping relationship between the C-
VLAN tags and the S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relationship does not
exist, the packets are discarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the
bridge, where the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before
the packets leave the C-aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.
NOTE

l The same C-aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped to different S-VLAN
tags but does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapped to multiple S-VLAN tags.
l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-aware port are
not filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have
the S-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-
aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering is
performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-
VLAN are discarded. Then the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering
table. When the packets leave the S-aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the
packets leave a port:
l The port is contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.
l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually
mounts the port to the bridge.
In the case of a C-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-
VLAN ID that is added when the packets enter the port.
In the case of an S-VLAN port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-
VLAN ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-aware
port is mounted based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the
legal S-VLAN IDs.

10.3 Configuration Procedure


Ethernet services based on the Ethernet over WDM (EoW) solution, Ethernet services based
on the Ethernet over SDH (EoS) solution and Ethernet services based on the Ethernet over
OTN (EoO) solution are configured in similar ways. The difference is that to configure
Ethernet services based on the EoO solution you need to specify the port working mode for
the TEM28 board and create ODUk cross-connections between the TEM28 board and the line
board. EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN services are configured in the same way.

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoO Solution


Figure 10-10 and Table 10-7 illustrate the procedure for configuring Ethernet services based
on the EoO solution.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 477


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-10 Flowchart for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoO solution
1
Configure Configure Configure Configure
Configure Configure Configure EPLAN EVPLAN EVPLAN
Ethernet EVPL (VLAN) EVPL (QinQ)
EPL services (IEEE 802.1d (IEEE 802.1q (IEEE 802.1ad
services services services bridge) services bridge) services bridge) services

2
Configure the Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure
working mode external external external external external external
of ClientLP Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports
ports

3
Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure
Configure the internal internal internal internal internal internal
mapping protocol Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports
for VCTRUNK
ports

4 Create EPL Create a Create a Create EPLAN Create


Create EPLAN
services VLAN group VLAN group services EPLAN
Create the services
services
ODUk inter-
board cross-
connections
Create EVPL Manage the Create the Create the
Create EPL
(QinQ) MAC address VLAN filter VLAN filter
services
services table table table

Modify the Modify the Manage the Manage the


QinQ type hub/spoken MAC address MAC address
area attribute table table

Modify the hub/ Modify the


spoken hub/spoken
attribute attribute

Modify the
QinQ type
area

Mandatory

Optional

Table 10-7 Procedure for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoO solution
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Mandatory
Ethernet services. Configure required Ethernet services. For details, see Procedure
for Configuring Ethernet Services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 478


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

2 Configure the Mandatory


working mode of The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in
ClientLP ports on different modes. It can work in one of the following modes:
the TEM28 board.
l ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0
l ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
l ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
l ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex

3 Configure the Optional


mapping protocol The default value is GFP-F. When Port Working Mode is
for VCTRUNK ODU0 non-convergence mode, the mapping protocol can be set
ports. to GFP-F or GFP-T.
Operations on the NMS are as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting
parameters on this tab, click Apply.

4 Create the ODUk Mandatory


inter-board cross- Create ODUk cross-connections between the TEM28 board and
connections. the line board. (The ODUk level is determined according to the
port working mode.)

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoW Solution


Figure 10-11 and Table 10-8 illustrate the procedure for configuring Ethernet services based
on the EoW solution.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 479


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-11 Flowchart for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoW solution
1
Configure Configure Configure Configure
Ethernet Configure Configure Configure EPLAN EVPLAN EVPLAN
EPL services EVPL (VLAN) EVPL (QinQ) (IEEE 802.1d (IEEE 802.1q (IEEE 802.1ad
services services services bridge) services bridge) services bridge) services

2
Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure
Create GE/10GE external external external external external external
inter-board cross- Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports
connections

Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure


internal internal internal internal internal internal
Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports

Create EPL Create a Create a Create EPLAN Create


Create EPLAN
services VLAN group VLAN group services EPLAN
services
services

Create EVPL Manage the Create the Create the


Create EPL
(QinQ) MAC address VLAN filter VLAN filter
services
services table table table

Modify the Modify the Manage the Manage the


QinQ type hub/spoken MAC address MAC address
area attribute table table

Modify the hub/ Modify the


spoken hub/spoken
attribute attribute

Modify the
QinQ type
area

Mandatory

Optional

Table 10-8 Procedure for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoW solution
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Mandatory
Ethernet services. Configure required Ethernet services. For details, see Procedure
for Configuring Ethernet Services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 480


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

2 Create GE/10GE This operation is intended for inter-board GE/10GE service


inter-board cross- convergence.
connections. l The operation is optional for the LEM24, LEX4, and L4G
boards.
l The operation is mandatory for the TBE board.
l For the LEM24 board, you can create 10GE cross-
connections to the LEX4 board only.
l For the TBE and L4G boards, you can create GE cross-
connections to various boards. For details on the boards that
the TBE and L4G boards support, see the "Configuration of
Cross-connection" section for the TBE and L4G boards in
Hardware Description.

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoS Solution


Figure 10-12 and Table 10-9 illustrate the procedure for configuring Ethernet services based
on the EoS solution.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 481


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-12 Flowchart for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoS solution
1
Configure Configure Configure Configure
Configure Configure Configure EPLAN EVPLAN EVPLAN
Ethernet EPL services EVPL (VLAN) EVPL (QinQ) (IEEE 802.1d (IEEE 802.1q (IEEE 802.1ad
services services bridge) services bridge) services bridge) services
services

2
Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure
Create cross- external external external external external external
connection for Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports
the Ethernet
services
Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure
internal internal internal internal internal internal
Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports Ethernet ports

Create EPL Create a Create a Create EPLAN Create


Create EPLAN
services VLAN group VLAN group services EPLAN
services
services

Create EVPL Manage the Create the Create the


Create EPL
(QinQ) MAC address VLAN filter VLAN filter
services
services table table table

Modify the Modify the Manage the Manage the


QinQ type hub/spoken MAC address MAC address
area attribute table table

Modify the hub/ Modify the


spoken hub/spoken
attribute attribute

Modify the
QinQ type
area

Mandatory

Optional

Table 10-9 Procedure for configuring Ethernet services based on the EoS solution
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Mandatory
Ethernet services. Configure required Ethernet services. For details, see Procedure
for Configuring Ethernet Services.

2 Configure cross- Mandatory


connection for To ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted using
the Ethernet specified timeslots on the transport link, you must create cross-
services. connection between the channels bound to VCTRUNK ports and
timeslots for the line board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 482


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services


Table 10-10 describes the difference in the procedures for configuring different Ethernet
services.

Table 10-10 Difference in the procedures for configuring different Ethernet services
Action Para Difference
meter
Invol
ved

Configure Flow Setting this parameter is mandatory only in the procedure for
external/ Contr configuring EPL services.
internal ol
Ethernet
ports. Tag l For EPL services, set Entry Detection to Disabled.
Attrib l For EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge), EVPL (VLAN), and
utes EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services, set Entry
Detection to Enabled. Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and
VLAN Priority according to the plan.
l For EVPL (QinQ) and EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
services, Tag Attributes is unnecessary.

Netwo l For EPL, EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge), EVPL (VLAN), and
rk EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services, set Port Attributes
Attrib to UNI.
utes l For EVPL (QinQ) and EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
services, set Port Attributes to C-Aware or S-Aware.

Create a - This operation is required only in the procedure for configuring


VLAN group. EoW-based EVPL (VLAN) and EVPL (QinQ) Ethernet services.
This operation is optional.

Modify the - This operation is required only in the procedures for configuring
QinQ type EVPL (QinQ) and EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) services.
area. This operation is optional.

Manage the - These operations are required only in the procedures for
MAC address configuring EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge), EVPLAN (IEEE
table. 802.1q bridge), and EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) services.
These operations are mandatory.
Modify the
hub/spoken
attribute.

Create the - This operation is required only in the procedures for configuring
VLAN filter EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad
table. bridge) services. This operation is mandatory.

The following describes the procedures for configuring EPL services, EVPL (VLAN), EVPL
(QinQ), EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge), EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge), and EVPLAN (IEEE
802.1ad bridge) services:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 483


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l Table 10-11 describes the procedure for configuring EPL services.


l Table 10-12 describes the procedure for configuring EVPL (VLAN) services.
l Table 10-13 describes the procedure for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services.
l Table 10-14 describes the procedure for configuring EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge)
services.
l Table 10-15 describes the procedure for configuring EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
services.
l Table 10-16 describes the procedure for configuring EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
services.

Table 10-11 Procedure for configuring EPL services


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


external Ethernet l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled. For
ports. ports not to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external equipment,
set Working Mode to the same value as that of the external
equipment (generally, the working mode of the external
equipment is auto-negotiation). For Ethernet ports used for
connection within the network, set Working Mode to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal to or
greater than the user-defined maximum frame length for
transmitting data flows.

Click the Flow Control tab to set parameters if the flow control
function is enabled on the external equipment to which the
Ethernet port is connected:
l When the external equipment uses the non-auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Non-Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation flow
control function, set Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control.

Set TAG Attributes.


Set Entry Detection to Disabled.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to UNI.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (External Ports).

2 Configure Set TAG Attributes.


internal Ethernet Set Entry Detection to Disabled.
ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 484


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to UNI.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (Internal Ports).

3 Creating EPL Required. Set the parameters as follows:


Services l Set Service Type to EPL.
l Set Service Direction to Bidirectional.
l Set Source Port and Sink Port according to the network
plan.
l Set Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6) and Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6) to
null.

Table 10-12 Procedure for configuring EVPL (VLAN) services


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


external Ethernet l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled. For
ports. ports not to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external equipment,
set Working Mode to the same value as that of the external
equipment (generally, the working mode of the external
equipment is auto-negotiation). For Ethernet ports used for
connection within the network, set Working Mode to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal to or
greater than the user-defined maximum frame length for
transmitting data flows.

Set TAG Attributes.


l Set Entry Detection to Disabled.
l Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority according
to the plan. Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are valid
only when TAG is Access or Hybrid.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to UNI.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (External Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 485


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

2 Configure Set TAG Attributes.


internal Ethernet l For a VLAN-based EVPL service, set Entry Detection to
ports. Enabled.
l Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority according
to the plan. Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are valid
only when TAG is Access or Hybrid.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to UNI.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (Internal Ports).

3 Create a VLAN This operation is optional.


group.

4 Create EPL Required. Set the parameters as follows:


services. l Set Service Type to EPL.
l Set Service Direction to Bidirectional.
l Set Source Port and Sink Port according to the network
plan.
l Set Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6) and Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)
according to the network plan.

Table 10-13 Procedure for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services

N Action Description
o.

1 Configure Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


external Ethernet l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled. For
ports. ports not to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external equipment,
set Working Mode to the same value as that of the external
equipment (generally, the working mode of the external
equipment is auto-negotiation). For Ethernet ports used for
connection within the network, set Working Mode to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal to or
greater than the user-defined maximum frame length for
transmitting data flows.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to C-
Aware or S-Aware.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 486


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (External Ports).

2 Configure internal Set Network Attributes.


Ethernet ports. Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to C-
Aware or S-Aware.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (Internal Ports).

3 Create a VLAN This operation is optional.


group.

4 Create EVPL Required. Set the parameters as follows:


(QinQ) services. NOTE
Before setting parameters, select Display QinQ Shared Service.
l Set Service Type to EVPL(QinQ).
l Set Service Direction to Bidirectional.
l Set Operation Type, Source Port, Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6), Source S-VLAN, Sink Port, Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)
and Sink S-VLAN according to the network plan.

5 Modify the QinQ This operation is optional.


type area. Set this parameter as required.

Table 10-14 Procedure for configuring EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge) services
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure external Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


Ethernet ports. l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to
Enabled. For ports not to be used, set Enabled/
Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to the same value as
that of the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation).
For Ethernet ports used for connection within the
network, set Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal
to or greater than the user-defined maximum frame
length for transmitting data flows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 487


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

Set TAG Attributes.


l Set Entry Detection to Enabled.
l Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
according to the plan. Default VLAN ID and VLAN
Priority are valid only when TAG is Access or
Hybrid.

For an IEEE 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN service, set


Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page to
UNI.

Advanced Attributes is optional.


For parameter details, see 10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced
Attributes (External Ports).

2 Configure internal Set TAG Attributes.


Ethernet ports. Set Entry Detection to Disabled.

l Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab
page to UNI.
l Set Bound Path. Only for EoS.
Configure bound paths according to the network plan.

3 Create EPLAN services. Required. Set the major parameters as follows:


l Set VB name according to the network plan.
l Set Bridge Type to 802.1d.
l Set Mount Port according to the network plan.
l If a VCTRUNK to which no path is bound is used as
Mount Port, configure bound paths according to the
network plan.

4 Manage Create Required if Set certain MAC address entries not to age.
the MAC VLAN The parameters need to be set according to the network
address unicast. plan.
table.
Create a Required when the use of EPLAN services needs to be
blacklist disabled on certain MAC address hosts.
entry of a The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
address.

Configure Required if you need to disable the aging function or


the aging change the aging time (5 minutes by default).
time for The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
addresses.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 488


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

5 Modify the hub/spoken This operation is mandatory when you need to change
attribute. the port mounted to the bridge, the enable/disable status
of the mounted port, and the hub/spoken attribute of the
mounted port.

Table 10-15 Procedure for configuring EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure external Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


Ethernet ports. l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to
Enabled. For ports not to be used, set Enabled/
Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to the same value as
that of the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation).
For Ethernet ports used for connection within the
network, set Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal
to or greater than the user-defined maximum frame
length for transmitting data flows.

Set TAG Attributes.


l Set Entry Detection to Enabled.
l Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
according to the plan. Default VLAN ID and VLAN
Priority are valid only when TAG is Access or
Hybrid.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page
to UNI.

To enable the broadcast packet suppression function, Set


Advanced Attributes.
Set parameters as planned. For parameter details, see
10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External
Ports).

2 Configure internal Set TAG Attributes.


Ethernet ports. Set TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
according to the plan. Default VLAN ID and VLAN
Priority are valid only when TAG is Access or Hybrid.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 489


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

l Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab
page to UNI.
l Set Bound Path. Only for EoS.
Configure bound paths according to the network plan.

3 Create EPLAN services. Required. Set the major parameters as follows:


l Set VB name according to the network plan.
l Set Bridge Type to 802.1q.
l Set Mount Port according to the network plan.
l If a VCTRUNK to which no path is bound is used as
Mount Port, configure bound paths according to the
network plan.

4 Create the VLAN filter Required.


table. Set VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) and Selected forwarding ports
according to the network plan.

5 Manage Create Required if Set certain MAC address entries not to age.
the MAC VLAN The parameters need to be set according to the network
address unicast. plan.
table.
Create a Required when the use of EPLAN services needs to be
blacklist disabled on certain MAC address hosts.
entry of a The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
address.

Configure Required if you need to disable the aging function or


the aging change the aging time (5 minutes by default).
time for The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
addresses.

6 Modify the hub/spoken This operation is mandatory when you need to change
attribute. the port mounted to the bridge, the enable/disable status
of the mounted port, and the hub/spoken attribute of the
mounted port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 490


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Table 10-16 Procedure for configuring EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) services
N Action Description
o.

1 Configure external Set Basic Attributes. Set the parameters as follows:


Ethernet ports. l For ports to be used, set Enabled/Disabled to
Enabled. For ports not to be used, set Enabled/
Disabled to Disabled.
l For Ethernet ports that are connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to the same value as
that of the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation).
For Ethernet ports used for connection within the
network, set Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l The Maximum Frame Length value must be equal
to or greater than the user-defined maximum frame
length for transmitting data flows.

Set Network Attributes.


Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab page
to C-Aware or S-Aware.

To enable the broadcast packet suppression function, Set


Advanced Attributes.
Set parameters as planned. For parameter details, see
10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External
Ports).

2 Configure internal l Set Network Attributes.


Ethernet ports. Set Port Attributes in the Network Attributes tab
page to C-Aware or S-Aware.
l Set Bound Path. Only for EoS.
Configure bound paths according to the network plan.

3 Create EPLAN services. Required. Set the major parameters as follows:


l Set VB name according to the network plan.
l Set Bridge Type to 802.1ad.
l Set Mount Port according to the network plan.
l If a VCTRUNK to which no path is bound is used as
Mount Port, configure bound paths according to the
network plan.

4 Create the VLAN filter Required if you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/
table. Ingress Filter Enable.
Set VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) and Selected forwarding ports
according to the network plan.

5 Manage Create Required if Set certain MAC address entries not to age.
the MAC VLAN The parameters need to be set according to the network
unicast. plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 491


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

N Action Description
o.

address Create a Required when usage of EPLAN services needs to be


table. blacklist disabled on certain MAC address hosts.
entry of a The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
address.

Configure Required if you need to disable the aging function or


the aging change the aging time (5 minutes by default).
time for The parameters need to be set according to the network
MAC plan.
addresses.

6 Modify the hub/spoken This operation is mandatory when you need to change
attribute. the port mounted to the bridge, the enable/disable status
of the mounted port, and the hub/spoken attribute of the
mounted port.

7 Modify the QinQ type This operation is optional.


area. Set this parameter as required.

10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoO


Solution
The TEM28 board is used to configure Ethernet services based on the EoO solution.

10.4.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services


The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of
Ethernet services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios
where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network
does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is unknown to the network carrier.

10.4.1.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 10-13 for the service requirement networking diagram. The NE1, NE2, and NE3
form a ring network. All the NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirements are as
follows:

There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPL
service exists between stations NE1 and NE2. The working mode of the bidirectional EPL
service is set to auto-negotiation, and the bidirectional EPL service does not support the
VLAN function.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 492


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-13 Networking diagram

NM

NE3

IU1- IU1-
TEM28 NE1 NE2 TEM28
IU3- IU3-
TN53NS2 TN53NS2

User1 User 2

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT7 PORT7

NG WDM
VCTRUNCK
equipment

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one TEM28 board and one TN53NS2 board.

10.4.1.2 Service Signals Flow


Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port,
and transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with
the remote node.
Figure 10-14 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPL services between stations NE1
and NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 493


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-14 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service


NE1

IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
201(ClientLP1/
User1 VCTRUNK1 ClientLP1)-1
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE2

IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
PORT7 201(ClientLP1/
User2 VCTRUNK1 ClientLP1)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.4.1.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode


This section uses an EPL service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an example to
illustrate how to configure EPL services. The process for configuring an EPL service dropped
on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000(U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EPL Service on NE1


Step 1 Configure external Ethernet ports for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
External Port.
2. Click the Basic Attribute tab.
3. Set the parameters on this tab, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see
10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).
Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EPL service of User1 occupies the
external port PORT7, and the enabling
status of PORT7 is set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 494


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The access equipment of the EPL


Negotiation service of User1 supports auto-
negotiation, and the working mode of
PORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback.

4. Click the Flow Control tab. Double-click the Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
value of the PORT7 port and choose Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control
from the drop-down list.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Disabled The port does not identify tags in data
packets.

6. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

Step 2 Configure internal Ethernet ports for the TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 495


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Disabled The port does not identify tags in data
packets.

Step 3 On the TEM28 board on NE1, create an EPL service.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Parameter Value Description

Service Type EPL The service type of User1 is EPL.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN - In this example, the EPL service does


(e.g. 1,3-6) not carry any VLAN tag. Therefore, the
parameter value is empty.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN - In this example, the EPL service does


(e.g.1, 3-6) not carry any VLAN tag. Therefore, the
parameter value is empty.

4. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

----End

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 496


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:

ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0


ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 497


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Configuring the EPL Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EPL service for user 2 on NE2 by referring to the
configuration process on NE1.

10.4.1.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l Inter- and intra-site physical and logical fiber connections have been correctly created.
l OCh trails have been searched out or created.

Procedure
1. Create a client trail as the server trail of an Ethernet private line (EPL) service.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.
b. Set the following parameters in the Create WDM Trail window:
n Level: Client
n Direction: Bidirectional
n Rate: GE
c. Set the source and sink ports based on the network plan.
i. Click Browse on the right of the Source text box. In the Select Board Port-
Source dialog box that is displayed, select the desired board as the source
board of an end-to-end (E2E) service trail.
ii. Click Working Mode Settings to set the working mode of the ClientLP1 port
to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0).
iii. Set the service access port to 101(AP1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 498


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Set the sink port in the same way.


d. Select Auto-Calculation. In Server Layer Route Details, check whether Source
and Sink of the trail are the same as planned. On the Port Attribute Settings tab,
configure the FEC types of the upstream and downstream boards.

e. Click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
2. Create a bidirectional EPL trail.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create EPL.
b. Set Port Usage Strategy to Port for the source and sink.
NOTE

Two values are available for Port Usage Strategy:


l Port: When this port usage strategy is used, transparently transmitted EPL services are
configured to implement point-to-point (P2P) communication. If this port usage strategy is
used, VLAN ID is unavailable and cannot be edited.
l Port+VLAN: When this port usage strategy is used, converged EPL services are configured
to implement P2P or point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication.
c. Click Browse to set the source and sink ports based on the network plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 499


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

d. Specify one existing client trail as the server trail of the EPL service and click Next.

e. Set port attributes in the Port Attribute Settings area as described in the following
table.

Parameter Value in This Description


Example

Port Type NE1-PORT7: UNI When Port Type is set to UNI for a
NE2-PORT7: UNI port, the port can identify the tag
attributes (including Tag Aware,
NE1-VCTRUNK1: Access, and Hybrid) of 802.1Q
UNI protocol packets.
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
UNI

Port Enabled NE1-PORT7: The EPL service between User1 and


Enabled User2 occupies PORT7 (an external
NE2-PORT7: port). Therefore, Port Enabled is set
Enabled to Enabled for PORT7.

Working Mode NE1-PORT7: Auto- The access device of the EPL service
Negotiation between User1 and User2 supports
NE2-PORT7: Auto- auto-negotiation. Therefore,
Negotiation Working Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 500


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in This Description


Example

Entry Detection NE1-PORT7: When Entry Detection is set to


Disabled Disabled for a port, the port does not
NE2-PORT7: identify tags of data packets.
Disabled
NE1-VCTRUNK1:
Disabled
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
Disabled

f. Optional: Set the information about the EPL service trail. For example, set Name
and Order No..
g. Optional: Deselect the Activate the trail check box if the created trail does not
need to be delivered to an NE.
h. Click Finish. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful.

10.4.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN)


Services
Through the virtual private line solution of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) service,
multiple users that are connected to a transmission network can share one VCTRUNK to
transmit their data without any VLAN tag. During the transmission, VLAN tags are added to
isolate data. In this manner, multiple EVPL services can share the same physical channel.

10.4.2.1 Networking Diagram


When multiple users connected to the same NE need to transmit data over the same
VCTRUNK channel, VLAN tags can be used to isolate data of different users. In this manner,
multiple EVPL services can share the same physical channel.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 10-15, NE1, NE2, and NE3 form a ring network. All the NEs
are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

Two branches of user B are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

The services of user A need to be isolated from the services of user B.

One bidirectional EVPL (VLAN) service needs to be configured between NE1 and NE2. The
working mode is auto-negotiation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 501


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-15 Networking diagram of the EVPL(VLAN) services

NM

NE3

A1
IU1- A2
NE1 NE2 IU1-
TEM28 TEM28
IU3- IU3-
TN53NS2 TN53NS2 B2
B1

PORT7 PORT7
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
PORT8 PORT8

NG WDM VCTRUNCK
equipment

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one TEM28 and one TN53NS2 board.

10.4.2.2 Service Signals Flow


The data of multiple users received from different external ports on an Ethernet board are
tagged with different VLAN IDs and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this way,
the data of different users is isolated. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags
are stripped.
Figure 10-16 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (VLAN) services between NE1
and NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 502


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-16 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL(VLAN) service


NE1

IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
UserA1 201(ClientLP1/ IN/OUT
VCTRUNK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
UserB1 ClientLP1)-1
PORT8 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE2
IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
UserA2 201(ClientLP1/ IN/OUT
VCTRUNK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
UserB2 ClientLP1)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
PORT8
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.4.2.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode


This section uses an EVPL (VLAN) service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an
example to illustrate how to configure EVPL (VLAN) services. The process for configuring
an EVPL (VLAN) service dropped on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000(U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EVPL(VLAN) Service on NE1


Step 1 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service used by userA1 and
userB1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
External Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 503


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EVPL (VLAN) service uses


PORT8: Enabled external PORT7 port for userA1 and
PORT8 port for userB1. Therefore, set
the parameter to Enabled for ports
PORT7 and PORT8.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The equipment that receives the EVPL
Negotiation (VLAN) service support the
PORT8: Auto- autonegotiation mode. Therefore, set
Negotiation Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length PORT8: 1522 used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
PORT8: Non- service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
PORT8: Non- service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

TAG PORT7: Access If TAG is set to Access for a port, only


PORT8: Access data frames carrying no VLAN tags can
enter the port. In this example, Ethernet
devices used by userA1 and userB1
does not support VLAN tags.

Default VLAN ID PORT7: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is


PORT8: 200 set to 100 on the transmission network
side for Ethernet services between
userA1 and userA2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for EVPLAN
services between userB1 and userB2.

VLAN Priority PORT7: 0 This parameter is set to the default


PORT8: 0 value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 504


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled If the equipment of users A1 and B1


does not support VLAN, you need to
enable the entry detection function to
detect whether the received packets
contain VLAN tags. In this case, Entry
Detection is set to Enabled for PORT7
and PORT8.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


PORT8: UNI processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

Step 2 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the internal Ethernet port shared by the bidirectional
services between userA1 and userA2, and the bidirectional services between userB1 and
userB2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Tag VCTRUNK1: Tag Tag aware requires that the packets at


aware the ingress and egress ports contain
VLAN tags. In this case, TAGis set to
Tag aware.

Default VLAN ID - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set VLAN Priority.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 505


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection VCTRUNK1: The port does not identify tags in data
Enabled packets.

Step 3 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service between userA1 and
userA2, and the EVPL (VLAN) service between userB1 and userB2. You need to configure
the service between ports PORT7 and VCTRUNK1 and the service between ports PORT8 and
VCTRUNK1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Parameter Value Description

Service Type EPL The service is a point-to-point private


line service.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.


PORT8

Source C-VLAN PORT7: 100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8: 200 NOTE
For EVPL services, C-VLAN tags for
different sources ports must be different.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN 100 (when the source Sets the source C-VLAN.
(e.g.1,3-6) is port PORT7) NOTE
200 (when the source For EVPL services, sink C-VLAN tags for
different sources ports must be different.
is port PORT8)

4. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

----End

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.
The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 506


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0


ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.

Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 507


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Configure the EVPL(VLAN) Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service between userA2 and userB2 on
NE2 by referring to the configuration process on NE1.

10.4.2.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l Inter- and intra-site physical and logical fiber connections have been correctly created.
l OCh trails have been searched out or created.

Procedure
1. Create a client trail as the server trail of an Ethernet private line (EPL) service.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.
b. Set the following parameters in the Create WDM Trail window:
n Level: Client
n Direction: Bidirectional
n Rate: GE
c. Set the source and sink ports based on the network plan.
i. Click Browse on the right of the Source text box. In the Select Board Port-
Source dialog box that is displayed, select the desired board as the source
board of an end-to-end (E2E) service trail.
ii. Click Working Mode Settings to set the working mode of the ClientLP1 port
to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0).
iii. Set the service access port to 101(AP1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 508


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Set the sink port in the same way.


d. Select Auto-Calculation. In Server Layer Route Details, check whether Source
and Sink of the trail are the same as planned. On the Port Attribute Settings tab,
configure the FEC types of the upstream and downstream boards.

e. Click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
2. Create an Ethernet private line (EPL) service trail between UserA1 and UserA2.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create EPL.
b. Set the source and sink of the EPL service trail and set Port Usage Strategy to
Port+VLAN for the source and sink.
NOTE

Two values are available for Port Usage Strategy:


l Port: When this port usage strategy is used, transparently transmitted EPL services are
configured to implement point-to-point (P2P) communication. If this port usage strategy is
used, VLAN ID is unavailable and cannot be edited.
l Port+VLAN: When this port usage strategy is used, converged EPL services are configured
to implement P2P or point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication.
c. Click Browse to set the source and sink ports based on the network plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 509


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

d. Specify one existing client trail as the server trail of the EPL service and click Next.

e. Set port attributes in the Port Attribute Settings area as described in the following
table.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 510


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in This Description


Example

TAG NE1-PORT7: When TAG is set to Access for a


Access port, the data frames received on the
NE2-PORT7: port do not carry VLAN tags.
Access Therefore, the Ethernet devices of
UserA1 and UserA2 do not support
NE1-VCTRUNK1: VLAN tags.
Tag aware
When TAG is set to Tag aware for a
NE2-VCTRUNK1: port, the data frames transmitted to
Tag aware and received on the port must carry
VLAN tags.

Default VLAN NE1-PORT7: 100 Based on the service plan, the VLAN
NE2-PORT7: 100 ID of the EPL service between
UserA1 and UserA2 is 100.

VLAN Priority NE1-PORT7: 0 The default value is used.


NE2-PORT7: 0

Port Type NE1-PORT7: UNI When Port Type is set to UNI for a
NE2-PORT7: UNI port, the port can identify the tag
attributes (including Tag Aware,
NE1-VCTRUNK1: Access, and Hybrid) of 802.1Q
UNI protocol packets.
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
UNI

Port Enabled NE1-PORT7: The EPL service between UserA1


Enabled and UserA2 occupies PORT7 (an
NE2-PORT7: external port). Therefore, Port
Enabled Enabled is set to Enabled for
PORT7.

Working Mode NE1-PORT7: Auto- The access device of the EPL service
Negotiation between UserA1 and UserA2
NE2-PORT7: Auto- supports auto-negotiation. Therefore,
Negotiation Working Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.

Entry Detection NE1-PORT7: The EPL service between UserA1


Enabled and UserA2 does not support VLAN
NE2-PORT7: tags. Therefore, Entry Detection is
Enabled set to Enabled for the ports to check
whether data frames on the ports
NE1-VCTRUNK1: contain VLAN tags.
Enabled
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
Enabled

f. Optional: Set the information about the EPL service trail. For example, set Name
and Order No..

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 511


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

g. Optional: Deselect the Activate the trail check box if the created trail does not
need to be delivered to an NE.
h. Click Finish. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful.
3. Refer to 2 to create an EPL service trail between UserB1 and UserB2, and set the port
attributes as described in the following table.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

TAG NE1-PORT8: Access When TAG is set to Access for a port,


NE2-PORT8: Access the data frames received on the port do
not carry VLAN tags. The Ethernet
NE1-VCTRUNK1: devices of UserB1 and UserB2 do not
Tag aware support VLAN tags.
NE2-VCTRUNK1: When TAG is set to Tag aware for a
Tag aware port, the data frames transmitted to and
received on the port must carry VLAN
tags.

Default VLAN NE1-PORT8: 200 Based on the service plan, the VLAN
NE2-PORT8: 200 ID of the EPL service between UserB1
and UserB2 is 200.

VLAN Priority NE1-PORT8:0 The default value is used.


NE2-PORT8:0

Port Type NE1-PORT8: UNI When Port Type is set to UNI for a
NE2-PORT8: UNI port, the port can identify the tag
attributes (including Tag Aware,
NE1-VCTRUNK1: Access, and Hybrid) of 802.1Q protocol
UNI packets.
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
UNI

Port Enabled NE1-PORT8: The EPL service between UserB1 and


Enabled UserB2 occupies PORT8 (an external
NE2-PORT8: port). Therefore, Port Enabled is set to
Enabled Enabled for PORT8.

Working Mode NE1-PORT8: Auto- The access device of the EPL service
Negotiation between UserB1 and UserB2 supports
NE2-PORT8: Auto- auto-negotiation. Therefore, Working
Negotiation Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 512


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in This Description


Example

Entry Detection NE1-PORT8: The EPL service between UserB1 and


Enabled UserB2 does not support VLAN tags.
NE2-PORT8: Therefore, Entry Detection is set to
Enabled Enabled for the ports to check whether
data frames on the ports contain VLAN
NE1-VCTRUNK1: tags.
Enabled
NE2-VCTRUNK1:
Enabled

10.4.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services


The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are
applicable where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into
a transmission network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of
EVPL (QinQ) services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the
services of different users from each other.

10.4.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirements
In the network shown in Figure 10-17, NE1, NE2, and NE3 form a ring network. All the NEs
are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.
Two branches of user B are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.
The services of user A need to be isolated from the services of user B.
One bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service needs to be configured between NE1 and NE2. The
working mode is auto-negotiation. NE1 adds the S-VLAN1 tag to the received frames for user
A and the S-VLAN2 tag to the received frames for user B. After stripping the S-VLAN1 and
S-VLAN2 tags from the frames, NE2 sends the frames to user A and user B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 513


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-17 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services

NM

NE3

C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1 C-VLAN1


A1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 A2
IU1- NE2 IU1-
NE1
TEM28 TEM28
IU3- IU3- B2
B1 TN53NS2 TN53NS2

PORT7 PORT7 C-VLAN1


C-VLAN1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT8 PORT8

NG WDM
VCTRUNCK
equipment

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one TEM28 and one TN53NS2 board.

10.4.3.2 Service Signal Flow


The stackable VLAN technology adds two layers of VLAN tags to data packets to identify
different packet services.
Figure 10-18 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service between NE1
and NE2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 514


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-18 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL(QinQ) service


NE1
IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
C-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 S-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1
UserA1 201(ClientLP1/ IN/OUT
VCTRUNK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
UserB1 ClientLP1)-1
PORT8 S-VLAN2 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
C-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE2
IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
C-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 S-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1
UserA2 201(ClientLP1/ IN/OUT
VCTRUNK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
UserB2 ClientLP1)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
PORT8 S-VLAN2
C-VLAN1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.4.3.3 Configuration Process


This section uses an EVPL (QinQ) service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an example
to illustrate how to configure EVPL (QinQ) services. The process for configuring an EVPL
(QinQ) service dropped on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000(U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EVPL (QinQ) Service on NE1


Step 1 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service used by userA1 and
userB1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
External Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 515


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: The EVPL (QinQ) service uses external


Enabled PORT7 port for user A1 and PORT8 port for
PORT8: user B1. Therefore, set the parameter to
Enabled Enabled for ports PORT7 and PORT8.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The equipment for receiving the EVPL
Negotiation (QinQ) service support the auto-negotiation
PORT8: Auto- mode. Therefore, set Working Mode to
Negotiation Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is used.
Length PORT8: 1522

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service, set
PORT8: Non- this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service, set
PORT8: Non- this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

4. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: C-Aware In the case of C-Aware, the port does


PORT8: C-Aware not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries C-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
C-VLAN tag.

Step 2 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the internal Ethernet port shared by the bidirectional
services between userA1 and userA2, and the bidirectional services between userB1 and
userB2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 516


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: S- In the case of S-Aware, the port does


Aware not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries S-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
S-VLAN tag.

Step 3 On the TEM28 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service between userA1 and
userA2, and the EVPL (QinQ) service between userB1 and userB2. You need to configure the
service between ports PORT7 and VCTRUNK1 and the service between ports PORT8 and
VCTRUNK1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane.
3. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
4. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Parameter Value Description

Service Type EVPL(QinQ) The service between user A1 and


userB1 is an EVPL (QinQ) service.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add the label of S-VLAN.

Source Port PORT7, PORT8 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN PORT7:100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8:100

Source S-VLAN - Data enteringthe external port carries


the C-VLAN tag but not the S-VLAN
tag.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN PORT7: 100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8: 100

Sink S-VLAN 100 (when the source Adds the S-VLAN tag.
is port PORT7)
200 (when the source
is port PORT8)

5. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.
----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 517


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.

The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:

ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0


ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 518


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Configure the EVPL (QinQ) Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service between userA2 and userB2 on
NE2 by referring to the configuration process on NE1.

10.4.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1d Bridge)
The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication
equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the
VLAN planning is unknown to the network operator.

10.4.4.1 Networking Diagram


The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
The two access nodes do not need to communicate with each other.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 10-19, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs
to communicate with F2 and F3.
l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides Ethernet optical ports that work in auto-
negotiation mode and support VLANs. VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs, however,
are unknown and may be changed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 519


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.
l Branches F2 and F3 do not need to communicate with each other.

Figure 10-19 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

NM

NE3

IU1- IU1-
TEM28 TEM28
NE2 NE4
IU3- IU3-
TN53NS2 NE1
TN53NS2
F2 F3

VCTRUNK1 IU1- VCTRUNK1


PORT7 TEM28
PORT7
IU3- IU4-
TN53NS2 TN53NS2
VB
NG WDM VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
equipment
PORT7
VCTRUNCK
F1

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one TEM28 boards that
supports the IEEE 802.1d bridge, which implements EPLAN services where user VLANs are
not limited.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one TEM28 board each. The EPL
services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.4.4.2 Service Signals Flow


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded
to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on
the WDM network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-20 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 520


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-20 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service


NE2

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
PORT7
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
User F2 VCTRUNCK1 IN/OUT
ClientLP1)-1
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE1
IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
VB VCTRUNCK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ClientLP1)-1
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
User F1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
202(ClientLP2/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
VCTRUNCK2 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ClientLP2)-1
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
IU4-TN53NS2

NE4

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
PORT7
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
User F3 VCTRUNCK1 IN/OUT
ClientLP1)-1
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.4.4.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode


At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge).
At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparently transmitted EPL
services.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Configure EPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external port used by the service of TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 521


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab.


3. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter
settings, see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).
Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled Set PORT7 to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- If the Ethernet service access


Negotiation equipment of user F1 supports the auto-
negotiation function, set the working
mode of PORT7 to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 Generally, this parameter is set to 1522


Length by default.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection PORT7: Enabled If the packets of user F1 carry VLAN


tags, you need to enable the entry
detection function to detect the VLAN
tags of packets. In this case, set this
parameter to Enabled.

TAG PORT7: Tag Aware If the service access equipment of user


F1 supports VLAN and if the
transmitted data frames carry VLAN
tags, set these parameters to Tag Aware
for PORT7 and PORT8.

Default VLAN ID - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set VLAN Priority.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 522


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Type PORT7: UNI A UNI port is connected to the


equipment on the user side because it is
provided by the service provider. This
port processes the packets with TAG
attributes specified in IEEE 802.1q. In
addition, this port identifies and
processes the VLAN information of the
received packets according to the
supported Tag Aware, Access, or
Hybrid attribute.

NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet
service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 2 Set the attributes of the internal port used by the service of TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select Internal Port.
3. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.
Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.
Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection VCTRUNK1: If the data frames of users F2 and F3


Enabled carry VLAN tags, you need to enable
the entry detection function to detect
the VLAN tags of packets. In this case,
set this parameter to Enabled.

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag For the internal port, you do not need to
Aware configure the tag header but retain the
default value, namely Tag Aware.

Step 3 Create a bridge for the TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 523


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2. Click New.
3. Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VB Name VB This parameter is a character string used to describe


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards
the packets according to the MAC addresses of the
user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of
the user packets, however, is not considered in the
learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge is used when the entire information of
the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or
when the data between the VLANs of the client does
not need to be isolated.

Bridge SVL/Ingress When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all
Switch Mode Filter Disable the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That
is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets
according to the MAC address of the user packets
only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user
packets, however, is not considered in the learning
and forwarding process.

Bridge SVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the
VLAN tags of the received packets.

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

4. Click Configure Mount....


5. In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Then,
click .
6. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
7. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 4 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, skip this step.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 524


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge. After setting the
parameters, click Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub If user F1 needs to communicate with


VCTRUNK2: Spoke users F2 and F3 respectively, set
PORT7 that accesses the services of
VCTRUNK1: Spoke user F1 to Hub. A port of the Hub
attribute can communicate with a port
of the Spoke or Hub attribute.
If user F2 does not need to
communicate with user F3, set the
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that
receive the services of users F2 and F3
to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute
cannot communicate with each other.

----End

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.
The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:
ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0
ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 525


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 526


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point
to point. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the
operations described in 10.4.1.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode.

10.4.4.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l Inter- and intra-site physical and logical fiber connections have been correctly created.
l OCh trails have been searched out or created.

Procedure
1. Create a client trail between UserF1 and UserF2 as the server trail of an Ethernet private
LAN (EPLAN) service.
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create WDM Trail.
b. Set the following parameters in the Create WDM Trail window:
n Level: Client
n Direction: Bidirectional
n Rate: GE
c. Set the source and sink ports based on the network plan.
i. Click Browse on the right of the Source text box. In the Select Board Port-
Source dialog box that is displayed, select the desired board as the source
board of an end-to-end (E2E) service trail.
ii. Click Working Mode Settings to set the working mode of the ClientLP1 port
to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0).
iii. Set the service access port to 101(AP1).

Set the sink port in the same way.


d. Select Auto-Calculation. In Server Layer Route Details, check whether Source
and Sink of the trail are the same as planned. On the Port Attribute Settings tab,
configure the FEC types of the upstream and downstream boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 527


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

e. Click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
2. Refer to 1 to create a client trail between UserF1 and UserF3 as the server trail of an
EPLAN service.
3. Create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge).
a. From the main menu, choose Service > WDM Trail > Create EPLAN.
b. In the Selected Node area, right-click and choose Add from the shortcut menu that
is displayed to add nodes based on the network plan.

c. Set VB Type of each node.


d. Specify one existing client trail as the server trail and click Next.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 528


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

e. Set port attributes in the Port Attribute Settings area as described in the following
table.
Paramet Value in This Example Description
er
NE1 NE2 NE4

TAG PORT7: Tag PORT7: Tag PORT7: Tag The access devices of
aware aware aware UserF1, UserF2, and
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK UserF3 support VLAN
1: Tag 1: Tag 1: Tag tags and the data
aware aware aware frames sent from the
access devices carry
VCTRUNK VLAN tags. Therefore,
2: Tag TAG is set to Tag
aware Aware for the ports.

Default - - - This parameter does


VLAN not need to be set if
TAG is set to Tag
Aware.

VLAN - - - This parameter does


Priority not need to be set if
TAG is set to Tag
Aware.

Port Type PORT7: PORT7: PORT7: When Port Type is set


UNI UNI UNI to UNI for a port, the
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK port can identify the
1: UNI 1: UNI 1: UNI tag attributes
(including Tag Aware,
VCTRUNK Access, and Hybrid) of
1: UNI 802.1Q protocol
packets.

Port PORT7: PORT7: PORT7: In the example,


Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled UserF1, UserF2, and
UserF3 occupy PORT7
(an external port).
Therefore, Port
Enabled is set to
Enabled for PORT7.

Working PORT7: PORT7: PORT7: The access devices of


Mode Auto- Auto- Auto- the EPLAN services of
Negotiation Negotiation Negotiation UserF1, UserF2, and
UserF3 support auto-
negotiation. Therefore,
Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 529


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Paramet Value in This Example Description


er
NE1 NE2 NE4

Entry PORT7: PORT7: PORT7: The data frames of


Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled UserF1, UserF2, and
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK UserF3 carry VLAN
1: Enabled 1: Enabled 1: Enabled tags. Therefore, Entry
Detection is set to
VCTRUNK Enabled for the ports
2: Enabled to check for VLAN
tags.

f. Optional: Set the information about the EPL service trail. For example, set Name
and Order No..
g. Optional: Deselect the Activate the trail check box if the created trail does not
need to be delivered to an NE.
h. Click Finish. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful.
4. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, skip this step.
a. Select the TEM28 board in the NE Explorer of NE1 and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the navigation tree.
b. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
c. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge. After setting the
parameters, click Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub If user F1 needs to communicate with


VCTRUNK2: Spoke users F2 and F3 respectively, set
PORT7 that accesses the services of
VCTRUNK1: Spoke user F1 to Hub. A port of the Hub
attribute can communicate with a
port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.
If user F2 does not need to
communicate with user F3, set the
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that
receive the services of users F2 and
F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke
attribute cannot communicate with
each other.

10.4.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides an LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 530


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

equipment connected to the transmission network supports VLANs or where the VLAN
planning is open to the network operator.

10.4.5.1 Networking Diagram


The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
LAN services of the two users (H and G) need to be isolated.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 10-21, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4
respectively. G2 and G3 do not need to communicate with each other.
l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4
respectively.
l The service of user G needs to be isolated from the service of user H.
l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides Ethernet electrical ports that work
in auto-negotiation mode and do not support VLANs.

Figure 10-21 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NM

PORT8 PORT8
VCTRUNK1 NE3 VCTRUNK2
PORT7 PORT7
IU1- IU1-
TEM28 TEM28
IU3- NE2 NE4 IU3-
H2 TN53NS2 NE1 TN53NS2 H3

IU1- G3
G2
TEM28
H1 IU3- IU4- G1
TN53NS2 TN53NS2
VB1 VLAN 200 VB1 VLAN 100

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2


POR8 PORT7

NG WDM
equipment VCTRUNCK

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 531


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE 1 is configured with one TEM28 board that
support the IEEE 802.1q bridge to implement EVPLAN services in which user data is
isolated.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one TEM28 board respectively. EVPL
services are configured to implement transparent transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.4.5.2 Service Signals Flow


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port
through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and the services are transparently
transmitted in the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.
Figure 10-22 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

Figure 10-22 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service


NE2

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
User H2 201(ClientLP1/
VCTRUNCK1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
User G2 ClientLP1)-1
PORT8 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE1

IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
VLAN100 OCH:1-ODU2:1
PORT7 201(ClientLP1/
User H1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
VCTRUNCK1 ClientLP1)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
VB1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
202(ClientLP2/ OCH:1-ODU2:1
User G1 VCTRUNCK2 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
PORT8 ClientLP2)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
VLAN200 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
IU4-TN53NS2

NE4

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
User H3 201(ClientLP1/
VCTRUNCK2 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
User G3 ClientLP1)-1
PORT8 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.4.5.3 Configuration Process


At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with
EVPL services only.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 532


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Configure EVPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external ports used by the services of TEM28.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog
box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enabled/ PORT7: Enabled In this example, PORT7 and PORT8 carry the
Disabled PORT8: Enabled services and Enabled/Disabled is set to
Enabled for PORT7 and PORT8.

Working PORT7: Auto-Negotiation In this example, the Ethernet service access


Mode PORT8: Auto-Negotiation equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports
the auto-negotiation mode. Therefor,
Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation
for PORT7 and PORT8.

Maximu PORT7: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default


m Frame PORT8: 1522 value 1522.
Length

MAC PORT7: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopbac PORT8: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC Loopback
k is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT7: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopbac PORT8: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
k is set to Non-Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 533


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

TAG PORT7: Access The access equipment of users G1 and H1


PORT8: Access does not support VLAN tags. Therefor, the
Ethernet access equipment transmits only the
packets without the VLAN tags. In this
example, TAG is set to Access for PORT7
and PORT8.

Default PORT7: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to


VLAN PORT8: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user G1, user G2,
and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.

VLAN - This parameter adopts the default value.


Priority

Entry PORT7: Enabled The services of user G1 and user H1 are


Detectio PORT8: Enabled EVPLAN services. Therefor, the entry
n detection function must be enabled to check
whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this
example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

Port PORT7: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,


Type PORT8: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

6. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.3 Parameters:
Advanced Attributes (External Ports).
NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet
service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 2 Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the services of TEM28.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 534


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

1. Select Internal Port.


2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter
settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,


Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter
settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The services of user G2, user G3, user H2,
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Therefor,
n the entry detection function must be enabled
to check whether the packets carry VLAN
tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set
to Enabled.

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user G2,
VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports
VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames
do not carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware for VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK4.

4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the
Advanced Attributes Parameter (External Port).
Step 3 Create a bridge for the TEM28 board on NE1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
3. Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 535


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using


one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the
contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Bridge IVL/Ingress When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the


Switch Mode Filter Enable bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are
in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching
according to the destination MAC addresses and the
VLAN IDs of the packets.

Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Enabled -

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

4. Click Configure Mount.


5. In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Then, click .
6. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
7. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.
1. Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
2. Click New.
3. Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create VLAN
dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 536


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on


the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

4. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
5. Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on


the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

6. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 5 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user G2 and user G3, skip this step.
1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,
VCTRUNK1: set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access
Spoke the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate
VCTRUNK2: with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can
Spoke communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub
PORT8: Hub attribute.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 537


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.

The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:

ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0


ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 538


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services. Complete the configuration based
on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.4.2.3 Process of
Service Configuration in Single Mode.

10.4.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)
The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks
(VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution,
which facilitates identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services.

10.4.6.1 Networking Diagram


A network operator requires that the different services sent to the transmission network be
uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 10-23, the service requirements are as follows:

l The GE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and
NE4 respectively and to the GE server at the convergence node NE1.
l The FE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and
NE4 respectively and to the FE server at the convergence node NE1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 539


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l The GE services need to be isolated from the FE services. User M does not need to
communicate with user N.
l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides Ethernet electrical
ports that work in auto-negotiation mode and support VLANs.
C-VLAN ID of the GE services: 10
C-VLAN ID of the FE services: 20
NOTE
The application scenarios where user M needs to communicate with user N are as follows:
l User M needs to communicate with user N.
l User M does not need to communicate with user N.

The operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeled
and groomed through planned S-VLANs.

l S-VLAN ID of the GE services: 100


l S-VLAN ID of the FE services: 200

Figure 10-23 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NM

C-VLAN 10 C-VLAN 10
GE GE
PORT7 NE3 PORT7
FE FE
C-VLAN 20 C-VLAN 20
IU1- IU1-
TEM28 TEM28
NE2 NE4
IU3- IU3-
TN53NS2 NE1 TN53NS2
User M User N

IU1-
TEM28
GE FE
IU3- IU4-
TN53NS2 TN53NS2
VB1 VLAN 100 VB1 VLAN 200
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT7 PORT8

NG WDM
VCTRUNCK
equipment

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one TEM28 board that support
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which GE data is
isolated from FE data.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 540


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l The GE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 10 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further
tagged with S-VLAN ID 100. When they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the
services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.
l The FE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 20 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further
tagged with S-VLAN ID 200. When they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the
services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one TEM28 board each. The EVPL
services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.4.6.2 Service Signals Flow


The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards. GE and FE services carrying different C-VLANs are tagged with different S-VLANs.
Service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
Figure 10-24 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1 ad bridge).

Figure 10-24 Service signal flow of the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
NE2

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
GE CVLAN 10 VLAN100 OCH:1-ODU2:1
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
User M PORT7 VCTRUNCK1 IN/OUT
ClientLP1)-1
FE CVLAN 20
VLAN200 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

NE1

IU1-TEM28 IU3-TN53NS2
VLAN100 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
PORT7 OCH:1-ODU2:1
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
GE VCTRUNCK1 ClientLP1)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
VB1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1
202(ClientLP2/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) IN/OUT
FE VCTRUNCK2
PORT8 ClientLP2)-1 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
VLAN200 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
IU4-TN53NS2

NE4

IU3-TN53NS2
IU1-TEM28 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
GE CVLAN 10 VLAN100 OCH:1-ODU2:1
201(ClientLP1/ OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
User N PORT7 VCTRUNCK1 IN/OUT
ClientLP1)-1
FE CVLAN 20
VLAN200 OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)

Working service of GE
WDM-side working service
Working service of FE

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 541


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.4.6.3 Configuration Process


An EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the corresponding S-VLAN filtering table
need to be created for the convergence node NE1. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be
configured with EVPL services only.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoO Solution.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Configure EVPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external ports used by the services of TEM28.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see Description of the Basic Attributes Parameter (External Port).
Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled Set PORT7 and PORT8 that carry the
PORT8: Enabled service to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The GE server and FE server support


Negotiation the auto-negotiation function. This
PORT8: Auto- parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation for
Negotiation PORT7 and PORT8.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length PORT8: 1522 used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
PORT8: Non- set this parameter to Non-Loopback
Loopback

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
PORT8: Non- set this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

4. Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For the
default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter
(External Port).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 542


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.
Parameter Value Description

Port Type PORT7: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must


PORT8: C-Aware be selected for the port when you
configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The
C-Aware port connects to the port in the
client network, identifies and processes
the packets that contain C-VLAN tags
(namely, client tags). The S-Aware port
connects to the port on the network
side, identifies and processes the
packets that contain S-VLAN tags
(namely, service tags of the network
operator). It is unnecessary to set the
parameters on the TAG Attributes tab.
If the port type

6. It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set
to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.
Step 2 Set the attributes of the internal ports for the TEM28 board on NE1 used by the service
between user M and user N.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.
Parameter Value Description

Port Type VCTRUNK1: S- When you configure the IEEE 802.1ad


Aware bridge, set the port to C-Aware or S-
VCTRUNK2: S- Aware. The C-Aware port is connected
Aware to the UNI port, identifies, and
processes the packets with the C-VLAN
tags. The S-Aware port is connected to
the network-side port, identifies, and
processes the packets with the S-VLAN
tags.

3. It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set
to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.
Step 3 Create a bridge for the TEM28 board on NE1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
> Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab.
2. Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 543


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see Description of the EPLAN Service Parameter.

Parameter Value Description

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string


used to describe the bridge. It is
recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that
contains the information about the
detailed application of the bridge.

VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports


packets with two layers of VLAN tags
and adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to
isolate services of different VLANs. It
can be mounted to the ports whose
attributes are C-Aware and S-Aware
only.

Bridge Switch IVL/Ingress Filter An IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks the


Mode Enable content of VLAN tags of the received
packets. The bridge performs Layer 2
switching based on the destination
MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs
of the packets.

Bridge Learning IVL -


Mode

Ingress Filter Enabled -

4. Click Configure Mount, the Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the mount ports in the dialog box.
NOTE
When a VC-Trunk port is mounted to different C-VLANs and S-VLANs, ensure that the values of VB
Port are the same; otherwise, a service conflict occurs.

Attr Attribute Value


ibut
e

Ope Adding S-VLAN tags based on Port and C-VLAN


ratio
n
Typ
e

VB 1 2 3 4
Port

Mou POR PORT8 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2


nt T7
Port

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 544


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Attr Attribute Value


ibut
e

C- 10 20 10 20 10 20
VL
AN

S- 100 200 100 200 100 200


VL
AN

6. Click OK, and the service mount is displayed on the interface.


7. Click OK, and the created EPLAN service is displayed on the interface.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.
1. Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering Table tab.
2. Click New.
3. Create the VLAN filtering table of the GE service.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID


is 100 for the GE service.

4. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then click Apply.
5. Create the VLAN filtering table of the FE service.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID


is 200 for the FE service.

6. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then click Apply.
Step 5 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user M and user N, skip this step.
1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 545


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub Users M and N do not need to


PORT8: Hub communicate with each other. In this
case, set VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2 that access the services of
VCTRUNK2: Spoke users M and N to the Spoke attribute.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot
communicate with each other. A port of
the Hub attribute can communicate with
a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

----End

Configure the TEM28 Board on NE1


Step 1 Configure the port working modes for the TEM28 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree. In this example, the working mode has not been planned for
the TEM28 board. You can set the working mode according to the actual network plan.

The TEM28 board processes service differently when working in different modes. It can
work in either of the following modes:

ODU0 non-convergence mode: Any->ODU0


ODU1 non-convergence mode: OTU1/Any->ODU1
ODU2 non-convergence mode: OTU2/Any->ODU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode: Any->ODUflex
2. Select the desired optical port. Double-click the Port Working Mode value of the
optical port, and select the desired working mode from the drop-down list.
3. Click Apply. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 2 Configure the encapsulation or mapping mode of TEM28 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the TEM28 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the navigation tree. Click Internal
Port.
2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting parameters on this tab, click
Apply.

Parameter Value Description

Mapping Default: After the working mode of a port is configured, the


Protocol GFP-F default mapping protocol is GFP-F. Set it to GFP-T
only when the working mode is ODU0 non-
convergence.

Check Field Default: The default value FCS32 is used.


Length FCS32

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 546


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Step 3 Configure cross-connections between the TEM28 board and TN53NS2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management in the function tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab, and click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Parameter Value

Level Set the parameter value according to the Port Working Mode
value. If Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 non-convergence
mode, set Level to ODU0.

Service Type When Level is set to ODUflex, this parameter must be set to
PACKET.

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-1-54TEM28

Source Optical Set this parameter as planned.


Port

Source Optical 1
Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot Select the NS2 board as planned.

Sink Optical Port 1(IN1/OUT1)

Sink Optical The system automatically allocate the sink optical channel. You
Channel(e.g.1,3-6) do not need to set it.

Occupied This parameter needs to be set only when Level is set to


ODUflex ODUflex.
Timeslots Valid values of this parameter are 1-8 timeslots. Set the value
according to the bandwidth of received services.

3. Click OK.

----End

Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services. Complete the configuration based
on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.4.1.3 Process of
Service Configuration in Single Mode.

10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoW


Solution
The LEM24, LEX4, L4G, and TBE boards are used to configure Ethernet services based on
the EoW solution.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 547


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

This section uses the LEM24 board as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services based
on the EoW solution. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet services on the LEX4, L4G, and TBE
boards is similar to the procedure for configuring the Ethernet services on the LEM24 board.

10.5.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services


The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of
Ethernet services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios
where the user-side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network
does not support VLANs or where the VLAN planning is unknown to the network carrier.

10.5.1.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 10-25. The NE1, NE2, and NE3 form a ring network. All the NEs function as
OADM stations. The service requirements are as follows:
There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPL
service exists between stations NE1 and NE2. The working mode of the bidirectional EPL
service is set to auto-negotiation, and the bidirectional EPL service does not support the
VLAN function.

Figure 10-25 Networking diagram

NM

NE3

NE1 NE2
IU3- IU3-
LEM24 LEM24

User1 User 2

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT7 PORT7

NG WDM VCTRUNCK
equipment

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 548


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.5.1.2 Service Signals Flow


Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port,
and transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with
the remote node.

Figure 10-26 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPL services between stations NE1
and NE2.

Figure 10-26 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service


NE1 NE2

IU3-LEM24 IU3-LEM24

PORT7 PORT7
User1 VCTRUNK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNK1 User2

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.5.1.3 Configuration Process


This section uses an EPL service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an example to
illustrate how to configure EPL services. The process for configuring an EPL service dropped
on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
Read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based
on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000 (U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EPL Service on NE1


Step 1 Configure external Ethernet ports for the LEM24 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
External Port.
2. Click the Basic Attribute tab.
3. Set the parameters on this tab, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings, see
10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 549


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EPL service of User1 occupies the
external port PORT7, and the enabling
status of PORT7 is set to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The access equipment of the EPL


Negotiation service of User1 supports auto-
negotiation, and the working mode of
PORT7 is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback.

4. Click the Flow Control tab. Double-click the Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
value of the PORT7 port and choose Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control
from the drop-down list.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Disabled The port does not identify tags in data
packets.

6. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

Step 2 Configure internal Ethernet ports for the LEM24 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 550


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Disabled The port does not identify tags in data
packets.

Step 3 Configure the EPL service on NE1.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.

Parameter Value Description

Service Type EPL The service type of User1 is EPL.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN - In this example, the EPL service does


(e.g. 1,3-6) not carry any VLAN tag. Therefore, the
parameter value is empty.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN - In this example, the EPL service does


(e.g.1, 3-6) not carry any VLAN tag. Therefore, the
parameter value is empty.

4. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

----End

Configure the EPL Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EPL service for user 2 on NE2 by referring to the
configuration process on NE1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 551


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.5.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN)


Services
Through the virtual private line solution of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) service,
multiple users that are connected to a transmission network can share one VCTRUNK to
transmit their data without any VLAN tag. During the transmission, VLAN tags are added to
isolate data. In this manner, multiple EVPL services can share the same physical channel.

10.5.2.1 Networking Diagram


When multiple users connected to the same NE need to transmit data over the same
VCTRUNK channel, VLAN tags can be used to isolate data of different users. In this manner,
multiple EVPL services can share the same physical channel.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 10-27, NE1, NE2 and NE3 form a ring network. All the NEs
are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

Two branches of user B are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

The services of user A need to be isolated from the services of user B.

One bidirectional EVPL (VLAN) service need to be configured between NE1 and NE2. The
working mode is auto-negotiation.

Figure 10-27 Networking diagram of the EVPL(VLAN) services

NM

NE3
UserA1
UserA2
NE1 NE2
IU3- IU3-
LEM24 LEM24 UserB2
UserB1

PORT7 PORT7
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
PORT8 PORT8

NG WDM
equipment VCTRUNCK

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 552


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.5.2.2 Service Signals Flow


The data of multiple users received from different external ports on an Ethernet board are
tagged with different VLAN IDs and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this way,
the data of different users is isolated. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags
are stripped.

Figure 10-28 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (VLAN) services between NE1
and NE2.

Figure 10-28 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL(VLAN) service


NE1 NE2

IU3-LEM24 IU3-LEM24
PORT7 PORT7
UserA1 UserA2
VCTRUNK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNK1
UserB1 UserB2
PORT8 PORT8

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.5.2.3 Configuration Process


This section uses an EVPL (VLAN) service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an
example to illustrate how to configure EVPL (VLAN) services. The process for configuring
an EVPL (VLAN) service dropped on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000(U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EVPL(VLAN) Service on NE1


Step 1 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service used by userA1 and
userB1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
External Port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 553


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.


3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).
Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled The EVPL (VLAN) service uses


PORT8: Enabled external PORT7 port for userA1 and
PORT8 port for userB1. Therefore, set
the parameter to Enabled for ports
PORT7 and PORT8.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The equipment that receives the EVPL
Negotiation (VLAN) service support the
PORT8: Auto- autonegotiation mode. Therefore, set
Negotiation Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length PORT8: 1522 used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
PORT8: Non- service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for
Loopback fault diagnosis. When configuring a
PORT8: Non- service, set this parameter to Non-
Loopback Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

TAG PORT7: Access If TAG is set to Access for a port, only


PORT8: Access data frames carrying no VLAN tags can
enter the port. In this example, Ethernet
devices used by userA1 and userB1
does not support VLAN tags.

Default VLAN ID PORT7: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is


PORT8: 200 set to 100 on the transmission network
side for Ethernet services between
userA1 and userA2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for EVPLAN
services between userB1 and userB2.

VLAN Priority PORT7: 0 This parameter is set to the default


PORT8: 0 value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 554


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled If the equipment of users A1 and B1


does not support VLAN, you need to
enable the entry detection function to
detect whether the received packets
contain VLAN tags. In this case, Entry
Detection is set to Enabled for PORT7
and PORT8.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


PORT8: UNI processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

Step 2 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the internal Ethernet port shared by the bidirectional
services between userA1 and userA2, and the bidirectional services between userB1 and
userB2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

Parameter Value Description

Tag VCTRUNK1: Tag Tag aware requires that the packets at


aware the ingress and egress ports contain
VLAN tags. In this case, TAGis set to
Tag aware.

Default VLAN ID - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set VLAN Priority.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 555


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection VCTRUNK1: The port does not identify tags in data
Enabled packets.

Step 3 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service between userA1 and
userA2, and the EVPL (VLAN) service between userB1 and userB2. You need to configure
the service between ports PORT7 and VCTRUNK1 and the service between ports PORT8 and
VCTRUNK1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Parameter Value Description

Service Type EPL The service is a point-to-point private


line service.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Source Port PORT7 Indicates the name of the source port.


PORT8

Source C-VLAN PORT7: 100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8: 200 NOTE
For EVPL services, C-VLAN tags for
different sources ports must be different.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN 100 (when the source Sets the source C-VLAN.
(e.g.1,3-6) is port PORT7) NOTE
200 (when the source For EVPL services, sink C-VLAN tags for
different sources ports must be different.
is port PORT8)

4. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.

----End

Configure the EVPL(VLAN) Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EVPL (VLAN) service between userA2 and userB2 on
NE2 by referring to the configuration process on NE1.

10.5.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services


The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are
applicable where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 556


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

a transmission network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of
EVPL (QinQ) services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the
services of different users from each other.

10.5.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.

Service Requirements
In the network shown in Figure 10-29, NE1, NE2 and NE3 form a ring network. All the NEs
are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:

Two branches of user A are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

Two branches of user B are located at NE1 and NE2 and need to communicate with each
other.

The services of user A need to be isolated from the services of user B.

One bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service need to be configured between NE1 and NE2. The
working mode is auto-negotiation. NE1 adds the S-VLAN1 tag to the received frames for user
A and the S-VLAN2 tag to the received frames for user B. After stripping the S-VLAN1 and
S-VLAN2 tags from the frames, NE2 sends the frames to user A and user B.

Figure 10-29 Networking diagram of the EVPL(QinQ) services

NM

C-VLAN1 NE3 C-VLAN1


S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
UserA1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 UserA2
NE1 NE2
IU3- IU3-
LEM24 LEM24 UserB2
UserB1

PORT7
C-VLAN1 PORT7 C-VLAN1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
PORT8
PORT8

NG WDM
VCTRUNCK
equipment

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 557


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, each station is configured with one LEM24 board.

10.5.3.2 Service Signal Flow


The stackable VLAN technology adds two layers of VLAN tags to data packets to identify
different packet services.

Figure 10-30 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL (QinQ) service between NE1
and NE2.

Figure 10-30 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL(QinQ) service


NE1 NE2

C-VLAN1 IU3-LEM24 IU3-LEM24 C-VLAN1


PORT7 S-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 PORT7
UserA1 UserA2
VCTRUNK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNK1
UserB1 UserB2
PORT8 S-VLAN2 S-VLAN2 PORT8
C-VLAN1 C-VLAN1

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.5.3.3 Configuration Process


This section uses an EVPL (QinQ) service dropped on NE1 and added on NE2 as an example
to illustrate how to configure EVPL (QinQ) services. The process for configuring an EVPL
(QinQ) service dropped on NE2 and added on NE1 is similar.

Prerequisite
Read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based
on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT/U2000 (U2000 is recommended)

Configure the EVPL (QinQ) Service on NE1


Step 1 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service used by user A1 and
userB1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
External Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 558


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: The EVPL (QinQ) service uses external


Enabled PORT7 port for user A1 and PORT8 port for
PORT8: user B1. Therefore, set the parameter to
Enabled Enabled for ports PORT7 and PORT8.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The equipment for receiving the EVPL
Negotiation (QinQ) service support the auto-negotiation
PORT8: Auto- mode. Therefore, set Working Mode to
Negotiation Auto-Negotiation.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is used.
Length PORT8: 1522

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service, set
PORT8: Non- this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service, set
PORT8: Non- this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

4. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Port PORT7: C-Aware In the case of C-Aware, the port does


PORT8: C-Aware not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries C-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
C-VLAN tag.

Step 2 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the internal Ethernet port shared by the bidirectional
services between users A1 and A2, and the bidirectional services between users B1 and B2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 559


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: S- In the case of S-Aware, the port does


Aware not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries S-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
S-VLAN tag.

Step 3 On the LEM24 board on NE1, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service between user A1 and user
A2, and the EVPL (QinQ) service between userB1 and userB2. You need to configure the
service between ports PORT7 and VCTRUNK1 and the service between ports PORT8 and
VCTRUNK1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
2. Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane.
3. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box
is displayed.
4. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see 10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Parameter Value Description

Service Type EVPL(QinQ) The service between user A1 and


userB1 is an EVPL (QinQ) service.

Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional


service.

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add the label of S-VLAN.

Source Port PORT7, PORT8 Indicates the name of the source port.

Source C-VLAN PORT7:100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8:100

Source S-VLAN - Data enteringthe external port carries


the C-VLAN tag but not the S-VLAN
tag.

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN PORT7: 100 Sets the source C-VLAN.


(e.g.1,3-6) PORT8: 100

Sink S-VLAN 100 (when the source Adds the S-VLAN tag.
is port PORT7)
200 (when the source
is port PORT8)

5. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.
----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 560


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configure the EVPL (QinQ) Service on NE2


According to the plan, configure the EVPL (QinQ) service between user A2 and userB2 on
NE2 by referring to the configuration process on NE1.

10.5.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1d Bridge)
The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication
equipment connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs or where the
VLAN planning is kept secret from the network operator.

10.5.4.1 Networking Diagram


The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
The two access nodes do not need to communicate with each other.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 10-31, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs
to communicate with F2 and F3.
l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides Ethernet optical ports that work in auto-
negotiation mode and support VLANs. VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs, however,
are unknown and may be changed.
NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches as follows:
l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.
l Branches F2 and F3 do not need to communicate with each other.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 561


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-31 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

NM

NE 3

IU3- IU3-
LEM24 NE 2 NE 4 LEM24
NE 1
F2 F3

VCTRUNK1 IU3- VCTRUNK1


PORT7 LEM24
PORT7

VB
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
NG WDM equipment PORT7
F1
VCTRUNCK

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 boards that
supports the IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs
are not limited.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EPL
services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.5.4.2 Service Signals Flow


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded
to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on
the WDM network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
Figure 10-32 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 562


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-32 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service


NE2
IU3-LEM24
PORT7
3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNCK1 User F2
NE1
IU3-LEM24
VCTRUNCK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1
PORT7 VB
User F1
VCTRUNCK2 4(IN4/OUT4)-1 NE4

IU3-LEM24
PORT7
3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNCK1 User F3

WDM-side working service

Working service direction

10.5.4.3 Configuration Process


At the convergence node NE1, create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At the access
nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparently transmitted EPL services.

Prerequisite
Read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based
on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Configure EPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external port used by the service of LEM24 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply. For details on parameter
settings, see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports).

Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled Set PORT7 to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- If the Ethernet service access


Negotiation equipment of user F1 supports the auto-
negotiation function, set the working
mode of PORT7 to Auto-Negotiation.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 563


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 Generally, this parameter is set to 1522


Length by default.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
set this parameter to Non-Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection PORT7: Enabled If the packets of user F1 carry VLAN


tags, you need to enable the entry
detection function to detect the VLAN
tags of packets. In this case, set this
parameter to Enabled.

TAG PORT7: Tag Aware If the service access equipment of user


F1 supports VLAN and if the
transmitted data frames carry VLAN
tags, set these parameters to Tag Aware
for PORT7 and PORT8.

Default VLAN ID - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set Default VLAN ID.

VLAN Priority - If TAG is set to Tag Aware, it is


unnecessary to set VLAN Priority.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Parameter Value Description

Port Type PORT7: UNI A UNI port is connected to the


equipment on the user side because it is
provided by the service provider. This
port processes the packets with TAG
attributes specified in IEEE 802.1q. In
addition, this port identifies and
processes the VLAN information of the
received packets according to the
supported Tag Aware, Access, or
Hybrid attribute.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 564


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet
service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 2 Configure the attribute of the internal port that F1 occupies.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select Internal Port.
3. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.

Parameter Value Description

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port


processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click Apply.
For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

Parameter Value Description

Entry Detection VCTRUNK1: If the data frames of users F2 and F3


Enabled carry VLAN tags, you need to enable
the entry detection function to detect
the VLAN tags of packets. In this case,
set this parameter to Enabled.

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag For the internal port, you do not need to
Aware configure the tag header but retain the
default value, namely Tag Aware.

Step 3 Create a bridge for the LEM24 board.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
3. Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VB Name VB This parameter is a character string used to describe


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 565


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards
the packets according to the MAC addresses of the
user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of
the user packets, however, is not considered in the
learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge is used when the entire information of
the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or
when the data between the VLANs of the client does
not need to be isolated.

Bridge SVL/Ingress When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all
Switch Mode Filter Disable the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That
is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets
according to the MAC address of the user packets
only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user
packets, however, is not considered in the learning
and forwarding process.

Bridge SVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the
VLAN tags of the received packets.

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

4. Click Configure Mount....


5. In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Then,
click .
6. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
7. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 4 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, skip this step.
1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge. After setting the
parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 566


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub If user F1 needs to communicate with


VCTRUNK2: Spoke users F2 and F3 respectively, set
PORT7 that accesses the services of
VCTRUNK1: Spoke user F1 to Hub. A port of the Hub
attribute can communicate with a port
of the Spoke or Hub attribute.
If user F2 does not need to
communicate with user F3, set the
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that
receive the services of users F2 and F3
to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute
cannot communicate with each other.

----End

Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EPL services transparently transmitted from point
to point. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the
operations described in 10.5.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services.

10.5.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service applies in cases where user-side data communication
equipment connected to the transmission network supports VLANs or where the VLAN
planning is open to the network operator.

10.5.5.1 Networking Diagram


The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
LAN services of the two users (H and G) need to be isolated.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 10-33, the service requirements are as follows:

l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4
respectively. G2 and G3 do not need to communicate with each other.
l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4
respectively.
l The service of user G needs to be isolated from the service of user H.
l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides Ethernet electrical ports that work
in auto-negotiation mode and do not support VLANs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 567


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-33 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NM

PORT8 PORT8
NE 3
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT7 PORT7
IU3- NE 2 NE 4 IU3-
LEM24 LEM24
NE 1
H2 H3

G2 G3
IU3-
H1 LEM24 G1

VB1 VLAN 200 VB1 VLAN 100


VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT8 POR7

NG WDM
equipment VCTRUNCK

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE 1 is configured with one LEM24 board that
support the IEEE 802.1q bridge to implement EVPLAN services in which user data is
isolated.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board respectively. EVPL
services are configured to implement transparent transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.5.5.2 Service Signals Flow


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port
through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently
transmitted in the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.
Figure 10-34 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 568


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-34 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service


NE2

IU3-LEM24
VLAN100 PORT7
NE1
VCTRUNCK1 User H2
3(IN3/OUT3)-1
IU3-LEM24 User G2
VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT8
PORT7
User H1 VCTRUNCK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1

VB1 NE4
User G1 VCTRUNCK2 4(IN4/OUT4)-1 IU3-LEM24
PORT8
VLAN200 VLAN100 PORT7
VCTRUNCK2 User H3
3(IN3/OUT3)-1
User G3
VLAN200 PORT8

WDM-side working service Working service direction

10.5.5.3 Configuration Process


At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with
EVPL services only.

Prerequisite
Read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services Based
on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Configure EVPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external ports used by the services of LEM24.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog
box that is displayed.

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

Enabled/ PORT7: Enabled In this example, PORT7 and PORT8 carry the
Disabled PORT8: Enabled services and Enabled/Disabled is set to
Enabled for PORT7 and PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 569


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

Working PORT7: Auto-Negotiation In this example, the Ethernet service access


Mode PORT8: Auto-Negotiation equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports
the auto-negotiation mode. Therefor,
Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation
for PORT7 and PORT8.

Maximu PORT7: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default


m Frame PORT8: 1522 value 1522.
Length

MAC PORT7: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopbac PORT8: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC Loopback
k is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT7: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopbac PORT8: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
k is set to Non-Loopback.

4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

TAG PORT7: Access The access equipment of users G1 and H1


PORT8: Access does not support VLAN tags. Therefor, the
Ethernet access equipment transmits only the
packets without the VLAN tags. In this
example, TAG is set to Access for PORT7
and PORT8.

Default PORT7: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to


VLAN PORT8: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user G1, user G2,
and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.

VLAN - This parameter adopts the default value.


Priority

Entry PORT7: Enabled The services of user G1 and user H1 are


Detectio PORT8: Enabled EVPLAN services. Therefor, the entry
n detection function must be enabled to check
whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this
example, Entry Detection is set to Enabled.

5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 570


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

Port PORT7: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,


Type PORT8: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

6. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see 10.8.3 Parameters:
Advanced Attributes (External Ports).
NOTE

The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet
service must be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.

Step 2 Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the services of LEM24.
1. Select Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter
settings, see Description of the Network Attributes Parameter.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,


Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed. For details on parameter
settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes Parameter.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 571


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parame Value in This Example Description


ter

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The services of user G2, user G3, user H2,
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Therefor,
n the entry detection function must be enabled
to check whether the packets carry VLAN
tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set
to Enabled.

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user G2,
VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports
VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames
do not carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware for VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK4.

4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the
Advanced Attributes Parameter (External Port).

Step 3 Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
3. Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using


one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the
contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Bridge IVL/Ingress When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the


Switch Mode Filter Enable bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are
in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching
according to the destination MAC addresses and the
VLAN IDs of the packets.

Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 572


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Ingress Filter Enabled -

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

4. Click Configure Mount.


5. In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT7, PORT8, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Then, click .
6. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
7. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.


1. Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
2. Click New.
3. Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create VLAN
dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on


the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

4. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
5. Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on


the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

6. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 573


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Step 5 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user G2 and user G3, skip this step.
1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,
VCTRUNK1: set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access
Spoke the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot communicate
VCTRUNK2: with each other. A port of the Hub attribute can
Spoke communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub
PORT8: Hub attribute.

----End

Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services. Complete the configuration based
on the planned parameters by referring to the operations described in 10.5.2.3 Configuration
Process.

10.5.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services


(IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)
The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private networks
(VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN solution,
thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating and grooming EVPLAN services.

10.5.6.1 Networking Diagram


A network operator requires that the different services sent to the transmission network be
uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.

Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 10-35, the service requirements are as follows:

l The GE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and
NE4 respectively and to the GE server at the convergence node NE1.
l The FE services of user M and user N are sent to the transmission network at NE2 and
NE4 respectively and to the FE server at the convergence node NE1.
l The GE services need to be isolated from the FE services. User M does not need to
communicate with user N.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 574


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides Ethernet electrical
ports that work in auto-negotiation mode and support VLANs.
C-VLAN ID of the GE services: 10
C-VLAN ID of the FE services: 20
NOTE
The application scenarios where user M needs to communicate with user N are as follows:
l User M needs to communicate with user N.
l User M does not need to communicate with user N.

Requirement of the operator requires that all services received from the user side should be
uniformly labeled and groomed through planned S-VLANs.

l S-VLAN ID of the GE services: 100


l S-VLAN ID of the FE services: 200

Figure 10-35 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NM

C-VLAN 10 C-VLAN 10
GE NE3 GE
PORT7 PORT7
FE FE
C-VLAN 20 C-VLAN 20
IU3- NE2 NE4 IU3-
LEM24 LEM24
NE1
M N

IU3-
GE FE
LEM24

VB1 VLAN 100 VB1 VLAN 200

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

PORT7 PORT8

NG WDM
equipment VCTRUNCK

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with one LEM24 board that support
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which GE data is
isolated from FE data.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 575


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l The GE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 10 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further
tagged with S-VLAN ID 100. When they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the
services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.
l The FE services tagged with C-VLAN ID 20 from NE2 and NE4 respectively are further
tagged with S-VLAN ID 200. When they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1 the
services are forwarded to the NE1 through Layer 2 switching.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with one LEM24 board each. The EVPL
services are configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

10.5.6.2 Service Signals Flow


The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards. GE and FE services carrying different C-VLANs are tagged with different S-VLANs.
Service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
Figure 10-36 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1 ad bridge).

Figure 10-36 Service signal flow of the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
NE2

IU3-LEM24
VLAN100 GE CVLAN 10
NE1
IU3-LEM24 3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNCK1 PORT7 User N

VLAN200 FE CVLAN 20
VLAN100
PORT7
GE VCTRUNCK1 3(IN3/OUT3)-1

VB1 NE4
FE VCTRUNCK2 4(IN4/OUT4)-1 IU3-LEM24
PORT8
VLAN200 VLAN100 GE CVLAN 10
3(IN3/OUT3)-1 VCTRUNCK2 PORT7 User M

VLAN200 FE CVLAN 20

Working service of GE
WDM-side working service
Working service of FE

10.5.6.3 Configuration Process


An EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the corresponding S-VLAN filtering table
need to be created for the convergence node NE1. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be
configured with EVPL services only.

Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the EoW Solution.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 576


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configure EVPLAN services on NE1


Step 1 Set the attributes of the external ports used by the services of LEM24.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Set the parameter on this tab page, and click Apply. For details on parameter settings,
see Description of the Basic Attributes Parameter (External Port).
Parameter Value Description

Port Enabled PORT7: Enabled Set PORT7 and PORT8 that carry the
PORT8: Enabled service to Enabled.

Working Mode PORT7: Auto- The GE server and FE server support


Negotiation the auto-negotiation function. This
PORT8: Auto- parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation for
Negotiation PORT7 and PORT8.

Maximum Frame PORT7: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is


Length PORT8: 1522 used.

MAC Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
PORT8: Non- set this parameter to Non-Loopback
Loopback

PHY Loopback PORT7: Non- The loopback setting is used for fault
Loopback diagnosis. When configuring a service,
PORT8: Non- set this parameter to Non-Loopback.
Loopback

4. Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For the
default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter
(External Port).
5. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 577


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Port Type PORT7: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must


PORT8: C-Aware be selected for the port when you
configure the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The
C-Aware port connects to the port in the
client network, identifies and processes
the packets that contain C-VLAN tags
(namely, client tags). The S-Aware port
connects to the port on the network
side, identifies and processes the
packets that contain S-VLAN tags
(namely, service tags of the network
operator). It is unnecessary to set the
parameters on the TAG Attributes tab.
If the port type

6. It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set
to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.

Step 2 Set the attributes of the internal ports used by the service between user M and user N.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select
Internal Port.
2. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.

Parameter Value Description

Port Type VCTRUNK1: S- When you configure the IEEE 802.1ad


Aware bridge, set the port to C-Aware or S-
VCTRUNK2: S- Aware. The C-Aware port is connected
Aware to the UNI port, identifies, and
processes the packets with the C-VLAN
tags. The S-Aware port is connected to
the network-side port, identifies, and
processes the packets with the S-VLAN
tags.

3. It is unnecessary to set the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab. If the port type is set
to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters on the TAG Attributes are meaningless.

Step 3 Create a bridge for the LEM24 board on NE1.


1. In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
> Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab.
2. Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box is displayed.
3. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see Description of the EPLAN Service Parameter.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 578


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string


used to describe the bridge. It is
recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that
contains the information about the
detailed application of the bridge.

VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports


packets with two layers of VLAN tags
and adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to
isolate services of different VLANs. It
can be mounted to the ports whose
attributes are C-Aware and S-Aware
only.

Bridge Switch IVL/Ingress Filter An IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks the


Mode Enable content of VLAN tags of the received
packets. The bridge performs Layer 2
switching based on the destination
MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs
of the packets.

Bridge Learning IVL -


Mode

Ingress Filter Enabled -

4. Click Configure Mount, the Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the mount ports in the dialog box.
NOTE
When a VC-Trunk port is mounted to different C-VLANs and S-VLANs, ensure that the values of VB
Port are the same; otherwise, a service conflict occurs.

Attr Attribute Value


ibut
e

Ope Adding S-VLAN tags based on Port and C-VLAN


ratio
n
Typ
e

VB 1 2 3 4
Port

Mou POR PORT8 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2


nt T7
Port

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 579


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Attr Attribute Value


ibut
e

C- 10 20 10 20 10 20
VL
AN

S- 100 200 100 200 100 200


VL
AN

6. Click OK, and the service mount is displayed on the interface.


7. Click OK, and the created EPLAN service is displayed on the interface.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.
1. Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering Table tab.
2. Click New.
3. Create the VLAN filtering table of the GE service.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID


is 100 for the GE service.

4. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT7, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then click Apply.
5. Create the VLAN filtering table of the FE service.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID


is 200 for the FE service.

6. In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT8, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click


. Then click Apply.
Step 5 Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the ports mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user M and user N, skip this step.
1. Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
2. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 580


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT7: Hub Users M and N do not need to


PORT8: Hub communicate with each other. In this
case, set VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK1: Spoke VCTRUNK2 that access the services of
VCTRUNK2: Spoke users M and N to the Spoke attribute.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot
communicate with each other. A port of
the Hub attribute can communicate with
a port of the Spoke or Hub attribute.

----End

Configure EVPL services on NE2 and NE4


The Ethernet services on NE2 and NE4 are EVPL services transparently transmitted from
point to point. Complete the configuration based on the planned parameters by referring to the
operations described in 10.5.1.3 Configuration Process.

10.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoS


Solution
The EGSH and EAS2 boards are used to configure Ethernet services based on the EoS
solution.

10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board


The EPL solution allows point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services on a
private line. The solution applies to a scenario where the data communication equipment on
the client side does not support VLANs.

10.6.1.1 Networking Diagram


The data services of two users at a station need to be completely isolated and transmitted to
another station through MSTP equipment.

In the network shown in Figure 10-37, the service requirements are as follows:

l User A has two branches located at NE1 and NE2 respectively. two branches need to
communicate with each other through Ethernet. This requires a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l User B has two branches located at NE1 and NE2 respectively. two branches need to
communicate with each other through Ethernet. This requires a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The services of user A and user B must be completely isolated.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex Ethernet
ports that do not support VLANs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 581


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-37 Networking diagram for configuring EPL services

User A1 PORT1
NE1 NE2 User A2
8 8 PORT1

PORT2
User B1 PORT2 12 12
User B2
Ethernet Board 5-EGSH Ethernet Board 5-EGSH
Line Board 8-SL64 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64 Line Board 12-SL64

Service signal flow

10.6.1.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port,
and transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a
remote node.

Figure 10-38 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation for EPL services.

Figure 10-38 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board)
NE1 :EGSH NE2 :EGSH
SDH
PORT1 EPL EPL PORT1
User A1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
User A2
VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
PORT2 EPL EPL PORT2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
User B1
VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 User B2
VC4-xv:VC4-3 VC4-xv:VC4-3

l User A:
The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link is used for transmitting EPL services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board is used
to add or drop EPL services.
l User B:
The second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) and the third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link
is used for transmitting EPL services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) and third VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-3) of the EGSH board are used to add or drop EPL services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 582


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Table 10-17 Parameters of external ports (PORTs)


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled


Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-18 Parameters of internal ports (VCTRUNKs)


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Internal Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP


Protocol

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2, VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2,


VC4-3 VC4-3

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-19 EPL service parameters


Parameter EPL Service of User A EPL Service of User B

Board EGSH

Service Type EPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 583


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.6.1.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes the procedure for configuring EPL services for Ethernet switching
boards.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EPL Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EPL services for users A1 and B1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT 1 and PORT 2 on the EGSH board)
used by the service of users A1 and B1.
In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose External Port.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value in This Description


eter Example

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used to carry services of user


/ PORT2: Enabled A1, and PORT2 is used to carry services of
Disable user B1. Therefore, set this parameter to
d Enabled.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet ports for receiving/


g Mode Duplex transmitting services from/to user A1 and
PORT2: 1000M Full- user B1 support 1000M full-duplex.
Duplex Therefore, set this parameter to 1000M
Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value in This Description


eter Example

Entry PORT1: Disabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti PORT2: Disabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on The TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority parameters are invalid when this
parameter is set to Disabled. Retain
default values for these parameters.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 584


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value in This Description


eter Example

Port PORT1: UNI Only a UNI can process the tag attribute of
Attribut PORT2: UNI IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. Available
es tag attributes include Tag Aware, Access,
and Hybrid.

Set the parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab to the default values.
2. Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 on the
EGSH board) used by the service of users A1 and B1.
Choose Internal Port.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value in This Description
eter Example

Entry VCTRUNK1: Disabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti VCTRUNK2: Disabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on The TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority parameters are invalid when this
parameter is set to Disabled. Retain
default values for these parameters.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value in This Description
eter Example

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI Only a UNI can process the tag attribute of
Attribut VCTRUNK2: UNI IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. Available
es tag attributes include Tag Aware, Access,
and Hybrid.

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User Configura VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 is used for transmitting


A1 ble Ports K1 services between user A1 and user A2.
Use
r A2 Av Lev VC4-xv Services between user A1 and user A2
aila el require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore,
ble the VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
Bo
un

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 585


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value in Description


r This
Example

d Serv Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


Pat ice nal
hs Dire
ctio
n

Avai VC4-1 Set this parameter to VC4-1.


labl
e
Res
ourc
es

User Configura VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 is used for transmitting


B1 ble Ports K2 services between user B1 and user B2.
Use
r B2 Av Lev VC12 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
aila el user A1 and user A2. Therefore, the
ble VCTRUNK is bound with two VC-4s.
Bo
un Serv Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
d ice nal
Pat Dire
hs ctio
n

Avai VC4-2, In this example, set this parameter to VC4-2


labl VC4-3 and VC4-3.
e
Res
ourc
es

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Configure the EPL service between user A1 and user A2 and the EPL service between
user B1 and user B2.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
In the lower right part of the window, click New. Set the parameters in the Create
Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Click Apply.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User A1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User A2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 586


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


Direction al

Source Port PORT1 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. Set this parameter to PORT1 for
user A1.

Source - In this example, the EPL service does not


VLAN (e.g. carry any VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. Set this parameter to
VCTRUNK1 for user A1.

Sink - In this example, the EPL service does not


VLAN (e.g. carry any VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

User B1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User B2
Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction al

Source Port PORT2 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. Set this parameter to PORT2 for
user B1.

Source - In this example, the EPL service does not


VLAN (e.g. carry any VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K2 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. Set this parameter to
VCTRUNK2 for user B1.

Sink - In this example, the EPL service does not


VLAN (e.g. carry any VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

4. Configure the cross-connections from Ethernet services to the SDH links for users A1
and B1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 587


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create in the lower part of the pane on the right. Set the required parameters
in Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same. For example, if the number of
source timeslots is one, the number of
sink timeslots must be one.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User B1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User B2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 588


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value in Description


r This
Example

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 2-3 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Optional Timeslot,
Range(e.g. which is set for paths bound with
1,3-6) VCTRUNK2. For VCTRUNK 2, the
value of Optional Timeslot is VC4-2
and VC-3.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 2-3 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE2.


Configure EPL services for users A2 and user B2 by referring to step 1. Set the parameters
consistently for NE2 (user A2 and user B2) and NE1 (user A1 and B1).

----End

10.6.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services


Through the private line solution of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service, multiple users
that are connected to a transmission network through one Ethernet external port on an NE can
use different VCTRUNKs to transmit their services to different NEs or to different external
ports on one NE.

10.6.2.1 Networking Diagram


Services of multiple users are received/transmitted from/to the transmission network using an
external Ethernet port (PORT) on an NE, and are then transmitted to another NE using
different internal ports (VCTRUNKs).
Figure 10-39 shows the networking diagram. Service requirements are described as follows:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 589


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l The headquarter of user A (A1) is located at NE1, and the two branches of user A (A2
and A3) are located at NE2.
l Services of user A2 and user A3 are isolated. User A2 and user A3 communicate with
user A1 using different ports and a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A1, user A2, and user A3 provides 1000 Mbit/s full-
duplex Ethernet ports. The Ethernet equipment of user A1 supports VLANs, but the
Ethernet equipment of user A2 and user A3 does not support VLANs.
The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between A1 and A2 is 100.
The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between A1 and A3 is 200.

Figure 10-39 Networking diagram for PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

PORT1 NE1 NE2 User A2


VLAN 100 8 8 PORT1

VLAN 200 PORT2


12 12
User A1
User A3
Ethernet Ethernet
5-EGSH 5-EGSH
Board Board
Line Board 8-SL64 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64 Line Board 12-SL64

Service signal flow

10.6.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


Ethernet services that use different VLAN IDs to isolate the data of different users are
received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and
transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a
remote node.

The signal flow of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the timeslot allocation to the
PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services are shown in Figure 10-40.

Figure 10-40 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation to PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services
NE1:EGSH NE2 :EGSH
SDH

EVPL1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1


PORT1
VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 User A2
User A1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 EPL PORT2
EVPL2
VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 User A3

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 590


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

l Service between user A1 and user A2


The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link is used for transmitting EVPL
services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board is used
to add or drop EVPL services.
l Service between user A1 and user A3
The second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link is used for transmitting EVPL
services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board is
used to add or drop EVPL services.

Table 10-20 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

TAG Tag Aware - -

Entry Detection Enabled Disabled Disabled

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-21 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP


Protocol

TAG Access Access - -

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled

Default VLAN 100 200 - -


ID

VLAN Priority 0 0 - -

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 591


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Table 10-22 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services


Parameter NE1

EVPL1 EVPL2
(PORT1 (PORT1
VCTRUNK1) VCTRUNK2)

Board EGSH

Service Type EVPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT1

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 100 200

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 100 200

10.6.2.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedure for configuring EVPL services. To be specific, create
EVPL services using different VLAN IDs on NE1 to differentiate user services from the same
external port (PORT), and create EPL transparent transmission services on NE2.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPL services for user A1 on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) for user A1.
In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is required for transmitting the


/ services of user A1. Therefore, set this
Disable parameter to Enabled.
d

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 592


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet port for receiving/


g Mode Duplex transmitting services from/to user A1 is
required to support 1000M full-duplex.
Therefore, set this parameter to 1000M
Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value Description


eter

Tag PORT1: Tag aware The data frames carried by PORT1 must
carry VLAN tags. Therefore, set this
parameter to Tag Aware.

Default - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


VLAN parameter does not need to be configured.
ID

VLAN - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


Priority parameter does not need to be configured.

Entry PORT1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value Description


eter

Port PORT1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Configure the attributes of internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 on EGSH
boards) for the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user A1
and user A3.
Select Internal Port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 593


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value Description


eter

Tag VCTRUNK1: Access The Ethernet equipment of user A2 and


VCTRUNK2: Access user A3 does not support VLANs.
Therefore, set this parameter to Access,
which does not require data frames to carry
VLAN tags.

Default VCTRUNK1: 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN VCTRUNK2: 200 transmission network for transmitting
ID Ethernet services between user A1 and
user A2.
The VLAN ID 200 is required on the
transmission network for transmitting
Ethernet services between user A1 and
user A3.

VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 Retain the default value for this parameter.


Priority VCTRUNK2: 0

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti VCTRUNK2: Enabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value Description


eter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut VCTRUNK2: UNI the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.

User Parameter Value Description

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 is used for transmitting


A1 e Ports K1 services between user A1 and user A2.
Use
r A2 Availa Le VC4-xv Services between user A1 and user A2
ble ve require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore,
Bound l the VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
Paths

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 594


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Se Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


rvi nal
ce
Di
re
cti
on

Av VC4-1 Set this parameter to VC4-1.


ail
ab
le
Re
so
ur
ce
s

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 is used for transmitting


A1 e Ports K2 services between user A1 and user A3.
Use
r A3 Availa Le VC4-xv 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
ble ve user A1 and user A3. Therefore, the
Bound l VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
Paths
Se Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
rvi nal
ce
Di
re
cti
on

Av VC4-2 Set this parameter to VC4-2.


ail
ab
le
Re
so
ur
ce
s

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Configure the EPL service between user A1 and user A2 and the EPL service between
user A1 and user A2.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
In the lower right part of the window, click New. Set the parameters in the Create
Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 595


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

User A1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User A2
Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction al

Source Port PORT1 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. The external port used by the
services between user A1 and user A2 is
PORT1.

Source 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required for


VLAN (e.g. transmitting Ethernet services between user
1, 3-6) A1 and user A2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. The internal port used by the
services between user A1 and user A2 is
VCTRUNK1.

Sink 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required for


VLAN (e.g. transmitting Ethernet services between user
1, 3-6) A1 and user A2.

User A1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User A3
Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction al

Source Port PORT1 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. The external port used by the
services between user A1 and user A3 is
PORT1.

Source 200 The VLAN ID 200 is required for


VLAN (e.g. transmitting Ethernet services between user
1, 3-6) A1 and user A3.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K2 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. The internal port used by the
services between user A1 and user A3 is
VCTRUNK2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 596


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Sink 200 The VLAN ID 200 is required for


VLAN (e.g. transmitting Ethernet services between user
1, 3-6) A1 and user A3.

4. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for the service
between user A1 and A2, and the service between A1 and A3.
In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create in the lower part of the pane on the right. Set the required parameters
in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A3 with a VCTRUNK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 597


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 2 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2.


NOTE
The type of Ethernet services to be configured on NE2 is EPL. Configure EPL services by referring to
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.

----End

10.6.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services


Through the virtual private line solution of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) service,
multiple users that are connected to a transmission network can share one VCTRUNK to
transmit their data without any VLAN tag. During the transmission, VLAN tags are added to
the data for isolation purpose, so bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.

10.6.3.1 Networking Diagram


The data of multiple Ethernet users received from the same station is transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this way, bandwidth is shared on
the SDH side.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 598


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

In the network shown in Figure 10-41, the service requirements are as follows:
l User A has two branches (A1 and A2) located respectively at NE1 and NE2. User B also
has two branches (B1 and B2) located respectively at NE1 and NE2. The branches of
each user need to communicate with each other.
l Services of user A and user B are isolated. User A and user B share a 100 Mbit/s
bandwidth because traffic peak time of the users does not overlap.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex Ethernet
ports that do not support VLANs.
l The VLAN ID 100 is added when services of user A enter the transmission network, and
stripped when the services leave the transmission network.
l The VLAN ID 200 is added when services of user B enter the transmission network, and
stripped when the services leave the transmission network.

Figure 10-41 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)


services

VLAN=100
VLAN=100
User A1 PORT1
NE1 NE2 User A2
VLAN=200
8 8 PORT1
PORT2

User B1 PORT2 12 12 VLAN=200


User B2
Ethernet Board 5-EGSH Ethernet Board 5-EGSH
Line Board 8-SL64 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64 Line Board 12-SL64

Service signal flow

10.6.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The data of multiple users received from different external ports on an Ethernet board are
tagged with different VLAN IDs and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this way,
the data of different users is isolated. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags
are stripped.
The signal flow of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the timeslot allocation
to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services are shown in Figure 10-42.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 599


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-42 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation to VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)
services
NE1:EGSH NE2:EGSH
SDH
PORT1 PORT1
UserA1 EVPL1 EVPL1 User A2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT2 PORT2
VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User B1 EVPL2 EVPL2 User B2

l The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link is used for transmitting the EVPL
services. User A and user B share VCTRUNK1 on the SDH link.
l For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board is used to
add or drop EPL services.

Table 10-23 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled


Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522


Frame Length

TAG Access Access Access Access

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default VLAN 100 200 100 200


ID

VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-24 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol GFP GFP

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 600


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter NE1 NE2

TAG Tag aware Tag aware

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Attributes UNI UNI

Table 10-25 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services


Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2


PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Board EGSH EGSH

Service Type EVPL EVPL

Service Bidirectional Bidirectional


Direction

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C- 100 200 100 200


VLAN (e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 100 200 100 200


(e.g. 1,3-6)

10.6.3.3 Configuration Process


Both the source and sink nodes require Ethernet switching boards for you to create EVPL
services of different VLAN IDs. In this way, the packets received from different external ports
are added with different VLAN tags. As a result, the packets are isolated when they are
transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) for user
A1 and user B1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 601


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is required for transmitting the


/ PORT2: Enabled services of user A1. PORT2 is required for
Disable transmitting the services of user B1.
d Therefore, set this parameter to Enabled.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet port for receiving/


g Mode Duplex transmitting services from/to user A1
PORT2: 1000M Full- supports 1000M full-duplex. Therefore, set
Duplex this parameter to 1000M Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag PORT1: Access Ethernet ports of user A1 and user B1 do


PORT2: Access not support VLANs. Therefore, set this
parameter to Access.

Default PORT1: 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN PORT2: 200 transmission network for transmitting
ID Ethernet services between user A1 and
user A2.
The VLAN ID 200 is required on the
transmission network for transmitting
Ethernet services between user B1 and
user B2.

VLAN PORT1: 0 Retain the default value for this parameter.


Priority PORT2: 0

Entry PORT1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti PORT2: Enabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 602


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

Port PORT1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut PORT2: UNI the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) for services
between user A1 and user A2 and between user B1 and user B2.
Select Internal Port.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag VCTRUNK1: Tag The data frames carried by VCTRUNK1


Aware are required to carry VLAN tags.
Therefore, set this parameter to Tag
Aware.

Default - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


VLAN parameter does not need to be configured.
ID

VLAN - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


Priority parameter does not need to be configured.

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 603


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.
User Parameter Value Description

User Configurab VCTRUN Services between user A1 and user A2 and


A1 le Ports K1 between user B1 and user B2 need to share
Use VCTRUNK1.
r A2
Avai Lev VC4-xv Services between user A1 and user A2 and
User
lable el between user B1 and user B2 share a 100
B1
Bou Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore, the
Use
nd VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
r B2
Path
s Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
vic nal
e
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-1 Set this parameter to VC4-1.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Configure the EPL service between user A1 and user A2 and the EPL service between
user B1 and user B2.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
In the lower right part of the window, click New. Set the parameters in the Create
Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Click Apply.
User Parameter Value Description

User A1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User A2
Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction al

Source Port PORT1 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. The external port used by the
services between user A1 and user A2 is
PORT1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 604


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Source 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN (e.g. transmission network for transmitting
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user A1 and user
A2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. The internal port used by the
services between user A1 and user A2 is
VCTRUNK1.

Sink 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN (e.g. transmission network for transmitting
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user A1 and user
A2.

User B1 Service EPL Set this parameter to EPL.


Type
User B2
Service Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction al

Source Port PORT2 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the PORT to the
source port. The external port used by the
services between user B1 and user B2 is
PORT2.

Source 200 The VLAN ID 200 is required on the


VLAN (e.g. transmission network for transmitting
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user A1 and user
A2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK
to the sink port. The internal port used by the
services between user B1 and user B2 is
VCTRUNK1.

Sink 200 According to the data plan, the VLAN ID 200


VLAN (e.g. is used on the transmission network for
1, 3-6) transmitting Ethernet services between user
B1 and user B2.

4. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for user A1 and
user B1.
In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 605


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.
User B1
Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.

al
User B2
Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH
Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EVPL services on NE2.

Configure EVPL services by referring to step 1.

----End

10.6.4 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services


The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are
applicable where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into
a transmission network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of
EVPL (QinQ) services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the
services of different users from each other.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 606


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.6.4.1 Networking Diagram


When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same
station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added
to isolate the services of different users from each other.

Figure 10-43 shows the networking diagram. Service requirements are described as follows:

l User A has two branches (A1 and A2) located respectively at NE1 and NE2. User B also
has two branches (B1 and B2) located respectively at NE1 and NE2. The branches of
each user need to communicate with each other.
l Services of user A and user B are isolated. User A and user B share a 200 Mbit/s
bandwidth because traffic peak time of the users does not overlap.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation
Ethernet ports. The VLAN ID 100 is used for transmitting Ethernet services on the
transmission network.
l The S-VLAN ID 10 is added when services of user A enter the transmission network,
and stripped when the services leave the transmission network.
l The S-VLAN ID 20 is added when services of user B enter the transmission network,
and stripped when the services leave the transmission network.

Figure 10-43 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services

C-VLAN=100
S-VLAN=10 C-VLAN=100
S-VLAN=10
C-VLAN=100 C-VLAN=100
S-VLAN=20 S-VLAN=20

User A1
NE1 NE2 User A2
PORT1
8 8 PORT1
PORT2

User B1 PORT2 12 12
User B2
Ethernet Board 5-EGSH Ethernet Board 5-EGSH
Line Board 8-SL64 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64 Line Board 12-SL64

Service signal flow

10.6.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different
external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are
added to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,
the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink
node, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 607


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-44 shows the signal flow of the EVPL (QinQ) services and the timeslot allocation
to the EVPL (QinQ) services.

Figure 10-44 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation for EVPL (QinQ) services
NE1:EGSH SDH NE2:EGSH

PORT1 PORT1 User A2


User A1 EVPL1 EVPL1
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VLAN 100
PORT2 PORT2
User B1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 EVPL2
EVPL2 User B2
VLAN 100 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2
VLAN 100

PORT VCTRUNK
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

User A1 C-VLAN(100) S-VLAN(10) C-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(100)

User B1 C-VLAN(100) S-VLAN(20) C-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(100)

l The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link are
used for transmitting EVPL services between NE1 and NE2. User A and user B share
VCTRUNK1 on the SDH link.
l For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and the second VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board are used to add or drop EVPL services.

Table 10-26 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled


Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522


Frame Length

Port Attributes C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware

Table 10-27 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGSH EGSH

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 608


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter NE1 NE2

Mapping Protocol GFP GFP

Port Attributes S-Aware S-Aware

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-2

Table 10-28 Parameters of EVPL (QinQ) services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2


PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Board EGSH EGSH

Service Type EVPL(QinQ) EVPL(QinQ)

Service Bidirectional Bidirectional


Direction

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add S-VLAN

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C- 100 100 100 100


VLAN (e.g.
1,3-6)

Source S- - - - -
VLAN

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 100 100 100 100


(e.g. 1,3-6)

Sink S-VLAN 10 20 10 20

C-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO


Priority

S-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO


Priority

10.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure


The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source
and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different
S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and
are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 609


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

services of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) for user
A1 and user B1.
In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value Description


eter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is required for transmitting the


/ PORT2: Enabled services of user A1. PORT2 is required for
Disable transmitting the services of user B1.
d Therefore, set this parameter to Enabled.

Workin PORT1: Auto- The Ethernet ports of user A1 and user B1


g Mode Negotiation supports the auto-negotiation mode.
PORT2: Auto- Therefore, set this parameter to Auto-
Negotiation Negotiation.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Parameter Value Description

Port PORT1: C-Aware Connected to client-side ports, C-


Attributes PORT2: C-Aware Aware ports identify and process
the packets that carry C-VLAN
tags.

The parameters on the TAG Attributes are invalid for C-Aware or S-Aware ports.
Therefore, retain default values for the parameters.
Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) for services
between user A1 and user A2 and between user B1 and user B2.
Select Internal Port.
Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 610


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

Port VCTRUNK1: S-Aware Connected to network-side ports, S-Aware


Attribut VCTRUNK2: S-Aware ports identify and process the packets that
es carry S-VLAN tags.

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User Configura VCTRUN Services between user A1 and user A2 and


A1 ble Ports K1 between user B1 and user B2 need to share
Use VCTRUNK1.
r A2
Ava Lev VC4-xv Services between user A1 and user A2 and
User
ilabl el between user B1 and user B2 share a 200
B1
e Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore, the
Use
Bou VCTRUNK is bound with two VC-4s.
r B2
nd
Path Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
s vice nal
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-1, The first and second VC-4s of the EGSH


ilab VC4-2 board are bound to the VCTRUNK.
le
Res
our
ces

The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid for C-Aware or S-
Aware ports. Therefore, retain default values for the parameters.
Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and
LCAS tab pages.
3. Configure the EPL service between user A1 and user A2 and the EPL service between
user B1 and user B2.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
In the lower part of the right pane, tick Display QinQ shared service. Click New.
In the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box, set the following parameters and
click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 611


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

User A1 Service EVPL(Qi Set this parameter to EVPL(QinQ).


Type nQ)
User A2
Service Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction nal

Operation Add S- Services between user A1 and user A2 and


Type VLAN between user B1 and user B2 carry the
same C-VLAN tag. Therefore, add S-
VLAN tags to isolate the services of user
A and user B.

Source PORT1 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


Port service between a PORT and a
VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you
set the PORT to the source port. The
external port used by the services between
user A1 and user A2 is PORT1.

Source C- 100 The C-VLAN ID of the Ethernet service


VLAN from user A is 100.
(e.g. 1,3-6)

Source S- - Ingress services at the external port carry


VLAN C-VLAN tags but does not carry S-VLAN
tags.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a
VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you
set the VCTRUNK to the sink port. The
internal port used by the services between
user A1 and user A2 is VCTRUNK1.

Sink C- 100 The C-VLAN ID of the Ethernet service


VLAN from user A is 100.
(e.g. 1,3-6)

Sink S- 10 The S-VLAN ID 10 is required for


VLAN services between user A1 and user A2.

User B1 Service Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


Direction nal
User B2
Operation Add S- Services between user A1 and user A2 and
Type VLAN between user B1 and user B2 carry the
same C-VLAN tag. Therefore, add S-
VLAN tags to isolate the services of user
A and user B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 612


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Source PORT2 When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


Port service between a PORT and a
VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you
set the PORT to the source port. The
external port used by the services between
user B1 and user B2 is PORT2.

Source C- 100 The C-VLAN ID of the Ethernet service


VLAN from user B is 100.
(e.g. 1,3-6)

Source S- - Ingress services at the external port carry


VLAN C-VLAN tags but does not carry S-VLAN
tags.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating a bidirectional Ethernet


K1 service between a PORT and a
VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you
set the VCTRUNK to the sink port. The
internal port used by the services between
user B1 and user B2 is VCTRUNK1.

Sink C- 100 The C-VLAN ID of the Ethernet service


VLAN from user B is 100.
(e.g. 1,3-6)

Sink S- 20 The S-VLAN ID 20 is required for


VLAN services between user B1 and user B2.

4. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for user A1 and
user B1.
In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.
User B1
Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.

al
User B2
Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH
Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 613


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Source 1-2 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1
and VC4-2.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1-2 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EVPL services on NE2.

Configure EVPL services by referring to step 1.

----End

10.6.5 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)


The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a multipoint-to-multipoint LAN solution.
It applies to the scenario where the client-side data communication equipment connected to
the transmission network does not support VLANs.

10.6.5.1 Networking Diagram


Ethernet Layer 2 switching needs to be implemented between a convergence node and two
access nodes. Whether communication between the two access nodes is required depends on
actual service requirements.

Figure 10-45 shows the networking diagram. Service requirements are described as follows:

l User A has three branches (A1, A2, and A3). User A1 needs to communicate with user
A2 and user A3. The bandwidth for services between user A1 and user A2 or between
user A1 and user A3 is 100 Mbit/s.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A provides 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex Ethernet ports.
l Ethernet equipment of user A1, user A2, and user A3 supports VLANs. VLAN IDs and
the number of available VLAN IDs are unknown and subject to later changes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 614


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

The application scenarios whether one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l Branches A2 and A3 need to communicate with each other.
l Branches A2 and A3 do not need to communicate with each other.
If branches A2 and A3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.4.

Figure 10-45 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

Ethernet Board 5-EGSH


A2 Line Board 8-SL64 A3
Line Board 12-SL64
PORT1
PORT1

12
8

8 NE2
NE3 12

NE1

12 8

Ethernet Board 5-EGSH


PORT1 Line Board 8-SL64
VB
Line Board 12-SL64
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT1
VCTRUNK

A1

10.6.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded
to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on
the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.
The signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and the timeslot allocation to
the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) are shown in Figure 10-46.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 615


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-46 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation to EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)
NE2: EGSH
SDH
VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1
NE1: EGSH User A2
VC4-xv:VC4-1

VCTRUNK1
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User A1 VCTRUNK2
NE3: EGSH
VC4-xv:VC4-2
VB1 EPL PORT1
VCTRUNK1
User A3
VC4-xv:VC4-1

l The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4
(VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 are used for transmitting EPLAN
services.
l The first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board on NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board on NE2 are used to add or drop EPLAN services between
NE1 and NE2.
l The second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board on NE1 and the first VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board on NE3 are used to add or drop EPLAN services
between NE1 and NE3.

Table 10-29 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522


Length

Entry Detection Enabled Disabled Disabled

TAG Tag Aware - -

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-30 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards


Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 616


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP


Protocol

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware - -

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-31 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)


Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Bridge Learning Mode SVL

Ingress Filter Disabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

10.6.5.3 Configuration Process


At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge).
At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparently transmitted EPL
services.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EPLAN Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EPLAN services for user A1, user A2, and user A3 on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) for user A1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 617


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled Set this parameter to Enabled.


/
Disable
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet port for receiving/


g Mode Duplex transmitting services from/to user A1
supports 1000M full-duplex. Therefore, set
this parameter to 1000M Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag PORT1: Tag Aware The Ethernet equipment for receiving/


transmitting services from/to user A1
supports VLANs and the data frames
processed by PORT1 carry VLAN tags.
Therefore, set this parameter to Tag
Aware.

Default - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


VLAN parameter does not need to be configured.
ID

VLAN - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


Priority parameter does not need to be configured.

Entry PORT1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 618


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

Port PORT1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH
board) for services between user A2 and user A3 on NE1.
Select Internal Port.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag VCTRUNK1: Tag The Ethernet equipment for receiving/


Aware transmitting the services from/to user A2
VCTRUNK2: Tag and user A3 supports VLANs and the data
Aware frames processed by the VCTRUNKs
carry VLAN tags. Therefore, set this
parameter to Tag Aware.

Default - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


VLAN parameter does not need to be configured.
ID

VLAN - When Tag is set to Tag Aware, this


Priority parameter does not need to be configured.

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti VCTRUNK2: Enabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 619


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut VCTRUNK2: UNI the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.
User Parameter Value Description

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used


A1 e Ports K1 for transmitting services between user A1
Use and user A2.
r A2
Avail Lev VC4-xv 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
able el user A1 and user A2. Therefore, the
Boun VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
vic nal
e
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-1 Set this parameter to VC4-1.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used


A1 e Ports K2 for transmitting services between user A1
Use and user A3.
r A3
Avail Lev VC4-xv 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
able el user A1 and user A3. Therefore, the
Boun VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
vic nal
e
Dir
ecti
on

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 620


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Ava VC4-2 Set this parameter to VC4-2.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
Click New.
In the displayed Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, set the following
parameters and click Apply.

Parameter Value Description

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string that describes


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to one that indicates the usage of the
bridge.

Bridge Type 802.1d An IEEE 802.1d bridge learns and forwards user
packets according to the MAC addresses, instead
of the VLAN information of the packets. Set this
parameter to 802.1d if the VLAN information on
the client side is not available and service
isolation by VLAN ID is not required.

Bridge SVL/Ingress When the learning mode of a bridge is SVL, all


Switch Filter the VLANs share a MAC address table. That is,
Mode Disable the bridge learns and forwards user packets
according to the learned MAC address, not on the
VLAN information of the packets.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click Configure Mount.


In the displayed Service Mount Configuration dialog box, select PORT1,
VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click .
Click OK.
In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, click OK.
4. Configure the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If user A2 and user A3 need to communicate with each other, go to Step 1.5.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 621


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Select the bridge that has been created, and click the Service Mount tab.
Modify the Hub/Spoke attribute of the mounted port. Set the following parameters
and click Apply.
Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT1: A Hub port can communicate properly with a Hub


Hub or Spoke port. User A1 needs to communicate
VCTRUNK with user A2 and user A3. Therefore, set the
1: Spoke attribute of PORT1, which receives/transmits
services from/to user A1, to Hub.
VCTRUNK
2: Spoke Two Spoke ports cannot communicate with each
other. Communication between user A2 and user
A3 is not required. Therefore, set the attribute of
the two VCTRUNKs, which receive/transmit
services from/to user A2 and user A3, to Spoke.

5. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for services
between user A1 and user A2 and between user A1 and user A3.
In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you set
DH-1) the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-12- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you set
H-1) the slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 622


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A3 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you set
DH-1) the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 2 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you set
H-1) the slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE3.


NOTE
The type of Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3 is EPL. Configure EPL services by referring to
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 623


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.6.6 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)


The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a VLAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint services. It is applicable when the client-side data communication equipment
connected to the transmission network does not support VLANs.

10.6.6.1 Networking Diagram


The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
LAN services of the two users (H and G) need to be isolated.
Figure 10-47 shows the networking diagram. Service requirements are described as follows:
l User A has three branches (A1, A2, and A3) located respectively at NE1, NE2, and NE3.
The branches form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Communication between
user A2 and user A3 is not required.
l User B has three branches (B1, B2, and B3) located respectively at NE1, NE2, and NE3.
The branches form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Communication between
user B2 and user B3 is required.
l Services of user A and user B are isolated.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex Ethernet
ports that do not support VLANs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 624


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-47 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

B2 A3
A2
Ethernet Board 5-EGSH B3
Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64
PORT1
PORT2 PORT1
PORT2

12 8

8 NE2
NE3 12
NE1

12 8

PORT1 PORT2

Ethernet Board 5-EGSH B1


A1 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64 VCTRUNK

VB1 VLAN 100 VB1 VLAN 200


VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
PORT1 PORT2

10.6.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port
through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently
transmitted in the SDH network. In this way, the node communicates with a remote node.
The signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the timeslot allocation to
the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) are shown in Figure 10-48.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 625


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-48 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation to EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
NE2 :EGSH

SDH PORT1
VCTRUNK1 EPL
NE1:EGSH User A 2
VC4-xv:VC4-1
VCTRUNK2 EPL PORT2
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 User B2
VC4-xv:VC4-2
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User A 1
VCTRUNK2
VC4-xv:VC4-2
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK3 NE3:EGSH
PORT2
VC4-xv:VC4-3
User B1
VCTRUNK4 VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1
VC4-xv:VC4-4 User A 3
VC4-xv:VC4-1
VB1 VCTRUNK2 EPL PORT2
User B3
VC4-xv:VC4-2

PORT VCTRUNK
Strip VLAN tag Add VLAN tag Strip VLAN tag

Data(User A ) VLAN(100) Data(User A) Data(User A )

Data(User B) VLAN(200) Data(User B) Data(User B)

l Ethernet LAN services of user A:


The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the first
VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 are used for
transmitting EVPLAN services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board is used
to add or drop EVPLAN services.
The second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board on NE1 and the first VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board on NE3 are used to add or drop EVPLAN
services between NE1 and NE3.
l Ethernet LAN services of user B:
The second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the
second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 are used for
transmitting EVPLAN services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) of the EGSH board is used
to add or drop EVPLAN services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) of the EGSH board is
used to add or drop EVPLAN services.

Table 10-32 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards


Paramete NE1 NE2 NE3
r

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 626


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Paramete NE1 NE2 NE3


r

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled


Disabled

Working 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M


Mode Full- Full- Full- Full- Full- Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522


Frame
Length

TAG Access Access - - - -

Entry Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


Detection

Default 100 200 - - - -


VLAN ID

VLAN 0 0 - - - -
Priority

Port UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI


Attributes

Table 10-33 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards

Param NE1 NE2 NE3


eter

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR


UNK1 UNK2 UNK3 UNK4 UNK1 UNK2 UNK1 UNK2

Mappin GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP


g
Protoco
l

TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -

Entry Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable


Detecti d d d d d d d d
on

Default 100 100 200 200 - - - -


VLAN
ID

VLAN 0 0 0 0 - - - -
Priority

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 627


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param NE1 NE2 NE3


eter

Bound VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4-


Path xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4
-1 -2 -3 -4 -1 -2 -1 -2

Port UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI


Attribut
es

Table 10-34 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)


Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge Learning Mode IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,


VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4

VLAN VLAN VLAN filter table 1 VLAN filter table 2


Filtering Filtering

VLAN ID 100 200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK3,


Physical VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK4
Port

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK Spoke
1

VCTRUNK Spoke
2

VCTRUNK Hub
3

VCTRUNK Hub
4

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 628


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.6.6.3 Configuration Process


At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. The access nodes NE2 and NE4 need to be configured with EPL
transparent transmission services only.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPLAN services for user A and user B on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH boards) for user
A1 and user B1.
In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled Set this parameter to Enabled.


/ PORT2: Enabled
Disable
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet ports for receiving/


g Mode Duplex transmitting services from/to user A1 and
PORT2: 1000M Full- user B1 support 1000M full-duplex.
Duplex Therefore, set this parameter to 1000M
Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag PORT1: Access The Ethernet equipment for receiving/


PORT2: Access transmitting services from/to user A1 and
user B1 does not support VLANs.
Therefore, set this parameter to Access.

Default PORT1: 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN PORT2: 200 transmission network for transmitting
ID Ethernet services among user A1, user A2,
and user A3. The VLAN ID 200 is
required on the transmission network for
transmitting Ethernet services among user
B1, user B2, and user B3.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 629


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

VLAN Default value -


Priority

Entry PORT1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti PORT2: Enabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Port PORT1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut PORT2: UNI the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and
VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board) on NE1 for user A2, user A3, user B2, and user B3.
Select Internal Port.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Tag VCTRUNK1: Access The Ethernet equipment for receiving/


VCTRUNK2: Access transmitting services from/to user A2, user
A3, user B2, and user B3 does not support
VCTRUNK3: Access VLANs. Therefore, set this parameter to
VCTRUNK4: Access Access.

Default VCTRUNK1: 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the


VLAN VCTRUNK2: 100 transmission network for transmitting
ID Ethernet services among user A1, user A2,
VCTRUNK3: 200 and user A3. The VLAN ID 200 is
VCTRUNK4: 200 required on the transmission network for
transmitting Ethernet services among user
B1, user B2, and user B3.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 630


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Param Value Description


eter

VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 Retain the default value for this parameter.


Priority VCTRUNK2: 0
VCTRUNK3: 0
VCTRUNK4: 0

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The Tag parameter is valid only when this
Detecti VCTRUNK2: Enabled parameter is set to Enabled.
on
VCTRUNK3: Enabled
VCTRUNK4: Enabled

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value Description
eter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI A UNI is deployed by a service provider at


Attribut VCTRUNK2: UNI the user side. The UNI processes the tag
es attributes of IEEE 802.1Q-compliant
VCTRUNK3: UNI packets. To be specific, the UNI identifies
VCTRUNK4: UNI and processes the VLAN information of
received user packets, based on the tag
attributes (such as Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid).

Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.
User Parameter Value Description

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used for


A1 e Ports K1 transmitting services between user A1 and
Us user A2.
er A2
Avai Lev VC4-xv 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
lable el user A1 and user A2. Therefore, the
Bou VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
nd
Path Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
s vice nal
Dir
ecti
on

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 631


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Ava VC4-1 Set this parameter to VC4-1.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used for


A1 e Ports K2 transmitting services between user A1 and
Us user A3.
er A3
Avai Lev VC4-xv 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required between
lable el user A1 and user A3. Therefore, the
Bou VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
nd
Path Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
s vice nal
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-2 Set this parameter to VC4-2.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK3 of the EGSH board is used for


B1 e Ports K3 transmitting services between user B1 and
Us user B2.
er B2
Avai Lev VC4-xv Services between user B1 and user B2
lable el require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore,
Bou the VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
nd
Path Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
s vice nal
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-3 Set this parameter to VC4-3.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board is used for


B1 e Ports K4 transmitting services between user B1 and
Us user B3.
er B3

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 632


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value Description

Avai Lev VC4-xv Services between user B1 and user B3


lable el require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Therefore,
Bou the VCTRUNK is bound with one VC-4.
nd
Path Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
s vice nal
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-4 Set this parameter to VC4-4.


ilab
le
Res
our
ces

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
Click New.
In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, set the following parameters.
Parameter Value Description

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string that describes


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to one that indicates the usage of the
bridge.

Bridge Type 802.1q An IEEE 802.1q bridge supports one layer of


VLAN tags. An IEEE 802.1q bridge checks the
VLAN tags of data frames and performs Layer 2
switching according to the destination MAC
addresses and VLAN IDs of the frames.

Bridge IVL/Ingress When the learning mode of a bridge is SVL, the


Switch Filter bridge checks the VLAN tags of data frames and
Mode Enable performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs of the
frames.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click Configure Mount.


In the Service Mount Configuration dialog box, select PORT1, PORT2,
VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Click .

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 633


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Click OK.
In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, click OK.
4. Create VLAN filtering tables.
Select the bridge that has been created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Click New.
In the Create VLAN dialog box, create a VLAN filtering table for user A1, user
A2, and user A3.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 100 The VLAN ID 100 is required on the transmission


network for transmitting Ethernet services among
user A1, user A2, and user A3.

Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 from Available Forwarding


Ports and click . Click Apply.
Create a VLAN filtering table for user B1, user B2, and user B3.
Parameter Value Description

VLAN ID 200 The VLAN ID 200 is required on the transmission


network for transmitting Ethernet services among
user B1, user B2, and user B3.

Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 from Available Forwarding


Ports and click . Click Apply.
5. Configure the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
Select the bridge that has been created, and click the Service Mount tab.
Modify the Hub/Spoke attribute of the mounted port. Set the following parameters
and click Apply. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.
Parameter Value Description

Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub Two Spoke ports cannot communicate with


VCTRUNK1: each other. Communication between user A2
Spoke and user A3 is not required. Therefore, set the
attribute of the two VCTRUNKs, which
VCTRUNK2: receive/transmit services from/to user A2 and
Spoke user A3, to Spoke. A Hub port can
PORT2: Hub communicate properly with a Hub or Spoke
VCTRUNK3: port.
Hub
VCTRUNK4:
Hub

6. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for user A2, user
A3, user B2, and user B3.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 634


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.
User Paramete Value Description
r

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-12- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User A1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User A3 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 635


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Source 2 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User B1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User B2 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 3 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-3.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-12- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 2 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 636


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value Description


r

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User B1 Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
User B3 with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 4 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-4.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 2 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE3.


NOTE
The type of Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3 is EPL. Configure EPL services by referring to
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.

----End

10.6.7 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)


The QinQ technology provides a simple and cost-effective L2 virtual private network (VPN)
solution. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide a VLAN solution
that helps the operator to identify, differentiate, and groom VLAN services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 637


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.6.7.1 Networking Diagram


Network operators require that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI)
services transmitted to a transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at
convergence nodes.
As shown in Figure 10-49, the transmission network is required to carry VoIP and HSI
services.
User requirements are described as follows:
l The VoIP services of user A and user B are transmitted to the transmission network at
NE2 and NE3 respectively and into the VoIP server at the convergence node NE1. The
services share a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The HSI services of user A and user B are transmitted to the transmission network at
NE2 and NE3 respectively and into the HSI server at the convergence node NE1. The
services share a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The data communication equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s full-
duplex Ethernet optical ports that support VLANs.
The VoIP and HSI services are isolated.
C-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 10
C-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 20
NOTE

Application scenarios regarding communication between branches:


l Communication between user A and user B is required.
l Communication between user A and user B is not required.
If communication between user A and user B is required, skip Step 1.5.

According to the data plan, all services received from the user side must be uniformly labeled
and groomed using planned S-VLANs.
l S-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 100
l S-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 200

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 638


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-49 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
User A User B

Service C-VLAN Service C-VLAN


Ethernet Board 5-EGSH VoIP 10
VoIP 10
Line Board 8-SL64 HSI 20
HSI 20
Line Board 12-SL64
PORT1
PORT1

12
8

8 NE2
NE3 12
NE1

12 8
VoIP
PORT1 PORT2 HSI

Ethernet Board 5-EGSH


Line Board 8-SL64 VCTRUNK
Line Board 12-SL64

VB1 S-VLAN 100 VB1 S-VLAN 200


VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT1 PORT2

10.6.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The services of user A and user B are received respectively from the access nodes NE2 and
NE3 to the convergence node NE1. The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN
IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN IDs. Isolation of service data and Layer 2 switching
are performed by means of S-VLAN filtering.
Figure 10-50 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation for the EVPLAN services (IEEE
802.1ad bridge).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 639


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-50 Signal flow and timeslot allocation for EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
NE1:EGSH NE2:EGSH
SDH

VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1


SVLAN 100 VC4-xv:VC4-1 User A
VoIP PORT1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv:VC4-2
Server VC4-xv:VC4-1
VC4-xv:VC4-2
SVLAN 200 NE3:EGSH
VCTRUNK2
HSI PORT2 VC4-xv:VC4-3
Server VC4-xv:VC4-4 VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1
VC4-xv:VC4-1 User B
VB1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

PORT VCTRUNK
Strip S-VLAN tag Add S-VLAN tag Strip S-VLAN tag

C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) S-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP)

C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) S-VLAN(200) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI)

l User A:
The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link
are used for transmitting EVPLAN services between NE1 and NE2.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and the second VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board are used to add or drop EVPLAN services
between NE1 and NE2.
l User B:
The third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) and the fourth VC-4 (VC4:VC4-4) on the SDH link
are used for transmitting EVPLAN services between NE1 and NE3.
For NE1 and NE3 each, the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) and the fourth VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-4) of the EGSH board are used to add or drop EVPLAN services
between NE1 and NE3.

Table 10-35 Parameters of external ports (PORTs)

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled


Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522


Frame Length

Port Attributes C-Aware C-Aware UNI UNI

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 640


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Table 10-36 Parameters of internal ports (VCTRUNKs)


Paramet NE1 NE2 NE3
er

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP


Protoco

Port C-Aware C-Aware UNI UNI


Attribute
s

Bound VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-3, VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-1,


Path VC4-2 VC4-4 VC4-2 VC4-2

Table 10-37 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)


Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1ad

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge Learning Mode IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled

Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port 1 2 3 4

Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

VLAN VLAN VLAN filter table 1 VLAN filter table 2


Filterin Filtering
g
VLAN ID 100 200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1,


Physical VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
Port

Hub/ PORT1 Hub


Spoke
PORT2 Hub

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 641


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

VCTRUNK Spoke
1

VCTRUNK Spoke
2

10.6.7.3 Configuration Process


An EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the corresponding S-VLAN filtering table
need to be created for the convergence node NE1. The access nodes NE2 and NE3 need to be
configured with EPL transparent transmission services only.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPLAN services on NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by
the VoIP server and HSI server.
In the NE Explorer, click the EGSH board and chooseConfiguration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Choose the External Port.
Click the Basic Settings tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param Value in This Description
eter Example

Enabled PORT1: Enabled Set this parameter to Enabled.


/ PORT2: Enabled
Disable
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The VoIP server and HSI server are
g Mode Duplex required to support the 1000M full-duplex
PORT2: 1000M Full- mode. Therefore, set this parameter to
Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 642


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in This Example Description

Port PORT1: C-Aware Set Port Attributes to C-Aware or


Attributes PORT2: C-Aware S-Aware for an IEEE 802.1ad
bridge. Connected to client-side
ports, C-Aware ports identify and
process the packets that carry C-
VLAN tags. Connected to network-
side ports, S-Aware ports identify
and process the packets that carry
S-VLAN tags.

The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid for C-Aware or S-
Aware ports. Therefore, retain default values for the parameters.
Retain default values for the parameters on the Flow Control and Advanced
Attributes tab pages.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 on the EGSH
board) for user A and user B.
Select Internal Port.
Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.

Param Value in This Description


eter Example

Port VCTRUNK1: C-Aware Set Port Attributes to C-Aware or S-


Attribut VCTRUNK2: C-Aware Aware for an IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
es Connected to client-side ports, C-Aware
ports identify and process the packets that
carry C-VLAN tags. Connected to
network-side ports, S-Aware ports identify
and process the packets that carry S-
VLAN tags.

The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are invalid for C-Aware or S-
Aware ports. Therefore, retain default values for the parameters.
Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. In the displayed Bound Path
Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and click Apply.

User Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

User Configurabl VCTRUN Set this parameter to VCTRUNK1.


A e Ports K1

Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user A uses a 200 Mbit/s


able el bandwidth. Therefore, two VC-4s need to
Boun be bound.
d
Paths

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 643


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


vice nal
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-1, Set this parameter to VC4-1 and VC4-2.


ilabl VC4-2
e
Res
ourc
es

User B Configurabl VCTRUN Set this parameter to VCTRUNK2.


e Ports K2

Avail Lev VC4-xv A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required for


able el services of user B. Therefore, two VC-4s
Boun need to be bound.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio Set this parameter to Bidirectional.
vice nal
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-3, Set this parameter to VC4-3 and VC4-4.


ilabl VC4-4
e
Res
ourc
es

Retain default values for the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping and


LCAS tab pages.
3. Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1.
Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree.
Click New.
In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, set the following parameters.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 644


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string that describes


the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to one that indicates the usage of the
bridge.

Bridge Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames
with two layers of VLAN tags. Outer S-VLAN
tags are used to isolate different VLANs, and
attributes of mounted ports must be C-Aware or
S-Aware.

Bridge IVL/Ingress An IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks the VLAN tags


Switch Filter of data frames and performs Layer 2 switching
Mode Enable according to the destination MAC addresses and
VLAN IDs of the frames.

Retain default values for the other parameters.

Click Configure Mount.


In the Service Mount Configuration dialog box, set the following parameters and
click Add Mount Port. Then click OK.
Parameter Value in This Example

Operation Add S-VLAN based for Port and C-VLAN


Type

VB Port 1 2 3 4

Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

Retain default values for the other parameters.

In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, click OK.


4. Create VLAN filtering tables.
Select the bridge that has been created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Click New.
In the Create VLAN dialog box, create VLAN filtering tables.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VLAN ID 100 The S-VLAN ID 100 is required for transmitting


VoIP services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 645


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 from Available Forwarding


Ports and click . Click Apply.
Create a VLAN filtering table for HSI services.

Parameter Value in Description


This
Example

VLAN ID 200 The S-VLAN ID 200 is required for transmitting


HSI services.

Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 from Available Forwarding


Ports and click . Click Apply.
5. Configure the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If communication between user A and user B is required, go to Step 1.6.


Select the bridge that has been created, and click the Service Mount tab.
Modify the Hub/Spoke attribute of the mounted port.

Parameter Value in This Description


Example

Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub Two Spoke ports cannot communicate with


PORT2: Hub each other. Communication between user M
and user N is not required. Therefore, set the
VCTRUNK1: attribute of the two VCTRUNKs, which
Spoke receive/transmit services from/to user M and
VCTRUNK2: user N, to Spoke.
Spoke A Hub port can communicate properly with a
Hub or Spoke port.

6. Configure cross-connections between Ethernet services and SDH links for user A and
user N.
In the NE Explorer, click NE1 and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click New in the lower right portion of the window to set required parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box that is displayed. Click OK.

User Paramete Value in Description


r This
Example

User A Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
with a VCTRUNK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 646


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value in Description


r This
Example

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 1-2 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK1, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1
and VC4-2.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-12- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1-2 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

User B Level VC4 Set this parameter to VC-4, which must


be the same as the level of paths bound
with a VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirection Set this parameter to Bidirectional.


al

Source Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


Slot ack)-5- service between an Ethernet board and a
EGSH-1(S line board, it is recommended that you
DH-1) set the slot of the Ethernet board as the
source slot.

Source 3-4 The value of this parameter must be the


Timeslot same as the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. For VCTRUNK2, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-3
and VC4-4.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 647


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

User Paramete Value in Description


r This
Example

Sink Slot Shelf0(subr When creating a bidirectional SDH


ack)-8- service between an Ethernet board and a
SL64-1(SD line board, it is recommended that you
H-1) set the slot of the line board as the sink
slot.

Sink 1-2 Source Timeslot Range and Sink


Timeslot Timeslot Range may take different
Range(e.g. values. However, the number of source
1,3-6) timeslots and that of sink timeslots must
be same.

Activated Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE3.


NOTE
Type of the Ethernet services on NE2 and NE3 is EPL. Configure EPL services by referring to 10.6.1
Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.

----End

10.6.8 Configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) Services and


EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
The VPN solutions provided by PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and EVPLAN (IEEE
802.1q bridge) services allow services received from the same external port of an NE to be
transmitted to different external ports of other NEs. Services of different users are transmitted
through different VCTRUNKS and isolated by VLANs.

10.6.8.1 Networking Diagram


The EVPL and EVPLAN services received from a port are differentiated by VLAN.

Figure 10-51 shows the networking diagram. Service requirements are described as follows:

l Services of user A1 and user B1 are received from the same Ethernet port.
l User A has two branches (A1 and A2) located respectively at NE1 and NE2. Services of
user A require a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l User B has three branches (B1, B2, and B3) located respectively at NE1, NE2, and NE3.
The branches form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Communication between
user B2 and user B3 is not required.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex Ethernet
ports.
The VLAN ID 100 is used for transmitting services between user A1 and user A2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 648


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

The VLAN ID 200 is used for transmitting services between user B1 and user B3
and between user B2 and user B3.
l Services of user A and user B are isolated.

Figure 10-51 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

B2
A2 Ethernet Board 5-EGSH
Line Board 8-SL64 B3
Line Board 12-SL64
PORT1
PORT2 PORT1

12 8

8 NE2
NE3 12
NE1

12 8

Ethernet Board 5-EGSH


PORT1 Line Board 8-SL64
Line Board 12-SL64

A1
VCTRUNK

B1

VB1 VLAN 200


VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3
PORT1

10.6.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation


The Ethernet services of a convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port by means of Layer 2
switching, the VLAN IDs are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on
an SDH network. In this way, the local convergence node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 10-52 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation for PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN)
services and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 649


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-52 Signal flow and timeslot allocation for EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
NE2 :EGSH

SDH EPL PORT1


VCTRUNK1
NE1:EGSH User A 2
VC4-xv:VC4-1
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK2 EPL PORT2
VCTRUNK1 User B2
EVPL VC4-xv:VC4-2
VC4-xv:VC4-1
User A 1
PORT1
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK2 NE3:EGSH
User B1
VC4-xv:VC4-2
PORT1
VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK1 EPL User B3
VC4-xv:VC4-3 VC4-xv:VC4-1
VB1

l Ethernet LAN services of user A:


The first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link is used for transmitting EVPLAN
services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board is used
to add or drop EVPLAN services.
l Ethernet LAN services of user B:
The second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the
first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 are used for
transmitting EVPLAN services.
For NE1 and NE2 each, the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) of the EGSH board is
used to add or drop EVPLAN services between NE1 and NE2.
The third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) of the EGSH board on NE1 and the first VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-1) of the EGSH board on NE3 are used to add or drop EVPLAN
services between NE1 and NE3.

Table 10-38 Parameters of external ports (PORTs)

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522 1522


Length

TAG Tag Aware - - -

Entry Detection Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Default VLAN ID - - - -

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 650


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

VLAN Priority 0 - - -

Port Attributes UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 10-39 Parameters of internal ports (VCTRUNKs)


Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGSH EGSH EGSH

Port VCTRU VCTRU VCTRU VCTRUN VCTRUN VCTRUNK


NK1 NK2 NK3 K1 K2 1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP


Protocol

TAG Access Access Access - - -

Entry Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


Detection

Default 100 200 200 - - -


VLAN ID

VLAN 0 0 0 - - -
Priority

Bound VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4-


Path xv:VC4-1 xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4- xv:VC4-1 xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4-1
3

Port UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI UNI


Attributes

Table 10-40 Parameters of EVPL services (VLAN)


Parameter NE1

EVPL
(PORT1VCTRUNK1)

Board EGSH

Service Type EVPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 100

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 651


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameter NE1

EVPL
(PORT1VCTRUNK1)

Sink Port VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 100

Table 10-41 Parameters of EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)


Parameter Ethernet LAN Services of NE1

Board EGSH

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge Learning Mode IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3

VLAN Filtering VLAN Filtering VLAN filter table 1

VLAN ID 200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3


Physical Port

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

VCTRUNK3 Spoke

10.6.8.3 Configuration Process


Create EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and VLAN filtering tables on the
convergence node NE1. Create EPL services on access nodes NE2 and NE3.

Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.
l You must be familiar with Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure EVPL (VLAN) services for user A1 on NE1. Configure EVPL services by
referring to 10.6.2.3 Configuration Process.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 652


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Step 2 Configure EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) between user B1 and user B2 and
between user B1 and user B3 on NE1. Configure EVPLAN services by referring to 10.6.6.3
Configuration Process.
Step 3 Configure EPL services on NE2 and NE3.
NOTE
The type of Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3 is EPL. Configure EPL services by referring to
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.

----End

10.7 Operation Tasks


This section describes basic operations involved in Ethernet service configuration, such as
configuring the port on an Ethernet board, configuring Ethernet services, and managing the
MAC address table.

10.7.1 Configuring a Port on an Ethernet Board


This section describes how to configure a port on an Ethernet board.

10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port


When an NE accesses Ethernet services through the external port on the Ethernet board,
configure the attributes of the external port so that the NE can work with the data
communications equipment on the client side to ensure the normal access of Ethernet
services.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l The required Ethernet board must be created.

Legend Information
Figure 10-53 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-53 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, set the basic attributes of the external port. For the basic attributes of the
external port on an Ethernet board, see 10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External
Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 653


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Configuration example:

3
1 4

NOTE

5
:
l Before configuring the external ports of the board, set State of the port to OOS in the Basic
Attributes tab, indicating that the port is out of service. After the preceding configurations are
complete, set the State to IS, which indicates that the port is in service.
l Set the working modes for the interconnected ports consistently. Otherwise, services will be
unavailable.
l Working Mode: By default, this parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation. That is, two ports operate in
the working mode of the highest level through pulse negotiation signals.

Step 2 Set the flow control mode of the port. For the flow control parameters of the external port on
an Ethernet boards, see 10.8.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Ports).
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 654


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

3
1 4

Step 3 Set the tag attributes of the external port. For the tag attributes of the external port on an
Ethernet board, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Configuration example:

3
1 4

Step 4 Set the network attributes of the external port. For the network attributes of the external port
on an Ethernet board, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 655


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

3
1 4

Step 5 Set the advanced attributes of the external port. For the advanced attributes of the external
port on an Ethernet board, see 10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Ports).
Configuration example:

3
1 4

----End

10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port


When an NE transmits Ethernet services through internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) on an
Ethernet board, configure the port attributes so that the Ethernet board can interconnect with
its peer to properly transmit the Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 656


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l The required Ethernet board must be created.

Legend Information
Figure 10-54 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-54 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select Internal Port.

Step 3 Set the tag attributes of internal ports.


1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2. Set the tag attributes of the internal port. For the tag attributes of the internal port on an
Ethernet board, see 10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.

3
1 4

3. Click Apply.

Step 4 Set the encapsulation/mapping protocol for the internal port.


1. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 657


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.

3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Set the network attributes of the internal port.
1. Click the Network Attributes tab.
2. Set the network attributes of the internal port. For the network attributes of the internal
port on an Ethernet board, see 10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.

3
1 4

3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the advanced attributes of the internal port.
1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
2. Set the advanced attributes of the internal port. For the advanced attributes of the internal
port on an Ethernet board, see 10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal
Ports).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 658


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

3
1
4

3. Click Apply.

----End

10.7.1.3 Modifying the QinQ Type Area


The type area value of a QinQ frame ranges from 0x0600 to 0xffff. The default value is
0x8100.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l The required Ethernet board must be created.

Legend Information
Figure 10-55 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-55 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, Modify the QinQ type area value.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 659


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

----End

10.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Services


This section describes how to configure Ethernet services.

10.7.2.1 Creating EPL Services


You can configure EPL services for a single NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port and 10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port have
been completed.

Legend Information
Figure 10-56 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-56 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 660


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Background Information
The configuration of service parameters on both ends of an Ethernet service must be the same.

The following are the three types of EPL services that can be configured on the NMS.
l EPL services between PORT and VCTRUNK ports.
l EPL services between VCTRUNK and VCTRUNK ports.
l EPL services between PORT and PORT ports.
NOTE

l For the above three types of services, if the source VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID are different, this
VLAN is a switched VLAN. To configure VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, the source
VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID must be the same.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, configure the information related to the EPL service, such as Direction,
Source Port, Sink Port, etc.

Configuration example:

NOTE

5
:
l You can set Direction to unidirectional or bidirectional.
l In Port Attributes, you can set Port Enabled and TAG for a port in the Create Ethernet Line
Service dialog box or in Ethernet Interface.
l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however,
retain the default values.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 661


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.7.2.2 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services


When the services of multiple users that have the same C-VLAN ID are accessed on the same
station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added
to isolate the services of different users from each other.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port and 10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port have
been completed.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 10-57 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-57 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
EVPL (QinQ) services are the Ethernet service packets that are added with an S-VLAN tag or
C-VLAN tag. In this way, the extension of VLAN ID is realized.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and configure the information related to the
EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, Source Port, Sink Port, etc.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 662


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2
4

NOTE

6
:
l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however,
use the default values.
l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.

----End

10.7.2.3 Creating EPLAN Services


Based on the Ethernet data layer 2 switch function, EPLAN services allow the accessed data
to be transported to its destination media access control (MAC) address. This section
describes the method to set the EPLAN service.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port and 10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port have
been completed.

Each board supports one virtual bridge (VB).

Context
Legend Information

Figure 10-58 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 663


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Figure 10-58 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, create Ethernet LAN Service.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 664


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

8
9

NOTE

7
: Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt services.

Step 2 Optional: Set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port.


Configuration example:

10

11

12

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 665


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

11
: Services are interoperable between Hub ports or between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but
are isolated between Spoke ports.

----End

10.7.2.4 Creating a VLAN Group


The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows and simplify the service
configuration process and save resources.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Applicable to the LEM24, LEX4 and TBE boards

Legend Information
Figure 10-59 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-59 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
The NMS and its managed NG WDM equipment organize certain consecutively accessed
VLAN services in a group (usually service demands of the same type) to form a VLAN
group. NMS creates services, manages the QoS flow, and performs Ethernet OAM operations
according to the initial VLAN ID so that the other VLAN services in the VLAN group have
the same configuration.
l Each port supports a maximum of eight VLAN groups. The eight VLAN groups must
have different VLAN values. The port attribute can be UNI or C-aware only.
l When you create a VLAN group, if a service has been configured in the first VLAN of
the VLAN group, the VLAN group can be created, but the service may be transiently
interrupted.
l When you attempt to create a VLAN group, the VLAN group cannot be created if any
VLAN group member (not the first VLAN) has been configured with services such as
EPL services without VLAN tags, QinQ services, or services involved in VLAN

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 666


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

configuration such as flow configuration, Ethernet service OAM, and flow statistic
collection rule configuration.
l VLAN groups support only EVPL and QinQ services that are forwarded based on port
+VLAN attributes (the VLAN ID cannot be 0).

NOTICE
Creating a VLAN group may affect the services.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and configure the VLAN group parameters.
Configuration example:

1 4

NOTE

4
:
l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN
= p x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.
l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the
value of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1.
l If the value of Initial VLAN is an integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The
value of n is the same as that in the formula of the Initial VLAN.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 667


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.7.2.5 Creating VLANs Filtering


You can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and the
VCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to each
other.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The port must be mounted to a VB.
Ensure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. This is the only way
you can create VLANs.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 10-60 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-60 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer,creating VLANs Filtering
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 668


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

1
3

6
7

Step 2 Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 669


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

----End

10.7.3 Managing the MAC Address Table


This section describes how to configure and manage the MAC address table.

The entries in the MAC address table indicate the corresponding relationship between the
MAC addresses and the ports. The MAC address table contains the following entries:

l Dynamic entry
Indicates the entry that the bridge obtains by adopting the SVL/IVL learning mode and a
dynamic entry ages. It is lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
l Static entry
Indicates the entry corresponding to the MAC address and the port that the network
administrator manually adds in the MAC address table on the U2000. Dynamic entry
does not age and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
l Blackhole entry
Indicates the entry used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination
MAC address. It is also referred to as the MAC address disable entry. Blackhole entry is
configured by the network administrator. This entry does not age and is not lost after the
Ethernet switching board is reset.
NOTE

l If a routing entry is not updated within a specific period of time, that is, if the MAC address fails to be
learned because the new data frame from the MAC address is not received, this routing entry is
automatically deleted. This mechanism is considered as aging, and this period of time is considered as the
aging time. The default aging time of the MAC address table is five minutes and can be set by using the
NM.
l A limited number of MAC addresses can be learned at a time.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 670


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.7.3.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry


You can configure VLAN unicast to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified
MAC address and to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the
VB swapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the
specified port in the entire VB.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The VLAN must be created.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 10-61 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-61 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and creating a Static MAC Address Entry
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 671


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

1
3

NOTE

5
:
l The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.

Step 2 Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 672


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

----End

10.7.3.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of a MAC Address


By performing this operation, you can ensure that the hosts with specific MAC addresses
cannot use Ethernet LAN services.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Creating EPLAN Services has been completed.

Context
Legend Information

Figure 10-62 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-62 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 673


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and set the parameters of the disabled MAC
address entries.
Configuration example:

----End

10.7.3.3 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses


You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses to realize the dynamic address aging
function. If the MAC addresses do not appear again in the transport network during the aging
time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses. The
MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table so that the MAC address table can
contain more MAC addresses.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 10-63 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-63 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 674


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address
items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC address
table may not be updated according to the change in the network.
If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,
packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address, and the performance of
the network is affected.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and configuring the Aging Time for MAC
Addresses
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 675


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

NOTE

5
:

Field Value Unit

MAC Address Aging Time 1-120 Min

1-120 Hour

1-12 Day

----End

10.7.3.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address


This section describes how to query and delete self-learned MAC addresses of Ethernet LAN
services.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Creating EPLAN Services has been completed.

Context
Legend Information

Figure 10-64 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-64 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and view the dynamic entries of a MAC address
table page by page.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 676


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

1 3

2
4

Step 2 Optional: Select a MAC address to be deleted and click Clear MAC address.
Configuration example:

1 3

----End

10.7.3.5 Querying the Actual Capacity of a MAC Address Table


This section describes how to query the actual capacity of a MAC address table.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 677


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Creating EPLAN Services has been completed.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 10-65 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 10-65 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
l For EVPLAN services, you can query the capacity of a MAC address table where MAC
addresses are queried based on VLAN IDs and the capacity of a MAC address table
where MAC addresses are queried based on VB logical ports.
l For EPLAN services, you can query the capacity of a MAC address table where MAC
addresses are queried based on VB logical ports.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and query the actual number of dynamically
learned MAC addresses based on the VLAN IDs.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 678


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

2
4

Step 2 Query the actual number of dynamically learned MAC addresses based on the VB ports.

Configuration example:

2
4

----End

10.8 Parameters
This section describes how to configure parameters related to Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 679


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports)


In this user interface, you can query and set basic attributes of a MAC port.

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-42 Basic Attributes (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT3 to


PORT30.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled When the parameter value is


Default: Disabled set to Enabled for a port, the
port is enabled and services are
provisioned. When the
parameter value is set to
Disabled for a port, the
services on the port are not
processed. Therefore, you must
enable a port when you
configure services on the port.

Working Mode PORT3 to PORT6: Indicates the working modes


l 10G FULL_Duplex of an Ethernet port. Auto-
LAN, 10G negotiation can automatically
FULL_Duplex LAN, determine the optimal working
10G FULL_Duplex modes of the connected ports.
LAN (SONET) This mode is easy to maintain
and is recommended.
l Default: 10G
NOTE
FULL_Duplex LAN
In the configuration process,
PORT7 to PORT30: ensure that working modes of the
connected ports are consistent;
l 1000M otherwise, services are
FULL_Duplex, Auto- unavailable.
Negotiation
l Default: Auto-
Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600 Specifies the maximum frame


Default: 1522 length supported by an
Ethernet port.
Unit: Byte.
Click Maximum Frame Length
to view the details.

Port Physical Parameters - Indicates the physical


parameters of a port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 680


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The MAC Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the MAC
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter, users
can test whether equipment
runs normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC layer
and then sending and receiving
signals over the path.

PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter, users
can test whether equipment
runs normally by creating a
looped path at the PHY layer
and then sending and receiving
signals over the path.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-43 Basic Attributes (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT28.

QinQ Type Area 0x0600 to 0xFFFF Display the QinQ type area.
Default:0x8100 This parameter indicates the
VLAN protocol used by the
packet that is transmitted by
QinQ.
NOTE
The QinQ Type Area
parameter must be set to the
same value for interconnected
boards; otherwise, traffic will
be interrupted.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 681


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled When the parameter value is


Default: Disabled set to Enabled for a port,
the port is enabled and
services are provisioned.
When the parameter value is
set to Disabled for a port,
the services on the port are
not processed. Therefore,
you must enable a port when
you configure services on
the port.

Working Mode PORT5 to PORT6: Indicates the working modes


l 10G FULL_Duplex of an Ethernet port. Auto-
LAN, 10G negotiation can
FULL_Duplex WAN automatically determine the
optimal working modes of
l Default: 10G the connected ports. This
FULL_Duplex LAN mode is easy to maintain
PORT7 to PORT28: and is recommended.
l 1000M FULL_Duplex, NOTE
Auto-Negotiation In the configuration process,
ensure that working modes of
l Default: Auto- the connected ports are
Negotiation consistent; otherwise, services
are unavailable.

Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600 Specifies the maximum


Default: 1522 frame length supported by
an Ethernet port.
Click Maximum Frame
Length to view the details.

Port Physical Parameters - Indicates the physical


parameters of a port.

MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- TheMAC Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the
Default: Non-Loopback MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 682


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter,
users can test whether
equipment runs normally by
creating a looped path at the
PHY layer and then sending
and receiving signals over
the path.

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-44 Basic Attributes (External Port)

Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT8.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled When the parameter value is


Default: Disabled set to Enabled for a port,
the port is enabled and
services are provisioned.
When the parameter value is
set to Disabled for a port,
the services on the port are
not processed. Therefore,
you must enable a port when
you configure services on
the port.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Working Mode PORT5 to PORT8: Indicates the working modes


l 10G FULL_Duplex of an Ethernet port. Auto-
LAN, 10G negotiation can
FULL_Duplex WAN automatically determine the
optimal working modes of
l Default: 10G the connected ports. This
FULL_Duplex LAN mode is easy to maintain
and is recommended.
NOTE
In the configuration process,
ensure that working modes of
the connected ports are
consistent; otherwise, services
are unavailable.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 683


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600 Specifies the maximum


Default: 1522 frame length supported by
an Ethernet port.
Click Maximum Frame
Length to view the details.

Port Physical Parameters - Indicates the physical


parameters of a port.

MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- TheMAC Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the
Default: Non-Loopback MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.

PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter,
users can test whether
equipment runs normally by
creating a looped path at the
PHY layer and then sending
and receiving signals over
the path.

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-45 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a port.


The name can contain up to
32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 684


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Enable Port Enabled, Disabled The Enabled/Disabled


Default: Disabled parameter determines
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
this parameter is set to
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Specifies the working mode


Half-Duplex, 10M Full- of the Ethernet port on a
Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, board. This parameter
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M determines the maximum
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full- transmission rate and
Duplex, 10GE Full-Duplex communication mode of the
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex Ethernet port.
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex When setting this parameter,
WAN(SONET mode) you must ensure the working
modes of the interconnected
ports are the same.
Otherwise, the services are
not available.

Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600 Specifies the maximum


Default: 1522 frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.

Port Physical Parameters - Displays the actual working


state of a port.

MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- TheMAC Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the
Default: Non-Loopback MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.

PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter,
users can test whether
equipment runs normally by
creating a looped path at the
PHY layer and then sending
and receiving signals over
the path.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 685


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Physical Type - Displays the physical type of


port.

Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH- Displays the logic type of


EPORT port.

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-46 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a port.


The name can contain up to
32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.

Enable Port Enabled, Disabled The Enabled/Disabled


Default: Disabled parameter determines
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
this parameter is set to
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Specifies the working mode


Half-Duplex, 10M Full- of the Ethernet port on a
Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, board. This parameter
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M determines the maximum
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full- transmission rate and
Duplex, 10GE Full-Duplex communication mode of the
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex Ethernet port.
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex When setting this parameter,
WAN(SONET mode) you must ensure the working
modes of the interconnected
ports are the same.
Otherwise, the services are
not available.

Maximum Frame Length 1518 to 9600 Specifies the maximum


Default: 1522 frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.

Port Physical Parameters - Displays the actual working


state of a port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 686


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

MAC LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- TheMAC Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the
Default: Non-Loopback MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.

PHY LoopBack Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback


Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Default: Non-Loopback loopback state at an Ethernet
port. With this parameter,
users can test whether
equipment runs normally by
creating a looped path at the
PHY layer and then sending
and receiving signals over
the path.

10.8.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Ports)


In this user interface, you can enable and disable the autonegotiation or non-autonegotiation
flow control mode for an external port.

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-47 Flow Control (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT3 to


PORT30.

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, mode adopted when an
Receive Only Ethernet port does not work
Default: Disable in auto-negotiation mode.
Click Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to view
the details.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 687


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, mode adopted when an
Enable Symmetric Flow Ethernet port works in auto-
Control, Enable Symmetric/ negotiation mode.
Dissymmetric Flow Control Click Autonegotiation Flow
Default: Disable Control Mode to view the
details.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-48 Flow Control (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT28.

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, mode adopted when an
Receive Only Ethernet port does not work
Default: Disable in auto-negotiation mode.
Click Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to view
the details.

Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, mode adopted when an
Enable Symmetric Flow Ethernet port works in auto-
Control, Enable Symmetric/ negotiation mode.
Dissymmetric Flow Control Click Autonegotiation Flow
Default: Disable Control Mode to view the
details.

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-49 Flow Control (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 688


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, mode adopted when an
Receive Only Ethernet port does not work
Default: Disable in auto-negotiation mode.
Click Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to view
the details.

Autonegotiation Flow - This parameter is


Control Mode unavailable for this board.

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-50 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric Non-Autonegotiation Flow


Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, Control Mode is selected
Receive Only when a port works in non-
Default: Disable autonegotiation mode.
See Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to
obtain the details.

Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control


Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, mode adopted when an
Enable Symmetric Flow Ethernet port works in auto-
Control, Enable Symmetric/ negotiation mode.
Dissymmetric Flow Control
Default: Disabled

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-51 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 689


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric Non-Autonegotiation Flow


Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, Control Mode is selected
Receive Only when a port works in non-
Default: Disable autonegotiation mode.
See Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode to
obtain the details.

10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Ports)


This section describes the parameters required for setting or querying the advanced attributes
of an external port.

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-52 Advanced Attributes (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT3 to


PORT30.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable


Suppression Default: Disabled broadcast packet
suppression.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100%, with a step of If broadcast packet


Suppression Threshold 10% suppression is enabled,
Default: 30% broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 690


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for an external
port, a loopback on the port
can be automatically
detected. When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for an external
port, the system will block
the port if the port is self-
looped. When the parameter
is set to Disabled, the
system will not take any
action on the self-looped
port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Threshold of Port PORT3 to PORT6: Indicates the rate threshold


Receiving Rates (Mbps) l 010000 for an external port to
receive traffic.
l Default: 10000
PORT7 to PORT30:
l 01000
l Default: 1000

Port Rates Time Slice (m) 0 to 30 Indicates the traffic rate time
Default: 0 window of an external port.

Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to monitor


Default: Disabled zero traffic.
Click Flow Monitor
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) to view the
details.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 691


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Flow Monitor Interval 1 to 30 Indicates the interval for


(min) Default: 15 monitoring zero traffic.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-53 Advanced Attributes (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT28.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable


Suppression Default: Disabled broadcast packet
suppression.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100%, with a step of If broadcast packet


Suppression Threshold 10% suppression is enabled,
Default: 30% broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, a
loopback on the port can be
automatically detected.
When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 692


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, the
system will block the port if
the port is self-looped.
When the parameter is set to
Disabled, the system will
not take any action on the
self-looped port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Threshold of Port PORT5 to PORT6: Indicates the rate threshold


Receiving Rates (Mbps) l 0 to 10000 for an external port to
receive traffic.
l Default: 10000
PORT7 to PORT28:
l 0 to 1000
l Default: 1000

Port Rates Time Slice (m) 0 to 30 Indicates the traffic rate time
Default: 0 window of an external port.

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-54 Advanced Attributes (External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT5 to


PORT8.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable


Suppression Default: Disabled broadcast packet
suppression.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 693


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100%, with a step of If broadcast packet


Suppression Threshold 10% suppression is enabled,
Default: 30% broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, a
loopback on the port can be
automatically detected.
When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, the
system will block the port if
the port is self-looped.
When the parameter is set to
Disabled, the system will
not take any action on the
self-looped port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Threshold of Port PORT5 to PORT8: Indicates the rate threshold


Receiving Rates (Mbps) l 0 to 10000 for an external port to
receive traffic.
l Default: 10000

Port Rates Time Slice (m) 0 to 30 Indicates the traffic rate time
Default: 0 window of an external port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 694


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-55 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)

Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled The Broadcast Packet


Suppression Default: Disabled Suppression parameter
determines whether to
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100% The Broadcast Packet


Suppression Threshold Suppression
Thresholdparameter
allocates the specified
bandwidth to the broadcast
packets. The bandwidth is
allocated on the basis of the
traffic proportion at the port.
If the bandwidth allocated to
the broadcast packets
reaches the specified
threshold, the port discards
the broadcast data packets
that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving 0 to 1000 The Threshold of Port


Rates (Mbit/s) Default: 1000 Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)
parameter specifies the data
flow threshold at external
physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time 0 to 30 Sets traffic threshold time


Window (Min) Default: 0 window for the external
port.

Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable loop


Default: Disabled detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists
at the port.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable


Default: Enabled shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set
blocking for a loop port.

Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to monitor the


Default: Disabled zero flow.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 695


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Zero-Flow Monitor Interval 1 to 30 Sets the time interval for the


(min) Default: 15 zero-flow monitoring.

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-56 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled The Broadcast Packet


Suppression Default: Disabled Suppression parameter
determines whether to
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100% The Broadcast Packet


Suppression Threshold Suppression
Thresholdparameter
allocates the specified
bandwidth to the broadcast
packets. The bandwidth is
allocated on the basis of the
traffic proportion at the port.
If the bandwidth allocated to
the broadcast packets
reaches the specified
threshold, the port discards
the broadcast data packets
that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving 0 to 10000 The Threshold of Port


Rates (Mbit/s) Default: 10000 Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)
parameter specifies the data
flow threshold at external
physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time 0 to 30 Sets traffic threshold time


Window (Min) Default: 0 window for the external
port.

Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable loop


Default: Disabled detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists
at the port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 696


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable


Default: Enabled shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set
blocking for a loop port.

10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Ports)


This section describes the parameters required for setting or querying the advanced attributes
of an internal port.

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-57 Advanced attributes (Internal Port)


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are


VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for port, a
loopback on the port can be
automatically detected.
When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 697


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, the
system will block the port if
the port is self-looped.
When the parameter is set to
Disabled, the system will
not take any action on the
self-looped port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to monitor


Default: Disabled zero traffic.
Click Flow Monitor
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) to view the
details.

Flow Monitor Interval 1 to 30 Indicates the interval for


(min) Default: 15 monitoring zero traffic.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-58 Advanced attributes (Internal ports)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable


Suppression Default: Disabled broadcast packet
suppression.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 698


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100%, with a step of If broadcast packet


Suppression Threshold 10% suppression is enabled,
Default: 30% broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, a
loopback on the port can be
automatically detected.
When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, the
system will block the port if
the port is self-looped.
When the parameter is set to
Disabled, the system will
not take any action on the
self-looped port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 699


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-59 Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable


Suppression Default: Disabled broadcast packet
suppression.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression to view
the details.

Broadcast Packet 10% to 100%, with a step of If broadcast packet


Suppression Threshold 10% suppression is enabled,
Default: 30% broadcast packets are
suppressed when the
bandwidth occupied by
broadcast packets exceeds
specified times (suppression
threshold) the total
bandwidth.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
view the details.

Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disabled port self-looped detection.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, a
loopback on the port can be
automatically detected.
When Loop Port
Shutdown is set to
Enabled, the self-looped
port is automatically
shutdown, preventing the
port from forwarding data
packets that are looped
back.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 700


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a


Default: Enabled self-looped port.
When the parameter is set to
Enabled for a port, the
system will block the port if
the port is self-looped.
When the parameter is set to
Disabled, the system will
not take any action on the
self-looped port.
NOTE
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is available only
when Loop Detection is set to
Enabled.

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-60 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable loop


Default: Disabled detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists
at the port.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable


Default: Enabled shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set
blocking for a loop port.

Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to monitor the


Default: Disabled zero flow.

Zero-Flow Monitor Interval 1 to 30 Sets the time interval for the


(min) Default: 15 zero-flow monitoring.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 701


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-61 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
Field Value Description

Port - Displays all ports available


on the Ethernet board.

Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable loop


Default: Disabled detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists
at the port.

Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable


Default: Enabled shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set
blocking for a loop port.

10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes


This section describes the parameters required for querying and setting TAG attributes of
PORT or VCTRUNK ports.

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-62 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are


VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
External ports are PORT3 to
PORT30.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 702


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Indicates the type of packets


Default: Tag Aware that can be processed by a
port.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packets with VLAN IDs
(Tag) and discards packets
without VLAN IDs (Untag).
If TAG is set to Tag Aware,
VLAN priority and Default
VLAN ID are invalid.
Access: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and discards the
packets that already have
VLAN IDs (Tag).
Hybrid: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and transparently
transmits the packets that
already have VLAN IDs
(Tag).
This parameter is valid only
for UNI ports.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for
C-Aware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 703


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-63 TAG Attributes(Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.
External ports are PORT5 to
PORT28.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 704


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Indicates the type of packets


Default: Tag Aware that can be processed by a
port.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packets with VLAN IDs
(Tag) and discards packets
without VLAN IDs (Untag).
If TAG is set to Tag Aware,
VLAN priority and Default
VLAN ID are invalid.
Access: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and discards the
packets that already have
VLAN IDs (Tag).
Hybrid: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and transparently
transmits the packets that
already have VLAN IDs
(Tag).
This parameter is valid only
for UNI ports.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for
C-Aware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 705


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-64 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.
External ports are PORT5 to
PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 706


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Indicates the type of packets


Default: Tag Aware that can be processed by a
port.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packets with VLAN IDs
(Tag) and discards packets
without VLAN IDs (Untag).
If TAG is set to Tag Aware,
VLAN priority and Default
VLAN ID are invalid.
Access: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and discards the
packets that already have
VLAN IDs (Tag).
Hybrid: The port labels the
default VLAN IDs to
packets without VLAN IDs
(Untag) and transparently
transmits the packets that
already have VLAN IDs
(Tag).
This parameter is valid only
for UNI ports.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for
C-Aware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
when the value of TAG is
Access or Hybrid.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 707


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-65 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)

Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of a


VCTRUNK port.

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Specifies the type of a data


Default: Tag Aware packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Table 10-66 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port)

Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of port,


either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Name For example, VCTRUNK-3 Specifies the name of a


VCTRUNK port. The name
can contain up to 32
characters in English or 16
characters in Chinese.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 708


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Specifies the type of a data


Default: Tag Aware packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-67 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of a


VCTRUNK port.

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Specifies the type of a data


Default: Tag Aware packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 709


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

Table 10-68 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port)


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of port,


either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Name For example, VCTRUNK-3 Specifies the name of a


VCTRUNK port. The name
can contain up to 32
characters in English or 16
characters in Chinese.

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Specifies the type of a data


Default: Tag Aware packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 The Default VLAN ID


Default: 1 parameter specifies a default
VLAN ID for a port that
transmits untagged packets.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority


Default: 0 parameter specifies the
priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection


Default: Enabled parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.

10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes


This section describes the parameters required for setting network attributes of a port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 710


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameters of the TEM28 Board

Table 10-69 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are


VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16.
External ports are PORT3 to
PORT30.

Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware A UNI port supports Tag


Default: UNI Aware, Access, and Hybrid.
An S-Aware port determines
that the packets do not carry
C-VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have S-
VLAN tags.
A C-Aware port determines
that the packets do not carry
S-VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have
C-VLAN tags.

Parameters of the LEM24 Board

Table 10-70 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.
External ports are PORT5 to
PORT28.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 711


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Port Attributes UNI, NNI, C-Aware, S- A UNI port processes the


Aware TAG attributes of the
Default: UNI 802.1Q-compliant packets.
The port attributes include
Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid.
An S-Aware port does not
process the tag attributes of
the 802.1Q-compliant
packets. In this case, the
port determines that the
packets do not carry C-
VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have S-
VLAN tags.
A C-Aware port does not
process the tag attributes of
the 802.1Q-compliant
packets. In this case, the
port determines that the
packets do not carry S-
VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have
C-VLAN tags.
NNI is a reserved port type
and is not supported at
present.

Parameters of the LEX4 Board

Table 10-71 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port)


Field Value Description

Port - OptiX OSN 8800: Internal


ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK2.
OptiX OSN 6800: Internal
ports are VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK4.
External ports are PORT5 to
PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 712


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Port Attributes UNI, NNI, C-Aware, S- A UNI port processes the


Aware TAG attributes of the
Default: UNI 802.1Q-compliant packets.
The port attributes include
Tag Aware, Access, and
Hybrid.
An S-Aware port does not
process the tag attributes of
the 802.1Q-compliant
packets. In this case, the
port determines that the
packets do not carry C-
VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have S-
VLAN tags.
A C-Aware port does not
process the tag attributes of
the 802.1Q-compliant
packets. In this case, the
port determines that the
packets do not carry S-
VLAN tags and processes
only the packets that have
C-VLAN tags.
NNI is a reserved port type
and is not supported at
present.

Parameters of the EGSH Board

Table 10-72 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of port,


either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, Specifies the position of the


NNI port in the network.
Default: UNI Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 713


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Parameters of the EAS2 Board

Table 10-73 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the type of port,


either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, Specifies the position of the


NNI port in the network.
Default: UNI Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.

10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service


In this user interface, you can create or query the source and sink routes of an Ethernet leased
line, and set port attributes and path binding.

Table 10-74 Ethernet Service Parameters


Field Value Description

Service Type Values of parameters vary Displays the service type.


with different boards and
products.

Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the transmit


Default: Bidirectional direction of the service.
The bidirectional service
refers to two services, one of
which is transmitted from
the source port to the sink
port and the other one of
which is transmitted from
the sink port to the source
port. The unidirectional
service refers to a service
transmitted from the source
port to the sink port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 714


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Operation Type Values of parameters vary Sets the operation type for
with different boards and the EVPL(QinQ) services.
products. l Add S-VLAN: Adds S-
Add S-VLAN, Add S- TAG based on the PORT
VLAN and C-VLAN, Strip route.
S-VLAN, Strip S-VLAN
and C-VLAN, Transparently l Add S-VLAN and C-
transmit S-VLAN, Translate VLAN: Adds S-TAG and
S-VLAN, Transparently C-TAG based on the
transmit C-VLAN, PORT route.

Add S-VLAN, l Transparently transmit S-


Transparently transmit S- VLAN: Transmits the
VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, User TAG transparently.
Transparently transmit C- l Transparently transmit
VLAN, Translate C-VLAN C-VLAN: Transmits the
C-TAG transparently.
l Translate S-VLAN:
Exchanges S-TAG based
on the PORT route.
l Strip S-VLAN: Strip S-
TAG.
l Strip S-VLAN and C-
VLAN: Strip S-TAG and
C-TAG.

Source Port PORTn, VCTRUNKn Displays the name of the


Default: PORT3 source port.

Source VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the source


port. Applies to EPL
services.

Source C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the source


port. C-VLAN is the client
VLAN ID.
Applies to EVPL(QinQ)
services.

Source S-VLAN 1-4095, NULL Sets S-VLAN of the source


Default: NULL port. S-VLAN is the service
VLAN ID.
Applies to EVPL(QinQ)
services.

Sink Port PORTn, VCTRUNKn Displays the name of the


For example: PORT3 sink port.

Sink VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the sink


port. Applies to EPL
services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 715


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Sink C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the sink


port. C-VLAN is the client
VLAN ID.
Applies to EVPL(QinQ)
services.

Sink S-VLAN 1-4095, NULL Sets S-VLAN of the sink


Default: NULL port. S-VLAN is the service
VLAN ID.
Applies to EVPL(QinQ)
services.

C-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Sets the priority of C-


Priority2, Priority3, VLAN.
Priority4, Priority5,
Priority6, Priority7

S-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Sets the priority of S-


Priority2, Priority3, VLAN.
Priority4, Priority5,
Priority6, Priority7

Port For example: PORT3 Displays the name of a port.

Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (for Sets the network attributes
boards that support QinQ) for a port.
Default: UNI If the port is of the UNI
type, the port processes the
tag attributes in 802.1Q and
the port has the Tag, Access,
and Hybrid attributes.
If the port is of the C-Aware
type, the port does not
process the tag attributes in
802.1Q. It determines that
the data packet carries the
C-VLAN tag and processes
only the data packet that has
the C-VLAN tag.
If the port is of the S-Aware
type, the port does not
process the tag attributes in
802.1Q. It determines that
the data packet carries the S-
VLAN tag and processes
only the data packet that has
the S-VLAN tag.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 716


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables a port.


Default: Enabled Enabled: This port can
access services.
Disabled: This port cannot
access services.

TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid TAG is used to set the type
Default: Tag Aware of the processed messages.
The tag aware port only
processes the messages with
a tag, and those messages
without a tag are discarded.
However, the Access port is
quite the contrary. The
hybrid port processes the
two types of messages. It
adds a tag to the messages
without a tag according to
the VLAN ID of this port.

10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service


In this user interface, you can create and query Ethernet LAN services, and configure the
forwarding filter table.

Table 10-75 Ethernet LAN Service Parameters


Field Value Description

Board For example: NE501-4- Displays the name of the board.


TBE

VB ID For example: 1 Allocated automatically when an


Ethernet LAN service is created.

VB Name A maximum of 16 English Indicates the name of the VB.


letters or numerals

Bridge Type For example: 802.1q Sets the type of a bridge.

Bridge Switch IVL/Ingress Filter Enable, Selects the bridge switch mode.
Mode SVL/Ingress Filter
Disable
Default: IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 717


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Bridge Learning Values of default with Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN
Mode different bridge mode. For Service) indicates how the bridge learns
details, click the links in the MAC address. Bridge Learning
the Description column. Mode is classified into the shared VLAN
learning and independent VLAN learning
modes. The shared VLAN learning mode
indicates learning and forwarding based
on the MAC address. The independent
VLAN learning mode indicates learning
and forwarding based on the VLAN and
MAC address.

Ingress Filter Enabled, Disabled Displays the status of an ingress filter.


Enabled: Checks the validity of a VLAN
ID on the basis of bridge. If the ingress
receives a packet that does not belong to
the VLAN associated to the port on the
bridge, the ingress discards the packet.
Disabled: Does not check the validity of
a VLAN ID. All packets that need to
enter the bridge are valid.

MAC Address Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables MAC address


Self-learning Default: Enabled learning.
Enabled: MAC addresses are learned.
Disabled: MAC addresses are statically
configured.

Active Active, Inactive Displays the activation status of a VB.

Table 10-76 Service Mount

Field Value Description

VB Port For example: 1 Sets the VB logical ports.

Mount Port For example: PORT1 The mount port may be the PORT port or
VC trunk port.

Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for You can perform operations as follows:
Port, Add S-VLAN base l Mounting that is based on port and for
for Port and C-VLAN, which the S-VLAN tag is added
Mount Port, Mount Port
and base for Port and S- l Mounting that is based on port and C-
VLAN VLAN and for which the S-VLAN
tag is added
l Mounting that is based on port
l Mounting that is based on port and S-
VLAN

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 718


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware Sets the network attributes for a port.
(for boards that support If the port is of the UNI type, the port
QinQ) processes the TAG attributes in 802.1Q
Default: UNI and the port has the Tag Aware, Access
and Hybrid attributes.
If the port is of the C-Aware type, the
port does not process the tag attributes in
802.1Q. It determines that the data packet
carries no S-VLAN tag and processes
only the data packet that has the C-
VLAN tag.
If the port is of the S-Aware type, it can
identify and process the VLAN
information about the provider. If the
QinQ Type field is valid, this port treats
the outmost label carried by the packets
as S-VLAN.

Service Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of an Ethernet


Default: Bidirectional service.

Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables a port.


Enabled: This port can access services.
Disabled: This port cannot access
services.

TAG Access, Tag aware, Sets the tag attribute of the VB.
Hybrid

Hub/Spoke Hub, Spoke Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service) is


Default: Hub used to separate packets between the
logical ports in the network bridge.

Default VLAN 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set the VLAN ID,
ID right-click a port, and choose VLAN
Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the
VLAN ID of the VB link that the port
belongs to. You can also set the VLAN
ID in the VLAN Filtering tab.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 719


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Working Mode For example: 10M Half- Displays the working modes of the
Duplex Ethernet port. Auto-Negotiation can
automatically determine the optimized
working modes of the connected ports.
This mode is easy to maintain and is
recommended.
During configuration, make sure that
working modes of the connected ports
are consistent. If the working modes are
different, the services are down.

Service Direction Bidirectional Sets the direction of service.

C-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the C-VLAN value.

S-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the S-VLAN value.

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set the VLAN ID,
right-click a port, and choose VLAN
Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the
VLAN ID of the VB link that the port
belongs to. You can also set the VLAN
ID in the VLAN Filtering tab.

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Sets the MAC address of VLAN unicast.
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF To set the MAC address of VLAN
The first byte is an even unicast, right-click a port that is already
number. allocated with a VLAN ID, and choose
VLAN Unicast from the shortcut menu.
Then, in the dialog box displayed, set the
MAC address of VLAN unicast for the
port. You can also set the MAC address
of VLAN unicast in the VLAN Unicast
tab.

Table 10-77 VLAN Filtering


Field Value Description

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Specifies the VLAN ID and configures


the forwarding filter table.

VB Port For example: (1-2) Sets the VB logical ports.

Forwarding For example: PORT1, Displays the physical port that is actually
Physical Port VCTRUNK1 attached to the VB link.

Available For example: PORT4 Displays the queried physical ports that
forwarding ports can be used for forwarding.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 720


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Selected For example: PORT4 Displays the selected ports that can be
forwarding ports used for forwarding.

Table 10-78 VLAN Unicast

Field Value Description

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Only the VLAN ID specified in the


forwarding filter table can be selected.
VLAN unicast is different from common
unicast. A VLAN unicast uses VB,
VLAN ID, port, and MAC address as its
unique identifier.

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Displays the MAC address of VLAN


FF-FF-FF-FF-FF unicast.
The first byte is an even
number.

VB Port For example: 1 Sets the VB logical ports.

Physical Port For example: PORT1 Displays the name of the port.

Aging Status Static Displays the aging status of unicast


items, including static and dynamic.

VB VB ID-VB Name VB is automatically displayed by the


U2000.

Table 10-79 Disable MAC Address

Field Value Description

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Inhibits a MAC address in the VLAN of


a certain VB.

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Enters a MAC address that is to be


FF-FF-FF-FF-FF inhibited. Hence, enters a MAC address
The first byte is an even that is not associated to the VLAN
number. unicast of this VLAN.

Table 10-80 Bound Path (Only EoS supports this parameter)

Field Value Description

VCTRUNK Port For example: Displays the name of the configured VC


VCTRUNK1 trunk port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 721


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)

Field Value Description

Level For example: VC12 Displays the level of a VC trunk-bound


path.

Service Direction Bidirectional, Uplink, Displays the direction of an Ethernet


Downlink service.
Default: Bidirectional

Bound Path For example: VC4-1- Specifies the number of the path that you
VC3(1) want to bind, including VC4 path No.
and VC12/VC3 path No. VC4-1-
VC12(1-3).

Number of Bound For example: 1 Displays the number of the bound paths.
Paths

Table 10-81 Self-learning MAC address


Field Value Description

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Enters a MAC address.


FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
The first byte is an even
number.

VB Port For example: 1 Sets the VB logical ports.

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Displays the VLAN ID.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 722


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

About This Chapter

This section describes the process of configuring Ethernet services in the packet transport
network.

11.1 Basic Concepts


This section describes the basic concepts of Ethernet services.
11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in E2E Mode
Configuring an Ethernet service on a packet network in end-to-end (E2E) mode simplifies the
configuration process and improves the configuration efficiency.
11.3 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in Single Site Mode
An Ethernet service on a packet network can also been configured in single site mode.
11.4 Managing Services
TThis section describes how to manage services.
11.5 Parameter Description
This topic describes the parameters related to configuring services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 723


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.1 Basic Concepts


This section describes the basic concepts of Ethernet services.

11.1.1 Ethernet Service Types


This section describes various Layer 2 Ethernet service types defined by Metropolitan
Ethernet Forum (MEF), International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication
Standardization Sector (ITU-T), and Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). The packet
transport network usually uses the Ethernet service types defined by MEF and IETF.
In essence, the Ethernet service models defined by MEF, ITU-T, and IETF are the same
although they have different names. The OptiX OSN series support all the service models
listed in Table 11-1. This table also presents the mappings between the service models,
transport tunnels, and service multiplexing methods.

Table 11-1 Ethernet service models


MEF ITU-T IETF Model Transport Tunnel Service
Model Model (Network Side) Multiplexing
Method (Access
Side)

E-Line EPL - Physically isolated Physically isolated

EVPL - VLAN Physically isolated

VPWS MPLS

- Physically isolated VLAN

- VLAN

VPWS MPLS

E-LAN EPLAN - Physically isolated Physically isolated

EVPLAN - Physically isolated VLAN

- VLAN

VPLS MPLS

11.1.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN
MEF defines two types of Layer 2 Ethernet services: E-Line service using point-to-point
Ethernet virtual connection (EVC) and E-LAN service using multipoint-to-multipoint EVC.

E-Line Service
Any Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC shall be designated as an Ethernet
Line (E-Line) service type, as shown in Figure 11-1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 724


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-1 E-Line Service

A
EVC1

A Metro carrier
Ethernet

EVC2
B

B
E-Line1
E-Line2

The E-Line services that the product support are:


l E-Line Services Carried by PWs
l E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
l E-Line Services Carried by Ports
l Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services
NOTE
Native Ethernet services include E-Line/E-LAN services carried over QinQ links, E-Line/E-LAN
services carried over PWs, and UNI-UNI E-Line services. The E-Line services carried over PWs are
also called PWE3 services.

Table 11-2 shows different E-Line services and related carrier technologies.

Table 11-2 E-Line Service


E-Line Service Carrier Schematic Diagram
technol
ogies

E-Line Services MPLS PSN


Ethernet
Ethernet service Ethernet service
Carried by PWs Ethernet
service PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=100
PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=101 NE2
service
A
NE1
A

Ethernet service Ethernet service


PW Label=21 PW Label=21 NNI UNI
UNI NNI Tunnel Label=101
Tunnel Label=100 B
B

PW Tunnel

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 725


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

E-Line Service Carrier Schematic Diagram


technol
ogies

E-Line Services VLAN AVLAN = 1-100

Carried by QinQ Ethernet


service
Links NE1
A PSN
Ethernet service
A : SVLAN = 30
AVLAN = 1-100
Ethernet service
Ethernet
B: SVLAN = 40 service
B
BVLAN = 1-200
A
NE2

B
QinQ link BVLAN = 1-200

E-Line Services Port Ethernet Ethernet


Carried by Ports carrier service
Port3
NE1
Ethernet service
NE2 service
Port3
(physical A
Port4
A
Port4
isolation) UNI NNI
PSN
NNI UNI

B
B

Configuration Port NE2

Flow for the carrier


UNI-UNI E- (physical Ethernet
service UNI
Line Services isolation) Port3 NE1 NE3
A
PSN
Port4

Ethernet
service UNI
A

NE4

E-LAN Service
Any Ethernet service that is based on a Multipoint-to-Multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection
(EVC) shall be designated as an Ethernet Line (E-LAN) Service type, as shown in Figure
11-2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 726


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-2 E-LAN Service

A Metro carrier B
Ethernet

B
A

The E-LAN services that the product support are:


l E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
l E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
l E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
Table 11-3 shows the different E-LAN services and related carrier technologies.

Table 11-3 E-LAN Service


E-LAN Carrier Schematic Diagram
Service technolo
gies

E-LAN MPLS
CE A
Services
Carried
by PWs Ethernet
service
NE A
PW 2

NE C
PW1

Ethernet service PSN CE C


PW Label=20
Tunnel Label=100
PW3

NE B

Ethernet
service
PW

Tunnel
CE B
Service flow

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 727


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

E-LAN Carrier Schematic Diagram


Service technolo
gies

E-LAN VLAN
Services CE A

Carried
by QinQ Ethernet
service

Links NE A

Ethernet service
SVLAN NE C
PSN CE C

NE B
Ethernet
service

QinQ link
CE B Service flow

E-LAN Port
CE A
Services carrier
Carried (physical UNI
Ethernet
by Ports isolation) service
Port1 NNI
NE A
Port3
NNI Port2
Port2 NE C
Ethernet PSN
service CE C
Port 3 Port1

Port2

NE B Port 3
Ethernet
service Port1

CE B

Service flow

11.1.1.2 VPWS/VPLS
Layer 2 virtual private network (L2VPN) defined by IETF includes the virtual private wire
service (VPWS) and virtual private LAN service (VPLS). VPWS is used to provide point-to-
point service at Layer 2 and VPLS is used to simulate a local area network (LAN) in a wide
area network (WAN).

VPWS
VPWS is a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) technology for point-to-point transmission.
It performs one-to-one mapping between a received attachment circuit (AC) and a pseudo
wire (PW). By binding ACs and PWs in the <AC, PW, AC> format to form a virtual circuit,
VPWS achieves transparent transmission of Layer 2 services between users. Figure 11-3
shows the application of VPWS.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 728


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-3 Application of VPWS

VPLS
VPLS is a Layer 2 VPN technology for simulating LANs. Using VPLS, each L2VPN
considers an NE as a virtual switching instance (VSI), and this VSI is used to achieve
mapping between multiple ACs and PWs, and connect multiple Ethernet LANs so that the
LANs work as if they are one LAN.
VPLS is an important technology for MANs. It can connect multiple Ethernet-powered
enterprise networks. As shown in Figure 11-4, VPLS provides LAN services across the WAN
for customer A.

Figure 11-4 Application of VPLS


AC
VSI PW

PW

HQ of PW
company A VPLS
VSI AC
NE 1
PW

VPLS

PSN
NE 3
Branch of
company A
PW
VSI PW
NE 2
AC
VPLS AC Tunnel

PW Service flow

Branch of
company A

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 729


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.1.2 Service Carrier Technologies


The product support Ethernet service carrier technologies such as port carrier (physical
isolation), VLAN, and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS). The VLAN technology
includes QinQ technology. This section describes the MPLS and QinQ technologies, which
are more complex.

MPLS
MPLS is a type of transmission technology and it is used to transparently transmit data
packets between users. The MPLS technology includes pseudo wire edge to edge emulation
(PWE3) and MPLS tunnel.
l PWE3
PWE3 is a type of L2VPN protocol. In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3
provides tunnels and emulates various services, for example, Ethernet services. PWE3
carries services that are received over different mediums on one MPLS network,
eliminating the need for constructing multiple networks and therefore reducing the
OPEX.
PWE3 creates point-to-point tunnels, which are separated from each other. The Layer 2
packets from users are transparently transmitted in PWs. PWs must be carried on the
MPLS Tunnel.

Figure 11-5 Application of PWE3

Branch of
company A
NE3

HQ of
company A NE1 PSN

NE2

HQ of
company B
Branch of
company B
PW Service flow

l MPLS Tunnel
The MPLS tunnel is defined by the MPLS protocol. Independent from services, the
MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries PWs that contain the
services. Figure 11-6 shows how the MPLS tunnel is used to transmit services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 730


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-6 Application of the MPLS tunnel

HQ of Branch of
company A company A

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3

PSN

HQ of Branch of
company B company B

PW MPLS tunnel

QinQ
Services from the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple
VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport
network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The QinQ
technology is a VLAN stacking and nesting technology. Using the QinQ technology, data
packets carry two layers of VLAN tags for the identification purpose. This removes the limit
of the original solution in which only one layer of VLAN tag is used, extending the VLAN
IDs. Figure 11-7 shows the application of the QinQ technology.

Figure 11-7 Application of the QinQ technology


C-VLAN1
NE1 Service
Network A
S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
NE2
C-VLAN1
S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1
S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1
Service
Network B
S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 C-VLAN1

NE3
C-VLAN1

11.1.3 UNI/NNI
A UNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the user equipment. A UNI is used for
the user-side configuration of an Ethernet service. An NNI refers to the Ethernet port that is
connected to the packet transport network. An NNI is used for the network-side configuration
of an Ethernet service.

UNI
l V-UNI
A V-UNI is a virtual user-network interface. Each service on a UNI corresponds to a
logical V-UNI.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 731


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

A UNI can receive multiple services. That is, a UNI may correspond to multiple V-UNIs.

NNI
Based on the modes of carrying services, NNIs can be classified into three types, namely,
NNIs carrying services by ports, NNIs carrying services by PWs, and NNIs carrying services
by QinQ links.
l Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by ports, the encapsulation type can
be 802.1Q or QinQ. In this case, the NNIs that an Ethernet service traverses are
exclusively occupied. The other physical ports that the Ethernet service traverses may be
shared.
l Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by PWs, you need to create static
MPLS tunnels for the NNIs. To create the Ethernet services carried by PWs, you need to
create the PWs first. In this case, different Ethernet services can be encapsulated into
different PWs and transmitted in a tunnel to the same NNI. Therefore, the occupied NNIs
are reduced and the bandwidth utilization is improved.
l Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by QinQ links, you need to create
QinQ links for the NNIs. The port attribute and the encapsulation mode of the NNIs
corresponding to the QinQ links are Layer 2 and QinQ, respectively. On a QinQ link, the
packets that are accessed are encapsulated with one layer of VLAN tags in QinQ
encapsulation mode at the access ports. In this manner, multiple packets with different
VLAN tags from the user-side network can be encapsulated into the same VLAN for
transport. Therefore, the occupied VLAN resources on the transport network are
reduced. E-Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the QinQ link on the
network side.

11.1.4 Split Horizon Group


A split horizon group consists of some specified ports. The ports in one split horizon group
cannot forward packets to each other.
To better isolate E-LAN services and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service
loop, you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
Figure 11-8 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the NNI ports and service access ports are configured as
mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is configured at NE1 and the
NNI ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west NNI ports
do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 732


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-8 Service model that applies a split horizon group

HQ of company A

NE 1 E-LAN
Access
Point

Split Horizon Group

NE 2 NE 4
Access
Access Point
Point NE 3

Access
Point

Branch of Branch of
company A company A

Branch of
company A

Tunnel Service flow for company A

11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network


in E2E Mode
Configuring an Ethernet service on a packet network in end-to-end (E2E) mode simplifies the
configuration process and improves the configuration efficiency.

11.2.1 Services Supporting E2E Configuration


On an OptiX OSN 8800 packet network, the following services support end-to-end (E2E)
configuration:
l PW-carried E-Line services, that is, virtual private wire service (VPWS). In E2E
configuration, they are also called pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 733


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

l PW-carried E-LAN services, that is, virtual private LAN service (VPLS).
l Composite services, that is, E2E services that comprise different types of services. On an
OptiX OSN 8800 packet network, a composite service comprises PWE3 and VPLS
services.
A composite service contains service components and connection points. Figure 11-9 shows
the model of a composite service.

Figure 11-9 Model of a composite service

l Service components: indicate the services that constitute a composite service. For
example, for a composite service that comprises PWE3 and VPLS services, the service
components are PWE3 and VPLS services.
l Connection points: connect service components to form a composite service. Connection
points are classified into the following types, which show the connection mode of service
components.
PW connection points: indicate that service components are connected using PWs
to form a composite service.
Port connection points: indicate that service components are connected using
service ports (that is, UNI ports) to form a composite service.

11.2.2 E2E Service Configuration Procedure


This topic describes the three procedures for end-to-end (E2E) service configuration. Two
methods are available for configuring a composite service in E2E mode.

NOTE

Before configuring an Ethernet service on a packet network in E2E mode, ensure that the optical layer of
the packet network has been commissioned and configured, and the desired NEs, logical boards, and
logical fibers have been created. For details, see the Commissioning Guide.
If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure ETH virtual ports of
the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services following
the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths.

In this configuration mode, the user can configure tunnel automatic protection switching
(APS) and PW APS during the configuration of a multiprotocol label switching (MPLS)
tunnel and a PWE3 service. For an Ethernet service with tunnel APS or PW APS and an
Ethernet service without tunnel APS or PW APS, the configuration procedures are the same
but the parameters that need to be set vary. For details, see 11.2.4 Configuring an MPLS
Tunnel and 11.2.6 Configuring a PWE3 Service.
This topic describes the procedure for configuring an Ethernet service without tunnel APS or
PW APS on a packet network in E2E mode, as shown in Figure 11-10.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 734


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-10 Configuration procedure


Start

Configure the basic


Configure the LSR Configure global Allocating IP Addresses Set NNI port Create an
parameters of an MPLS
ID for an NE. OAM parameters. to Ports Automatically paramters. L2 link.
tunnel.

Specify the NEs and


Configure an MPLS Configure basic Configure OAM Test tunnel
ports that the tunnel
tunnel. tunnel information. parameters. connectivity.
traverses.

Configure basic service Configure UNI port Configure LAGs or MC-


parameters and attributes. LAGs.
features.

Configure a composite
Configure a composite
Configure a PWE3 service. Configure a VPLS service. service (method 1,
service (method 2)
recommended)

Configure basic Configure the basic Configure the basic Configure an


information about the information about the information about the unterminated PWE3
service. service. service. service.

Specify the source Specify the NE and Configure an


Specify an NE for the
and sink NEs and port for the VPLS unterminated VPLS
service.
ports. service. service.

Configure the basic


Specify the tunnel that Specify the tunnel that Specify the NE and
information about the
forwards a PW. forwards a PW. port for the PWE3
composite service.
service.

Specify the port to


Combine the PWE3
Enable ETH OAM for which the service is Specify the tunnel that and VPLS services.
the service. mounted. forwards a PW.

Configure split horizon Configure split horizon Create connection


Use ETH OAM to test groups. groups. points.
service connectivity.

Enable ETH OAM for Enable ETH OAM for Enable ETH OAM for
the service. the service. the service.

Use ETH OAM to test Use ETH OAM to test Use ETH OAM to test
service connectivity. service connectivity. service connectivity.

Configure other
Ethernet features.

Mandatory

End Optional

11.2.3 Configuring the Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel


Before packet services are configured, the basic parameters of a multiprotocol label switching
(MPLS) tunnel needs to be set and create an L2 link. The basic parameters include the LSR
ID, global MPLS-TP OAM parameters, and NNI port attributes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 735


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.2.3.1 Configuring the LSR ID for an NE


The ID of the label switch router (LSR) is used to identify an NE on a multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) network. LSR IDs on an MPLS network are configured to specify the
source and sink nodes during MPLS tunnel creation.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Precautions
NOTE

When planning LSR IDs, adhere to the following principles:


l An LSR ID can be a class-A, class-B, or class-C IP address, ranging from 1.0.0.1 to
223.255.255.254. It cannot be a broadcast address (*.*.*.255), unicast address (224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255), reserved address (240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255), network address (*.*.*.0), IP
address starting with 0 (0.*.*.*), or a loopback address (127.*.*.*). The network segment
172.16.0.0~172.31.255.255 is recommended.
l When ASON and packet services coexist, the LSR ID of packet services and the node ID of ASON
services must be the same.
l Each NE must have a unique node ID on the entire network.
l The LSR ID and IP address of an NE cannot be the same or be in the same network segment.
l The LSR ID of an NE cannot be in the same network segment as the IP address of a service port on
the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > packet
configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration and click Query.

Step 2 On the Basic Configuration tab, set LSR ID. For example, set it to 15.15.15.15.

NOTE

l When the LSR ID is specified for the first time, no warm-reset occurs on the NE. If the specified
LSR ID is then changed, a warm-reset occurs on the NE but does not affect services.
l If the LSR ID is modified, services will not be interrupted.
l The LSR ID cannot be modified if there are tunnels.

Step 3 Optional: On the Basic Configuration tab, set other parameters. The other parameters can
retain the default values or be modified based on the actual network plan. For details about the
parameters, see 11.5.2.1 Basic Configuration.

----End

11.2.3.2 Configuring Global OAM Parameters


Configured global OAM parameters are valid for all tunnels and pseudo wires (PWs). Among
the OAM parameters, only Carrier ID needs to be set, and the other parameters retain the
default values. Therefore, global OAM parameters are set to differentiate carriers.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 736


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration.

Step 2 On the Global OAM Parameters tab, set Carrier ID.

NOTE

For networks of the same carrier, the carrier ID must be the same. A carrier ID is a case-sensitive
alphanumeric string consisting of 0 to 6 characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9).

Step 3 Optional: Set other global parameters. The other parameters can retain the default values or
be modified based on the actual network plan. For details about the parameters, see MPLS-TP
OAM_Global OAM Parameters in the Feature Description.

----End

11.2.3.3 Allocating IP Addresses to Ports Automatically


This topic describes how to use the U2000 to automatically allocate IP addresses to ports. By
using the automatic allocation function, you can quickly configure IP addresses of ports.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l No IP addresses are configured for ports.

Background Information
If the IP addresses to be configured are discontinuous, many IP address resources can be
configured.

The IP address resources should not contain IP addresses in the 192.168.0.0/16 network
segment, 192.169.0.0/16 network segment, or the network segments to which LSR IDs and
NE IP addresses belong.

NOTICE
After you set IP addresses to ports manually for a NE, you must synchronize NE data to the
U2000, otherwise data inconsistency may occur between NE and U2000 and the conflict may
occur when you allocate IP addresses to ports automatically to the same NE or other NEs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 737


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 Specify a network segment for automatic allocation of IP addresses to ports.
1. Choose Configuration > IP Address Managementfrom the main menu from the main
menu.
2. Click New and specify the network segment for automatic allocation of IP addresses to
ports.

3. Click OK. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.


4. Click OK. Then, close the operation result dialog box that is displayed.
Step 2 Enable the function of automatically allocating IP addresses to ports. When creating a link,
select Automatically Allocate IP Address. For details of how to create a link, see 11.2.3.5
Creating L2 Links.
When automatically allocating IP addresses, the U2000 changes the values of the following
parameters of the involved ports.
l Port Mode: Layer 3
l Enable Tunnel: Enabled
l Specify IP Address: Manually
l IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

----End

11.2.3.4 (Optional)Configuring NNI Port Attributes


You can set the port mode to Layer 3 and the IP address in Layer 3 Attributes manually.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface.
Step 2 Select an NNI port and set the mandatory parameters for the NNI port.
l On the Basic Attributes tab, set Port Mode to Layer 3.

l On the Layer 3 Attributes tab, set Specify IP Address to Manually and set IP Address
and IP Mask for the port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 738


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

l Ensure that the IP address of the NNI port is not in the same network segment as that of another port
on which services have been configured or the IP address of the NE; otherwise, services may be
interrupted or the NE may be unreachable.
l Along an MPLS tunnel, the IP address of a port and that of its next-hop port must be in the same
network segment.

Step 3 Optional: Set other NNI port parameters. The other parameters can retain the default values
or be modified based on the actual service plan. For details, see 11.5.1 Parameter
Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface.
----End

11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links


Tunnel trails can be automatically computed during multiprotocol label switching (MPLS)
tunnel creation only after L2 links (known as Ethernet links) are created on the U2000.

Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Background Information
l L2 links can be created by using the link search function only for EX2 and EG16
boards.

Creating a Layer 2 Link by Searching for it


1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose File > Discovery > Link.

2. In the navigation tree on the left, select the NE where L2 links need to be searched for

and click . In the dialog box that indicates the search operation was successful,
click Close. The search result list is displayed.

3. In the search result list, select one or more L2 links in the Not exist state and click Creat
on the lower right of the window. In the dialog box that indicates the creation of L2 links
was successful, click Close.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 739


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

4. Optional: In the Confirm dialog box that prompts Are you sure to import links as
fibers/cables, perform the following operations:
a. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.
b. The Import Link dialog box is displayed, select one or multiple links and do as
follows:

n Click . The selected link is moved to the Selected Link area.

n Click . All links in the Available Link area are moved to the
Selected Link area. This operation is applicable to batch import.

n Click . The selected link is moved to the Available Link area.

n Click . All links in the Selected Link area are moved to the
Available Link area.
NOTE

When import the link, you can set whether to allot IP address automatic on the ports of the
link.
c. Click OK. In the dialog box that prompts the success, click Close.
5. Optional: If there are links in the Conflicting state, click Delete Conflicting Links on
the lower right of the window. In the dialog box that indicates the operation was
successful, click Close to delete the links in the Conflicting state.
6. Optional: From the main menu of the U2000, choose Inventory > Link Management
to view the created L2 links.

Manually Creating a Layer 2 Link


1. Choose Inventory > Link Managementfrom the main menu.

2. In the Link Management window, click New.


3. In the Create Link dialog box, click New, set Link Typeto L2 Link, and specify
Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE, and Sink Port.

4. Optional: Set the Remarks, User Label, Owner, or Weight.


5. Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box containing Operation succeeded,
click Close.
The created link is displayed in the query result area of link management.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 740


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

If a fault occurs during the link creation, the cause is displayed in the Operation Result dialog
box. You can rectify the fault based on the cause.
6. In the Create Link dialog box, click Cancel.
7. Optional: From the main menu of the U2000, choose Inventory > Link Management
to view the created L2 links.

11.2.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel


Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) tunnels need to be configured after the basic
parameters of the MPLS tunnels are configured. Some MPLS tunnels are equipped with
tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) while others are not. This topic describes the
detailed procedure for configuring an MPLS tunnel without tunnel APS. For the procedure for
configuring an MPLS tunnel with tunnel APS, this topic only describes the difference from
the procedure for configuring an MPLS tunnel without tunnel APS.

11.2.4.1 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel Without Tunnel APS


This topic describes how to create a multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel without
tunnel automatic protection switching (APS).

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel. The Create
Tunnel window is displayed.

Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel as follows:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 741


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

l Tunnel Name: The value of this parameter is automatically generated on the U2000. The
user can also enter a tunnel name based on the service plan. A tunnel name cannot
contain Chinese characters.
l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Service Direction: The value of this parameter can be Bidirectional (recommended) or
Unidirectional. The user can also set the value to Unidirectional based on the service
plan.
l Protection Type: Protection-Free
Step 3 Configure the NEs that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
l Method 1 (recommended): select the desired NEs in the topology view. This method is
vivid and applies to the scenario where there are many NEs.
a. In the topology view on the right, double-click the desired NEs one by one. Node
Role of the NEs is Ingress, Egress, and Transit in turn.
NOTE

To delete Node Role of an NE, double-click the NE.

Click to return to
the upper-level physical topology view.
l Method 2: select the desired NEs from the NE list. This method applies to the scenario
where there are a few NEs.
a. Click Add. Choose Node from the drop-down list that is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 742


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

b. In the window that is displayed, select an NE that the MPLS tunnel traverses. The
user can hold down Shift to select multiple NEs. Click and OK.

c. The position of an NE on an MPLS tunnel can be adjusted in either of the following


ways:
n Click Node Role of the NE to change Node Role of the NE on the MPLS
tunnel.
n Select the NE and clicking Up or Down to change Node Role of the NE on the
MPLS tunnel.
l Method 3: compute routes. This method applies only to the boards that support creating
L2 links.
NOTE

Before using this method, ensure that 11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links has been completed.

a. In the topology view on the right, double-click the ingress and egress NEs. Node
Role of the NEs is Ingress, Egress, and Transit respectively.
b. Click Route Constraint. In the Set Route Constraint window that is displayed,
add an NE or port, and set Explicit Restriction and Exclude Restriction for the
NE or port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 743


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

c. Click OK. Node Role of the NE or port is Transit.


d. Click Calculate Route.
Step 4 Configure the NNI ports that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
1. Click Details in the lower part. The details about the MPLS tunnel are displayed on the
right.
2. Double-click the blank area in the Outbound Interface/Ring column of an ingress node
and click .

3. In the list that is displayed, select an egress port of the ingress NE and click OK. The
egress port is the NNI port of the ingress node.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 744


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

4. Select the NNI ports for the transit and egress nodes by repeating the preceding steps.
For the transit node, Intbound Interface/Ring and Outbound Interface/Ring need to
be set. For the egress node, Intbound Interface/Ring needs to be set.
Step 5 Configure MPLS-TP OAM for the MPLS tunnel.
1. Click MPLS-TP OAM(Y.1731).... The Configuration MPLS-TP OAM dialog box is
displayed.

2. In the dialog box, click Add, set OAM Status of the MEP and RMEP to Enable, and
click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 745


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 6 Optional: Set other parameters for the MPLS tunnel and MPLS-TP OAM based on network
planning.
l In general, the other parameters of MPLS-TP OAM and an MPLS tunnel use the default
values.
l For the other parameters of an MPLS tunnel, see 11.5.2.3 Parameters for Configuring
a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode). For the other parameters of MPLS-TP OAM, see
MPLS-TP OAM_Global OAM Parameters in the Feature Description.
Step 7 Click Apply in the lower part to apply the MPLS tunnel configurations. The Operation
Succeed dialog box is displayed.

Step 8 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Browse Trail to view the configured MPLS tunnel.
1. In the Manage Tunnel window that is displayed, ensure that Deployment Status is set
to Deployed.

2. View the information about the tunnel and sub-layers. Select the configured tunnel. Click
the Topology tab in the lower part of the Manage Tunnel window to unfold the tunnel
and all the sub-layers.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 746


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

The tunnel contains information about the ODUk, OTUk, and OCh layers only when the tunnel was
carried on an ODUk channel.
After connecting logical fibers and before creating the tunnel, the users must create or search for an
OCh trail.

Step 9 Test the bidirectional connectivity of the MPLS tunnel using MPLS-TP OAM.
1. In the Manage Tunnel window, right-click the MPLS tunnel and choose OAM >
MPLS-TP OAM Test. The MPLS-TP OAM Test dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Select column, select the check box corresponding to the desired MPLS tunnel
and click Run to start a loopback (LB) test. After the LB test is complete, click LB
Statistics to view the detailed test results.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 747


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

3. Optional: Select LT from the drop-down list, select the check box corresponding to the
desired MPLS tunnel, and click Run to start a linktrace (LT) test. After the LT test is
complete, click LT Statistics to view the detailed test results.

----End

11.2.4.2 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel with Tunnel APS


The procedures for configuring a multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel with tunnel
automatic protection switching (APS) is similar to that for configuring an MPLS tunnel
without tunnel APS. The difference is that tunnel APS parameters must be set for the former.
This topic only describes the operations that are not required for configuring an MPLS tunnel
without tunnel APS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel. The Create
Tunnel window is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 748


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 In the basic information configuration window, set Protection Type and Switching Mode.
For example, set Protection Type to 1:1 and Switching Mode to Dual-ended switching.

Step 3 Configure the NEs and NNI ports that the working and protection tunnels traverse and
configure MPLS-TP OAM for the working and protection tunnels.

Step 4 Use MPLS-TP OAM to test the bidirectional connectivity between the working and protection
tunnels. The test procedure is the same as that for an MPLS tunnel without tunnel APS. For
details, see Step 4 in 11.2.4.1 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel Without Tunnel APS.

----End

11.2.4.3 Configuring Tunnels in Batches


This topic describes how to create MPLS tunnels in batches. The function of creating MPLS
tunnels in batches can be used when dynamic tunnels need to be created for multiple NEs.
The procedure for creating MPLS tunnels in batches is similar to that for creating a single
MPLS tunnel. The following takes how to create unprotected MPLS tunnels in batches as an
example.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Tunnel > Batch Create Tunnel. The
Batch Create Tunnel windows is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 749


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel as follows:

l Network Type: Full-Mesh


l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Service Direction: The value of this parameter can be Bidirectional (recommended) or
Unidirectional. The user can also set the value to Unidirectional based on the service
plan.
l Protection Type: Protection-Free
Step 3 Configure the NEs that the MPLS tunnel traverses. The computing routes function is
recommended.
NOTE

l Before using this method, ensure that 11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links has been completed.
1. In the topology view on the right, double-click the ingress and egress NEs. Node Role of
the NEs is Ingress, Egress, and Transit respectively.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 750


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

2. Click Route Constraint. In the Set Route Constraint window that is displayed, add an
NE or port, and set Explicit Restriction and Exclude Restriction for the NE or port.

3. Click OK. Node Role of the NE or port is Transit.


4. Click Calculate Route.
Step 4 The left procedure is the similar as that for a single MPLS tunnel without tunnel APS. For
details, see Step 4 in 11.2.4.1 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel Without Tunnel APS.
----End

11.2.5 Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features


Before configuring a pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), virtual private LAN
service (VPLS), or composite service, ensure that the service-related basic parameters and
features have been configured.

11.2.5.1 Configuring UNI Port Attributes


UNI port attributes need to be configured based on the actual service types.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Background Information
C-VLAN and S-VLAN services can share the same port only on theTN54EX8, TN55EG16,
TN54HUNQ2, and TN54HUNS3 boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 751


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Attributes of UNI Ports for Service Transparent Transmission or Transmission of


Only C-VLAN or S-VLAN Services
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface.
2. Configure UNI port attributes based on the actual service types.
For UNI ports, set the parameters as follows:
a. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Encapsulation Type.
n If services are transparently transmitted on UNI ports, set Encapsulation Type
to Null.
n If only C-VLAN services are received and transmitted on UNI ports, set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
n If only S-VLAN services are received and transmitted on UNI ports, set
Encapsulation Type to QinQ.
On the Basic Attributes tab, set Working Mode and Max Frame Length (bytes)
based on the service plan.
b. On the Layer 2 Attributes tab, perform the following operations:
n Set Tag and Default VLAN ID.
n Set QinQ type domain based on the received services.
If only C-VLAN services are received and transmitted on UNI ports, set
QinQ type domain to 8100.
If only S-VLAN services are received and transmitted on UNI ports, set
QinQ type domain to A.When QinQ type domain is set to A, the
packets whose TPIDs are 8100 or A can pass through the UNI ports.
NOTE

For the TN54EX8, TN55EG16, TN54HUNQ2, and TN54HUNS3 boards on an NE, QinQ
type domain of all UNI ports must be set to the same value if it is not set to 8100.

For details about parameter description, see 11.5.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.

Attributes of UNI Ports for Transmission of Both C-VLAN and S-VLAN Services
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. In the navigation tree, choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface.
2. Configure UNI port attributes based on the actual service types.
For UNI ports, set the parameters as follows:
a. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
b. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Working Mode and Max Frame Length (bytes)
based on the service plan.
c. On the Layer 2 Attributes tab, perform the following operations:
n Set TAG and Default VLAN ID.
n Set QinQ type domain based on the received services. When QinQ type
domain of an UNI port is set to A, the packets whose TPIDs are 8100 or A can
pass through the UNI port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 752


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

For the TN54EX8, TN55EG16, TN54HUNQ2, and TN54HUNS3 boards on an NE, QinQ
type domain of all UNI ports must be set to the same value if it is not set to 8100.
n Set SVLANs.
NOTE

SVLANs can be set to one or more values(example: A,B,C), or a value range(example: A-


C). When the value of an S-VLAN service is the same as the values of SVLANs or is in the
value range of SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass through a UNI port.

For details about parameter description, see 11.5.1 Parameter Description: Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.

11.2.5.2 (Optional) Configuring LAGs or MC-LAGs


If link aggregation groups (LAGs) or multi-chassis link aggregation groups (MC-LAGs) are
planned on a network, it is recommended that LAGs and MC-LAGs be configured before
service configuration to prevent services from being configured on standby ports on LAGs.

For details about the configuration of LAGs and MC-LAGs, see the Feature Description:

l LAG
l MC-LAG

11.2.6 Configuring a PWE3 Service


Some pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services are equipped with PW automatic
protection switching (APS) while the others are not. This topic describes the detailed
procedure for configuring a PWE3 service without PW APS. For the procedure for
configuring a PWE3 service with PW APS, this topic only describes the difference from the
procedure for configuring a PWE3 service without PW APS.

11.2.6.1 Configuring a PWE3 Service Without PW APS


This topic describes how to configure a pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) service
without PW automatic protection switching (APS).

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3
Service. The Create PWE3 Service window is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 753


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 In the Create PWE3 Service window, set the basic attributes. For details, see 11.5.3.2 E-Line
Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).

NOTE

l Services can be configured using a service template. The user can select a template from the Service
Template drop-down list or create a template.
l Set Service Type to ETH.

Step 3 Click Configure Source and Sink to configure the source and sink nodes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 754


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 Select the desired NE. In the pane on the right, select the board and port that accept services
and configure VLAN information for them. Click Add Node to configure the source node.

NOTE

l Setting Priority Type is optional. Set this parameter to 802.1P when packets need to be forwarded
based on port+VLAN+VLAN priority.
l When Priority Type is set, Priority Field must be set. The value of Priority Field is an integer
ranging from 0 to 7 and 7 indicates the highest priority.
l The E-Line services carried by PWs (Based on VLAN priorities) can't coexist with ETH OAM.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to add and configure the sink node and click OK.

Step 6 Configure MPLS-TP OAM for the PW.


1. Click MPLS-TP OAM(Y.1731).... The Configuration MPLS-TP OAM dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the dialog box, click Add, set OAM Status of the MEP and RMEP to Enable, and
click OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 755


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

If the MPLS-TP OAM function has not been enabled when you create the PWE3 service, you can enable the
function after the service is configured. The operation procedure is as follows:
1. In the Manage PWE3 Service window, right-click the desired PWE3 service and choose PW OAM >
Configure MPLS-TP OAM from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed Configuration MPLS-TP OAM dialog box, click Add, set OAM Status of the MEP
and RMEP to Enable, and click OK.
3. Right-click the desired PWE3 service again and choose PW OAM > Enable MPLS-TP OAM from the
shortcut menu.

Step 7 Specify the tunnel that forwards PWs. Select the desired PW that has been created, double-
click the Forward Tunnel column and click . The Select Tunnel window is displayed.
Specify the tunnel that forwards PWs and click OK.
NOTE

Parameters such as PW ID, Forward Label, and Reverse Label can use the automatically assigned
values or be specified based on the service plan.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 756


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 8 Click OK or Apply on the lower right of the window to complete PWE3 service
configuration.
NOTE

Select ETH OAM CC in the lower left corner of the window to create ETH OAM.

Step 9 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Browse Trail to view the newly created PWE3
service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 757


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 10 Perform a loopback (LB) test to check the bidirectional connectivity of the PWE3 service as
follows: In the PWE3 Service Management window, right-click the PWE3 service and
choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test.

Step 11 In the LB Test dialog box that is displayed, select the PWE3 service and click Run.

----End

11.2.6.2 Configuring a PWE3 Service with PW APS


The procedures for configuring a pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) service with
PW automatic protection switching (APS) is similar to that for configuring a PWE3 service
without PW APS. The difference is that PW APS must be configured. This topic only
describes the parameters related to PW APS and the operations that need to be added
compared with the creation of a PWE3 service without PW APS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Precautions
l MPLS tunnel APS and PW APS are mutually exclusively.
l The MPLS-TP OAM function must be configured and enabled for PWE3 services with
protection. Otherwise, the service will fail to be deployed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3
Service. The Create PWE3 Service window is displayed.

Step 2 Set the basic information about the PWE3 service in the same way as configuring a PWE3
service without PW APS. In addition, ensure that Protection Type has been set to PW APS
Protection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 758


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Specify the tunnel that forwards the working PW and the tunnel that forwards the protection
PW and click Single Source and Single Sink in the Node List area.

Step 4 The other operations are the same as those for configuring a PWE3 service without PW APS
protection. For details, see Step 3 in 11.2.6.1 Configuring a PWE3 Service Without PW
APS.

----End

11.2.7 Configuring a VPLS Service


This topic describes how to configure a virtual private LAN service (VPLS).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 759


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS
Service. The Create VPLS Service window is displayed.

Step 2 In the Create VPLS Service window, set the basic attributes of the virtual private LAN
service (VPLS).

Step 3 In Physical Topology on the right, double-click the NE where the VPLS service needs to be
configured and set Node Role of the NE to NPE.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 760


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 Click Details in the lower left corner of the window and click the PW Configuration tab. On
the tab, select a tunnel that forwards a PW as follows: Select the PW and double-click the
Forward Tunnel column and click . The Select Tunnel window is displayed.

NOTE
Other parameters such as PWID, Forward Label, and Reverse Label can use the automatically
assigned values or be specified based on the service plan.

Step 5 Select the tunnel and click OK.

NOTE

Tunnels must be created between NEs that the created VPLS service traverses. If a tunnel that forwards
PWs has not been created, click Create in the lower left corner of the Select Tunnel window. In the
Create Tunnel window that is displayed, create the tunnel that forwards PWs. For details, see
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.

Step 6 Select the associated NEs one by one, click SAI Configuration and SAI List, and click
Create.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 761


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 7 In the displayed Create SAI window, select the board, port, and service VLAN mounted to
each of the NEs.
Step 8 Click OK or Apply to complete VPLS service configuration.

Step 9 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Browse Trail to view the VPLS service.

Step 10 Perform a loopback (LB) test to check the bidirectional connectivity of the VPLS service as
follows: In the VPLS Service Management window, right-click the VPLS service and
choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 762


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 11 In the LB Test dialog box that is displayed, select the VPLS service and click Run.

----End

11.2.8 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 1,


Recommended)
A composite service can be configured using two methods. This topic describes how to
configure a composite service using method 1, which is preferred due to its simplicity.

11.2.8.1 Configuring a Composite Service Without PW APS


This topic describes how to configure a composite service without PW automatic protection
switching (APS).

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of the U2000, choose Sevice > Composite Sevice > Create Composite
Sevice. The Create Composite Service window is displayed.

Step 2 On the General tab, set Creation Type to H-VPLS.

Step 3 Click Add VPLS Node-SAI. In the Select VPLS Node window that is displayed, click the
Add Device tab. On the tab, select the NE where a virtual private LAN service (VPLS)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 763


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

service needs to be configured, and select the required board, port, and service VLAN. Click
OK.

Step 4 Click Add PWE3 Node. In the Select PWE3 Node window that is displayed, select the NE
where a pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) service needs to be configured, select
the required board, port, and service VLAN, and click OK.

Step 5 Click the PW Configuration tab in the lower right corner and select the tunnel that forwards
the desired PW.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 764


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 6 Click OK or Apply to complete the configuration of the composite service.

Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Browse Trail to view the newly created composite
service.

Step 8 Right-click the composite service and choose Ethernet OAM > Start CC from the shortcut
menu.

Step 9 In the Start CC window that is displayed, select an MA from MA Information List and
click . The selected MA is displayed in Selected MA Information List. Click
OK.
Step 10 Right-click ETH OAM Configuration View and choose LB Test.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 765


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 11 In the LB Test window that is displayed, select the composite service and click Run to start a
loopback (LB) test.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 766


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.2.8.2 Configuring a Composite Service with PW APS


The procedures for configuring a composite service with PW automatic protection switching
(APS) is similar to that for configuring a composite service without PW APS are. The
difference is that PW APS parameters must be set for the former. This topic only describes the
operations that are not required for configuring a composite service without PW APS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Configuration Networking Diagram


VPLS

PWE3

VPLS

Working
OptiX NE
Protection

Procedure
Step 1 On the PW Configuration tab, select the tunnels of the working and protection PWs.

Step 2 On the PWE3 Protection Parameter tab, set Protection Mode, Enable Status, and
Switching Mode.

NOTE

If Protection Mode has been set to 1:1, Switching Mode must be set to Dual-ended Switching.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 767


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 The other operations are the same as those for creating a composite service without PW APS.
For details, see Step 1.

----End

11.2.9 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 2)


This topic describes how to use method 2 to configure a composite service. This method helps
the user better understand the composition of a composite service.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Configuring Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring an MPLS Tunnel has been completed.
l Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features has been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an unterminated pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) service, that is, virtual
private wire service (VPWS) or E-line service.
1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3
Service. The Create PWE3 Service window is displayed.

2. In the Create PWE3 Service window, set the basic attributes. For details, see 11.5.3.2
E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).

NOTE

Composite services can be configured using a service template. The user can select a template
from the Service Template drop-down list or create a template.
Set Service Type to ETH.
3. Click Configure Source and Sink to configure the source and sink nodes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 768


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

4. Select the desired NE. In the pane on the right, select the board and port for service
access to configure a VLAN. Click Add Node to configure the source node.

5. Select a sink node that is not terminated. In the navigation tree on the left, click
Unterminated and set LSR ID for the sink node. Click Add Node and OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 769


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

6. Specify the tunnel that forward a PW as follows: Double-click the Forward Tunnel
column. In the Select Tunnel window that is displayed, select the tunnel that forwards
the PW and click OK.

7. Specify the forward and reverse labels of the PWs. Reverse labels are automatically
assigned by the system but forward labels need to be manually set.

8. Click OK or Apply to complete the configuration of the PWE3 service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 770


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

9. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Browse Trail to view the unterminated PWE3
service that is newly created.

10. Record the PW ID that is automatically generated and forward and reverse labels
because the information is required during the configuration of the unterminated PW for
a virtual private LAN service (VPLS) service. On the PW tab, click PW.

NOTE
In this example, PW ID is 39, Incoming Label is 32123, and Outgoing Label is 779.

Step 2 Create a VPLS service (that is, E-LAN service).


1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS
Service. The Create VPLS Service window is displayed.

2. Set basic attributes and add a VPLS node as follows: In the Create VPLS Service
window, set the basic attributes and click Add to select NPE. The Select NE window is
displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 771


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

3. In the Select NE window, select the desired NE, click , and click OK.
4. Create an unterminated PW that carries the VPLS service as follows: On the PW
Configuration tab, click Create to choose Unterminated PW. The Create PW window
is displayed.

5. In the Create PW window, set the basic attributes. Ensure that PW ID, Outgoing Label,
and IncomingLabel are the same as those set during PWE3 service creation. In the
Advanced Attribute area, specify the tunnel as follows: Double-click the blank area in
the Tunnel text box. In the window that is displayed, specify the tunnel that forward the
PW and click OK.

6. Create a service access interface (SAI) that carries the VPLS service as follows: On the
PW Configuration tab, click SAI List and click Create. The Create SAI window is
displayed.

7. In the Create SAI window, select the required board, port, and service VLAN. Click
OK.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 772


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

8. Click OK to complete the creation of the VPLS service.

9. Click Browse Trail to view the VPLS service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 773


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Create a composite service. That is, connect the unterminated PWE3 and VPLS services to
form an end-to-end composite service.
1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Composite Service > Create
Composite Service. The Create Composite Service window is displayed.

2. Set Service Name and set Creation Type to Customize.

3. Click Select and choose VPLS and PWE3. In the Set Filter Criteria window that is
displayed, click Filter to search for the unterminated PWE3 and VPLS services that have
been created, and click Select to add them to Service Component.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 774


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

4. Click Create to choose PW. The Create PW Connection Point window is displayed.

5. Select a PW and click to add it to Selected PW Information List.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 775


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

6. Click OK to create PW connection points.

7. Click OK or Apply on the lower lower right of the window to create the composite
service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 776


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

8. Click Browse Service to view the composite service.

----End

11.2.10 (Optional) Configuring Other Ethernet Features


This topic describes how to configure other Ethernet features that are not mentioned in the
preceding topics. Such Ethernet features are configured mainly in single-station mode.

This topic does not describe the single-station mode. For details, see the following topics in
the Feature Description:

l Configuring MPLS-TP PW OAM: MPLS-TP PW OAM must be configured in the


scenario where MS-PW is used.
l Ethernet Port OAM: Ethernet port OAM must be configured in the scenario where
Ethernet physical ports are directly connected to each other.
l QoS: In a high bandwidth-consuming network, quality of service (QoS) can properly
allocate limited bandwidth resources by service type.
l MSTP: The multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) is used to prevent loops on a
network.

11.3 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network


in Single Site Mode
An Ethernet service on a packet network can also been configured in single site mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 777


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services


This section describes the process of configuring E-Line services.

11.3.1.1 E-Line Services Carried by PWs


You need to configure the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) tunnel before configuring
the E-Line services carried by PWs.

Table 11-4 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Figure 11-11 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
3
Configure the NNI for
the services carried by
the static MPLS tunnel

4
Configure the MPLS
tunnel

5
Create the E-Line
services carried by
PWs
Required

End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 778


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-4 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs
St Operation Remarks
ep

1 Configu Setting the Basic (Required) The parameters are set as follows:
ring the Attributes of l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
UNI Ethernet Ports
(when l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
the UNI l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
is an When the packets do not need to be distinguished
Ethernet based on the VLAN tags, Encapsulation Type is
port) set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same
as the working mode of the Ethernet equipment on
the opposite end. Generally, this parameter takes
the default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted,
Max Frame Length(byte) takes the default value
1522. In other cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is
set to the maximum length of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.

Setting the Layer (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


2 Attributes of 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be configured.
Ethernet Ports The parameters are set as follows:
l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets, Tag is set
to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority parameters need to
be set for the untagged frames. VLAN Priority
needs to be set based on the planned QoS.

Configuring the (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


Flow Control l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need to be
set to the default value Disabled, unless otherwise
specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 779


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

St Operation Remarks
ep

2 Configuring the DCN (Optional) This operation is applicable only when the
Function for a Port UNI is an Ethernet port. The parameters are set as
follows:
When the UNI does not need to transmit the inband
DCN information, set Enable Port to Disabled.
Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

3 11.3.4.2 Configuring the (Required) Set the parameters as follows:


NNIs for Ethernet Services l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
Carried by Static MPLS
Tunnels l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.
l Set Specify IP Address to Manually, and set IP
Address and IP Mask based on the service plan.

4 Configu 11.3.5 (Required) The parameters need to be set based on the


ring the Configuring an service planning information.
MPLS MPLS Tunnel NOTE
tunnel For information to manage the MPLS tunnel after it is
configured, see 11.4.1 Managing MPLS Tunnels.

MPLS-TP OAM (Optional) The MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM can be used


to detect, identify, and locate a tunnel fault and trigger
protection switching. You need to configure it based
on the specific operation requirements and service
planning of a network.

Tunnel APS (Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters


based on the service planning information.
NOTE
You may also use PW APS to protect services.

5 Configuring UNI-NNI E- (Required) The parameters need to be set based on the


Line Services Carried by service planning information.
PWs on a Per-NE Basis NOTE
For information to manage E-Line services carried by PWs
after they are configured, see 11.4.2 Managing PWE3
Services.

11.3.1.2 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links


You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ
links.

Table 11-5 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 780


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-12 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
3
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by QinQ links

4
Configure the QinQ
links

5
Configure the QoS

6
Create the E-Line
services carried by
QinQ links
Required
End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 781


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-5 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Step Operation Remarks

1 Configurin Setting the (Required) The parameters are set as follows:


g the UNI Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
(when the Attributes of
UNI is an Ethernet Ports l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Ethernet l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
port) l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same
as the working mode of the Ethernet equipment
on the opposite end. Generally, this parameter
takes the default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted,
Max Frame Length(byte) takes the default
value 1522. In other cases, Max Frame
Length(byte) is set to the maximum length of
the transmitted JUMBO frames.

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet Ports l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the equipment
on the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets, Tag is
set to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based on
the planned QoS.

Configuring (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


the Flow l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
Control prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need to
be set to the default value Disabled, unless
otherwise specified.

2 Configuring the DCN (Optional) This operation is applicable only when


Function for a Port the UNI is an Ethernet port. The parameters are set
as follows:
When the UNI does not need to transmit the inband
DCN information, set Enable Port to Disabled.
Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 782


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

3 Configuring the NNIs for (Required) The parameters need to be set based on
Ethernet Services Carried the service planning.
by QinQ Links

4 Creating a QinQ Link (Required) The parameters need to be set based on


the service planning.

5 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based on


the service QoS planning.

6 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line (Required) The parameters need to be set based on


Services Carried by QinQ the service planning.
Links

11.3.1.3 E-Line Services Carried by Ports


You need to configure the NNI and UNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-Line
services carried by ports.
Table 11-6 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by ports.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 783


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-13 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
3
Configure the NNI for
the services carried by
ports

4
Configure the QoS

5
Create the E-Line
services carried by
ports
Required

End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 784


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-6 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports
Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuri Setting the (Required) The parameters are set as follows:


ng the Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
UNI Attributes of
(when the Ethernet Ports l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
UNI is an l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
Ethernet When the packets do not need to be
port) distinguished based on the VLAN tags,
Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same
as the working mode of the Ethernet equipment
on the opposite end. Generally, this parameter
takes the default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted,
Max Frame Length (byte) takes the default
value 1522. In other cases, Max Frame Length
(byte) is set to the maximum length of the
transmitted JUMBO frames.

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet Ports l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the equipment
on the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets, Tag is
set to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based on
the planned QoS.

Configuring (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


the Flow l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
Control prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need to
be set to the default value Disabled, unless
otherwise specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 785


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

2 Configuring the DCN (Required) The E-Line services carried by ports


Function for a Port occupy the NNIs exclusively. Therefore, you need
to set DCN Enabled State of the NNIs to Disabled.
When the UNI does not need to transmit the inband
DCN information, set DCN Enabled State to
Disabled. Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

3 Configuring the NNIs for (Required) The parameters need to be set based on
Ethernet Services Carried by the service planning.
Ports

4 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based on


the service QoS planning.

5 Configuring UNI-NNI E- (Required) The parameters need to be set based on


Line Services Carried by the service planning.
Ports

11.3.1.4 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services


You need to configure the UNIs to configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Table 11-7 provides the process for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 786


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-14 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

3
Configure the QoS

4
Create the UNI-UNI
E-Line services
Required
End Optional

Table 11-7 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services


Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuring Setting the (Required) The parameters are set as follows:


the UNI Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
(when the Attributes of
UNI is an Ethernet l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Ethernet Ports l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
port) When the packets do not need to be
distinguished based on the VLAN tags,
Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same
as the working mode of the Ethernet equipment
on the opposite end. Generally, this parameter
takes the default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted,
Max Frame Length(byte) takes the default
value 1522. In other cases, Max Frame
Length(byte) is set to the maximum length of
the transmitted JUMBO frames.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 787


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
Ports packets that are transmitted from the equipment
on the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged frames, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged frames, Tag is
set to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged frames and
tagged frames, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based on
the planned QoS.

Configuring (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


the Flow l Generally, the packet switched network (PSN)
Control adopts the QoS scheme to prevent link
congestion. Therefore, Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode and Non-Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode need to be set to the default value
Disabled, unless otherwise specified.

2 Configuring the DCN (Optional) This operation is applicable only when


Function for a Port the UNI is an Ethernet port. The parameters are set
as follows:
l The UNI is used for connecting the external
equipment and need not transmit in-band DCN
information. Therefore, DCN Enabled State
needs to be set to Disabled for the UNI.

3 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based on


the service QoS planning.

4 Configuring UNI-UNI E- (Required) The parameters need to be set based on


Line Services the service planning.

11.3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services


The flowchart for configuring an E-LAN service differs according to the type of the E-LAN
service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 788


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.3.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs


You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-LAN services carried by
PWs.
Table 11-8 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Figure 11-15 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
3
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by static MPLS tunnel

4
Configure the MPLS
tunnel

5
Configure the QoS

6
Configure the E-LAN
services carried by
PWs
Required

End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 789


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-8 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuring Setting the (Required) The parameters are set as follows:


the UNI Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
(when the Attributes of
UNI is an Ethernet Ports l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Ethernet l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
port) 802.1Q. When the packets do not need to be
distinguished based on the VLAN tags,
Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the
same as the working mode of the Ethernet
equipment on the opposite end. Generally,
this parameter takes the default value Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte) takes
the default value 1522. In other cases, Max
Frame Length(byte) is set to the maximum
length of the transmitted JUMBO frames.

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet Ports l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the
equipment on the opposite end. If all the
packets are untagged packets, Tag is set to
Access. If all the packets are tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag Aware. If the packets
contain untagged packets and tagged packets,
Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based
on the planned QoS.

Configuring the (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


Flow Control l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need
to be set to the default value Disabled, unless
otherwise specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 790


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

2 Configuring the Inband DCN (Optional) This operation is applicable only


when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
When the UNI does not need to transmit the
inband DCN information, set Enable Port to
Disabled. Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

3 11.3.4.2 Configuring the (Required) Set the parameters as follows:


NNIs for Ethernet Services l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
Carried by Static MPLS
Tunnels l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.

4 Configuring 11.3.5 (Required) The parameters need to be set based


the MPLS Configuring on the service planning information. For details
tunnel an MPLS on how to manage MPLS tunnels, see 11.4.1
Tunnel Managing MPLS Tunnels.

Configuring (Optional) The MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM can be


MPLS-TP used to detect, identify, and locate a tunnel fault
Tunnel OAM and trigger protection switching. You need to
configure it based on the specific operation
requirements and service planning of a network.

Configuring (Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters


Tunnel APS based on the service planning information.
NOTE
You may also use MPLS PW APS to protect services.
Follow instructions in Configuring PW APS to
configure MPLS PW APS.

5 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based


on the service QoS planning.

6 Creating E-LAN Services (Required) The parameters need to be set based


Carried by PWs on a Per-NE on the service planning information. For details
Basis on how to manage Ethernet services carried by
PWs, see 11.4.2 Managing PWE3 Services.

11.3.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links


You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ
links.
Table 11-9 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 791


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-16 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
3
Confiure the NNI for
the services carried
by QinQ links

4
Configure the QinQ
links

5
Configure the QoS

6
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
QinQ links
Required

End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 792


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-9 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuring Setting the The parameters are set as follows:


the UNI Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
(when the Attributes of
UNI is an Ethernet Ports l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Ethernet l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
port) 802.1Q.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the
same as the working mode of the Ethernet
equipment on the opposite end. Generally,
this parameter takes the default value Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte) takes
the default value 1522. In other cases, Max
Frame Length(byte) is set to the maximum
length of the transmitted JUMBO frames.

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet Ports l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the
equipment on the opposite end. If all the
packets are untagged packets, Tag is set to
Access. If all the packets are tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag Aware. If the packets
contain untagged packets and tagged packets,
Tag is set to Hybrid. When Encapsulation
Type is set to QinQ, the Tag parameter
cannot be set.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based
on the planned QoS.

Configuring the (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


Flow Control l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need
to be set to the default value Disabled, unless
otherwise specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 793


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

2 Configuring the Inband DCN (Optional) This operation is applicable only


when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
When the UNI does not need to transmit the
inband DCN information, set Enable Port to
Disabled. Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

3 Configuring the NNIs for (Required) The parameters need to be set based
Ethernet Services Carried by on the service planning.
QinQ Links

4 Creating a QinQ Link The parameters need to be set based on the


service planning.

5 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based


on the service QoS planning.

6 Configuring E-LAN Services The parameters need to be set based on the


Carried by QinQ Links service planning.

11.3.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports


You need to configure the NNI and UNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-LAN
services carried by ports.
Table 11-10 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by ports.
NOTE

If a universal line board is used to receive and transmit packet services, configure virtual Ethernet ports
of the universal line board and ODUk mapping paths on the U2000 before configuring services
following the configuration procedure. For details, see 6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping
Paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 794


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-17 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports

Start

1
Configure the UNI

2
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

3
Configure the NNI for
the services carried by
ports

4
Configure the QoS

5
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
ports
Required
End Optional

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 795


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-10 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports
Step Operation Remarks

1 Configuring Setting the (Required) The parameters are set as follows:


the UNI Basic l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
(when the Attributes of
UNI is an Ethernet Ports l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Ethernet l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
port) 802.1Q. When the packets do not need to be
distinguished based on the VLAN tags,
Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the
same as the working mode of the Ethernet
equipment on the opposite end. Generally, this
parameter takes the default value Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte) takes
the default value 1522. In other cases, Max
Frame Length(byte) is set to the maximum
length of the transmitted JUMBO frames.

Setting the (Optional) When Encapsulation Type is set to


Layer 2 802.1Q, parameters on Layer 2 need to be
Attributes of configured. The parameters are set as follows:
Ethernet Ports l Tag needs to be set based on the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the
equipment on the opposite end. If all the
packets are untagged packets, Tag is set to
Access. If all the packets are tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag Aware. If the packets
contain untagged packets and tagged packets,
Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set based
on the planned QoS.

Configuring (Optional) The parameters are set as follows:


the Flow l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
Control prevent link congestion. Therefore, Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode need
to be set to the default value Disabled, unless
otherwise specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 796


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step Operation Remarks

2 Configuring the Inband DCN (Required) The E-LAN services carried by ports
occupy the NNIs exclusively. Therefore, you
need to set Enable State of the NNIs to
Disabled.
When the UNI does not need to transmit the
inband DCN information, set DCN Enabled
State to Disabled. Otherwise, set it to Enabled.

3 Configuring the NNIs for (Required) The parameters need to be set based
Ethernet Services Carried by on the service planning.
Ports

4 Configuring QoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set based


on the service QoS planning.

5 Configuring E-LAN Services (Required) The parameters need to be set based


Carried by Ports on the service planning.

11.3.3 Configuring an Ethernet Port


An Ethernet port can be used to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different
settings of the port attributes. The attributes of an Ethernet port include the general attributes,
Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes, and flow control.
Port attributes are configured depending on the application scenarios the port is used, as
shown in the following table.

Table 11-11 Application scenario of an Ethernet port


Application Scenario Port Type Required Port Attribute

Carry Ethernet service Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2


attributes

Carry QinQ Link Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2


attributes

Carry tunnel Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 3


attributes

NOTE

When the Ethernet port is used to carry QinQ Link, the configuration procedure is similar to the
configuration procedure when the Ethernet port is used to carry Ethernet service. In this case, however,
the encapsulation types are different.

Follow the procedure shown in Figure 11-18 to set the attributes of an Ethernet port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 797


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-18 Procedure for configuring an Ethernet port


Carry Ethernet service/ Carry tunnels
Carry QinQ Link

Start Start

Set general attributes Set general attributes

Set Layer 2 Set Layer 3


attributes attributes

Set advanced attributes Set advanced attributes

Configure the flow control Configure the flow control


Required

End End Optional

11.3.3.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports


Before you set the Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port, you need to set the
general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet
port define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and
maximum frame length.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-19 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-19 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 798


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the board and set the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports,see 11.5.1.1
General Attributes.
Configuration example:

NOTE

4
:
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only. In this case,
the port can be used to carry the tunnel.

----End

11.3.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports


After the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port are set, the port can be used for connecting to
the client-side equipment at the edge of a network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within
the network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related information about
the data link layer.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 2.

Legend Information
Figure 11-20 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 799


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-20 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the port and set the parameters as required. For details about the
parameters, see 11.5.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes.

Configuration example:

NOTE

4
:
l TAG can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.
l Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.

----End

11.3.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports


When an Ethernet port is used to carry a tunnel, you need to set the Layer 3 attributes of the
Ethernet port. The Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related attributes of the
network layer.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 800


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3.

Legend Information
Figure 11-21 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-21 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the
parameters, see 11.5.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes.

Configuration example:

----End

11.3.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports


You can set the routine maintenance parameters by setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet
ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 801


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-22 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-22 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the
parameters, see 11.5.1.5 Advanced Attributes.

Configuration example:

----End

11.3.3.5 Configuring the Flow Control


When the flow control function is enabled, the Ethernet port sends a PAUSE frame to the
opposite end and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets, if a congestion
occurs on the link. As a result, the congestion is prevented.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 802


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-23 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-23 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the
parameters, see 11.5.1.2 Flow Control.
Configuration example:

----End

11.3.4 Configuring the NNIs


Configuring the NNIs is the basis of configuring the packet Ethernet services.

11.3.4.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports


Before configuring the Ethernet services that are carried by ports, you need to set basic
attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 803


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum
frame length.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-24 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-24 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the board and set the parameters as required.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 804


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

4
:
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q, QinQ or Null.
When Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the QinQ packets.
When Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the 802.1Q packets.
When Encapsulation Type is set to Null, The port transparently transmits the accessed
packets.

Step 2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports, select the board and set the parameters as
required. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 805


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

4
:
l Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the data packet with a VLAN ID (that is, the data
packet is tagged). If a data packet does not have a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is untagged),
the port discards the data packet. In this case, the Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are
meaningless.
l Access: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the
data packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the
port discards the data packet.
l Hybrid: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the
data packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the
port transparently transmits the data packet.

----End

11.3.4.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static MPLS
Tunnels
The parameters are set in E2E mode.
For details, see 11.2.3.4 (Optional)Configuring NNI Port Attributes.

11.3.4.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
Before configuring Ethernet services that are carried by QinQ links, you need to set the
general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet
port define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and
maximum frame length.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-25 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-25 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, Select the board and set the parameters as required.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 806


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

4
:
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to QinQ. When
Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, he port identifies the QinQ packets.

----End

11.3.5 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel


On a PSN network, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel carries PWs where
various services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently
transmitted between NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a
service, you need to configure the MPLS tunnel that carries the service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 807


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Context
NOTE

It is recommended that you configure bidirectional MPLS tunnels to facilitate tunnel management and
maintenance, and to improve OAM resource utilization efficiency.
During configuration of unidirectional MPLS tunnels, forward MPLS tunnel and reverse MPLS tunnel
are created separately. For a unidirectional forward MPLS tunnel, either its mapping reverse MPLS
tunnel or another tunnel can be configured to transmit BDI packets during MPLS-TP OAM
configuration; either its mapping reverse MPLS tunnel or another reverse MPLS tunnel can be
configured as the protection reverse tunnel during configuration of MPLS tunnel APS.
For bidirectional MPLS tunnels, a forward MPLS tunnel is bound with a specific reverse MPLS tunnel.
During configuration of MPLS-TP OAM, BDI packets are configured to be transmitted by the reverse
MPLS tunnel bound with the forward MPLS tunnel. In addition, only the reverse MPLS tunnel that is
bound with the forward MPLS tunnel can be configured as the protection reverse tunnel during
configuration of MPLS tunnel APS.
Before configuring MPLS tunnels, refer to the number of MPLS tunnels recorded in "Functions and
Features" under "Packet Boards" in the Hardware Description.

11.3.5.1 Configuring LSR ID


In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR (Label Switch Router) ID.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-26 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-26 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Precautions
NOTE

When planning LSR IDs, adhere to the following principles:


l An LSR ID can be an IP address of standard class A, B, or C, that is, an IP address within the range
from 1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254. An LSR ID cannot be a broadcast address (*.*.*.255), multicast
address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255), reserved address (240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255), network
address (*.*.*.0), zero address (0.*.*.*), loopback address (127.*.*.*), or subnet address
(192.168.*.*, 192.169.*.*). The network segment 130.0.0.0 is recommended.
l Each NE must have an independent and globally unique LSR ID on a network.
l The LSR ID and IP address of an NE must be different from each other and must belong to different
network segments.
l The LSR ID of an NE and the IP addresses of service ports on the NE must belong to different
network segments.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 808


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,set LSR ID.
Configuration example:

NOTE

3
:
l When the LSR ID is specified for the first time, no warm-reset occurs on the NE. If the specified
LSR ID is then changed, a warm-reset occurs on the NE but does not affect services.
l If any tunnel exists, do not change the LSR ID.

----End

11.3.5.2 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis


You can configure an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to
configure the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.

Legend Information
Figure 11-27 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 809


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Figure 11-27 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and set the parameters of the
forward and reverse MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.2.2 Parameters
for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).

Configuration example:

NOTE

7
:
l When Node Type is set to Egress, the tunnel bandwidth is the same as the bandwidth in the
Ingress direction and cannot be changed manually.
Set Next Hop Address to be the IP address of the port of the next node.

Step 2 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink
NE.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 810


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.3.5.3 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis


You can configure an end-to-end bidirectional MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to
configure the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.

Legend Information
Figure 11-28 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-28 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and set the parameters of the
bidirectional MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.2.2 Parameters for
Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 811


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

7
:
l When Node Type is set to Transit, the In port, Out port, Forward In Label, Forward Out
Label, Reverse In Label, Reverse Out Label, Forward Next Hop Address, Reverse Next Hop
Address, Source Node and Sink Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.
l When Node Type is set to Egress, the In port, Forward In Label, Reverse Out Label, Reverse
Next Hop Address and Source Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.

Step 2 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink
NE.

----End

11.3.6 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services


You can create the E-Line services to realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet
services.

11.3.6.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services


In the case of the UNI-UNI E-Line services, different users communicate with each other
through the equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are
transparently transmitted on the user side.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.

Legend Information
Figure 11-29 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-29 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about
the parameters, see 11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE
Basis).

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 812


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

5 3

NOTE

4
:
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU (bytes), Source VLANs
and Sink VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support the configuration of the
alarms, performance events, OAM, and QoS.
l Set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l You can set several VLAN values in Source VLANs and Sink VLANs. Separate consecutive
values with "-" and separate inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may
be "1,3,5,8-10".

Step 2 Optional: Configuring QoS.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 813


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

5
8 3

NOTE

6
:
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). Alternatively, you can select the QoS policy directly in Policy.

Step 3 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 814


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

3
:
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.6.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports


In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by ports, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI, which the user data occupies exclusively. In this manner, the
point-to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.

Legend Information
Figure 11-30 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-30 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 815


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about
the parameters, see 11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE
Basis).
Configuration example:

5 3

NOTE

4
:
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set Source VLANs. The
transparently transmitted service does not support the configuration of the alarms, performance
events, OAM and QoS.
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to Port.
l You can set several VLAN values in Source VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and
separate inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".

Step 2 Optional: Configuring QoS


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 816


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

5
8 3

NOTE

6
:
l If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate (kbit/s) and
Peak Information Rate (kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy.

Step 3 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 817


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

3
:Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.6.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis


In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a PW. In this manner, the
point-to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be configured.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.

Legend Information
Figure 11-31 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-31 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 818


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and set the parameters in the dialog box. For details, see
11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
Configuration example:

5 3

NOTE

4
:
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set Source VLANs. The
transparently transmitted service does not support the configuration of the alarms, performance
events, OAM and QoS.
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to PW.
l You can set several VLAN values in Source VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and
separate inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".
l PRI is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI, set PRI to
an integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the highest priority.
l Service Tag Role can be set to User or Service.
User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as user VLAN tags, and are processed
when the packets are forwarded.
Service: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as service VLAN tags, and are not
processed when the packets are forwarded.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set
Protection Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and
protection PW to implement MPLS PW APS protection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 819


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Configuring PW.


Configuration example:

5
8
3

NOTE

6
:
l You can configure the protection PW only if Protection Type is set to PW APS.
l PW Type can be set to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
Ethernet: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are encapsulated into PWs without changes,
and transparently transmitted to downstream sites.
Ethernet Tagged Mode: A VLAN tag specified by Request VLAN is added to packets.
l Set other PW-related parameters according to the planning information.

Step 3 Configuring QoS.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 820


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

5
8
3

Step 4 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters.
NOTE

Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.6.4 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links


In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ link, the user data is accessed
from a UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a QinQ link. Multiple
VLANs on the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN on the transport
network. In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QinQ link must be created for the NNIs.
l The services carried by the QinQ link do not support the creation of any maintenance
point (MP).

Legend Information
Figure 11-32 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-32 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 821


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and set the parameters in the dialog box. For details of the
parameters, see 11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
Configuration example:

6 4

2
3

NOTE

5
:
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set Source VLANs. The
transparently transmitted service does not support the configuration of the alarms, performance
events, OAM and QoS.
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link.
l Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.

Step 2 Click the QoS tab and click the QinQ Link tab.
Step 3 Select the QoS policy for the ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply.
Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful.
NOTE

Before selecting the policy, ensure that the policy is already created. If you set Bandwidth Limit to
Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate (kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate (kbit/s).

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 822


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.3.7 Configuring E-LAN Services


This topic describes how to configure E-LAN services, including E-LAN services carried by
ports, E-LAN services carried by PWs, and E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.

11.3.7.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports


You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by ports on the NMS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.

Legend Information
Figure 11-33 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-33 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name, and other parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.1
E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 823


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled,
the bridge does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning.
All VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding
table. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs
are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for
different VLANs have the same MAC address.
You can set MAC Address Learning Mode to IVL only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service
packets with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed
service packets without any VLAN tags.

Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Then, click Close.

Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters.

Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the
Selected Ports list.

Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.

Step 7 Optional: Click the NNI tab. Click the Port tab. Refer to Steps Step 4- Step 6 to add and
configure the NNI port. Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.4 NNI
Parameters.

Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.5 Split Horizon Group.

Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, click Close.

Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.6 MAC
Address Learning Parameters.
NOTE

Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.

Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 824


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 13 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 14 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.

Step 15 Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color
of the port. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that
the operation is successful. Then, click Close.
Step 16 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address.
Step 17 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 11.5.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE

Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.7.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis


You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by PWs on the NMS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be created.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name and other parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.1
E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 825


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled,
the bridge does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning.
All VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding
table. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs
are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for
different VLANs have the same MAC address.
You can set MAC Address Learning Mode to IVL only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service
packets with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed
service packets without any VLAN tags.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set
Protection Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and protection
PW to implement MPLS PW APS protection.

Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters.

Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the
Selected Ports list.
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
Step 7 Click the NNI tab. Click the PW tab. Click New and set the parameters related to the PW.
Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.5 Split Horizon Group.
Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.6 MAC
Address Learning Parameters.
NOTE

Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.

Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 826


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 13 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 14 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.

Step 15 Optional: In the QoS tab, click the PW. Set EXP and LSP Mode. Click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE

If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy. Before selecting a
policy, you need to create the policy first.

Step 16 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address.
Step 17 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 11.5.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE

Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.7.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links


You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by QinQ links on the NMS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port.
l If the services need to be carried by a QinQ link, you must configure a QinQ link first.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name, and other parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.1
E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 827


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled,
the bridge does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC
address forwarding table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning.
All VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding
table. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs
are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for
different VLANs have the same MAC address.
You can set MAC Address Learning Mode to IVL only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service
packets with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed
service packets without any VLAN tags.

Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.

Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters.

Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the
Selected Ports list.

Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.

Step 7 Click the NNI tab.

Step 8 Click the QinQ Link tab. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.5 Parameter
Description: QinQ Link.

Step 9 Click Add. Then, the QinQ Link Management window is displayed.

Step 10 Select a QinQ link ID and click OK.

Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close,

Step 12 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 828


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 13 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 14 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.6 MAC
Address Learning Parameters.
NOTE

Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.

Step 15 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 16 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.

Step 17 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 18 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.

Step 19 Click the QinQ Link tab. Enable the bandwidth limit and select the QoS policy for the
ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,
NOTE

Before selecting a policy, you need to create the policy first. If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled,
you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate(kbit/s).

Step 20 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set MAC Address and Egress
Interface. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address.

Step 21 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set
the OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 11.5.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE

Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.

----End

11.3.8 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services


On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit
NEs for an Ethernet service.

11.3.8.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports


This section describes how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service carried by ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 829


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by ports, set Encapsulation Type to Null
(recommended) and Port Mode to Later 2.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service carried by ports exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its transit
NEs. The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports.

Legend Information
Figure 11-34 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-34 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet
service. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
Configuration example:

5 3
2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 830


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

4
:
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.

----End

11.3.8.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs


This section describes how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service carried by PWs.

Background Information
For transit NEs of an Ethernet service carried by PWs, you only need to configure MPLS
tunnels whose Node Type is Transit. For details on how to configure an MPLS tunnel, see
11.3.5 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
If the PW which carries Ethernet services belongs to the MS-PW, the MS-PW needs to be
configured at the Switching Provider Edge (S-PE) node through which Ethernet services pass.
This section describes how to configure the MS-PW.

Legend Information
Figure 11-35 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-35 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and set the parameters of the MS-PW.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 831


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

1 3

4
2

1 3

4
2
5

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the setting of MTU.

----End

11.3.8.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
This section describes how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service carried by QinQ
links.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 832


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by QinQ links, set Encapsulation Type to Null
(recommended) and Port Mode to Later 2.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service carried by QinQ links exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its
transit NEs. The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports.

Legend Information
Figure 11-36 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-36 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet
service. For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
Configuration example:

5 3
2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 833


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

4
:
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.

----End

11.3.9 Configuring Address Resolution


Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) learning is implemented by the dynamic ARP.
It automatically maps IP addresses and MAC address, requiring no manual configuration of
an ARP table. Generally, dynamic ARP learning is applicable to networks with many NEs.
Dynamic ARP protocol packets, however, may significantly affect NE operating. For static
ARP configuration, the ARP table, namely, mapping between IP addresses and MAC
addresses, is configured manually, but NE operating is not affected by static ARP protocol
packets. Static ARP configuration is applicable to small networks with specific NEs and NE
ports used.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-37 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-37 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Control Plane Configuration > Address Parse from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create. Then, the Add Address Parse dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the IP address and MAC address for each ARP table item, and then click Apply. For
details about the parameters, see 11.5.6 Parameter Description: Address Parse.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 834


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

CAUTION
When configuring the MAC address of each ARP table item, ensure that the first digit of the
address is an even number.

Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.

CAUTION
Configuring the address resolution refers to creating the static ARP table items. To delete the
dynamic ARP table items, click Clear. This operation, however, clears all the contents in the
ARP table items and interrupts the services. Hence, exercise caution when performing this
operation.

NOTE

Click Delete to delete the contents of the static ARP table items.

----End

11.3.10 Configuring the NE-Level TPID


When the request VLAN function is enabled, PW-carried Ethernet services function properly
only if the TPIDs in the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same at both ends
of a PW.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Context
NOTE

l NE-level TPIDs configured on the OptiX OSN 8800 are effective only for PW-carried E-Line
services, and are automatically added into the request VLAN tags of the E-Line services when the
PWs work in Ethernet tagged mode.
l NE-level TPIDs configured on the OptiX OSN 8800 are ineffective for PW-carried E-LAN services.
In this case, the default value 0X88A8 is added into the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services
when the PWs work in Ethernet tagged mode.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > TPID Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set TPID(Hexadecimal).

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 835


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.3.11 Creating a QinQ Link


In the case of the QinQ link, a layer of VLAN tag is added to the packets that are accessed
over a port, through QinQ encapsulation. Hence, the packets from different VLANs on the
user-side network can be encapsulated and then transmitted to the same VLAN on the
transport network. In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved. E-
Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the QinQ link on the network side.

Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Layer 2 attributes of the port on the QinQ link must be set and the encapsulation
mode must be the QinQ mode.
l If the QoS parameters of the QinQ link need to be set, the QinQ policy must be
configured first.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New. Then, the New QinQ Link window is displayed.

Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-VLAN ID.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

11.3.12 Managing the Blacklist


The blacklist is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC
address. Managing a blacklist involves configuring disabled MAC addresses.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 836


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l E-LAN services are configured.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-38 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-38 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,select the created E-LAN service and set MAC Address.

Configuration example:

2
6

----End

11.4 Managing Services


TThis section describes how to manage services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 837


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.4.1 Managing MPLS Tunnels


MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnels.
Managing MPLS tunnels involves checking the MPLS tunnel topology, deploying MPLS
tunnels, deleting MPLS tunnels, and managing discrete MPLS tunnels.

11.4.1.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels


A complete MPLS tunnel has its source and sink NEs. An MPLS tunnel that is created on a
per-NE basis, however, is displayed as a discrete tunnel on the NMS. The tunnel search
function on the NMS helps convert a discrete MPLS tunnel to a complete tunnel, therefore
facilitating tunnel management. This section describes how to search for MPLS tunnels on the
NMS.

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created on a per-NE basis.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-39 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-39 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for Service from the main menu.

Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 838


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Click Start to start searching.

Step 4 After the search is complete, view the search results. Click Close.

----End

11.4.1.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology


MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. This section describes how to check the MPLS tunnel topology to
learn configuration information about MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-40 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-40 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 839


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:
1

2
3

Step 3 Select the MPLS tunnel whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 840


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 In the MPLS tunnel topology view, right-click the NE and choose View Real-Time
Performance from the shortcut menu to check the real-time running status of the MPLS
tunnel.

----End

11.4.1.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels


This section describes how to quickly create MPLS tunnels by using the tunnel duplication
function of the NMS.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l ODUk paths have been discovered and L2 links have been generated.

Legend Information
Figure 11-41 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-41 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Context
l If the tunnel to be duplicated does not belong to a protection group, the U2000
automatically generates two unidirectional tunnels or a bidirectional tunnel, whose
direction is reverse and share the same source and sink nodes with the tunnel to be
duplicated.
l If the tunnel to be duplicated belongs to a protection group, the U2000 automatically
generates the tunnel who shares the same source and sink nodes with the tunnel to be
duplicated and a new protection group that contains the two tunnels.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 841


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 Visit the following navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:
1

2
3

Step 3 Set parameters for the duplicated MPLS tunnel, adjust the source and sink nodes of the
tunnel, and set the detailed tunnel parameters.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 842


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

1 2

6 5

NOTE

1
: If the tunnel to be duplicated belongs to a protection group, the U2000 automatically
generates the specified number of tunnels who share the same source and sink nodes with the tunnel to
be duplicated and a new protection group that contains the tunnels. If the Copy Protection Group check
box is cleared, a tunnel is duplicated. In this case, you can set Tunnel Number of Copying and other
relevant parameters.

----End

11.4.1.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels


After being created on the NMS, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy MPLS tunnels from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Visit the following navigation path.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 843


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to
check all undeployed MPLS tunnels.

Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels to be deployed, right-click the MPLS tunnels, and choose
Deploy and Enable > Deploy from the shortcut menu.

NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.

----End

11.4.1.5 Modifying MPLS Tunnels


This section describes how to modify MPLS tunnels in end-to-end mode and on a per-NE
basis.

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 844


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Background Information

NOTICE
Modifying an MPLS tunnel may interrupt services.

Modifying an MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode


Step 1 Visit the following navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 845


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

2
3

Step 3 Select the desired tunnel information, click the tab in the lower left corner of the interface,
and change values of relevant parameters.

Step 4 Optional: If you need to modify only basic information of a tunnel, right-click the desired
tunnel and choose Details from the shortcut menu, and modify the basic information in the
displayed dialog box.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 846


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Modifying an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis


Step 1 Select the source NE of the desired tunnel from NE Explorer, choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from
Function Tree, and click the Static Tunnel tab.
Step 2 Select the desired tunnel information and click Modify. In the displayed dialog box, change
values of relevant parameters.

Step 3 Click OK. The Warning dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation may interrupt
services.
Step 4 Click OK. The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
Step 6 Modify static tunnel information on intermediate and source NEs by reference to steps 1 to 5.

----End

11.4.1.6 Deleting MPLS Tunnels


After being deployed, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete MPLS tunnels from the NMS and corresponding NEs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 847


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Visit the following navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:
1

2
3

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 848


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels that you need to delete, and right-click the tunnels.
l Choose Delete service > Delete from the shortcut menu. Deletes the selected tunnel in
the Undeployed state, that is, deletes the tunnel from the U2000.
l Choose Delete service > Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu. Deletes
the selected tunnel from the network. The tunnel deleted from the network is saved in the
discrete tunnel.
l Choose Deploy and Enable > Undeploy from the shortcut menu. Deletes tunnel
configurations from NEs and keeps the tunnel configurations on the U2000. After this
operation is performed, the value of Deployment Status for the tunnel changes from
Deployed or Partially Deployed to Undeployed.
NOTE

l If an MPLS tunnel has been configured in an MPLS tunnel APS protection group or has been
configured with PWE3 services, you need to delete the MPLS tunnel APS protection group or
PWE3 services before deleting the MPLS tunnel.

----End

11.4.1.7 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels


MPLS tunnels without source or sink NEs and MPLS tunnels that are deleted from the
network side are displayed as discrete tunnels on the NMS. This section describes how to
check discrete MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.

Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the
MPLS tunnel.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Discrete Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 Set filter conditions.
Configuration example:
1

2
3

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 849


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel and click the Hops Information tab. In the tab page, check the port
information and label information about the MPLS tunnel.

Step 4 Optional: Select one or more MPLS tunnels and click Delete.

----End

11.4.2 Managing PWE3 Services


Quality of PWE3 services has significant impacts on customer revenues. Therefore, it is
crucial to properly manage PWE3 services. Managing PWE3 services involves deploying,
modifying, and deleting PWE3 services, checking the PWE3 service topology, and managing
discrete PWE3 services.

11.4.2.1 Searching for PWE3 Services


A complete PWE3 service contains its source and end. If being created on a per-NE basis,
PWE3 services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS. After you search for the PWE3
services on the NMS, the discrete PWE3 services are converted to complete PWE3 services.
This facilitates future PWE3 service management.

Prerequisites
l PWE3 services have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create PWE3
services on a per-NE basis, see Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs
on a Per-NE Basis.
l When PWE3 services are created on a per-NE basis, ensure that the PW types are the
same; Peer IP of a local NE equals the LSR ID of the opposite NE; the PW outgoing
label of a local NE equals the PW incoming label of the opposite NE.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-42 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-42 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for Service from the main menu.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 850


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Setting the discovery policy and searching for PWE3 Services.

2
1

----End

11.4.2.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status


This section describes how to check the topology information and running status of a PWE3
service, facilitating PWE3 service management.

Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-43 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-43 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 851


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter criteria.


Configuration example:

Step 3 View the topology of the selected PWE3 service.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 852


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 Check the real-time running status of the PWE3 service.


Configuration example:

Step 5 Check the running status of the tunnel.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 853


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.2.3 Deploying PWE3 Services


After being created on the NMS, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy PWE3 services
from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-44 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-44 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 854


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services to be deployed, right-click the PWE3 services, and choose
Deploy and Enable > Deploy from the shortcut menu.

NOTE
After a PWE3 service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 855


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.4.2.4 Modifying PWE3 Services


This section describes how to change values of PWE3 service parameters, such as the service
name.

Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-45 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-45 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Context

NOTICE
Modifying a PWE3 service may interrupt other services.
If the Ethernet service OAM function is used to performing performance test, after the VLAN
ID of a node is modified, the local MEP information will be deleted, which affects the
Ethernet service OAM function.

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 856


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select the desired PWE3 service, click the tab in the lower left corner of the interface, and
change values of relevant parameters.

Step 4 Optional: If you need to modify only basic information of a PWE3 service, select the PWE3
service and click Details. In the dialog box that is displayed, change the values of the PWE3
services parameters as required.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 857


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.2.5 Deleting PWE3 Services


After being deployed, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete PWE3 services from the NMS and corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-46 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-46 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 858


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services that you need to delete, and right-click the services.
NOTE

For the service that the Deployment Status is Deployed or Partially Deployed, before deleting the service,
you need to set Deployment Status to Undeployed.
l Choose Delete Service > Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu. Deletes
the selected service from the network. The service deleted from the network is saved in
the discrete service.
l Choose Delete Service > Delete from the shortcut menu. Deletes the selected service in
the Undeployed state, that is, deletes the service from the U2000.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 859


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

l Choose Delete Service > Completely Delete from the shortcut menu. Deletes the
selected service from the U2000. The service deleted using this button cannot be restored
using Recycle Bin.

----End

11.4.2.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services


This section describes how to find discrete PWE3 services, convert discrete PWE3 services to
unterminated services, and delete discrete PWE3 services.

Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-47 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-47 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 860


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Optional: Convert a PWE3 service to an unterminated service. Set attributes of the PWE3
service, such as the service name.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 861


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

3
:After a PWE3 service is converted to an unterminated service, its service information is
displayed in Manage PWE3 Service.

Step 4 Optional: Delete discrete service.


Configuration example:

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 862


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.4.3 Managing VPLS Services


Quality of VPLS services has significant impacts on customer revenues. Therefore, it is
crucial to properly manage VPLS services. Managing VPLS services involves deploying,
modifying, and deleting VPLS services, checking the VPLS service topology, and managing
discrete VSI resource.

11.4.3.1 Searching for VPLS Services


A complete VPLS service contains its source and end. If being created on a per-NE basis,
VPLS services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS. After you search for the VPLS
services on the NMS, the discrete VPLS services are converted to complete VPLS services.
This facilitates future VPLS service management.

Prerequisites
l VPLS services have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create VPLS
services on a per-NE basis, see Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE
Basis.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for Service from the main menu.

Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the discovery policy.

Step 3 Click Start to start searching.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 863


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 After the search is complete, view the search results. Click Close.

----End

11.4.3.2 Checking the VPLS Service Status


This section describes how to check the topology information and running status of a VPLS
service, facilitating VPLS service management.

Prerequisites
l The VPLS service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-48 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-48 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 864


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select the VPLS service to view its topology information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 865


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 Check the real-time running status of the VPLS service.


Configuration example:

3
4

Step 5 Check the running status of the tunnel.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 866


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

3
4

----End

11.4.3.3 Deploying VPLS Services


After being created on the NMS, VPLS services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy VPLS services from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l The VPLS service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-49 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-49 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Manage VPLS Service from the main menu.

Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to
check all undeployed VPLS services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 867


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Select one or more VPLS services to be deployed, right-click the VPLS services, and choose
Deploy and Enable > Deploy from the shortcut menu.

NOTE
After a VPLS service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.

----End

11.4.3.4 Modifying VPLS Services


This section describes how to change values of VPLS service parameters, such as the service
name.

Prerequisites
l The VPLS service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-50 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-50 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Background Information

NOTICE
Modifying a VPLS service may interrupt other services.
If the Ethernet service OAM function is used to performing performance test, after the VLAN
ID of a node is modified, the local MEP information will be deleted, which affects the
Ethernet service OAM function.

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 868


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 869


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Select the desired VPLS service, modify the basic attributes of the selected VPLS service. For
details, see 11.2.7 Configuring a VPLS Service.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 870


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

3
:The windows for modifying and creating a VPLS service are similar. The only difference is
that only part of the parameters can be set in the window for modifying the composite service.

Step 4 Optional: If you need to modify only basic information of a VPLS service, select the VPLS
service and change the values of the VPLS services parameters as required.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 871


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.3.5 Deleting VPLS Services


After being deployed, VPLS services are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete VPLS services from the NMS and corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l The VPLS service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-51 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-51 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 872


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 873


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Select one or more VPLS services that you need to delete, and right-click the services.
NOTE

For the service that the Deployment Status is Deployed or Partially Deployed, undeploy the VSI
before deleting it. In the Manage VPLS Service window, select VPLS services with Deployment
Status set to Deployed or Partially Deployed, and then click VSI tab. Select one or more VSIs, right-
click, and choose Undeploy.
l Choose Delete Service > Delete from the shortcut menu. Deletes the selected service in
the Undeployed state, that is, deletes the service from the U2000.
l Choose Delete Service > Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu. Deletes
the selected service from the network. The service deleted from the network is saved in
the discrete service.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 874


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.4.3.6 Managing VSI Resources


This section describes how to find discrete VPLS services, convert a VSI that is not
referenced by any service to a service, and delete discrete VPLS services.

Prerequisites
l The VPLS service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-52 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-52 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.

Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.

Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 875


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 3 Optional: Converts a VSI to a service.


1. Select a VSI resource and converts a VSI to a service..
Configuration example:

2. Set the VPLS service attributes.


Step 4 Optional: Select one or more VSI resources that you need to delete and deletes the selected
discrete VPLS service from both the NMS database and the NEs.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 876


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.4 Managing Composite Services


Managing composite services includes automatically discovering composite services,
checking the service topology, deploying, modifying, and deleting composite services.

11.4.4.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services


With the automatically discovering composite service function, you can discover composite
services and save them to the NMS. The composite service is composed of services associated
with interface connection points or PW connection points.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-53 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-53 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 877


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set the discovery.


Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 878


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

1
2

3 4

Step 3 View the search results.

----End

11.4.4.2 Checking the Composite Service Status


This section describes how to check the topology information and running status of a
composite service, facilitating composite service management.

Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-54 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-54 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 879


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:
1

Step 2 Set filter conditions.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select the composite service whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 880


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 In the topology view of the composite service, double-click to view the topology
information of the services contained in the composite service. Click the Service Component
tab to view the running status of the services.

Step 5 In the topology view of the composite service, right-click the connection point and
choose Details from the shortcut menu that is displayed to view the details about the
connection point of the composite service.

----End

11.4.4.3 Deploying Composite Services


After being created on the NMS, Composite services are stored on the NMS but not
immediately deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy
Composite services from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.

Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-55 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-55 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 881


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set the discovery.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select one or more Composite services to be deployed, right-click the Composite services,
and choose Deploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After a Composite service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 882


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.4.4.4 Modifying Composite Services


You can modify the basic attributes such as the name of a composite service or add or delete
service nodes to adjust the services managed by the composite service.

Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 11-56 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-56 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Background Information

NOTICE
If the Ethernet service OAM function is used to performing performance test, after the VLAN
ID of a node is modified, the local MEP information will be deleted, which affects the
Ethernet service OAM function.

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 883


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter condition.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select the desired composite service, right-click, and choose Modify from the shortcut menu.
In the Modify Composite Service window, modify the basic attributes, service components,
and connection points of the selected composite service. For details, see Configuring a
Composite Service.
NOTE
The windows for modifying and creating a composite service are similar. The only difference is that
only part of the parameters can be set in the window for modifying the composite service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 884


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 4 Optional: To modify only the name of a composite service, select and right-click the desired
composite service, choose Rename from the shortcut menu that is displayed, and set the
service name in the dialog box that is displayed.

----End

11.4.4.5 Deleting Composite Services


You can delete composite services that have not been deployed to delete the information about
the composite services and the related service components.

Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

Background Information
The deletion types are as follows:
l Delete Only Composite Service: In this case, only the composite services are deleted
from the U2000. Services on the NE side are not affected.
l Delete Cascaded Service: In this case, the composite services are deleted from the U2000
and the services associated with these composite services are deleted from both the
U2000 and NE side.

Legend Information
Figure 11-57 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-57 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Navigation path.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 885


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Set filter condition.


Configuration example:

Step 3 Select one or more composite services that you need to delete, right-click the services, and
choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box that is displayed, select Delete Composite Services Only or
Delete Cascaded Service.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 886


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

NOTE

If a service component used by multiple composite services is deleted, the service component is deleted
from all these composite services after clicking the Delete Cascaded Service.

----End

11.4.5 Searching for the Service Path

11.4.5.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs


For E-Line services, this operation can display the transmission path of the VLAN service
flow on one access port. For E-LAN services, this operation can display the broadcast domain
to which the VLAN belongs.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
l The license for TP-Assist function has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the TP-Assist function has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.

Legend Information
Figure 11-58 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-58 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
l Search for an E-Line service path.
a. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 887


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

b. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-Line service.

c. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

l Search for an E-LAN service path.


a. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

b. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-LAN service.

c. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 888


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.5.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses


For E-LAN services, this operation allows the information of a MAC address learned by each
NE on a service path to be displayed, illustrating the entire service path through which
packets with the MAC address being the source address travel.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
l The license for TP-Assist function has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the TP-Assist function has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.

Legend Information
Figure 11-59 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-59 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Search for an E-LAN service path.
1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 889


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

2. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-LAN service.

3. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

Step 2 Query the Learning of MAC Addresses.


1. Enter the MAC address to be queried.

2. Click Query. If the MAC address has been learned by a port, a green tick is displayed on
top right of the NE.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 890


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

----End

11.4.6 Performing Performance Monitoring Based on Service


Paths
This topic describes how to monitor the performance of Ethernet services based on service
paths.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
l The license of the TP-Assist function has been loaded. For details about the license, see
Feature License.
l The license of the TP-Assist function has been authorized to the NE. For details, see
Setting License.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for the desired service path.

Search for the desired service


path based on the selected port 4
and VLAN ID.

The service path is


displayed in the
topology view.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 891


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Query the real-time and historical performance data of each statistical item on the service
path.
The following figure takes querying the real-time performance data of a PW on a service path
as an example to illustrate the query process. The process for querying the performance data
of other statistical items is similar.

1
Click the Service
Information tab.
2

3
View the historical
or real-time
performance data
of a statistical item
as required.

4 Set the real-time performance


5 Click this button to monitoring period and display mode as
confirm the settings. required.

Performance data
display area. 6

----End

11.4.7 Querying Service Trail Performance By PMS System


The U2000 provides the performance management system (PMS). Using the PMS system,
you can view the performance data of service trails in a network. The performance data
includes statistics on the performance data of boards, ports, tunnels, PWs, and services.

11.4.7.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs


For E-Line services, this operation can display the transmission path of the VLAN service
flow on one access port. For E-LAN services, this operation can display the broadcast domain
to which the VLAN belongs.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 892


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

l End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.


l The license for TP-Assist function has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the TP-Assist function has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.

Legend Information
Figure 11-60 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-60 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
l Search for an E-Line service path.
a. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

b. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-Line service.

c. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 893


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

l Search for an E-LAN service path.


a. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

b. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-LAN service.

c. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

----End

11.4.7.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses


For E-LAN services, this operation allows the information of a MAC address learned by each
NE on a service path to be displayed, illustrating the entire service path through which
packets with the MAC address being the source address travel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 894


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
l The license for TP-Assist function has been correctly loaded. For details about the
license, see Feature License in the Feature Description.
l The NE license authorization for the TP-Assist function has been set. For details, see
Setting License in the Commissioning Guide.

Legend Information
Figure 11-61 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 11-61 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Search for an E-LAN service path.
1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > Service Path View.

2. Specify the port and VLAN ID for an E-LAN service.

3. Click Search. The service path to which the specified port and VLAN ID reside is
displayed in the right window .

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 895


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Step 2 Query the Learning of MAC Addresses.


1. Enter the MAC address to be queried.

2. Click Query. If the MAC address has been learned by a port, a green tick is displayed on
top right of the NE.

----End

11.5 Parameter Description


This topic describes the parameters related to configuring services.

11.5.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface


The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 896


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.5.1.1 General Attributes


This topic describes the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Mode, Enable Port, and Encapsulation Type.

Table 11-12 Basic Attributes of EG16 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Name - Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port Enabled, Disabled When the port is enabled, it indicates that
Default: Enabled the user uses the port and the port has
services. When the port is disabled, it
indicates that the port does not process
services.
When no service is configured, it is
recommended to disable the involved ports.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when
the Ethernet port carries port-based or
QinQ-link-based Ethernet services.
l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when
the port carries tunnel services.

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l This parameter is set to Null when the
port needs to transparently transmit
packets.
l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when
the port needs to identify 802.1Q
standard packets.
l This parameter is set to QinQ when the
port needs to identify QinQ standard
packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.
For TN55EG16, if the port needs to identify both
C-VLAN and S-VLAN packets, Encapsulation
Type must be set to 802.1Q.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 897


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Working Mode l GE optical port: Set the Working Mode parameter to set the
1000M Full- working mode of the Ethernet port on the
Duplex, Auto- board.
Negotiation Auto-negotiation can automatically
l GE electrical determine the optimal working modes of
port: 10M Full- the connected ports. This mode is easy to
Duplex, 100M maintain and is recommended.
Full-Duplex, NOTE
1000M Full- Ensure that the working modes of the
Duplex, Auto interconnected ports are the same, Otherwise,
Negotiation the services are not available.

l FE optical port:
100M Full-
Duplex, Auto-
Negotiation
Default: Auto-
Negotiation

Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 This parameter specifies the maximum
(bytes) Default: 1522 length of a frame traversing a port. When
the length of a frame exceeds the specified
maximum frame length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Logical Port Optical Port, Displays the attributes of a logical port,


Attribute Electrical Port which is set based on the attributes of the
Default: Optical Port corresponding physical port.

Physical Port No interface, Single- Displays the physical port attribute.


Attribute mode optical port,
Multi-mode optical
port, Electrical port

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min.) Default: 720 After the ARP aging time expires, the
equipment automatically updates dynamic
ARP entries to prevent incorrect address
resolution.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the EG16


board.

Optical Module In-Position, Not-in- Displays the optical module status.


Status Position

Laser Interface On, Off Specifies the on/off status of the laser.
Status

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 898


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Laser Transmission - Displays the laser transmission distance.


Distance

Traffic Policing Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables traffic monitoring on


Status Default: Disabled the port.
When you need to monitor the traffic on a
port, enable the traffic monitoring function
to monitor the traffic on a port in the period
specified by Traffic Policing Period.

Traffic Policing 1 to 30 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.


Period (min.) Default: 15

Table 11-13 Basic Attributes of EX2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Name - Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port Enabled, Disabled When the port is enabled, it indicates that
Default: Enabled the user uses the port and the port has
services. When the port is disabled, it
indicates that the port does not process
services.
When no service is configured, it is
recommended to disable the involved ports.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l Layer 2: The port can access the user-
side equipment, carry Ethernet services
that are based on the ports and use the
port exclusively or QinQ Link.
l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l Null: The port transparently transmits
the accessed packets.
l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q
standard packets.
l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ
standard packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 899


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Working Mode 10G Full-Duplex Set the Working Mode parameter to set the
LAN working mode of the Ethernet port on the
Default: 10G Full- board.
Duplex LAN NOTE
l When setting this parameter, ensure that the
working modes of the interconnected ports
are the same. Otherwise, the services are not
available.

Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 This parameter specifies the maximum
(bytes) Default: 1522 length of a frame traversing a port. When
the length of a frame exceeds the specified
maximum frame length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Logical Port Optical Port, Specifies the logical port attribute.


Attribute Electrical Port NOTE
Default: Optical Port The EX2 board does not support electrical ports.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Optical Port.

Physical Port No interface, Single- Displays the physical port attribute.


Attribute mode optical port,
Multi-mode optical
port, Electrical port

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min.) Default: 720 NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2


board.

Optical Module In-Position, Not-in- Displays the optical module status.


Status Position

Laser Interface On, Off Specifies the on/off status of the laser.
Status

Laser Transmission - Displays the laser transmission distance.


Distance

Traffic Policing Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables traffic monitoring on


Status Default: Disabled the port.

Traffic Policing 1 to 30 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.


Period (min.) Default: 15

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 900


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-14 Basic Attributes of EX8 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT8.

Name - Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port Enabled, Disabled When the port is enabled, it indicates that
Default: Enabled the user uses the port and the port has
services. When the port is disabled, it
indicates that the port does not process
services.
When no service is configured, it is
recommended to disable the involved ports.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l Layer 2: The port can access the user-
side equipment, carry Ethernet services
that are based on the ports and use the
port exclusively or QinQ Link.
l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l Null: The port transparently transmits
the accessed packets.
l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q
standard packets.
l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ
standard packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.
If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and
S-VLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be
set to 802.1Q.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 901


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Working Mode Port1 to Port4: 10G Set the Working Mode parameter to set the
Full-Duplex LAN, working mode of the Ethernet port on the
10G Full-Duplex board.
WAN NOTE
Port5 to Port8: 10G When setting this parameter, ensure that the
working modes of the interconnected ports are
Full-Duplex LAN,
the same. Otherwise, the services are not
1000M Full-Duplex, available.
1000M Half-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex,
100M Half-Duplex,
10M Full-Duplex,
10M Half-Duplex,
Auto-Negotiation
Default: 10G Full-
Duplex LAN

Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 This parameter specifies the maximum
(bytes) Default: 1522 length of a frame traversing a port. When
the length of a frame exceeds the specified
maximum frame length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Logical Port Optical Port, Specifies the logical port attribute.


Attribute Electrical Port
Default: Optical Port

Physical Port No interface, Single- Displays the physical port attribute.


Attribute mode optical port,
Multi-mode optical
port, Electrical port

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min.) Default: 720 NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status Up, Down Displays the port status.

Optical Module In-Position, Not-in- Displays the optical module status.


Status Position

Laser Interface On, Off Specifies the on/off status of the laser.
Status

Laser Transmission - Displays the laser transmission distance.


Distance

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 902


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Traffic Policing Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables traffic monitoring on


Status Default: Disabled the port.
When you need to monitor the traffic on a
port, enable the traffic monitoring function
to monitor the traffic on a port in the period
specified by Traffic Policing Period.

Traffic Policing 1 to 30 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.


Period (min.) Default: 15

Table 11-15 Basic Attributes of PND2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Name - Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l Layer 2: The port can access the user-
side equipment, carry Ethernet services
that are based on the ports and use the
port exclusively or QinQ Link.
l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l Null: The port transparently transmits
the accessed packets.
l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q
standard packets.
l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ
standard packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Working Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

Max Frame 1518 to 9600 This parameter specifies the maximum


Length(bytes) Default: 1522 length of a frame traversing a port. When
the length of a frame exceeds the specified
maximum frame length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 903


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Logical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Attribute board.

Physical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Attribute board.

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min) Default: 720 NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

Optical Module - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Status board.

Laser Interface - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Status board.

Laser Transmission - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Distance board.

Traffic Policing - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Status board.

Traffic Policing - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Period (min) board.

Table 11-16 Basic Attributes of HUNQ2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Name - Specifies the self-defined port name.

Enable Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNQ2 board.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when
the Ethernet port carries port-based or
QinQ-link-based Ethernet services.
l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when
the port carries tunnel services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 904


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l This parameter is set to Null when the
port needs to transparently transmit
packets.
l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when
the port needs to identify 802.1Q
standard packets.
l This parameter is set to QinQ when the
port needs to identify QinQ standard
packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.
If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and
S-VLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be
set to 802.1Q.

Working Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNQ2 board.

Max Frame Length - Displays the maximum frame length, which


(bytes) is always 9600 bytes. This parameter is not
configurable.

Logical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


Attribute HUNQ2 board.

Physical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


Attribute HUNQ2 board.

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min.) Default: 720 After the ARP aging time expires, the
equipment automatically updates dynamic
ARP entries to prevent incorrect address
resolution.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNQ2 board.

Optical Module - This parameter is unavailable for the


Status HUNQ2 board.

Laser Interface - This parameter is unavailable for the


Status HUNQ2 board.

Laser Transmission - This parameter is unavailable for the


Distance HUNQ2 board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 905


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Traffic Policing Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables traffic monitoring on


Status Default: Disabled the port.
When you need to monitor the traffic on a
port, enable the traffic monitoring function
to monitor the traffic on a port in the period
specified by Traffic Policing Period.

Traffic Policing 1 to 30 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.


Period (min.) Default: 15

Table 11-17 Basic Attributes of HUNS3 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Name - Specifies the self-defined port name.

Enable Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet
Default: Layer 2 port.
l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when
the Ethernet port carries port-based or
QinQ-link-based Ethernet services.
l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when
the port carries tunnel services.

Encapsulation Type 802.1Q, QinQ, Null Selects the means of processing the
Default: 802.1Q accessed packets.
l This parameter is set to Null when the
port needs to transparently transmit
packets.
l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when
the port needs to identify 802.1Q
standard packets.
l This parameter is set to QinQ when the
port needs to identify QinQ standard
packets.
NOTE
The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when
you set Port Mode to Layer 3.
If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and
S-VLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be
set to 802.1Q.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 906


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Working Mode - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

Max Frame Length - Displays the maximum frame length, which


(bytes) is always 9600 bytes. This parameter is not
configurable.

Logical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


Attribute HUNS3 board.

Physical Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


Attribute HUNS3 board.

ARP Aging Time 1 to 1440 Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.
(min.) Default: 720 After the ARP aging time expires, the
equipment automatically updates dynamic
ARP entries to prevent incorrect address
resolution.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is
set to Layer 3.

Running Status - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

Optical Module - This parameter is unavailable for the


Status HUNS3 board.

Laser Interface - This parameter is unavailable for the


Status HUNS3 board.

Laser Transmission - This parameter is unavailable for the


Distance HUNS3 board.

Traffic Policing Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables traffic monitoring on


Status Default: Disabled the port.
When you need to monitor the traffic on a
port, enable the traffic monitoring function
to monitor the traffic on a port in the period
specified by Traffic Policing Period.

Traffic Policing 1 to 30 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.


Period (min.) Default: 15

11.5.1.2 Flow Control


This topic describes the parameters, such as autonegotiation and non-autonegotiation, which
are used for configuring flow control function of a Packet Ethernet port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 907


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-18 Flow Control of EG16 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Non- Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control mode adopted


Autonegotiation Symmetric Flow when an Ethernet port does not work in
Flow Control Mode Control, Send Only, auto-negotiation mode.
Receive Only l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The
Default: Disabled port can both transmit and receive the
PAUSE frame.
l Send Only: The port can only send the
PAUSE frame.
l Receive Only: The port can only receive
the PAUSE frame.
When the buffer usage of the receiver
exceeds the threshold, the pause frame
enables the transmitter to temporarily stop
sending services.
NOTE
In general, flow control is implemented using
the QoS function and port-based flow control is
seldom used. It is recommended that the default
value Disabled be used.

Auto-Negotiation Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control mode adopted


Flow Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow when an Ethernet port works in auto-
Control, Enable negotiation mode.
Symmetric Flow l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control:
Control, Enable The port sends the PAUSE frame only,
Symmetric/ and cannot receive the PAUSE frame.
Dissymmetric Flow
Control l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The
port sends and receives the PAUSE
Default: Disabled frame.
l Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric
Flow Control: Enables either symmetric
or dissymmetric flow control, which is
determined in the autonegotiation
process.
When the buffer usage of the receiver
exceeds the threshold, the pause frame
enables the transmitter to temporarily stop
sending services.
NOTE
In general, flow control is implemented using
the QoS function and port-based flow control is
seldom used. It is recommended that the default
value Disabled be used.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 908


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-19 Flow Control of EX2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Non- Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control mode adopted


Autonegotiation Symmetric Flow when an Ethernet port does not work in
Flow Control Mode Control, Send Only, auto-negotiation mode.
Receive Only l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The
Default: Disabled port can both transmit and receive
PAUSE frames.
l Send Only: The port can only send
PAUSE frames.
l Receive Only: The port can only receive
PAUSE frames.
When the buffer usage of the receiver
exceeds the threshold, the pause frame
enables the transmitter to temporarily stop
sending services.
NOTE
In general, flow control is implemented using
the QoS function and port-based flow control is
seldom used. It is recommended that the default
value Disabled be used.

Auto-Negotiation - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2


Flow Control Mode board.

Table 11-20 Flow Control of EX8 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 909


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Non- Disabled, Enable Specifies the flow control mode adopted


Autonegotiation Symmetric Flow when an Ethernet port does not work in
Flow Control Mode Control, Send Only, auto-negotiation mode.
Receive Only l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The
Default: Disabled port can both transmit and receive
PAUSE frames.
l Send Only: The port can only send
PAUSE frames.
l Receive Only: The port can only receive
PAUSE frames.
When the buffer usage of the receiver
exceeds the threshold, the pause frame
enables the transmitter to temporarily stop
sending services.
NOTE
In general, flow control is implemented using
the QoS function and port-based flow control is
seldom used. It is recommended that the default
value Disabled be used.

Auto-Negotiation - This parameter is unavailable for the EX8


Flow Control Mode board.

NOTE

The PND2 board does not support flow control.

Table 11-21 Flow Control of HUNQ2 Board

Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Non- - This parameter is unavailable for the


Autonegotiation HUNQ2 board.
Flow Control Mode

Auto-Negotiation - This parameter is unavailable for the


Flow Control Mode HUNQ2 board.

Table 11-22 Flow Control of HUNS3 Board

Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 910


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Non- - This parameter is unavailable for the


Autonegotiation HUNS3 board.
Flow Control Mode

Auto-Negotiation - This parameter is unavailable for the


Flow Control Mode HUNS3 board.

11.5.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes


This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include QinQ Type Domain, Tag, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority

Table 11-23 Layer 2 Attributes of EG16 Board

Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

QinQ Type Domain 0x0600 to 0xFFFE Indicates the customized QinQ type
Default: 0x8100 domain.
The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type
domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ
type domain. The S-VLAN port supports
only one QinQ type domain. The default
value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You
can also change the value by setting QinQ
Type Domain.
NOTE
Only the TN55EG16 supports this parameter.

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 4.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.


Default: 1 NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the class of service (CoS) when


Default: 0 TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the
highest. When the network is busy, data
packets of higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of lower VLAN
priority may be discarded.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 911


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

SVLANs 1 to 4094 The specified SVLAN value must be


recognizable to the C-VLAN port.
SVLANs can be set to one or more values,
or a value range. When the value of an S-
VLAN service is the same as the values of
SVLANs or is in the value range of
SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass
through this port.
NOTE
Only the TN55EG16 supports this parameter.

Table 11-24 Layer2 Attributes of EX2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 4.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies


Default: 1 a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the


Default: 0 priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.
When the network is busy, data packets of
higher VLAN priority are processed first
and those of lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority
and 7 the highest.

Table 11-25 Layer2 Attributes of EX8 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT8.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 912


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

QinQ Type Domain 0x0600 to 0xFFFE Indicates the customized QinQ type
Default: 0x8100 domain.
The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type
domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ
type domain. The S-VLAN port supports
only one QinQ type domain. The default
value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You
can also change the value by setting QinQ
Type Domain.

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 4.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies


Default: 1 a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the


Default: 0 priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.
When the network is busy, data packets of
higher VLAN priority are processed first
and those of lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority
and 7 the highest.

SVLANs - The specified SVLAN value must be


recognizable to the C-VLAN port.
SVLANs can be set to one or more values,
or a value range. When the value of an S-
VLAN service is the same as the values of
SVLANs or is in the value range of
SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass
through this port.

Table 11-26 Layer2 Attributes of PND2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 913


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 5.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies


Default: 1 a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the


Default: 0 priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.
When the network is busy, data packets of
higher VLAN priority are processed first and
those of lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and
7 the highest.

Table 11-27 Layer 2 Attributes of HUNQ2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 5.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

QinQ Type Domain - Indicates the customized QinQ type


domain.
NOTE
The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type
domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type
domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one
QinQ type domain. The default value of the
QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change
the value by setting QinQ Type Domain.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.


Default: 1 NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 914


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the class of service (CoS) when


Default: 0 TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the
highest. When the network is busy, data
packets of higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of lower VLAN
priority may be discarded.

SVLANs - The specified SVLAN value must be


recognizable to the C-VLAN port.
SVLANs can be set to one or more values,
or a value range. When the value of an S-
VLAN service is the same as the values of
SVLANs or is in the value range of
SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass
through this port.

Table 11-28 Layer 2 Attributes of HUNS3 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Tag Tag Aware, Access, Indicates the data packet processing mode.
Hybrid For details, see Table 5.
This parameter is unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to
QinQ or Null.

QinQ Type Domain - Indicates the customized QinQ type


domain.
NOTE
The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type
domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type
domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one
QinQ type domain. The default value of the
QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change
the value by setting QinQ Type Domain.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.


Default: 1 NOTE
Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are
usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN
ID of 4095 is reserved.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 915


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the class of service (CoS) when


Default: 0 TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the
highest. When the network is busy, data
packets of higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of lower VLAN
priority may be discarded.

SVLANs - The specified SVLAN value must be


recognizable to the C-VLAN port.
SVLANs can be set to one or more values,
or a value range. When the value of an S-
VLAN service is the same as the values of
SVLANs or is in the value range of
SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass
through this port.

11.5.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes


This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Enable Tunnel, Specify IP, IP Address, and IP Mask

Table 11-29 Layer 3 Attributes of EG16 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 916


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 11-30 Layer 3 Attributes of EX2 Board


Field Vaule Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 917


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Vaule Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 11-31 Layer 3 Attributes of EX8 Board


Field Vaule Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT8.

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 918


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Vaule Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 11-32 Layer 3 Attributes of PND2 Board


Field Vaule Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 919


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Vaule Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 11-33 Layer 3 Attributes of HUNQ2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 920


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 11-34 Layer 3 Attributes of HUNS3 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for


example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled After this parameter is set to Enabled for a
port, the port can identify and process
MPLS labels.
NOTE
The parameter value Disabled is invalid.
Therefore, this parameter can be set only to
Enabled.

Specify IP Address Manually, When a port carries tunnel services, or


Unspecified when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this
parameter to Manually. For other scenarios,
set this parameter to Unspecified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 921


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

IP Address - Specifies the port IP address.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.
NOTE
When setting the IP address for a port, ensure
that the IP address is in a different network
segment from the IP address of other service
ports and the NE IP address, preventing service
interruption from occurring or the NE from
being unreachable by the NMS.
For example, the IP address and subnet mask of
an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0,
respectively. This means that the NE IP address
is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address
and subnet mask of a service-present port on the
NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.
This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1
network segment. In this situation, you cannot
assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1
network segments to other ports on the NE. In
other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to
129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

IP Mask - Specifies the port subnet mask.


This parameter is valid only when Specify
IP Address is set to Manually.

11.5.1.5 Advanced Attributes


This topic describes the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet
port. The parameters include Port Physical parameters, MAC Loopback, and Loopback
Check

Table 11-35 Advanced Attributes of EG16 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Port Physical - Displays physical parameters of the port.


Parameters

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, The MAC Loopback parameter specifies


Inloop, Outloop the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the


Inloop, Outloop PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 922


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the loopback check


Default: Disabled function. When enabled, the function
checks whether the loopback check packet
transmitted from a port is received by the
port itself, therefore determining whether
there is a loop on the network. This
parameter is usually used for fault location.
After this parameter is set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link and reports an alarm if there is any.

Loopback Port Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a port.


Block Default: Disabled When Loopback Check and Loopback
Port Block are both set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is
automatically blocked to clear the loop.

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the EG16


Bandwidth (kbit/s) board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the EG16


Mode board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 923


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Optical Module Type Unknown, Two- Displays whether an optical module is


Fiber Bidirectional inserted and the module type of an inserted
optical module.
l Unknown: No optical module is
inserted to the port.
l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber
bidirectional optical module is inserted
to the port.

Synchronous Clock Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to enable clock


Enabled Default: Disabled synchronization. Set this parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When this parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.

Table 11-36 Advanced Attributes of EX2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Port Physical - Displays physical parameters of the port.


Parameters

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, The MAC Loopback parameter specifies


Inloop, Outloop the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the


Inloop, Outloop PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 924


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the loopback check


Default: Disabled function. When enabled, the function
checks whether the loopback check packet
transmitted from a port is received by the
port itself, therefore determining whether
there is a loop on the network. This
parameter is usually used for fault location.
After this parameter is set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link and reports an alarm if there is any.

Loopback Port Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a port.


Block Default: Disabled When Loopback Check and Loopback
Port Block are both set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is
automatically blocked to clear the loop.

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2


Bandwidth (kbit/s) board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the EX2


Mode board.

Optical Module Type known, Two-Fiber Displays whether an optical module is


Bidirectional inserted and the module type of an inserted
optical module.
l Unknown: No optical module is
inserted to the port.
l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber
bidirectional optical module is inserted
to the port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 925


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Synchronous Clock Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to enable clock


Enabled Default: Disabled synchronization. Set this parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When this parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.

Table 11-37 Advanced Attributes of EX8 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT8.

Port Physical - Displays physical parameters of the port.


Parameters

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, The MAC Loopback parameter specifies


Inloop, Outloop the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the


Inloop, Outloop PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.
Default: Non-
Loopback

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the loopback check


Default: Disabled function. When enabled, the function
checks whether the loopback check packet
transmitted from a port is received by the
port itself, therefore determining whether
there is a loop on the network. This
parameter is usually used for fault location.
After this parameter is set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link and reports an alarm if there is any.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 926


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Loopback Port Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a port.


Block Default: Disabled When Loopback Check and Loopback
Port Block are both set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is
automatically blocked to clear the loop.

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the EX8


Bandwidth (kbit/s) board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the EX8


Mode board.

Optical Module Type known, Two-Fiber Displays whether an optical module is


Bidirectional inserted and the module type of an inserted
optical module.
l Unknown: No optical module is
inserted to the port.
l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber
bidirectional optical module is inserted
to the port.

Synchronous Clock Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to enable clock


Enabled Default: Disabled synchronization. Set this parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When this parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 927


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-38 Advanced Attributes of PND2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Port Physical - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Parameters board.

MAC Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

PHY Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the loopback check


Default: Disabled function. When enabled, the function
checks whether the loopback check packet
transmitted from a port is received by the
port itself, therefore determining whether
there is a loop on the network. This
parameter is usually used for fault location.
After this parameter is set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link and reports an alarm if there is any.

Loopback Port Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to block a port.


Block Default: Disabled When Loopback Check and Loopback
Port Block are both set to Enabled, the
board automatically checks for loops on the
link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is
automatically blocked to clear the loop.

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Bandwidth (kbit/s) board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 928


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


Mode board.

Optical Module Type - This parameter is unavailable for the PND2


board.

Synchronous Clock Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to enable lock


Enabled Default: Disabled synchronization. Set the parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When the parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.

Table 11-39 Advanced Attributes of HUNQ2 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Port Physical - Displays physical parameters of the port.


Parameters

MAC Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the board.

PHY Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the board.

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Loopback Check - This parameter is unavailable for the board.

Loopback Port - This parameter is unavailable for the board.


Block

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 929


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the board.


Bandwidth (kbit/s)

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the


Mode HUNQ2 board.

Optical Module Type - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNQ2 board.

Synchronous Clock - This parameter is unavailable for the


Enabled HUNQ2 board.

Table 11-40 Advanced Attributes of HUNS3 Board


Field Value Description

Port - External ports are PORT1 to PORT16.

Port Physical - Displays physical parameters of the port.


Parameters

MAC Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

PHY Loopback - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

MAC Address - Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate - Displays the rate for transmitting data


(kbit/s) packets.

Receiving Rate - Displays the rate for receiving data packets.


(kbit/s)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 930


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Loopback Check - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

Loopback Port - This parameter is unavailable for the


Block HUNS3 board.

Egress PIR - This parameter is unavailable for the


Bandwidth (kbit/s) HUNS3 board.

Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether to enable broadcast


Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
After suppression of broadcast packets is
enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will
be limited according to the specified
threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold, the
excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Broadcast Packet 0% to 100%, with a If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to


Suppression step of 10% Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed
Threshold (%) Default: 30% when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast
packets exceeds specified times
(suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.
If the traffic of the broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold, the excess
broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable - This parameter is unavailable for the


Mode HUNS3 board.

Optical Module Type - This parameter is unavailable for the


HUNS3 board.

Synchronous Clock - This parameter is unavailable for the


Enabled HUNS3 board.

11.5.2 Parameter Description: MPLS


This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS management.

11.5.2.1 Basic Configuration


This topic describe the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.
Table 11-41 lists the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 931


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-41 Parameter for the basic configuration


Field Value Description

LSR ID For example: 10.70.73.156 In a PSN network, each NE


is allocated with a unique
LSR ID.
NOTE
If the value of this parameter is
changed after services have
been provisioned on an NE,
the NE will undergo a warm
reset but services will not be
affected.

Start of Global Label Space For example: 0 Set and display the start of
the global label space.
The start of the global label
space is the minimum value
of the ingress and egress
labels of the unicast tunnel.
When Start of Global
Label Space is 0, the
minimum value of the
ingress and egress labels of
the unicast tunnel is 16.
"0-15" values are reserved
and are unavailable.

Global Label Space Size For example: 32768 Set and display the size of
the global label space.
The global label space size
is the number of unicast
tunnel labels.

Start of Multicast Label The value of Start of Display the start of the
Space Global Label Space plus multicast label space.
the value of Global Label The start of the multicast
Space Size Example: 0 label space is the minimum
+ 32768 = 32768 value of the ingress and
egress labels of the multicast
tunnel.

11.5.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis)


A static tunnel may be unidirectional or bidirectional.
Table 11-42 lists the parameters for configuring a static tunnel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 932


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-42 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel


Field Value Range Description

Tunnel ID For example, 1 Displays or specifies the


tunnel ID.

Tunnel Name For example, name1 Displays or specifies the


NOTE name of the tunnel.
The tunnel name contains a
maximum of 64 bytes.

Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the type of a node.


l Ingress: ingress node
l Egress: egress node
l Transit: pass-through
node

Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the direction of the


tunnel.
For a unidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Unidirectional
by default. For a
bidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Bidirectional
by default.

Committed Information - The Committed Information


Rate (Kbit/s) Rate (Kbit/s) parameter
specifies the CIR of the
queue.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel.

CBS(bytes) - The CBS(byte) parameter


specifies the committed
burst size.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel.

PIR(kbit/s) - The PIR(Kbit/s) parameter


specifies the maximum rate
of services allowed, also
called the peak information
rate (PIR).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 933


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

PBS(bytes) - The PBS(byte) parameter


specifies the peak burst size
(PBS).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel.

In Board/Logic Interface Shelf ID-Slot ID-Board Displays or specifies the


Type name ingress board or the logic
interface type.

In Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the


ingress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set
for only the egress node and
the transit node.

In Label For example, 17 Displays and specifies the


NOTE ingress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to The ingress label must be
1048575. unique on the entire
network.
This parameter can be set
for only the egress node and
the transit node.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.

Forward In Label For example, 17 Displays or specifies the


NOTE ingress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to NOTE
1048575. If the equipment is configured
with a bidirectional tunnel,
Forward Out Label can be
set but Forward In Label
cannot be set.

Reverse Out Label For example, 18 Displays or specifies the


NOTE egress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to NOTE
1048575. If the equipment is configured
with a bidirectional tunnel,
Reverse In Label can be set
but Reverse Out Label cannot
be set.

Out Board/Logic Interface Shelf ID-Slot ID-Board Displays or specifies the


Type name egress board or the logic
interface type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 934


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Out Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the


egress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set
for only the egress node and
the transit node.

Out Label For example, 19 Displays and specifies the


NOTE egress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to The egress label must be
1048575. unique on the entire
network.
This parameter can be set
for only the egress node and
the transit node.
Egress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.

Forward Out Label For example, 20 Displays or specifies the


NOTE egress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to This function is supported
1048575.
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.

Reverse In Label For example, 70 Displays or specifies the


NOTE ingress label of the tunnel.
The value ranges from 16 to When a bidirectional tunnel
1048575.
is configured on the device,
a reverse ingress label can
be set at the ingress node,
and a reverse egress label
can be set at the egress
node.

Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.2 Displays or specifies the


address of the next hop of
the tunnel.
This parameter can be set
only for the ingress node
and transit node.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 935


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Forward Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.3 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of
the tunnel.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.

Reverse Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.4 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of
the tunnel.
NOTE
When a bidirectional tunnel is
configured on the device,
Forward Next Hop Address
can be set at the ingress node,
and Reverse Next Hop
Address can be set at the
egress node.

Source Node For example, 192.168.0.5 Displays or specifies the


source node of the tunnel.
A source node can be
specified only for the egress
node and transit node.

Sink Node For example, 192.168.0.6 Displays or specifies the


sink node of the tunnel.
A sink node can be specified
only for the ingress node
and transit node.

Tunnel Type E-LSP Displays the tunnel type.

EXP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None The EXP parameter


Default: None specifies the field in the
MPLS packets for
identifying the priority of
these MPLS packets.

LSP Mode Pipe, Uniform The LSP Mode parameter


Default: Uniform specifies the mode in which
the MPLS network
processes packet priorities.

MTU(bytes) - Specifies the MTU value of


MPLS packets.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 936


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.5.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode)


This topic describes the parameters, such as the enabling status, label and type, for
configuring a static tunnel.

Table 11-43 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel


Field Value Range Description

Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel 1 Specifies the name of the


tunnel.

Reverse Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel1_RVS Specifies the name of the
reverse tunnel.

Protection Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel1_PRT Specifies the name of the
protection tunnel.
This parameter is available
only when Signaling Type
is set to Static CR and
Protection Type is set to
1+1 or 1:1.

Reverse Protection Tunnel For example, Specifies the name of the


Name Tunnel1_RVS_PRT reverse protection tunnel.
This parameter is available
only when Signaling Type
is set to Static CR and
Protection Type is set to
1+1 or 1:1.

Protocol Type MPLS, IP Specifies the protocol type


Default: MPLS used by the tunnel.
l MPLS: If all NEs that a
tunnel passes through
support MPLS, set
Protocol Type to MPLS.
l IP: To implement a
cross-IP ATM or CES
service, set Protocol
Type to IP.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 937


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Signaling Type RSVP TE, LDP, Static CR, Specifies the signaling type
Static of the tunnel.
Default: Static CR This parameter is
configurable only when you
set Protocol Type to
MPLS.
l RSVP TE: You need to
specify only the ingress
and egress nodes for an
RSVP TE tunnel. The
MPLS protocol
automatically calculates
a route for the tunnel. In
addition, you can specify
constraint nodes to plan a
specific route for the
tunnel. You can
configure FRR
protection and the QoS
function for an RSVP TE
tunnel. Therefore, an
RSVP tunnel is more
flexible and safer than an
LDP tunnel.
l LDP: You need to
specify only the source
and sink nodes. The LDP
protocol automatically
calculates a route for the
tunnel. An LDP tunnel is
more flexible than a
static tunnel.
l Static CR: A static CR
tunnel is created with
certain constraints. The
mechanism for creating
and managing those
constraints is CR. Every
site that a static CR
tunnel passes through
must be manually
specified too. Different
from a static tunnel that
requires only routing
information, creating a
CR tunnel has other
configurations, such as
the bandwidth, route, and
QoS parameters.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 938


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

l Static: Every site that a


static tunnel passes
through must be
manually specified.

Service Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Specifies the tunnel as a


Default: Unidirectional bidirectional tunnel or
Unidirectional tunnel.
A unidirectional tunnel has
channels in only one
direction while a
bidirectional tunnel has
channels in both forward
and reverse directions.
If you want to create a
bidirectional tunnel, one
tunnel is created. If you
want to create a
unidirectional tunnel, and
select Create Reverse
Tunnel, two tunnels are
created.
This parameter is available
only when Signaling Type
is set to Static CR.

Create Reverse Tunnel Checked, Unchecked If Create Reverse Tunnel is


checked, a reverse tunnel is
created when a forward
tunnel is created. If Create
Reverse Tunnel is
unchecked, only a forward
tunnel is created.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 939


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Protection Type Protection-Free, 1+1, 1:1 When Signaling Type is set


Default: Protection-Free to Static CR and Protection
Type is set to 1+1 or 1:1,
tunnel protection groups are
created along with tunnels.
l For protection groups of
the 1+1 protection type,
the source end sends and
receives services, and the
sink end selectively
receives services. If the
working tunnel fails, the
protection tunnel is used
to receive services to
implement service
switchover.
l For protection groups of
the 1:1 protection type,
services are transmitted
on the working tunnel. If
the working tunnel fails,
the protection tunnel is
used to transmit services.
The source end sends
services and the sink end
receives services.

Protection Group Name For example, Protection Set the name of protection
Group 1 group of tunnel.
This parameter is available
only when Signaling Type
is set to Static CR and
Protection Type is set to
1+1 or 1:1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 940


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Switching Mode Single-ended switching, This parameter is available


Dual-ended switching only when Signaling Type
Default: Single-ended is set to Static CR and
switching Protection Type is set to
1+1 or 1:1.
l Single-ended switching:
When an end detects a
fault, a switching takes
place only on this end. A
switching, however, does
not take place on the
peer end.
l Dual-ended switching:
When an end detects a
fault, the switching takes
place on this end and the
peer end.

Remarks For example, NE(9-7032)- Specifies the remarks.


NE(9-7037) Remarks for a specific
tunnel facilitate
management and
maintenance of the tunnel.

Auto Calculate Route Sets the value by clicking If Auto Calculate Route is
the check box. checked, the system
Checked, Unchecked automatically computes the
route after you select the
Default: Checked source node and sink node
and specify the NEs as
explicit/inexplicit nodes in
the physical topology.

Restriction Bandwidth 512Kbit/s - 10Gbit/s, No Specifies the upper


(Kbit/s) Limit bandwidth limit.
Default: No Limit When automatically
computing a route, the NMS
checks whether the
computed route meets the
requirement of Restriction
Bandwidth (Kbit/s).
This parameter is available
only when Auto Calculate
Route is checked.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 does not
support upper bandwidth limit.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 941


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Deploy Sets the value by clicking Saves the tunnel


the check box. configuration on the NMS
Checked, Unchecked and delivers the
configuration to NEs during
Default: Checked tunnel deployment.

Enable Sets the value by clicking Automatically enables the


the check box. tunnel during tunnel
Checked, Unchecked deployment.
Default: Checked

11.5.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service


This topic describes the parameters related to the E-Line service configuration.

11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)


This topic describes the parameters, such as Service Name, Service ID, Direction, and
Bearer Type, for configuring an E-Line service.
Table 11-44 lists the parameters for configuring an E-Line service.

Table 11-44 Parameters for configuring an E-Line service


Field Value Description

Service ID For example, 11 Sets and queries the ID of the Ethernet service.

Service Name For example, test Sets and queries the name of the Ethernet
service.

Source Node For example, Displays the source node of the E-Line service.
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 The format is Slot number - Board name - Port
)(14) name (VLAN ID).

Sink Node For example, PW-0 Displays the sink node of the E-Line service.
The sink node can be a port, PW or QinQ link.

Direction UNI-UNI, UNI-NNI In the case of the UNI-NNI direction, selects


the network-side bearer type as PW, Port or
QinQ Link.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 942


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Service Tag User, Service Specifies how C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of


Role Default: User packets are processed.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets
are used as user VLAN tags, and are
processed when the packets are forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets
are used as service VLAN tags, and are not
processed when the packets are forwarded.

Source Port For example, Sets and queries the user-side port or network-
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 side port.
)(1-2)

Source VLANs 1-4094 Sets one or several VLAN IDs, or does not set
any VLAN ID.

PRI 0 to 7 UNI-NNI E-Line services can be mapped to


Default: null different PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI. If packets need to be forwarded based on
Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI, set PRI to an
integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents
the highest priority.
PRI can be set to null, one value, or several
values. If PRI is set to several values, separate
the values using commas; if PRI is set to an
interval, represent the interval in a form like
2-5.
l If PRI is set to null, packets are mapped to
different PWs based on VLAN IDs. In this
case, packets whose PRI is set to a value
within the range from 0 to 7 can be carried
in the E-Line service.
l If PRI is not set to null, packets are
mapped to different PWs based on Port
+VLAN+VLAN PRI. In this case, one
service VLAN ID must be added for the E-
Line service.

Bearer Type Port, PW, QinQ Link Specifies the bearer type for different types of
Default: / Ethernet services. The value of this parameter
can be set to Port, PW, or QinQ Link.
l The bearer is the PW, and the PW ID needs
to be specified.
l The bearer is the physical port, and the slot
ID and port number needs to be specified.
l The bearer is the QinQ link, and the QinQ
link ID needs to be specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 943


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

PW ID 1-4294967295 Identifies the PW.


Default: /

QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Selects and displays the QinQ link ID.

BPDU Transparently Sets whether the service needs transparently


Transmitted, Not transmit the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)
Transparently packets. The BPDU is the information
Transmitted transmitted between bridges. It is used to
Default: Not switch information between bridges, and then
Transparently the spanning tree of the network is computed.
Transmitted l Transparent transmission of BPDU packets:
BPDU packets cannot be terminated on the
NE where services are configured and
therefore they are transparently transmitted
to the peer NE.
NOTE
Only the service that exclusively occupies a port
supports transparent transmission of BPDU
packets.
l Non-transparent transmission of BPDU
packets: BPDU are processed as service
packets and need to match the port
attribute. When the port attribute is Tag
Aware, BPDU packets will be dropped
because they do not have VLAN IDs.

MTU(bytes) - The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the


setting of this parameter.

Table 11-45 Basic PW and advanced PW parameters


Field Value Range Description

Role Working, Protection Displays and specifies the


role of a PW.

Source NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot source NE of a PW.

Sink NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot sink NE of a PW.

PW ID Auto-Assign, or manually Displays and specifies the


enter it. identifier of a PW.
For example, 35

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 944


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

PW Signaling Type Static, Dynamic Displays and specifies the


signaling type of a PW.
If you set Signaling Type to
Static, you need to set the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label. If you set
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
automatically allocates the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label.

PW Incoming Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when entering a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Forward
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

PW Outgoing Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when leaving a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Reverse
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

Ingress Tunnel For example, NE1-NE2#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a forward tunnel.

Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Displays and specifies the


binding type of a reverse
tunnel.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 945


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Egress Tunnel For example, NE2-NE1#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a reverse tunnel.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS Displays and specifies the


encapsulation type of a PW.

PW Trail - Displays the trail of a PW.

PW Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of a


PW.

PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged l Ethernet: The PW


Mode encapsulation mode is
Default: Ethernet Ethernet Raw mode, C-
VLAN/S-VLAN tags of
packets are encapsulated
into PWs without
changes, and
transparently transmitted
to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode:
A VLAN tag specified
by Request VLAN is
added to packets.
PWs of different types
process their carried
services differently. To tag
the services carried by a PW,
set PW Type to Ethernet
Tagged Mode for the PW;
otherwise, set PW Type to
Ethernet.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 946


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Control Word No Use, Used First Specifies the policy for


Default: / using the PW control word.
That is, this parameter
determines whether a PW
uses the control word field.
A control word is a 4-byte
encapsulated packet header,
which can be used to
identify the packet sequence
or used for bit stuffing.
l If the ping or traceroute
test needs to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to Used
First.
l If the ping or traceroute
test does not need to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to No Use
to save NNI-side
bandwidth.

Control Channel Type None, CW, Alert Label Specifies the type of
Default: CW channels for transmitting
VCCV packets.
l None: Indicates that the
control word is not used
to indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l CW: Indicates that the
control word is used to
indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l Alert Label: Indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode are
used.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 947


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Request VLAN 0-4094, Non-specified Specifies the ETH request


Default: Non-specified VLAN.
When the Request VLAN
parameter is set to Non-
specified, the packets with
tags are transmitted
transparently, and the
packets without tags are
added with 0 VLAN tags.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only
when PW Type is Ethernet
Tagged Mode.

Table 11-46 Parameters for VLAN forwarding table items


Field Value Description

Source Interface Type V-UNI This parameter specifies the


Default:V-UNI network attribute of the
source interface.

Source Interface This parameter specifies the


source interface.

Source VLAN ID 1-4094 This parameter specifies the


VLAN ID of the source
service.

Sink Interface Type V-UNI This parameter specifies the


Default:V-UNI network attribute of the sink
interface.

Sink Interface This parameter specifies the


sink interface.

Sink VLAN ID 1-4094 This parameter specifies the


VLAN ID of the sink
service.

11.5.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)


This topic describes the parameters for configuring E-Line services in end-to-end mode.
Before creating E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnel for carrying
the PWs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 948


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-47 Parameters for configuring PWE3 services


Field Value Range Description

Service Template DEFAULT_PWE3_ATM_P Displays and specifies the


TN, PWE3 service template.
DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_PT Service Type varies with
N, Service Template.
DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_P Service Template improves
TN, service configuration
DEFAULT_PWE3_ATM_P efficiency.
TN6900,
NOTE
DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_PT This parameter is optional and
N6900, helps users quickly configure
DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_P various services. If the
TN6900, parameter value is not
DEFAULT_PWE3_ATM_R specified, subsequent service
OUTER, configuration is not affected.
DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_R
OUTER,
DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_R
OUTER,
DEFAULT_PWE3_IWF_R
OUTER,
DEFAULT_PWE3_IP_ROU
TER

Service Type ETH, CES, ATM, Displays and specifies the


Interworking, ATM IWF, IP type of each PWE3 service.
over PW, Management PW NOTE
Service Type for the OptiX
OSN 8800 must be set to
ETH.

Service ID Auto-Assign, or manually Specifies the ID of each


enter it. PWE3 service. The service
Default: Auto-Assign ID is unique on the entire
network.

Service Name For example, E-Line-1 Displays and specifies the


NOTE name of each PWE3 service.
The value of this parameter
contains 1 to 64 bytes.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 949


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Protection Type Protection-Free, PW Specifies the protection type


Redundancy, Dual-homing for the service.
Protection for CEs of If Protection Type is PW
Symmetric Access, PW Redundancy, you need to
Backup Protection, PW APS select Single Source and
Protection Dual Sink from Node List.
If Protection Type is PW
APS, you need to select
Dual Source and Single
Sink from Node List. If you
select Single Source and
Dual Sink, you need to
configure one source node
and two sink nodes. If you
select Dual Source and
Single Sink, you need to
configure two source nodes
and one sink node. One PW
functions as the working
path and the other PW
functions as the protection
path.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800,
Protection Type can be set
only to Protection-Free or
PW APS Protection.

Description For example, E-Line-1 Displays and specifies the


NOTE service description.
The value of this parameter
contains 1 to 64 bytes.

Customer - Displays and specifies the


customer to which a service
belongs.

Remarks - Displays and specifies the


service remarks.

Table 11-48 SAI parameters


Field Value Range Description

ID For example, 1 Displays and specifies the


ID of the service access
port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 950


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

VLAN ID - Displays and specifies the


VLAN ID of the service
access port.

Priority Type Null, 802.1P Specifies the priority type.


Default value: Null

Priority Field 0 to 7 UNI-NNI E-Line services


Default value: Null can be mapped into different
PWs based on Port+VLAN
+VLAN PRI. Set this
parameter if packets need to
be forwarded based on Port
+VLAN+VLAN PRI This
parameter takes an integral
value ranging from 0 to 7.
Value 7 represents the
highest priority.
NOTE
l This parameter takes effect
only when Priority Type
is 802.1Q.

Service Tag User, Service Specifies the way C-


Default value: User VLAN/S-VLAN tags in user
packets are processed.
l User: C-VLAN/S-
VLAN tags in user
packets are used as user
VLAN tags, and are
processed when the
packets are forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-
VLAN tags in user
packets are used as
service VLAN tags, and
are not processed when
the packets are
forwarded.

Table 11-49 Basic PW and advanced PW parameters


Field Value Range Description

Role Working, Protection Displays and specifies the


role of a PW.

Source NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot source NE of a PW.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 951


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Sink NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot sink NE of a PW.

PW ID Auto-Assign, or manually Displays and specifies the


enter it. identifier of a PW.
For example, 35

PW Signaling Type Static, Dynamic Displays and specifies the


signaling type of a PW.
If you set Signaling Type to
Static, you need to set the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label. If you set
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
automatically allocates the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label.

PW Incoming Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when entering a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Forward
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

PW Outgoing Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when leaving a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Reverse
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 952


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Ingress Tunnel For example, NE1-NE2#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a forward tunnel.

Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Displays and specifies the


binding type of a reverse
tunnel.

Egress Tunnel For example, NE2-NE1#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a reverse tunnel.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS Displays and specifies the


encapsulation type of a PW.

PW Trail - Displays the trail of a PW.

PW Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of a


PW.

PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged l Ethernet: The PW


Mode encapsulation mode is
Default: Ethernet Ethernet Raw mode, C-
VLAN/S-VLAN tags of
packets are encapsulated
into PWs without
changes, and
transparently transmitted
to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode:
A VLAN tag specified
by Request VLAN is
added to packets.
PWs of different types
process their carried
services differently. To tag
the services carried by a PW,
set PW Type to Ethernet
Tagged Mode for the PW;
otherwise, set PW Type to
Ethernet.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 953


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Control Word No Use, Used First Specifies the policy for


Default: / using the PW control word.
That is, this parameter
determines whether a PW
uses the control word field.
A control word is a 4-byte
encapsulated packet header,
which can be used to
identify the packet sequence
or used for bit stuffing.
l If the ping or traceroute
test needs to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to Used
First.
l If the ping or traceroute
test does not need to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to No Use
to save NNI-side
bandwidth.

Control Channel Type None, CW, Alert Label Specifies the type of
Default: CW channels for transmitting
VCCV packets.
l None: Indicates that the
control word is not used
to indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l CW: Indicates that the
control word is used to
indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l Alert Label: Indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode are
used.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 954


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Request VLAN 0-4094, Non-specified Specifies the ETH request


Default: Non-specified VLAN.
When the Request VLAN
parameter is set to Non-
specified, the packets with
tags are transmitted
transparently, and the
packets without tags are
added with 0 VLAN tags.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only
when PW Type is Ethernet
Tagged Mode.

Table 11-50 QoS parameters for service access ports


Field Value Range Description

Role For example, Working Displays and specifies the role of a service
Source access port.
Based on different protection types, service
access ports can function as different roles,
for example, working source, working sink,
protection source, protection sink, FRR
source, and FRR sink.

SAI - Displays and specifies a service access port.

Direction Ingress, Egress Displays and specifies the direction of a


service access port.
l Ingress indicates the inbound direction
of a service.
l Egress indicates the outbound direction
of a service.

Bandwidth Enabled, Disabled Specifies or displays the bandwidth limit.


Limited If you set Bandwidth Limited to Enabled,
bandwidth is limited based on the specified
CIR, PIR, CBS, and PBS.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 955


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Committed 1024-10000000, Specifies the CIR of the queue. The packets


Information Rate Unlimited whose rates are less than the CIR can be
(Kbit/s) Default: 4294967295 forwarded. When the rate of the packets is
(FFFFFFFFFF is not more than the CIR, all messages can be
invalid) forwarded. If the rate of the packets is more
than the CIR, some packets are discarded
based on a certain packet discarding policy.
The Committed Information Rate
(Kbit/s) can be set only when the
Bandwidth Limited is set to Enabled.
The greater CIR, the higher rate of the
traffic, and the more packets forwarded.
It is recommended that the rate of the
packets is not more than the CIR.

Committed Burst 64-10000000 Specifies the committed burst size.


Size (byte) Default: 4294967295 If the CBS is small, the buffer easily
(FFFFFFFFFF is overflows and some packets are discarded
invalid) when the bandwidth is insufficient.
The greater the CBS is, the more packets
can be buffered when the bandwidth is
insufficient, and the less the packet loss
ratio is. The greater the CBS, the more
serious the delay jitter when packets are
forwarded.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, the CBS is
reserved and cannot be set.

Peak Information 64-10000000 Specifies the maximum rate of services


Rate (kbit/s) Default: 4294967295 allowed by the PIR.
(FFFFFFFFFF is It is recommended that the PIR be not less
invalid) than the CIR.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, the PIR
reserved and cannot be set.

Peak Burst Size 64-10000000 Specifies the size of the PBS.


(byte) Default: 4294967295 Although the packets in the PBS buffer may
(FFFFFFFFFF is also fail to be forwarded, the PBS buffer
invalid) decreases the packet loss ratio.
The greater the PBS, the less the packet
loss ratio, and the more serious the delay
jitter when packets are forwarded.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, the PBS
reserved and cannot be set.

Local QoS Policy - Displays the QoS policy at the local end.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 956


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Default CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, Displays the service forwarding priority.
Forwarding AF2, AF3, AF4, BE, Different values represent different service
Priority NONE classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service
class, mainly applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates expedited forwarding,
applicable to services (for example,
voice services) with low transmission
delay and low packet loss rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate assured forwarding,
applicable to services that require an
assured rate rather than restricted delay
or jitter.
l BE: applicable to services that do not
need special processing.

Default Packet Red, Yellow, Green, Displays the default packet marking color.
Marking Color None Based on the labels carried by packets,
different colors are configured for marking
the packets. Red packets have the highest
priority.

Processing Mode Discard, Pass, Remark Specifies the processing mode of packets.
of Green Packet l Discard: The packets are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are forwarded.

CoS of Green CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, Displays the service class of the packets
Packet AF2, AF3, AF4, BE, marked green.
NONE CoS of packets defines different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service
class, mainly applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates expedited forwarding,
applicable to services (for example,
voice and video services) with low
transmission delay and low packet loss
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate assured forwarding,
applicable to services that require an
assured rate rather than restricted delay
or jitter.
l BE: applicable to services that do not
need special processing.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 957


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Color of Green Green Sets the color of packets to green.


Packet

Processing Mode Discard, Pass, Remark Specifies the processing mode of packets.
of Yellow Packet l Discard: The packets are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are forwarded.

CoS of Yellow CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, Displays the service class of the packets
Packet AF2, AF3, AF4, BE, marked yellow.
NONE CoS of packets defines different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service
class, mainly applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates expedited forwarding,
applicable to services (for example,
voice and video services) with low
transmission delay and low packet loss
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate assured forwarding,
applicable to services that require an
assured rate rather than restricted delay
or jitter.
l BE: applicable to services that do not
need special processing.

Color of Yellow Yellow Sets the color of packets to yellow.


Packet

Processing Mode Discard, Pass, Remark Specifies the processing mode of packets.
of Red Packet l Discard: The packets are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are forwarded.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 958


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

CoS of Red CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, Displays the service class of the packets
Packet AF2, AF3, AF4, BE, marked red.
NONE CoS of packets defines different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service
class, mainly applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates expedited forwarding,
applicable to services (for example,
voice and video services) with low
transmission delay and low packet loss
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate assured forwarding,
applicable to services that require an
assured rate rather than restricted delay
or jitter.
l BE: applicable to services that do not
need special processing.

Color of Red - Sets the color of packets to red.


Packet

VLAN Range - Specifies the VLAN range of packets.

11.5.3.3 UNI Parameters


Setting the UNI parameters for an E-Line service focuses on setting of the VLAN information
about UNI ports.
Table 11-51 lists the UNI parameters for an E-Line service.

Table 11-51 Parameters for a UNI port


Field Value Description

Port For example, Indicates the UNI port.


21-54EG16-1 (port-1)
(1-2)

VLANs 1 to 4094 Queries and configures the VLAN ID. The


VLAN ID can be null; or you can set one or
more VLAN IDs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 959


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Default BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, Indicates the forwarding priority that the NE
Forwarding AF4, EF, CS6, CS7, sets to the user packets on the V-UNI side by
Priority NONE default.
Default: BE l CS7: Indicates the highest forwarding
priority, for delivering the control packets
(very important protocol packets) in the
network.
l CS6: Indicates the priority that is lower
than CS7, for delivering the control packets
(important protocol packets) in the
network.
l EF: Indicates the expedited forwarding
priority that is lower than CS6, for the low
delay services (for example, voice
services).
l AF4: Indicates the assured forwarding
priority 4, whose forwarding priority is
lower than EF.
l AF3: Indicates the assured forwarding
priority 3, whose forwarding priority is
lower than AF4.
l AF2: Indicates the assured forwarding
priority 2, whose forwarding priority is
lower than AF3.
l AF1: Indicates the assured forwarding
priority 1, whose forwarding priority is
lower than AF2.
l BE: Indicates the best effort forwarding
priority that is the lowest forwarding
priority, for the services without QoS in the
network.

Default Packet Red, Yellow, Green, Indicates the color that the NE sets to the user
Relabeling None packets on the V-UNI side by default.
Color Default: Green The user packets of a higher priority should be
marked green. The user packets of a lower
priority should be marked red. The user
packets of a medium priority should be marked
yellow.

11.5.3.4 NNI Parameters


NNI parameters are used for NNI Ethernet services. According to different service bearer
modes, NNI parameters include the parameters that are used for a PW, a port and a QinQ link.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 960


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-52 Parameters for a PW


Field Value Range Description

PW ID For example, 123 Specifies the ID of the PW carrying the


Ethernet service.

PW Status Enable, Disable Specifies or displays the enable status of the


PW.

PW Signaling Static In the case of the static PW, the label is


Type manually allocated. The configuration at the
two ends of a PW should be consistent.

PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet PWs of different types process the borne


Tagged Mode services differently. For example, the PW in
the Ethernet tagged mode attaches the tag on
the services on this PW.

PW Direction Bidirectional Specifies the direction of the PW.

PW MPLS Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.


Encapsulation
Type

PW Ingress 16 to 1048575 Specifies this parameter when the PW


Label Signaling Type is set to Static.

PW Egress 16 to 1048575 Specifies this parameter when the PW


Label Signaling Type is set to Static.

Peer IP For example, Specifies the peer IP of the PW.


10.70.71.123

Tunnel Type MPLS Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the
PW.

Tunnel No. Tunnel ID Selects a created tunnel. If no tunnel is


For example, 55 available, creation of a PW fails.

Control Word No Use, Used First Specifies the policy for using the PW control
Default: / word. That is, this parameter determines
whether a PW uses the control word field. A
control word is a 4-byte encapsulated packet
header, which can be used to identify the
packet sequence or used for bit stuffing.
l If the ping or traceroute test needs to be
performed on a PW, set this parameter to
Used First.
l If the ping or traceroute test does not need
to be performed on a PW, set this parameter
to No Use to save NNI-side bandwidth.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 961


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Control None, CW, Alert Label Specifies the type of channels for transmitting
Channel Type Default: CW VCCV packets.
l None: Indicates that the control word is not
used to indicate the VCCV control channel
information.
l CW: Indicates that the control word is used
to indicate the VCCV control channel
information.
l Alert Label: Indicates that VCCV packets
in Alert Label encapsulation mode are used.

Local Up, Down Displays the working status of the PW at the


Operating local end. Up indicates that the PW works
Status normally. Down indicates that the PW work
abnormally.

Remote Up, Down Displays the working status of the PW at the


Operating remote end. Up indicates that the PW works
Status normally. Down indicates that the PW work
abnormally.

Overall Up, Down Specifies the running status of a PW.


Operating NOTE
Status Dynamic supports Down and Static supports Up.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, Static can only
be set to Up.

Request VLAN 0-4094, Non-specified Specifies the ETH request VLAN.


Default: Non-specified When the Request VLAN parameter is set to
Non-specified, the packets with tags are
transmitted transparently, and the packets
without tags are added with 0 VLAN tags.
NOTE
You need to set the PW Type parameter to Ethernet
Tagged Mode.

TPID 0x88A8 Identifies the protocol.

Table 11-53 Parameters for an NNI Port


Field Value Range Description

Port For example, Specifies the network-side port.


21-54EG16-1(Port-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 962


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-54 Parameters for a QinQ link


Field Value Range Description

QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Displays the QinQ link ID.

Port For example, Displays the board and port.


21-54EG16-10(PORT-10)

S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays the S-VLAN ID.

Direction Ingress, Egress Displays the direction of the


service.

Bandwidth Limit Enabled, Disabled Displays the bandwidth


limit.
When Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled, you can set
Committed Information
Rate and Peak Information
Rate.

Committed Information For example, 16000 Displays the committed


Rate(kbit/s) information rate, which is
the guaranteed rate that can
be provided to the service.

Committed Burst Size(byte) - Displays the committed


burst size, which is the
maximum flow size allowed
for each burst.

Peak Information For example, 20000 Displays the peak


Rate(kbit/s) information rate, which is
the maximum rate that can
be provided for the service.

Maximum Burst Size(byte) - Displays the maximum burst


size, which is the maximum
flow size allowed for each
excessive burst.

Policy Policy ID + Policy Name Displays the QinQ policy.


For example, 1(policy1)

11.5.3.5 Maintenance Association


The maintenance association (MA) facilitates the connectivity check (CC) of a network that
transports services.
Table 11-55 lists the parameters for a maintenance association.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 963


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-55 Parameters for a maintenance association


Field Value Description

Maintenance 1-8 characters Sets an MD name that is unique in the entire


Domain Name network.

Maintenance 1-8 characters Sets an MA name that is unique in the same


Association MD.
Name

CC Test 3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms, The source end MEP constructs the CC
Transmit Period 1s, 10s, 1m, 10m frames, and then transmits them periodically to
Default: 1s the destination MEP. Within a certain period
(3.5 times of the transmission period), if the
destination MEP does not receive the CC
packets from the source end, an alarm is
automatically reported. The CC Test
Transmit Period parameter indicates the
transmission period of the unidirectional
connectivity check.
It is recommended that you use three period
values, that is, 3.33 ms for protection
switching, 100 ms for performance check, and
1 s for connectivity check. The configuration
should comply with user requirements. If the
fast check is required, set to 3.33 ms. Hence,
the fault can be detected quickly. The
bandwidth used, however, descends with the
period value.

11.5.3.6 MEP Point


The MEP point is the edge point in an MA.

Table 11-56 Parameters for an MEP point


Field Value Description

Maintenance 1-8 characters The name of an MD should be unique in the


Domain Name entire network.

Maintenance 1-8 characters The name of an MA should be unique in the


Association same MD.
Name

Board For example, Displays the board where the MEP point is
21-54EG16 located. The format is Slot number - Board
name.

Port For example, Displays the port where the MEP point is
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 located. The format is Slot number - Board
) name - Port information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 964


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Node For example, Sets the node as an MEP point. The format is
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 Slot number - Board name - Port information.
)

VLAN For example, 22 Sets the current VLAN ID of the service.

MEP ID 1-8191 Sets a unique ID for each MP. The ID is


required for OAM operations.

Direction Ingress, Egress Ingress indicates the direction for packets to


enter the board. Egress indicates the direction
for packets to exit the board.

CC Status Active, Inactive Activates or deactivates the CC function of the


MEP point.

11.5.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service


This topic describes the parameters related to the E-LAN Service configuration.

11.5.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)


This topic describes the parameters, such as Service ID and Service Name, for configuring
an E-LAN service.

Table 11-57 lists the parameters for configuring an E-LAN service.

Table 11-57 Parameters for configuring an E-LAN service

Field Value Description

Service ID For example, 11 Sets and queries the ID of the Ethernet service.

Service Name For example, test Sets and queries the name of the Ethernet
service.

Tag Type C-Awared, S-Awared, C-Awared indicates that the learning is based
Tag-Transparent on the C-TAG (client-side VLAN tag).
S-Awared indicates that the learning is based
on the S-TAG (operator service-layer VLAN
tag). S-Awared is valid only when
Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ for a port.
Tag-Transparent indicates that all Ethernet
packets can be transmitted transparently when
Encapsulation Type is set to Null for a port.

Self-Learning Enabled, Disabled Adds self-learnt MAC addresses to the MAC


MAC Address address forwarding table.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 965


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

MAC Address SVL, IVL SVL indicates the shared VLAN learning. All
Learning Mode VLANs share a MAC address forwarding
table. Any MAC address is unique in the
forwarding table.
IVL indicates the independent VLAN
learning. The forwarding tables for different
VLANs are independent from each other. It is
acceptable that the MAC address forwarding
tables for different VLANs have the same
MAC address.
When Tag Type is set to Tag-Transparent,
the parameter value is SVL by default and is
not configurable.
NOTE
You can set MAC Address Learning Mode to IVL
only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.

MTU (bytes) - The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the
setting of this parameter.

Service Tag User, Service The Service Tag Role is used to indicate the
Role Default: User user access mode, that is, the encapsulation
mode when the Ethernet service is received by
the AC.
l User: If the service-delimiting tag is User,
the user access mode is Ethernet. In this
case, the Ethernet frame that the CE sends
to the PE does not carry a provider-tag (P-
Tag). If the frame header contains the
VLAN tag, the VLAN tag is the inner
VLAN tag of the user packet, which is
called user-tag (U-Tag). The PE does not
identify or process a U-Tag.
l If the service-delimiting tag is Service, the
user access mode is VLAN. In this case,
the Ethernet frame that the CE sends to the
PE carries a provider-tag (P-Tag), which is
provided for the carrier to differentiate
users. The PE identifies and processes a P-
Tag based on the PW encapsulation mode.

Protection Type Unprotected, MC PW Protection Type is used to indicate the


APS, PW APS, Slave protection type of the service.
Protection Pair NOTE
Default: Unprotected The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support MC PW
APS.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 966


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.5.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)


Before creating E-LAN services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnel that carries
PWs and configure the VSI attribute of NEs as NPE. This section describes the parameters for
configuring E-LAN services in end-to-end mode.

Table 11-58 Parameters for the basic VSI attributes


Field Value Range Description

Service Name For example, E-LAN Specifies the name of the E-


LAN service.

Signal Type LDP, BGP Specifies the signaling type.


l LDP: indicates the label
distribution protocol
used for configuring or
maintaining PWs.
l BGP: indicates the
boundary gateway
protocol, which is used
for signaling exchanges
on a mesh network.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800
equipment, this parameter can
be set to only LDP.

Service Template - Indicates a service template.


An NE type-based template
can be used to preset
parameters. If no template is
available, all VPLS
parameters must be set
manually.

Networking Mode Full-Mesh VPLS Specifies the networking


mode of Ethernet services.
l If Networking Mode is
set to Full-Mesh VPLS,
only the NPE attribute of
an NE can be specified.

Service Type Service VPLS Specifies the VPLS type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 967


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

VSI Type Service VSI Displays the service type of


the virtual service instance
(VSI).
Regardless of whether
Service Type is set to
Service VPLS or
Management VPLS, VSI
Type is displayed as Service
VSI.

VSI Name For example, VPLS1 Specifies the VPLS service


name.
VSI: indicates the virtual
switching instance. The VSI
name on an NE must be
unique.

VSI ID Default: 1042 Specifies the VSI ID.


The value can be
automatically assigned.
After being specified, the
value of VSI ID cannot be
changed. The IDs of two
VSIs on an NE cannot be
the same.

MTU (bytes) - The OptiX OSN 8800 does


not support the setting of
this parameter.

Tag Type Tag-Transparent, C-Awared, Specifies the tag type.


S-Awared l C-Awared: receives the
service packets that
contain C-VLAN tags.
l S-Awared: receives the
service packets that
contain C-VLAN tags
and S-VLAN tags.
l Tag-Transparent:
receives the service
packets that do not
contain VLAN tags.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 968


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Service Tag Role User, Service The Service Tag Role is


Default: User used to indicate the user
access mode, that is, the
encapsulation mode when
the Ethernet service is
received by the AC.
l User: If the service-
delimiting tag is User,
the user access mode is
Ethernet. In this case, the
Ethernet frame that the
CE sends to the PE does
not carry a provider-tag
(P-Tag). If the frame
header contains the
VLAN tag, the VLAN
tag is the inner VLAN
tag of the user packet,
which is called user-tag
(U-Tag). The PE does
not identify or process a
U-Tag.
l If the service-delimiting
tag is Service, the user
access mode is VLAN.
In this case, the Ethernet
frame that the CE sends
to the PE carries a
provider-tag (P-Tag),
which is provided for the
carrier to differentiate
users. The PE identifies
and processes a P-Tag
based on the PW
encapsulation mode.

Table 11-59 Parameters for forwarding control


Field Value Range Description

MAC Address Learning Enable, Disable Specifies whether to enable


Default: Disable the MAC address learning
function.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 969


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Learning Mode Qualify(IVL), Specifies the bridge learning


Unqualify(SVL) mode of E-LAN services.
Default: Unqualify(SVL) l Qualify(IVL): The
bridge type is IEEE
802.1q or IEEE 802.1ad.
MAC address learning is
based on VLANs of the
VSI. Each VLAN has its
MAC address space. The
MAC address space of
different VLANs can be
overlapped.
l Unqualify(IVL): The
bridge type is IEEE
802.1d or IEEE 802.1ad.
MAC address learning is
based on VSIs. Each VSI
has an MAC address
space.
NOTE
You can set MAC Address
Learning Mode to IVL only
when the bridge type is IEEE
802.1ad.

Max. Learn MAC Addresses 0-65534 Specifies the maximum


Default: 512 number of learnt MAC
addresses.

MAC Address Aging Enable, Disable Specifies whether to enable


Default: Enable the MAC address aging
function.
After the MAC address
aging function is enabled, a
MAC address is deleted
from the MAC address table
if no packets that contain the
MAC address are received
within a certain period of
time.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 970


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

MAC Address Aging Time 1 min - 640 min Specifies the aging time of
Default: 5 min MAC addresses.
If the MAC address aging
function is enabled, the
system deletes a MAC
address if no packets that
contain the MAC address
are received after the aging
time expires.
If the MAC address aging
function is disabled, this
parameter is unavailable.

MAC Address Detection 80% to 100% Specifies the upper


Upper Threshold Default: 95% threshold of detected MAC
addresses.
The value of MAC Address
Detection Upper
Threshold needs to be
greater than the value of
MAC Address Detection
Lower Threshold. When
the number of learnt MAC
addresses is greater than the
upper threshold, an alarm is
reported.

MAC Address Detection 60% to 100% Specifies the lower


Lower Threshold Default: 90% threshold of MAC addresses
detection.

Multicast Broadcast, Discard Specifies how to process


Default: Broadcast unknown multicast packets.
When this parameter is set
to Discard, packets of
reserved multicast address
will continue to be
forwarded, without being
discarded.

Unicast Broadcast, Discard Specifies how to process


Default: Broadcast unknown unicast packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 971


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Enable BPDU Transparent Not Transparently Specifies whether to


Transmission Transmitted transparently transmit
BPDU packets.
When BPDU packets do not
need to be transparently
transmitted, they are
processed as service packets
and need to match the port
attribute. When the port
attribute is Tag Aware,
BPDU packets will be
dropped because they do not
have VLAN IDs.

Table 11-60 Basic PW and advanced PW parameters


Field Value Range Description

Role Working, Protection Displays and specifies the


role of a PW.

Source NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot source NE of a PW.

Sink NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port- Displays and specifies the


Higher order timeslot sink NE of a PW.

PW ID Auto-Assign, or manually Displays and specifies the


enter it. identifier of a PW.
For example, 35

PW Signaling Type Static, Dynamic Displays and specifies the


signaling type of a PW.
If you set Signaling Type to
Static, you need to set the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label. If you set
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
automatically allocates the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 972


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

PW Incoming Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when entering a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Forward
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

PW Outgoing Label For example, 20 Displays and specifies the


NOTE label that the service carries
The value ranges from 16 to when leaving a PW.
1048575, and is different from
l If you set Signaling
the MPLS tunnel label.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Static, Reverse
Label can be
automatically allocated
or manually specified.

Ingress Tunnel For example, NE1-NE2#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a forward tunnel.

Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Displays and specifies the


binding type of a reverse
tunnel.

Egress Tunnel For example, NE2-NE1#1 Displays and specifies the


name of a reverse tunnel.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS Displays and specifies the


encapsulation type of a PW.

PW Trail - Displays the trail of a PW.

PW Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of a


PW.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 973


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged l Ethernet: The PW


Mode encapsulation mode is
Default: Ethernet Ethernet Raw mode, C-
VLAN/S-VLAN tags of
packets are encapsulated
into PWs without
changes, and
transparently transmitted
to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode:
A VLAN tag specified
by Request VLAN is
added to packets.
PWs of different types
process their carried
services differently. To tag
the services carried by a PW,
set PW Type to Ethernet
Tagged Mode for the PW;
otherwise, set PW Type to
Ethernet.

Control Word No Use, Used First Specifies the policy for


Default: / using the PW control word.
That is, this parameter
determines whether a PW
uses the control word field.
A control word is a 4-byte
encapsulated packet header,
which can be used to
identify the packet sequence
or used for bit stuffing.
l If the ping or traceroute
test needs to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to Used
First.
l If the ping or traceroute
test does not need to be
performed on a PW, set
this parameter to No Use
to save NNI-side
bandwidth.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 974


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Control Channel Type None, CW, Alert Label Specifies the type of
Default: CW channels for transmitting
VCCV packets.
l None: Indicates that the
control word is not used
to indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l CW: Indicates that the
control word is used to
indicate the VCCV
control channel
information.
l Alert Label: Indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode are
used.

Request VLAN 0-4094, Non-specified Specifies the ETH request


Default: Non-specified VLAN.
When the Request VLAN
parameter is set to Non-
specified, the packets with
tags are transmitted
transparently, and the
packets without tags are
added with 0 VLAN tags.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only
when PW Type is Ethernet
Tagged Mode.

11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters


Setting the UNI parameters for an E-LAN service focuses on setting of the VLAN
information about UNI ports.
Table 11-61 lists the UNI parameters for an E-LAN service.

Table 11-61 Parameters for a UNI port


Field Value Description

Port For example, 1(port-1) Indicates the UNI port.

VLANs 1 to 4094 Queries and configures the VLAN ID. The


VLAN ID can be null; or you can set one or
more VLAN IDs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 975


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Enabled Enabled and Disabled Sets whether to enable the broadcast packet
Broadcast suppression. Enabling the broadcast packet
Packet suppression efficiently prevents the broadcast
Suppression storm and network congestion, and ensures the
normal running of services. The E-LAN
service supports this parameter.

Broadcast 0-100 Configures the threshold of the broadcast


Packet Default: 30 packet suppression. The E-LAN service
Suppression supports this parameter.
Threshold When the broadcast packet suppression is
enabled, the broadcast packets are suppressed
if the following requirement is met:
Occupancy rate of the broadcast packet to the
bandwidth of the current port > the total
bandwidth of the port x the suppression
threshold x 1%. A low occupancy rate
indicates that the number of broadcast packets
that pass through the port is small. If the
occupancy rate is 100%, it indicates that the
broadcast packets that pass through the port
are not suppressed.

Default BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, The Default Forwarding Priority parameter
Forwarding AF4, EF, CS6, CS7, indicates the forwarding priority that the NE
Priority NONE sets to the user packets on the V-UNI side by
Default: BE default.

Default Packet Red, Yellow, Green, The Default Packet Relabeling Color indicates
Relabeling None the color that the NE sets to the user packets
Color Default: Green on the V-UNI side by default.

11.5.4.4 NNI Parameters


NNI parameters are used for NNI Ethernet services. According to different service bearer
modes, NNI parameters include the parameters that are used for a PW, a port and a QinQ link.

Table 11-62 Parameters for a PW


Field Value Range Description

PW ID For example, 123 Specifies the ID of the PW carrying the


Ethernet service.

PW Status Enable, Disable Specifies or displays the enable status of the


PW.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 976


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

PW Signaling Static In the case of the static PW, the label is


Type manually allocated. The configuration at the
two ends of a PW should be consistent.

PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet PWs of different types process the borne


Tagged Mode services differently. For example, the PW in
the Ethernet tagged mode attaches the tag on
the services on this PW.

PW Direction Bidirectional Specifies the direction of the PW.

PW MPLS Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.


Encapsulation
Type

PW Ingress 16 to 1048575 Specifies this parameter when the PW


Label Signaling Type is set to Static.

PW Egress 16 to 1048575 Specifies this parameter when the PW


Label Signaling Type is set to Static.

Peer IP For example, Specifies the peer IP of the PW.


10.70.71.123

Tunnel Type MPLS Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the
PW.

Tunnel No. Tunnel ID Selects a created tunnel. If no tunnel is


For example, 55 available, creation of a PW fails.

Control Word No Use, Used First Specifies the policy for using the PW control
Default: / word. That is, this parameter determines
whether a PW uses the control word field. A
control word is a 4-byte encapsulated packet
header, which can be used to identify the
packet sequence or used for bit stuffing.
l If the ping or traceroute test needs to be
performed on a PW, set this parameter to
Used First.
l If the ping or traceroute test does not need
to be performed on a PW, set this parameter
to No Use to save NNI-side bandwidth.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 977


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Range Description

Control None, CW, Alert Label Specifies the type of channels for transmitting
Channel Type Default: CW VCCV packets.
l None: Indicates that the control word is not
used to indicate the VCCV control channel
information.
l CW: Indicates that the control word is used
to indicate the VCCV control channel
information.
l Alert Label: Indicates that VCCV packets
in Alert Label encapsulation mode are used.

Local Up, Down Displays the working status of the PW at the


Operating local end. Up indicates that the PW works
Status normally. Down indicates that the PW work
abnormally.

Remote Up, Down Displays the working status of the PW at the


Operating remote end. Up indicates that the PW works
Status normally. Down indicates that the PW work
abnormally.

Overall Up, Down Specifies the running status of a PW.


Operating NOTE
Status Dynamic supports Down and Static supports Up.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, Static can only
be set to Up.

Request VLAN 0-4094, Non-specified Specifies the ETH request VLAN.


Default: Non-specified When the Request VLAN parameter is set to
Non-specified, the packets with tags are
transmitted transparently, and the packets
without tags are added with 0 VLAN tags.
NOTE
You need to set the PW Type parameter to Ethernet
Tagged Mode.

TPID 0x88A8 Identifies the protocol.

Table 11-63 Parameters for an NNI Port


Field Value Range Description

Port For example, Specifies the network-side port.


21-54EG16-1(Port-1)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 978


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-64 Parameters for a QinQ link


Field Value Range Description

QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Displays the QinQ link ID.

Port For example, Displays the board and port.


21-54EG16-10(PORT-10)

S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays the S-VLAN ID.

Direction Ingress, Egress Displays the direction of the


service.

Bandwidth Limit Enabled, Disabled Displays the bandwidth


limit.
When Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled, you can set
Committed Information
Rate and Peak Information
Rate.

Committed Information For example, 16000 Displays the committed


Rate(kbit/s) information rate, which is
the guaranteed rate that can
be provided to the service.

Committed Burst Size(byte) - Displays the committed


burst size, which is the
maximum flow size allowed
for each burst.

Peak Information For example, 20000 Displays the peak


Rate(kbit/s) information rate, which is
the maximum rate that can
be provided for the service.

Maximum Burst Size(byte) - Displays the maximum burst


size, which is the maximum
flow size allowed for each
excessive burst.

Policy Policy ID + Policy Name Displays the QinQ policy.


For example, 1(policy1)

11.5.4.5 Split Horizon Group


A split horizon group is a group of V-UNIs or V-NNIs that do not allow for interconnection at
one station. The split horizon group prevents a cycling route and a loop.
Table 11-65 lists the parameters for a split horizon group.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 979


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-65 Parameters for a split horizon group


Field Value Description

Split Horizon 1 The Split Horizon Group ID parameter


Group ID Default: - identifies the split horizon group.

Split Horizon For example, PW-100, The Split Horizon Group Member parameter
Group Member PORT1[90, 100] indicates the logical port member in a split
horizon group.

11.5.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters


This topic describes the parameters, such as Aging Ability, Aging Time, and Address Table
Specified Capacity, for configuring the MAS address learning function.
Table 11-66 lists the parameters for MAC address learning.

Table 11-66 Parameters for MAC address learning


Field Value Description

Aging Ability Enabled, Disabled If no packets of an MAC address listed in the


Default: Enabled MAC address table are received during a
period, the MAC address is deleted from the
MAC address table.

Aging Time 1-640 Set the Aging Time (min) parameter to set the
(min) Default: 5 aging time of the learnt MAC address. The
Aging Time (min) parameter indicates that the
MAC address is automatically aged after the
timing is set.

Address Table 0-65534 Sets the capacity of the MAC address table.
Specified Default: 512
Capacity

Address 80-100 Sets a value of Address Table Specified


Detection Default: 95 Capacity to the upper threshold for address
Upper detection. The upper threshold needs to be
Threshold (%) higher than the value of Address Detection
Lower Threshold (%). If the number of MAC
addresses actually learnt is more than the
upper threshold, the FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
alarm is generated.

Address 60-100 Sets a value of Address Table Specified


Detection Default: 90 Capacity to the lower threshold for address
Lower detection. The lower threshold needs to be
Threshold (%) lower than the value of Address Detection
Upper Threshold (%).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 980


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Self-Learning Default: - The Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN


MAC Address Service) parameter indicates that the MAC
address is obtained by the board through self-
learning.

11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing


If the MAC address table fails to learn the MAC address of a packet, the MAC address table
considers this packet as an unknown frame.

Table 11-67 lists the parameters for unknown frame processing.

Table 11-67 Parameters for unknown frame processing

Field Value Description

Frame Type Unicast, Multicast Displays the type of the received unknown
frames.

Handing Mode Discard, Broadcast Selects the mode for handling the unknown
Default: Broadcast frames. Discard indicates that unknown
frames are directly discarded. Broadcast
indicates that unknown frames are broadcast at
the forwarding port.

11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address


Static MAC addresses refer to a MAC address table manually set for the service. Entries in
the MAC address table are not automatically aged. Therefore, unnecessary entries need to be
manually deleted.

Table 11-68 lists the parameters for a static MAC address.

Table 11-68 Parameters for a static MAC address

Field Value Description

VLAN ID - Sets the ID of the service.


The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the
setting of this parameter.

MAC Address For example, 00-e0- Sets a static MAC address.


fc-39-80-34

Egress Interface For example, PW-100 Sets the egress interface, which can be a PW,
port or QinQ link.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 981


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

11.5.4.9 Maintenance Association


The maintenance association (MA) facilitates the connectivity check (CC) of a network that
transports services.

Table 11-69 lists the parameters for a maintenance association.

Table 11-69 Parameters for a maintenance association

Field Value Description

Maintenance 1-8 characters Sets an MD name that is unique in the entire


Domain Name network.

Maintenance 1-8 characters Sets an MA name that is unique in the same


Association MD.
Name

CC Test 3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms, The source end MEP constructs the CC
Transmit Period 1s, 10s, 1m, 10m frames, and then transmits them periodically to
Default: 1s the destination MEP. Within a certain period
(3.5 times of the transmission period), if the
destination MEP does not receive the CC
packets from the source end, an alarm is
automatically reported. The CC Test
Transmit Period parameter indicates the
transmission period of the unidirectional
connectivity check.
It is recommended that you use three period
values, that is, 3.33 ms for protection
switching, 100 ms for performance check, and
1 s for connectivity check. The configuration
should comply with user requirements. If the
fast check is required, set to 3.33 ms. Hence,
the fault can be detected quickly. The
bandwidth used, however, descends with the
period value.

11.5.4.10 MEP Point


The MEP point is the edge point in an MA.

Table 11-70 Parameters for an MEP point

Field Value Description

Maintenance 1-8 characters The name of an MD should be unique in the


Domain Name entire network.

Maintenance 1-8 characters The name of an MA should be unique in the


Association same MD.
Name

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 982


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Field Value Description

Board For example, Displays the board where the MEP point is
21-54EG16 located. The format is Slot number - Board
name.

Port For example, Displays the port where the MEP point is
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 located. The format is Slot number - Board
) name - Port information.

Node For example, Sets the node as an MEP point. The format is
21-54EG16-1(PORT-1 Slot number - Board name - Port information.
)

VLAN For example, 22 Sets the current VLAN ID of the service.

MEP ID 1-8191 Sets a unique ID for each MP. The ID is


required for OAM operations.

Direction Ingress, Egress Ingress indicates the direction for packets to


enter the board. Egress indicates the direction
for packets to exit the board.

CC Status Active, Inactive Activates or deactivates the CC function of the


MEP point.

11.5.5 Parameter Description: QinQ Link


This topic describes the parameters related to QinQ links.

Table 11-71 QinQ link parameters


Field Value Range Description

QinQ Link For example, 5 Displays or specifies the ID of the QinQ link.
ID

Board For example, Displays or specifies the board.


1-54EG16

Port For example, Displays or specifies the port.


4(PORT-4)

S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID.

Policy 64 bytes Specifies and displays name of the policy.

11.5.6 Parameter Description: Address Parse


This topic describes the parameters, such as ARP List IP, ARP List MAC, and ARP List
Type, for configuring the address parse function.
Table 11-72 lists the parameters for configuring the address parse function.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 983


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet)

Table 11-72 Parameters for configuring the address parse function


Parameter Value Description

ARP List IP For example, 129.9.1.23 Configures the IP address in


the ARP list.

ARP List MAC For example, 1C- Configures the MAC


C4-31-88-1C-C4 address corresponding to the
IP address in the ARP list.

ARP List Type Static, Dynamic Displays the type of the


ARP list.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 984


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12 Configuration Tasks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes basic operations that may be used when you configure services. For
example, configure the service type and WDM-side port attributes of the board. You can see
this topic if required.

12.1 Configuring the Working Mode


Before using some boards, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
modes for the boards. Different port working modes enable a board to process services
differently.
12.2 Configuring the Service Mode
If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.
12.3 Configuring the Service Type
The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM
interface of the board is the same as the actual service type.
12.4 Creating Cross-Connections
By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for
a single service.
12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots
For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be
configured during service creation.
12.6 Configuring the Board Mode
The board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the
board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is
used as a regeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.
12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte
The J0 byte must be configured when the SDH or SONET service is received on the client
side. Otherwise, the J0_MM alarm is reported.
12.8 Configuring the Line Rate
This topic describes how to configure the line rate for each service mapping mode based on
the actual signal rate. The line rates at the transmit and receive ends must be the same.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 985


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12.9 Modifying the Configuration Data

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 986


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12.1 Configuring the Working Mode


Before using some boards, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
modes for the boards. Different port working modes enable a board to process services
differently.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

The required boards must be created.

Before changing the working mode or port working mode of a board, delete the cross-
connections on the board and logical fiber connections at the optical ports.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT

Context
l You need to configure working modes for the following boards: TN11TOM, TN52TOM,
THA, TOA, LOA, TN53TDX, TN55TQX and TEM28.
l You need to configure only Port Working Mode for the following boards: THA, TOA,
LOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX.
l For the TN52TOM board, you need to configure not only Board Working Mode but
also Port Working Mode (such as ODU0/ODU1 mapping and tributary-line integration)
to achieve different service signal flows.
l If you set Board Working Mode to Non-Cascading mode for the TN52TOM board,
you need to set Port Working Mode only for optical ports ClicentLP1, ClicentLP3,
ClicentLP5, and ClicentLP7.

Legend Information
Figure 12-1 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-1 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer,set the board Board Working ModeandPort Working Mode.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 987


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

5
6

NOTE

3
:This step is applicable only to the TN52TOM board.

----End

12.2 Configuring the Service Mode


If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 988


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Precautions

NOTICE
Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

NOTE

The line board in Standard Mode without setting Service mode .

Legend Information
Figure 12-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and set Service Mode according to the service
requirement. For details, see Service Mode (WDM Interface).
Operation Example:

4
5

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 989


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12.3 Configuring the Service Type


The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM
interface of the board is the same as the actual service type.

Prerequisite
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Precautions

NOTICE
Caution
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption. For ASON services, this
operation may trigger service rerouting.
l When configuring a GE or 10GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types
specified for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Legend Information
Figure 12-3 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-3 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and double-click the Service Type field to select
the required service type.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 990


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

5 4

NOTE

3
:
l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s).
l If you set Service Type to 10GE LAN, you must set the Port Mapping .

----End

12.4 Creating Cross-Connections


By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for
a single service.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, the available cross-connection capacity of a board is related to
the slot where the board is installed. For example, when the TQX or NQ2 board is
installed in slots 1, 4, 11 or 14, the available cross-connection capacity of the board is 40
Gbit/s; when the TQX or NQ2 board is installed in any other slots, the available cross-

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 991


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

connection capacity of the board is 20 Gbit/s. Different boards have different cross-
connection capacities.
l If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection
capacity, the service configuration fails.
l When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the
WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the
Service Type.

Legend Information
Figure 12-4 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-4 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, configuring the cross-connection services, For detailed configuration
method, see 2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

Operation Example:
l When the Configuring board is set to Compatibility mode.

4
1

When the following figure shows the Level is set to ODUflex.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 992


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

1
4

l When the Configuring board is set to Standard Mode.

4
1

When the following figure shows the Level is set to ODUflex.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 993


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

1
4

NOTE

3
: For details about the standard mode and ODUflex, see 2.1.2 Standard Mode and
Compatible Mode and 2.1.3 ODUflex.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT


Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-
Connection Service dialog box is displayed. For parameter descriptions, see 2.8.1 WDM
Cross-Connection Configuration.
Step 4 Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set other parameters for
the service.
Step 5 Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 994


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots


For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be
configured during service creation.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Applies to the TQM, TOM, LQM, LQMD, LOM, LQMS, LDMD, LDM, LDMS, TOA, THA.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the status of configured services for each port on the board.

Step 3 Choose the port, double-click Timeslot Configuration Mode and select Automatically
Assign.

NOTE

TOA and THA boards support the compatible mode and standard mode. The compatible mode supports
Automatically Assign and Manual. The standard mode does not support Manual. Therefore, set
Timeslot Configuration Mode to Automatically Assign when a TOA board in the compatible mode
interconnects with a TOA board in the standard mode or a THA board in the compatible mode
interconnects with a THA board in the standard mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 995


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

NOTE

When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Automatically Assign, Timeslot Configuration Mode
of the receive end and transmit end in the same direction of the service must be set as Automatically
Assign, and Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots do not need to be set.
When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Manual, you can set parameters, such as Send
Timeslots and Receive Timeslots.
l The format of timeslots can be one of the following two:
1, 2, 3, 4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.
1-4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.
l Please obey the following rules during service configuration:
The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board.
For each board, the same timeslot in the same direction cannot be shared by multiple
services.
In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
Timeslots must be set again after the service type is changed.
For details, see Service Timeslot (WDM Services).

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. The configured timeslots of the board are displayed in the interface.

----End

12.6 Configuring the Board Mode


The board supports different functions in different board modes. Set the board mode of the
board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is
used as a regeneration board, set the board mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Legend Information
Figure 12-5 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-5 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 996


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and double-click Board Mode to choose the
desired mode from the drop-down list.

Operation Example:

1
3

5
6

NOTE

4
If a cross-connection is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection on the board
before setting Board Mode.

----End

12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte


The J0 byte must be configured when the SDH or SONET service is received on the client
side. Otherwise, the J0_MM alarm is reported.

Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Service Type of the board has been set to the SDH or SONET service.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 997


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Procedure on the U2000


1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Overhead
Management > SDH Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Select Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
3. In the lower right of the window, click Query to query the settings of the current
overhead.
4. Double-click J0 to be Received([Mode]Content). In the dialog box displayed, enter
parameter values. Click OK.
5. Click Apply, and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT


1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Overhead
Management > OCh Overhead Management-SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
3. In the lower right of the window, click Query to query the settings of the current
overhead.
4. Double-click J0 to be Received([Mode]Content). In the dialog box displayed, enter
parameter values. Click OK.
5. Click Apply, and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.

Parameter Description

Table 12-1 Parameter Description


Domain Range Description

Object Shelf ID (shelf name)- Displays the operation object.


slot number-board
name-port number (port
name)
For example: NE811-
Shelf0(Master
subrack)-12-LSX-1(IN/
OUT)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 998


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Domain Range Description

J0 to be Sent For example: [16 Sets the J0 to be sent of the port.


([Mode] Content) Bytes] Where, [Mode] indicates the byte mode of
the J0 byte to be sent, which includes the
single-byte mode, 16-byte mode and 64-byte
mode. The "content" indicates the value of
the J0 byte to be sent.
Double-click this column to enter the Please
input the overhead byte dialog box where
you can set the J0 to be sent of the port.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only for the TBE board
and only when the service type of the board is set
to 10GE WAN.

J0 to be Received For example: [16 Sets the J0 to be received of the port.


([Mode] Content) Bytes] Where, [Mode] indicates the byte mode of
the J0 byte to be received, which includes
the single-byte mode, 16-byte mode and 64-
byte mode. The "content" indicates the value
of the J0 byte to be received.
Double-click this column to enter the Please
input the overhead byte dialog box where
you can set the J0 to be received of the port.

J0 Received For example: [16 Displays the J0 received of the port.


(Content) Bytes]

Input in Text For example: A The text entry field is used to input the
Format desired byte.

Byte Mode Single-Byte Mode, 16- Before inputting the text, you need to select
Byte Mode (First Byte the byte mode. Different services support
Created different modes.
Automatically), Disable

Input Mode Text Mode, Selects an input mode before entering texts.
Hexadecimal Text Mode means you can enter characters
directly; Hexadecimal means you enter
texts in hexadecimal mode.

12.8 Configuring the Line Rate


This topic describes how to configure the line rate for each service mapping mode based on
the actual signal rate. The line rates at the transmit and receive ends must be the same.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 999


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT

Background Information
When the WDM-side signal of the line board is OTU2e or OTU3e, or when the client-side
signal of the tributary board is 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G) for the client-side port, set Line Rate of the line board to Speedup Mode.
In any other cases, set it to Standard Mode.

Legend Information
Figure 12-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, configure Line Rate of the line board .

Operation Example:

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1000


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

12.9 Modifying the Configuration Data

12.9.1 Modifying Port


Different port types can be configured for the client-side ports and WDM-side ports of OTU
boards based on the optical modules that are used by the OTU boards.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
l Only the TOM board supports interchange of line-side ports and client-side ports. When
a TOM board is created, the ports on the TOM board are created automatically and are
defined as client-side ports by default.
l When a board is created, the ports on the board are created automatically and the client-
side ports are defined as Client Side Grey Optical Port by default.
l For 100G tributary boards, the port type is CFP4*25G by default. If CFP10*10G optical
modules are used on 100G tributary boards, services will be unavailable and a
LASER_MODULE_MISMATCH alarm will be reported. Therefore, ensure that the
client-side optical module type is the same as the practical optical module type before
service configuration.

Legend Information
Figure 12-7 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-7 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

ProcedureU2000
Step 1 Configure the port type based on the practical SFP optical modules used on the client-side and
WDM-side ports of the OTU boards inPath View.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1001


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

3 4

2
5

NOTE
If you need to modify Type to Client Side Color Optical Port, Line Side Color Optical Port or
Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be
modified successfully.

Configure the port type based on the practical client-side optical modules of 100G tributary
boards.

Step 2 Optional: In Path View, Delete the port need to delete .


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1002


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Step 3 Optional: In Path View,Add the port need to add .

Operation Example:

2
1

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1003


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Procedure on the Web LCT


Step 1 Right-click the desired board in the NE panel, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port from
the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to apply
the configuration.
NOTE
If you need to modify Type to Client Side Color Optical Port, Line Side Color Optical Port or
Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be
modified successfully.

Step 3 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.

Step 4 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port
dialog box displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.

----End

12.9.2 Modifying the Services Configuration


After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service
based on the following task sets.

12.9.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service


To release the occupied channel resources, you need to deactivate cross-connections and then
delete the cross-connections.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

The Cross-Connection Service must be created and the activated state of the service should be
activated.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Precautions

NOTICE
The deactivation operation may interrupt services.

Legend Information
Figure 12-8 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1004


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Figure 12-8 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, set the activated state at the Cross-Connection Service to deactivating.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1005


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

NOTE

1
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: in the NE Explorer, select the NE
and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function
Tree.

2
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: click the Electrical Cross-
Connection Configuration tab

----End

12.9.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections


When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

The cross-connections must be created and inactive.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Precautions

NOTICE
Deleting cross-connections may interrupt services.

Legend Information
Figure 12-9 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 12-9 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1006


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 12 Configuration Tasks

Procedure on the U2000


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, you can delete one or more specified cross-connections.
Operation Example:

2
4

Step 2 In the two Confirm dialog box that is displayed , click OKand then click Close. In the
Operation Result dialog box.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the
information about the existing cross-connections.
Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1007


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters of all the WDM products of Huawei. Each parameter is
described in terms of description, impact on the system, values, configuration guidelines, and
relationship with other parameters in detail.
A.1 Enable Port
A.2 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)
A.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
A.4 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
A.5 Default VLAN ID
A.6 VLAN Priority
A.7 Entry Detection
A.8 Tag Identifier
A.9 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)
A.10 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)
A.11 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)
A.12 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)
A.13 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)
A.14 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)
A.15 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
A.16 Board Mode (WDM Interface)
A.17 Explicit Link
A.18 Explicit Node
A.19 Excluded Node
A.20 Auto-Calculation
A.21 Copy after Creation

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1008


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A.22 Level (WDM Trail Creation)


A.23 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)
A.24 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)
A.25 Source (WDM Trail Creation)
A.26 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1009


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A.1 Enable Port


Description
The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive
services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set
to Disabled.

Impact on the System


The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the
attributes of the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Enabled, Disabled Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Enabled Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the
port take effect.

Disabled Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the
port becomes invalid and the service at the port is
interrupted.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.2 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)


Description
The Port parameter specifies a port for which tag attributes needs to be set. Users need to set
the tag attributes of boards separately.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1010


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

ip1-ipN, vctrunk1-vctrunkM None

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

ip1-ipN Represent Ethernet ports.

vctrunk1-vctrunkM Represent VC-Trunk ports.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold


Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of
broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will
be discarded.

Impact on the System


After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be
limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the
specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values
Value Range Default Value

10%-100% 30%

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1011


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Configuration Guidelines
Value Description

10% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 10% of the
bandwidth of a port.

20% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 20% of the
bandwidth of a port.

30% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 30% of the
bandwidth of a port.

40% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 40% of the
bandwidth of a port.

50% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 50% of the
bandwidth of a port.

60% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 60% of the
bandwidth of a port.

70% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 70% of the
bandwidth of a port.

80% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 80% of the
bandwidth of a port.

90% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 90% of the
bandwidth of a port.

100% Indicates that the broadcast packets can


account for a maximum of 100% of the
bandwidth of a port.

Relationship with Other Parameters


This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to
Enabled.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1012


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A.4 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression


Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the
traffic of broadcast packets.

Impact on the System


After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be
limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the
specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Disabled, Enabled Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Enabled Indicates that the traffic of broadcast


packets is not limited.

Disabled Indicates that excess broadcast packets will


be discarded if the traffic of broadcast
packets exceeds the specified threshold.

Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Relationship with Other Parameters


Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.

A.5 Default VLAN ID


Description
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1013


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Impact on the System


The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.

Values
Value Range Default Value

1 to 4095 1

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.6 VLAN Priority


Description
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

0 to 7 0

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.7 Entry Detection


Description
The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1014


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Enabled, Disabled Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Enabled Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier.

Disabled Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this


case, all packets can traverse the port.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


The entry detection states at the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.

A.8 Tag Identifier


Description
The Tag Identifier parameter determines whether a port transmits packets with tags. Three
types of tag identifier are available: ACCESS, TAG, and HYBRID.

Impact on the System


Tag Identifier Impact on Ports

ACCESS Allows a port to transmit only untagged


packets.

TAG Allows a port to transmit only tagged


packets.

HYBRID Allows a port to transmit both untagged and


tagged packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1015


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Values
Value Range Default Value

ACCESS, TAG, HYBRID TAG

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

ACCESS Allows a port to transmit only untagged


packets.

TAG Allows a port to transmit only tagged packets.

HYBRID Allows a port to transmit both untagged and


tagged packets.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


A tag identifier is valid only for a UNI port.

A.9 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)


Description
The Source Channel parameter is used to query the transmit channel of a certain electrical
cross-connect service (unidirectional service flow).

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Slot ID-Board Name-Optical Interface ID- Null


Optical Channel ID

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1016


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

Slot ID-Board Name- Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the cross-
Optical Interface ID-Optical connect board is located.
Channel ID Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board.
Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where
the cross-connect services are configured.
Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where
the cross-connect services are configured.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.10 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection


Configuration)
Description
The Sink Channel parameter is used to query the receive channel of a certain electrical cross-
connect service (unidirectional service flow).

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Slot ID - Board Name - Optical Interface ID Null


- Optical Channel ID

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1017


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

Slot ID-Board Name - Slot ID: The ID of the slot on the local NE where the cross-
Optical Interface ID - connect board is located.
Optical Channel ID Board Name: The name of the cross-connect board.
Optical Interface ID: The ID of the optical interface where
the cross-connect services are configured.
Optical Channel ID: The ID of the optical channel where
the cross-connect services are configured.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.11 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection


Configuration)
Description
The Activation Status parameter is used to display whether the service cross-connection
configuration is activated.

Only when the configuration is activated, can the U2000 deliver the service cross-connection
configuration to the NE software.

Impact on the System


When Active is selected, the U2000 delivers the information of the service type, source/sink
services and service direction that have been configured to the NE software; when Inactive is
selected, the U2000 does not deliver the configuration to the NE software.

The configuration does not take effect when Inactive is selected during the cross-connection
configuration; the configuration takes effect only when Active is selected during the cross-
connection configuration.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Active, Inactive Active

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1018


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

Active Indicates that the configuration is activated. The service cross-


connection configuration will be delivered to the NE software.

Inactive Indicates that the configuration is not activated. The service cross-
connection configuration will not be delivered to the NE software.

Configuration Guidelines
When creating service cross-connections, determine whether to deliver the configuration
immediately to the NE software.

Relationship with Other Parameters


When Active is displayed in the Activation Status column, the values of the Source
Interface, Sink Interface, Service Type, and Direction parameters will be delivered to the
NE software.

A.12 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)


Description
The Level parameter is used to differentiate the service types configured when electrical
cross-connections are configured.

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports Any, GE, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and OTU1 services.

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, ODU2, and OTU1 services.

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports Any, GE, ODU1, and OTU1 services.

Impact on the System


When you configure an electrical cross-connection, if the level of the services to be cross-
connected is set incorrectly, the configuration of the electrical cross-connection will fail and
the cross-connect services cannot be configured successfully.

Values
Value Range Default Value

ANY, GE, ODU0, ODU1, -


ODU2, ODU5G, ODU3,
OTU1

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1019


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

ANY Includes the following services: 10GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4,


STM-16, STM-64, STM-254, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192,
OC-768, FC50, FC100, FC200, FC100(Slice), FC200(Slice),
FICON(Slice), FICONEXPRESS(Slice), DVB-ASI, GE(Slice),
FC400, FC1000, FICON, FICON Express, HDSDI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, FICON4G, ETR, CLO

GE Indicates the data GE services.

ODU0 Indicates a 1.25 Gbit/s signal.

ODU1 Indicates a 2.5 Gbit/s signal.

ODU2 Indicates a 10 Gbit/s signal.

ODU3 Indicates a 40 Gbit/s signal.

ODU5G Indicates that one ODU5G service encapsulates four GE services.


The ODU5G services can be accessed by the L4G board or the
LQG board.

OTU1 Indicates a 2.5 Gbit/s signal.

NOTE

For the services listed in the table above, the ODU5G service is used only for intra-board fixed cross-
connections. For new cross-connections, only GE, Any, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3 and OTU1
services can be used.
The LSX, LSXR, TMX, LOM, LSXL, and LSXLR boards do not support electrical cross-connections
but fixed cross-connections.

Configuration Guidelines
The value of the parameter varies according to boards. For details, see the Hardware
Description.

Relationship with Other Parameters


The cross-connect level must be configured before the Sink Port parameter and optical ports
are configured.
When you configure electrical cross-connections by using the cross-connect board, the
services at the source and sink nodes configured with cross-connections must be consistent.
The fixed cross-connection within a board does not need to be configured manually. It is
configured automatically by the U2000.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1020


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A.13 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)


Description
The Direction parameter indicates the service direction mode when the service cross-
connection is configured. It can be set to either Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

Impact on the System


If the service cross-connection is configured in only one direction, only the services in that
direction can be configured successfully. The services in the other direction, however, cannot
be configured successfully.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Unidirectional, Bidirectional. Unidirectional

The following table provides a description of each value.

Value Description

Unidirectional When the received and transmitted services travel through


different route, the services are unidirectional.

Bidirectional When the received and transmitted services travel through


the same route, the services are bidirectional.

Configuration Guidelines
The values of the parameter are different according to the boards. For details, see the
Hardware Description.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.14 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)


Description
The Service Timeslot parameter is used to configure the number of timeslots of a service.
The number must be within the timeslot range of the service type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1021


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

1-16 Select a value based on the service type.


(If the number is 0, it indicates that the
timeslot is unavailable.)

Configuration Guidelines
The following table lists the required timeslots of each board for the OptiX OSN 6800, the
OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800.

Supported Board Service Type Required Timeslots

LDM/LDMD/ FE 1
LDMS/LQM/LQMD/
LQMS/TOM/TQM GE 7

OTU-1 16

STM-1 1

STM-4 4

STM-16 16

OC-3 1

OC-12 4

OC-48 16

FC100 6

FC200 12

FICON 6

FICON Express 12

HD-SDI 11

DVB-ASI 2

SDI 3

ESCON 2

FDDI 1

LOM GE 1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1022


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Supported Board Service Type Required Timeslots

FC100 1

FC200 2

FC400 4

FICON 1

FICON4G 4

FICON Express 2

ISC 1G 1

ISC 2G 2

l The number of timeslots required by a service is the number of unoccupied timeslots


required by the service type.
l For multiple timeslots, the timeslots with larger numbers are used with precedence. It is
recommended to use contiguous timeslots.
l Several configuration methods are provided for configuring multiple timeslots. The
following description considers configuring four timeslots as an example.
"1-4" indicates configuration of four contiguous timeslots numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4.
"1, 3, 6, 9" indicates configuration of four noncontiguous timeslots.
"1-3, 6" indicates configuration of four timeslots where three are contiguous.

Relationship with Other Parameters


The timeslots in the above table are determined by the value range and the number of
timeslots required.

A.15 Service Mode (WDM Interface)


Description
Service Mode: Specifies the service mode for a board.

Impact on the System


None.

Values
See the NMS parameter descriptions of corresponding boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1023


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Configuration Guidelines
l For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: Set the line-side service modes of the
local and remote boards to the same value. When the local board is connected to an SDH
service board on non-WDM equipment, set the line-side service mode to SDH.
l For the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, and TQM boards: When the board is enabled to
receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any
other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.16 Board Mode (WDM Interface)


Description
Board Mode: Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.

Impact on the System


The board mode determines how a signal is transmitted inside the board, what functions the
board provides, and how the board works. Therefore, switching between different board
modes interrupts the running services on the board.

Values
The following table provides the parameter values of the ECOM board.

Value Range Default Value

Service Mode, HUB Mode HUB Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the ECOM board.

Parameter Value Description

Service Mode In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE
services into one GE service.

HUB Mode In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE
services into one FE service.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board.

Value Range Default Value

NS1 Mode, LQM Mode LQM Mode

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1024


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12LQMS board.

Parameter Value Description

NS1 Mode In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as a line board
and adds/drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with a
tributary board.

LQM Mode In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as an OTU


board and can aggregate four Any-rate signals into one
OTU1 signal.

NOTE

The NS1 Mode value is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is deployed in an OptiX OSN 6800
subrack or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11TOM board.

Value Range Default Value

Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode Non-cascading Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11TOM board.

Parameter Value Description

Cascading Mode In this mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 port pairs
on the board can be used as WDM side optical port pairs.
The board can multiplex up to six Any-rate signals into one
OTU1 signal.

Non-cascading Mode In this mode, the RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 port pairs on the


board can be used as WDM-side optical port pairs. The
board can multiplex up to four Any-rate signals into two
OTU1 signals.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/


TN12LSXLR board.

Value Range Default Value

Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Electrical Relay Mode

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1025


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/


TN12LSXLR board.

Parameter Value Description

Electrical Relay Mode When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled,
it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set
Optical Relay Mode to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The
parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line
board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end
management of ASON services is not available.

The following table provides the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/


TN54NS3 board.

Value Range Default Value

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Line Mode


Relay Mode

The following table describes the parameter values of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/


TN54NS3 board.

Parameter Value Description

Line Mode The board serves as a line board.

Electrical Relay Mode The board serves as a regeneration unit.

Optical Relay Mode

Configuration Guidelines
Set the board mode depending on the actual service application scenario.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.17 Explicit Link


Description
The Explicit Link parameter specifies a link that a service must traverse when a trail is
created, optimized, or precalculated.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1026


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Impact on the System


A service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit link is incorrect or the explicit
links are not specified sequentially.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Links on a network None

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Links on a Lists all links available at a node.


network

Configuration Guidelines
In general, only one explicit link is available on an NE. In addition, the explicit link can be set
only at the egress port on the link that a service traverses.

Relationship with Other Parameters


A link can be specified only after a node is specified.

A.18 Explicit Node


Description
The Explicit Node parameter specifies a node that a service must traverse when a trail is
created, optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the System


A service cannot be created successfully if a specified explicit node is incorrect or the explicit
nodes are not specified sequentially.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Nodes on a network None

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1027


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Parameter

Nodes on a Specifies a node that a service must traverse.


network

Configuration Guidelines
Check whether the number of nodes that an ASON service traverses exceeds the maximum
number of nodes. In the process of creating an ASON service, the ASON software by default
considers that the maximum hops of the ASON service is . That is, the maximum number of
nodes that an ASON service travels is . In general, only one explicit node is available on an
NE.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.19 Excluded Node


Description
The Excluded Node parameter specifies a node that a service cannot traverse when a trail is
created, optimized, or precalculated.

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Nodes on a network None

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Parameter

Nodes on a Specifies a node that a service cannot traverse.


network

Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter according to customer requirements.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1028


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.20 Auto-Calculation
Description
The Auto-Calculation parameter enables auto-calculation of the trails that comply with the
specified level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints.

Impact on the System


If auto-calculation of trails fails, it indicates that a service that complies with the specified
level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints does not exist.

Values
Value Range Default Value

None None

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


After this parameter is selected, the system automatically calculates the trails that comply
with the level, direction, rate, source, sink, and route constraints specified for a service.

A.21 Copy after Creation


Description
The Copy after Creation parameter specifies the source and sink nodes for a service and the
route constraints for creating a service.

Users can create services in batches if the services have the same source node and the same
sink node and comply with the same specified route constraints.

Impact on the System


None.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1029


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Values
Value Range Default Value

Source, Sink Null

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Source Lists all nodes that can function as the source of a


service complying with the specified constraints.

Sink Lists all nodes that can function as the sink of a service
complying with the specified constraints.

Relationship with Other Parameters


The services created in batches by using this parameter have the same level, direction, and
rate. In addition, the services comply with the same route constraints.

A.22 Level (WDM Trail Creation)


Description
The Level parameter determines the type of a service configured during configuration of an
electrical cross-connection, OCh trail, or Client trail. ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and OCh
levels are supported.

Impact on the System


An electrical cross-connection cannot be configured successfully if this parameter is set
incorrectly and thus a service cannot be provisioned.

Values
Value Range Default Value

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, OCh, Client


Client

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

ODU0 Indicates a 1.25 Gbit/s signal.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1030


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

ODU1 Indicates a 2.5 Gbit/s signal.

ODU2 Indicates a 10 Gbit/s signal.

ODU3 Indicates a 40 Gbit/s signal.

OCh Indicates the optical-layer signal.

Client Indicates the client-side signal.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters


l Level must be set prior to Sink Port.
l When configuring an electrical cross-connection implemented by a cross-connect board,
ensure that the service levels at the source and sink ends are the same.
l The fixed cross-connections on a board do not need to be configured manually; instead,
they are configured automatically by the NMS.

A.23 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)


Description
The Direction parameter indicates the direction of a trail.

Impact on the System


None.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Unidirectional, Bidirectional Bidirectional

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Unidirectional Indicates that the source can transmit services, and the sink can
receive services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1031


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Value Description

Bidirectional Indicates that the source and sink can receive and transmit
services.

Configuration Guidelines
Ensure that a created ASON service is bidirectional.

Relationship with Other Parameters


None.

A.24 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)


Description
The Rate parameter specifies the rate for a trail.

The rate for an OCh-level ASON trail cannot be specified.

Impact on the System


If the service rates for the boards that the service traverses are different, the service will be
interrupted.

Values
Value Range Default Value

GE, 10GE, 10GELAN, 10GEWAN, The default rate varies according to service
OTU1, OTU5G, OTU2, OTU3, ANY, levels.
FC25, FC50, FC100, FC200, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768,
STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64...

Configuration Guidelines
l Ensure that the service rates for upstream and downstream boards are the same.
l Set this parameter according to the actual service mapping mode and signal rate. The
parameter value varies according to boards. For details, see the Hardware Description.

Relationship with Other Parameters


The value of this parameter depends on the service level.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1032


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

A.25 Source (WDM Trail Creation)


Description
The Source parameter specifies the source of a trail.
For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-
port-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency.
For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-
board-port.

Impact on the System


During configuration of a service, the source, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port,
must be specified for the service. A source slot must be specified if a board-level optical
cross-connection needs to be configured. If no source slot is specified, a board-level optical
cross-connection cannot be created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-
connection will become invalid if a source port is configured incorrectly.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Source NE, source subrack, source slot, Null


source board, source port, null

The following table lists the description of each value.


Value Description

Source NE Specifies a node where a service is added.

Source subrack Specifies a subrack at the node where a


service is added.

Source board Specifies the type of a board where the


source edge port is located.

Source port Specifies a source port for a board-level


optical cross-connection.

Null Indicates that no source is configured for an


optical cross-connection.

Configuration Guidelines
l Only one source port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.
l A MON port cannot be used as the source port for a board-level optical cross-
connection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1033


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Relationship with Other Parameters


This parameter is available only when a source slot is specified.

A.26 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)


Description
The Sink parameter specifies the sink of a trail.

For an optical service, the parameter value is expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-board-


port-wavelength number/wavelength/frequency.

For an electrical service, the parameter value is s expressed as optical NE-NE-subrack-slot-


board-port.

Impact on the System


During configuration of a service, the sink, including NE, subrack, slot, board, and port, must
be specified for the service. A sink slot must be specified if a board-level optical cross-
connection needs to be configured. If no sink slot is specified, a board-level optical cross-
connection cannot be created. In addition, a configured board-level optical cross-connection
will become invalid if a sink port is configured incorrectly.

Values
Value Range Default Value

Sink NE, sink subrack, sink slot, sink board, Null


sink port, null

The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Description

Sink NE Indicates a node where a service is dropped.

Sink subrack Specifies a subrack at a node where a


service is dropped.

Sink board Specifies the type of a board where the sink


edge port is located.

Sink port Specifies a sink port for a board-level


optical cross-connection.

Null Indicates that no sink is configured for an


optical cross-connection.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1034


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide A Parameters Description

Configuration Guidelines
l Only one sink port can be set for one board-level optical cross-connection.
l A MON port cannot be used as a sink port for a board-level optical cross-connection.

Relationship with Other Parameters


This parameter is available only when a sink slot is specified.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1035


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

B Glossary

Numerics
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s
to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over
private VLANs.

A
A/D analog/digit
AA authentication authorization
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACK See acknowledgement.
ACL See access control list.
ACR allowed cell rate
ACS See Application Control Server.
ADC analog to digital converter
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line.
AF See assured forwarding.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1036


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

AG See Access Gateway.


AH See Authentication Header.
AIN advanced intelligent network
AIS alarm indication signal
AK See access key ID.
ALC See automatic level control.
ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment
(single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it
fulfills optical power control on the line that contains the link.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
API See application programming interface.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working
facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS)
protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS
switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the
protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATAE See Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
AU adaptation unit
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
Access Gateway (AG) A type of gateway that provides a user-network interface (UNI) such as ISDN. An
access gateway is located at the edge access layer of the NGN structure, and provides
various methods for connecting users to the NGN.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1037


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

Advanced A carrier-class processing platform that is designed to meet the service application
Telecommunications requirement of high performance, high specialization, and high integration.
Application
Environment (ATAE)
Application Control A subsystem of the Media Entertainment Middleware (MEM), used for providing a
Server (ACS) service control interface for the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) server.
Authentication Header A protocol that provides connectionless integrity, data origin authentication, and anti-
(AH) replay protection for IP data.
Authentication, A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
Authorization and services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
Accounting (AAA) network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
access key ID (AK) An ID that confirms the identity of a user accessing the object-based storage system.
One access key ID belongs to only one user, but one user can have multiple access key
IDs. The object-based storage system recognizes the users accessing the system by
their access key IDs.
acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate reception of information. Acknowledgements
(ACK) may be implemented at any level, including the physical level (using voltage on one or
more wires to coordinate a transfer), link level (indicating transmission across a single
hardware link), or higher levels.
administrative unit One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM
group (AUG) payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm
has been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been
generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The
ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the
board.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
programming interface that are used for communication between software programs.
(API)
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable
for many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short
delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For
traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues
to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1038


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing
subscriber line (ADSL) phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL
provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that
it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to
receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog
(voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data
rates from 512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
shutdown (ALS) transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A function that keeps output power of components in a system essentially constant,
(ALC) even when line attenuation in a section of the system increases.
automatic power A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
equilibrium (APE) ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.

B
B/S Browser/Server
BA booster amplifier
BBC See battery backup cabinet.
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BEI backward error indication
BER Bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BPSK See binary phase shift keying.
BRA See basic rate access.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1039


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

BRAS See broadband remote access server.


BTS base transceiver station
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system
regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take
actions to recover the faulty link.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the
computer.
basic rate access An ISDN interface typically used by smaller sites and customers. This interface
(BRA) consists of a single 16 kbit/s data (or "D") channel plus two bearer (or "B") channels
for voice and/or data. Also known as Basic Rate Access, or BRI.
battery backup cabinet A cabinet that contains a built-in battery group to back up -48 V DC power and to
(BBC) supply power to the base station when there is no power input. It is a component of a
base station.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of
the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the
time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter,
packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
binary phase shift 2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation
keying (BPSK) mode, the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1
represents the phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1
needs to be specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to
represent digital information.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one
byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of
"1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the
number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them.
Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because
bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical
signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while
routers use IP addresses.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1040


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a
unit (BPDU) spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports,
addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended
destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of
network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of
multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth
utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to
a broadband network.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any
device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between
which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast
sending.
byte A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.

C
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CBS See committed burst size.
CCM continuity check message
CD chromatic dispersion
CDR See call detail record.
CE See customer edge.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CES See circuit emulation service.
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLI command-line interface
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CMEP connection monitoring end point
CMI coded mark inversion

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1041


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

CNP connection-not-possible signal


CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
COS chip operating system
CP cyclic prefix
CPLD complex programmable logical device
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CR carriage return
CR-LDP Constraint-based Routed Label Distribution Protocol
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CS class selector
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
CST See common spanning tree.
CSV See comma separated values.
CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
CoS class of service
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces
Request Broker of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the
Architecture (CORBA) two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on
different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request
broker, or ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program
from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented
environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cabinet A physical entity for containing one or more shelves, providing the cooling, power,
and security functions.
call detail record A record unit used to create billing records. A CDR contains details such as the called
(CDR) and calling parties, originating switch, terminating switch, call length, and time of day.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1042


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At
service (CES) the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These
ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception
end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots.
The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to
the original sequence at the reception end.
circulation The number of copies of a newspaper or magazine per issue that are circulated in the
market
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also
known as frequency synchronization).
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
comma separated A CSV file is a text file that stores data, generally used as an electronic table or by the
values (CSV) database software.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of
an IP packet to be forwarded.
common public radio A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
interface (CPRI) wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC,
Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF
interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and
equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to
reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST
(CST) region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their
spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
configuration data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key
factor that determines the operation of an entire network.
consistency check A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data
between two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the
consistency of service data and resource data between the softswitches.
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1043


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from
one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice
versa.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly
connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or
host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the
transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy
check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-
checking values.

D
DAPI destination access point identifier
DB database
DBMS Database Management System
DBPS distributed board protect system
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
(with ground) (DC-C) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line
between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
ground) (DC-I) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the
PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DEI device emulation interrupt
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DMUX demultiplexer

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1044


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

DPSK differential phase shift keying


DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior
node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate
DSE dispersion slope equalizer
DSF See distribute service framework.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP See digital signal processor.
DSS door status switch
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency.
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See differentiated service.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
(DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating
IP addresses to hosts.
data circuit- The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data
terminating equipment terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE
(DCE) may be separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment.
The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end
of the line.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the
equipment (DTE) DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced
by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source
node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1045


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
division multiplexing attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific
(DWDM) frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously
in the same fiber.
designated switch A designated switch of a device is a switch that is directly connected to the device and
forwards BPDUs to the device.
detection sensitivity The capability for a detector to respond to an exception.
differentiated service An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits
and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It
is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to
ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP
value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB).
Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital signal processor A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real
(DSP) time.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections
(DSLAM) and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
(DCF)
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
distribute service A distributed service development and running framework, in which services comply
framework (DSF) with standard specifications, and can be loaded and run by containers. This framework
provides a range of services including registration, detection, routing, and distributed
access.
distributed link A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
aggregation group negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or
(DLAG) hardware failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board,
thereby achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a
notation dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
downlink traffic The network traffic transferred into an internal carrier network. Noticeably, downlink
refers to sending traffic to user-end link nodes.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the
link.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1046


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

dual feed and selective A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The
receiving monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the
overhead of the service signal.
dual tone multiple Multi-frequency signaling technology for telephone systems. According to this
frequency (DTMF) technology, standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one
from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four high
frequencies, are used.

E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E1 An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides
thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32
timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization,
and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as
speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame
sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per
second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
E2E end to end
EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS See excess burst size.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEC Ethernet Electric Interface PMC Card
EEPROM See electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMF element management framework
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logic device.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1047


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

EVC Ethernet virtual connection


EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet passive A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
optical network technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
(EPON) supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance
of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on
encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the
bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high
bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission
channel (ESC) of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
programmable read- storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming.
only memory EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be
(EEPROM) reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1048


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its


compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP
inside IP.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates
a rate of 200 Mbit/s.
erasable A logic array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programmable logic programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array
device (EPLD) repeatedly until the program meets the requirement.
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump
laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting
with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it
amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode,
traffic control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter
defines the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when
the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must
be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
(EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to
(EXP) identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.
eye pattern An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively
sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the
horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks
like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.

F
FBG fiber Bragg grating
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1049


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.


FDI See forward defect indication.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction.
FICON See Fibre Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FMC See fixed mobile convergence.
FMT See fiber management tray.
FOA fixed optical attenuator
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FR See frame relay.
FRR See fast reroute.
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on
networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fibre Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units.
(FICON) It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel,
and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of
a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an
active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active
route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the
traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN
FRR, and TE FRR.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
(FMT)
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies
many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate
arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read
and invoked first.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1050


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

fixed mobile Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless
convergence (FMC) technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC
network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from
various access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and
use the same service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group
of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
forced switching The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection
channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is
faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that
indication (FDI) first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its
location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level
client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the
number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of
service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service
frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the
duplex (FDD) uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts.
Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.

G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GE ADM A technique that improves the transmission of GE services on a metropolitan area
network. Using this technique, equipment configured with a high-speed backplane can
separately transmit, aggregate, or divert GE services over electrical-layer wavelengths
or sub-wavelengths. This achieves cross-connections of wavelengths and end-to-end
management of sub-wavelengths over a single device. GE ADM enables GE
convergence and cross-connections at the same time, thereby ensuring that network
resources are used effectively.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1051


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

GFF gain flattening filter


GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GSM See Global system for mobile communications.
GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is
Procedure (GFP) defined by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
Global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by the European
mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
communications global mobile phone networks. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
(GSM) subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gateway IP address The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between
networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network
address resides in a different network to the sender.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This
(GTS) is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream
router to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
granularity The extent to which a system is broken down into small parts, either the system itself
or its description or observation. It is the extent to which a larger entity is subdivided.
If a system has more granularity for you to choose, that is, there are more granules in
the system for you to choose, then you can customize the system more flexibly.

H
HA system high availability system
HCS higher order connection supervision
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDTV See high definition television.
HP higher order path
HPT higher order path termination
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1052


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

HSI high-speed Internet


HSL See high-level script language.
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HUAWEI Electronic The software used to view, search for, and upgrade electronic documentation of
Document Explorer Huawei products. HedEx, pronounced as [hediks], has two editions, HedEx Lite and
(HedEx) HedEx Server.
HedEx See HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the
Packet Access requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It
(HSDPA) enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
high definition A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
television (HDTV) active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
high-level script A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and extendable.
language (HSL)

I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ID See identity.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
ILM incoming label map
IM See instant messaging.
IMP Instant Message Platform
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the
Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the
decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first
three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and
the last byte identifies the host itself.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1053


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

IP subnet A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the


submap icon in the topological view.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISI intersymbol interference
ISL See Inter-Switch Link.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IST internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Inter-Switch Link A kind of link that realizes VLAN by adding a 26-bit ISL header (with VLAN ID) to
(ISL) the traditional Ethernet packets.
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA
(IANA) also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite,
including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
Management Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and
(IGMP) maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the
media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to
the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after
media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1054


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host
within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits
while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
identity (ID) The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively
recognizable or known.
input jitter tolerance The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector,
coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path.
instant messaging (IM) A form of real-time communication between two or more people based on typed text.
The text is conveyed via devices connected over a network such as the Internet.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured
by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in
properly.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.

J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations,
and control system instability.

L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LAS line assurance system
LB See loopback.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1055


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

LBM See loopback message.


LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCT local craft terminal
LER See label edge router.
LHP long hop
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LMP link management protocol
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LPT link-state pass through
LRF location registration function
LSA link-state advertisement
LSR See label switching router.
LSS loss of sequence synchronization
LT linktrace
LTC loss of tandem connection
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
Layer 2 multicast A technology that maps IP multicast addresses to multicast MAC addresses. When
Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses for
traffic transmission.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
(LCK) informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and
suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to
(LER) assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1056


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR
(LSR) is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible
for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table,
creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to
groups received in the label forwarding table.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it
were a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member
links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity
initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path
is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
(LTM) LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM
minus 1.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
(LAN) square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the
(LLC) upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various
physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the
(LBM) destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the
LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the
sending time of LBR.
loss measurement A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
(LM) frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames
between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.

M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1057


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received
from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MBB mobile broadband
MD See maintenance domain.
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MDF See main distribution frame.
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG See maintenance entity group.
MEP maintenance association end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MGC media gateway controller
MIB See management information base.
MID message identification
MIN mobile identification number
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MML man-machine language
MNO See mobile network operator.
MOP See method of procedure.
MP maintenance point
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S main path interface at the transmitter
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MRI See measurement result integrity.
MRO mobility robustness optimization
MS multiplex section
MS-AIS See multiplex section alarm indication signal.
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSDP See Multicast Source Discovery Protocol.
MSI mobile station identifier
MSOH multiplex section overhead

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1058


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

MSP See multiplex section protection.


MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MUX See multiplexer.
MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator
MWA mobile wireless access
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of
(MAC) the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and
connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC
protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted,
certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control
information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving
data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the
data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted
correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is
transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multicast Source A protocol that is applicable only to the PIM-SM domain and meaningful only for the
Discovery Protocol Any-Source Multicast (ASM) model. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up
(MSDP) between RPs of different PIM-SM domains, multicast source information can be
shared between PIM-SM domains, and the inter-domain multicast can be
implemented. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up between RPs of the same
PIM-SM domain, multicast source information can be shared in the PIM-SM domain,
and anycast RP can be implemented.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this
case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.
The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning
trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN
because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different
Switching (MPLS) link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the
basis of IP routing and control protocols.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
(MD) connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of
(ME) a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1059


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

maintenance entity A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
group (MEG)
l Exist within the same management edges.
l Have the same MEG hierarchy.
l Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
maintenance entity An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond
group intermediate to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or
point (MIP) perform any operations on network connections.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such
(MIB) as routers and switches) in a network.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
measurement result Percentage of the number of the actually reported measurement results to the number
integrity (MRI) of the measurement results that should be reported.
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
method of procedure A document that describes the process of executing a specific task. It facilitates the
(MOP) mutual understanding of and cooperation between a service provider and a carrier.
Before executing a task, the representatives from both parties confirm this document
and reach an agreement on it. This document describes who, when, where, why, and
how to execute a task and what to do.
mobile network A company that has a network infrastructure, sells large network capacities, and
operator (MNO) provides transparent network channels.
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point
wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a
multicast group rather than a host.
multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On
IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router
to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related
groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a
instance (MSTI) simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a
VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be
assigned to multiple MSTIs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1060


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

multiplex section An all-ONES characteristic or adapted information signal. It's generated to replace the
alarm indication signal normal traffic signal when it signal contains a defect condition in order to prevent
(MS-AIS) consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised. AIS can be
identified as multiplex section alarm indication signal.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between
protection (MSP) and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to
a "protection" channel.
multiplex section A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the
termination (MST) formation of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse
direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate
channels being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol
switching virtual label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network
private network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines
(MPLS VPN) traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to
construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.

N
NAS network access server
NDF new data flag
NE network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays
subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of
the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NOC network operations center
NOS network operating system
NP See network processor.
NPE network provider edge

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1061


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

NRZ non-return to zero


NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NS network system
NSAP See network service access point.
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the
TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and
implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network processor An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking
(NP) application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices
and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are
commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a
message broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the
segment.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
point (NSAP) available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by
network connection or configuration problems.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the
output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in
the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise
figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device
itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio
receiver can be specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.

O
O&M operation and maintenance
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OC ordinary clock
OCI open connection indication
OCP optical channel protection

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1062


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

OCS optical core switching


OCh optical channel with full functionality
OD optical demultiplexing
ODB optical duobinary
ODF optical distribution frame
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OEQ optical equalizer
OFC optical fiber communication conference and exhibit
OIF See Optical Internetworking Forum.
OLP See optical line protection.
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOS out of service
OPEX operating expense
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
ORT See operation response time.
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI reference model See Open Systems Interconnection reference model.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OSS operations support system
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OUI organizationally unique identifier
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1063


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

Open Systems An open network architecture model developed by the International Organization for
Interconnection Standardization (ISO) and the ITU-T. This module consists of 7 layers. Each layer has
reference model (OSI special network functions, such as addressing, flow control, error control,
reference model) encapsulation, and reliable message transmission. The lowest layer (physical layer) is
closest to media technologies. The lower two layers are implemented in hardware and
software, and the upper five layers are implemented only in software. The highest
layer (application layer) is closest to users. The OSI reference model is a widely used
method of understanding network functions.
Optical A worldwide non-profit organization with membership open to any organization
Internetworking interested in shaping the future of optical internetworking.
Forum (OIF)
operation response The average time taken by a storage device to respond to each request. It is a critical
time (ORT) storage performance indicator.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification,
administration and location, and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one
multiplexer (OADM) channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.
optical channel A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for
payload unit (OPU) multiple services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and
lowering costs.
optical line protection Optical line protection is implemented using the dual feeding and selective receiving
(OLP) function. Two pairs of fibers (that is, four fibers) are used. One pair of fibers function
as the working trail and is used to transmit service signals of a line when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers function as the protection trail and is used to carry
protection switching signals when a fiber cut occurs or the signal attenuation is
excessively large.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and
reflectometer (OTDR) measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length
and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS
section (OTS) allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between
NEs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1064


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.

P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCC protection communication channel
PCN product change notice
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDG polarization-dependent gain
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDL See polarization-dependent loss.
PDM pulse duration modulation
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PER packet error rate
PET polyester
PFI packet forward interface
PGA program global area
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PID photonics integrated device
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PLC See packet loss compensation.
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMI payload missing indication
PMS Product Management System
PMU power monitoring unit
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
POTS See plain old telephone service.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1065


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet


PPS pulse per second
PPT PDH physical terminal
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
Protocol clock (PTP V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
clock) system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet loss A technology of compensating packets according to an appropriate algorithm if
compensation (PLC) packets are lost in the transmission.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
packing case A case used for packing a board or subrack.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd
or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity
error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
patch loading During patch loading, the software is written into the Flash boards and the patch area
of the board memory from the specified storage area of the OMU board or the BAM
of NEs through commands.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network
should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the
IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding
(EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1066


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

permanent virtual Virtual path that consists of PVCs.


path (PVP)
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop
filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with
the incoming or reference frequency.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the
sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
plain old telephone The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted
service (POTS) pair cables.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the
hierarchy (PDH) minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization-dependent A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component
loss (PDL) when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated
onto a non-conductive substrate.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the
working path.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can
be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent
sequence (PRBS) of the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is
established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information
of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of
edge-to-edge (PWE3) a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched
network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time
division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates
to the real situation.

Q
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1067


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.


quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth
period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four
dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can
perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the
minimum BER.

R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN See radio access network.
RBW reverse-band working
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
RF See radio frequency.
RFC See Request For Comments.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RJ45 registered jack45
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RMS resource management system
RMU rack monitoring unit
RNC See radio network controller.
ROADM reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR resilient packet ring
RS regenerator section
RS232 See Recommended Standard 232.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and
others are the same as RS232.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTP real-time performance

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1068


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

RX receive
RXD receive data
RZ return to zero
RZ code return-to-zero code
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Recommended A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals,
Standard 232 (RS232) and the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. As a distributed server/client system, RADIUS provides
(RADIUS) the AAA function.
Request For A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
Comments (RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from
sources such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for
Protocol (RSVP) an integrated services Internet.
Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
Protocol-Traffic MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs
Engineering (RSVP- by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP
TE) rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a
Protocol (RIP) route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the
(RAN) CN from wireless network.
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic
wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current.
The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can
be classified into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP
synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1069


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
regional root The root of the Internal Spanning Tree (IST) and Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
(MSTI) in the MST region. The regional root differs with the topology of the spanning
tree in the MST region.
remote optical A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply
pumping amplifier and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power
(ROPA) compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount,
free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action
ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
ring network A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming
a circular pathway for signals.

S
S-VLAN service virtual local area network
S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network,
each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock
synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock
reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference
source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole
network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference
source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization
status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1
byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching
of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper
switching protocol.
SAI service area identifier
SAPI service access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SBS synchronous information backbone system
SCA selective call acceptance
SCE See service creation environment.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP See Session Description Protocol.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SES severely errored second

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1070


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

SETS SDH equipment timing source


SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA See service level agreement.
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB Server Message Block
SMF See single-mode fiber.
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple network management protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SO See security object.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPI SDH physical interface
SPM service processing module
SQL See structured query language.
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SRP satellite reference point
SRS stimulated Raman scattering
SSD See service support data.
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STG synchronous timing generator
STM See synchronous transport module.
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS space time spreading
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1071


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the
network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived
and simple passwords from being captured.
Serial Line Interface A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
Protocol (SLIP) transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host
interconnection function with a known IP address.
Session Description A protocol intended for describing multimedia sessions for the purposes of session
Protocol (SDP) announcement, session invitation, and other forms of multimedia session initiation.
Simple network "An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in a network.
management protocol The data being monitored and managed is defined by a MIB. The functions supported
(SNMP) by the protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data, and
traps that signal the occurrence of events."
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing
Message (SSM) link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network
or synchronization network.
security object (SO) A main part of the information security. It is not related with the communication mode
or terminal. It does not only focus on the security of the information exchange but also
provides feasible solutions of security for the user information, including the user
identity authentication, user password, and encryption.
segment A subset of an identity type. This is a different subset from a trust level including but
is not limited to the following examples: A subset based on customer age, a subset
based on where the identity was registered or based, a subset based on the customer's
gender, and a subset based on an association that the identity may have. For example,
an organization is confirmed as a supermarket or a customer is a member of a society.
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
service creation A service generation tool that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for
environment (SCE) programming.
service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
service support data An identifier that defines data parameters of specific service feature descriptions in the
(SSD) global functional plane.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific
defined traffic profile.
shared risk group A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
(SRG) failure of all the resources in the group.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
(SNR) given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1072


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

single-mode fiber A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave
(SMF) length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.
single-pair high-speed A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
digital subscriber line HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
(SHDSL) terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
split ratio The ratio of the number one to the number of optical signal channels that are split
from a channel of downstream optical signals in a GPON network. A larger split ratio
implies greater optical splitting which creates the need for an increased power budget
to support the physical reach.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
structured query A programming language widely used for accessing, updating, managing, and
language (SQL) querying data in a relational database.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers
network (SONET) to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle
multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84
Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It
module (STM) consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is
suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is
synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed
STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic
rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are
under consideration.

T
T1 A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It
provides 24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN topology change notification
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TLS Transport Layer Security

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1073


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

TLV See type-length-value.


TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOS type of service
TPID tag protocol identifier
TR token ring
TST See Test.
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TUG tributary unit group
TX transmit
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows
users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local
system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Test (TST) A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service
diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors,
and so on.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other
networks through the RNC.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
(TM) signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high
rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
multiplexing (TDM) slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
token bucket The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited,
algorithm and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token
bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to
the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in.
Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be
transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of
packet input.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1074


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the
entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the
performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in
the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and
telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the
operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks.
The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems,
monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
transparent mode A method of binary synchronous text transmission in which only transmission control
characters preceded by the data link escape (DLE) character are processed as
transmission control characters.
transparent A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content
transmission but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as
speech, data and video signals.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The
tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases,
a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two
marker (trTCM) rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether
it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called
(TLV) Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through
different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual
data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New
TLVs can be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing
information loaded in packets.

U
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream
board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1075


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VA value assurance
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCPLM virtual concatenation payload mismatch
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VM virtual memory
VOA variable optical attenuator
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switching instance.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP
address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this
virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers
in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the
network.
value-added service A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers
(VAS) based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network
technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide
value-added services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1076


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice
calls.
very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
(VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection (VCC) point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple
end points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications
network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits
(PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the
group (VCG) same virtual concatenation link.
virtual connection A logical tunnel built in a non-backbone area between two ABRs in a same OSPF
routing domain. It is used to maintain the logical connections between physical
division areas. The two ends of the virtual connection must be ABRs. In addition, to
make a virtual connection effective, the ABRs must be configured at the same time.
The virtual connection is identified by the ID of the peer router.
virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
(VC trunk)
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switching An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
instance (VSI) virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.

W
WAN wide area network
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRR weighted round robin
WSS wavelength selective switching
WTR See wait to restore.
WXCP See wavelength cross-connection protection.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1077


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide B Glossary

Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength cross- A type of channel protection based on ring network topology. WXCP employs the
connection protection dual feed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to
(WXCP) implement service switching between the working and protection channels.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all
priority queues can be scheduled.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
network (WLAN) wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data
interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional
LAN.

X
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
xDSL x digital subscriber line

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1078


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai